User Guide - Antech Sales, Inc

User Guide - Antech Sales, Inc
6100A/6180A
User Guide
6100A/6180A Paperless graphic recorder
Versions 5.1 and later
HA028910/8
October 2010
®
E U ROT H E R M ®
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's name:
Eurotherm Limited
Manufacturer's address:
Faraday Close, Worthing, West Sussex,
BN13 3PL, United Kingdom
Product type:
Paperless graphic recorders
Models:
6100A Status level A1 and above
6180A Status level A1 and above
6100E Status level A1 and above.
Safety specification:
EN61010-1: 2001
EMC emissions specification:
EN61326-1: 1997 Class A
(including amendments A1, A2 and A3)
EMC immunity specification:
EN61326-1: 1997 Industrial locations
(including amendments A1, A2 and A3)
Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety
and EMC specifications listed. Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above
products comply with the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, and also with the Low Voltage
Directive 2006/95/EC.
Signed:
Dated:
Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited
Mark Green
(VP (acting) R&D)
IA249986U670 Issue 2 Nov 07 (CN24008)
© 2010 Eurotherm Limited
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or transmitted
in any form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as
an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior written permission
of Eurotherm Limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifications in this document may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this document is
given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only. Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility
for any losses arising from errors in this document.
®
E U ROT H E R M ®
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER
USER GUIDE
LIST OF SECTIONS
Section
Page
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 BRIDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SCREEN BUILDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 EVENT INPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ASCII PRINTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 PORTABLE CASE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 REMOTE CJ BLOCK OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 THERMAL UNIFORMITY SURVEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANNEX A: SPECIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANNEX B: REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANNEX C: WEB SERVER DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2
14
51
240
243
252
280
332
334
335
338
348
361
371
375
385
415
419
EFFECTIVITY
This manual refers to recorders fitted with software version 5.1. To determine the software version fitted
to the recorder, the 'About' screen may be accessed as described in section 4.6.11.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Contents Page i
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
PAPERLESS GRAPHICS RECORDER USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section
Page
SAFETY NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Signal wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTOR WIRING DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Supply voltage wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LINE SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY OPTION* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 ACCESS FLAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Stylus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Card slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.3 USB Front Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 Flap lock operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARCHIVE INACTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARCHIVE ACTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRUNCATION OF NUMERIC VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CURRENT TRACE ALARM ICONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 STATUS BAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 Current access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 Page name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3 Alarm indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUMENT ALARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL ALARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGE BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISK ICON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FTP ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURATION LOCKED INDICATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRIAL MODE INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.4 Summary menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUMENT ALARM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACK ALL ALARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM SUMMARY PAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BATCH SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESSAGE LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESSAGE TYPE FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERIOD FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPTION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVE MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 NAVIGATION KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Key functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROOT MENU KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 FIRST SWITCH-ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 Access to Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLE SHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEXT STRING ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 DISPLAY MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TREND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIME CHANGE RECORDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Vertical Trend display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Horizontal Trend display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Guide
Contents Page ii
1
1
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
9
9
9
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
20
21
22
24
25
25
26
27
28
28
28
31
32
33
33
35
35
36
36
38
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Section
Page
3.4.3 Circular Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TREND MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL VIEW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FULL SCREEN DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIMESTAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OTHER NOTES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.4 Vertical bargraph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FACEPLATES ABOVE THE BARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FACEPLATES AT RIGHT-HAND EDGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.5 Horizontal bargraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.6 Numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 OPERATOR NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 ARCHIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Local Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRING ARCHIVE UP TO DATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARCHIVE ALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARCHIVING WITH THE LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 Remote archiving (FTP transfer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 SAVE / RESTORE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAVE AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5 Import screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6 Export screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.7 Import User Linearisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.8 Export User Linearisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.9 Import printer driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 CONFIG KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Instrument configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUMENT NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL/SAVER DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAVE AFTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODBUS ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODBUS SECURITY DISABLED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMMS CHANNEL TIMEOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESET HOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESET MINUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISABLE WARNING DIALOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHOW OPERATOR NOTES LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Group configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TREND UNITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TREND TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/B SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TREND SPEED/TREND INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCULAR SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCULAR SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCULAR CHART FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . START AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRID TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FROM POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECORDING ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECORDING SPEED/RECORDING INTERVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TREND HISTORY DURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARCHIVE TO MEDIA ENABLE/ARCHIVE VIA FTP ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM MESSAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
40
40
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
44
46
48
50
51
52
52
53
53
53
54
55
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
57
57
57
58
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
64
64
64
64
65
66
66
66
66
67
67
67
67
67
67
68
68
68
68
68
68
69
69
69
69
User Guide
Contents Page iii
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Section
Page
4.3.2 Group configuration (continued)
ACK MESSAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POINT TYPE/SELECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Channel/Alarm configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUT TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIN TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUT LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RANGE LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RANGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RANGE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCALED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFFSET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCALE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BREAK RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION (CJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/B SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPANNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PV FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAXIMUM DECIMAL DIGITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COLOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETPOINT SOURCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HYSTERESIS EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RATE-OF CHANGE ALARM EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JOB NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CATEGORY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WHILE/ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Views Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOME TIMEOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOME GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISPLAY ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOME PAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISPLAY MODE ENABLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.5 Archive configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPRESSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH SIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHORTEST TREND HISTORY / DURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSV CHECK BOXES, DATE/TIME FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEDIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARCHIVE TO MEDIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEDIA FILE FORMAT/FTP FILE FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON MEDIA FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEDIA SIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVABLE MEDIA CAPACITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEDIA FULL EVENT LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARCHIVE TO REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOTE PATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIMARY REMOTE HOST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIMARY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECONDARY REMOTE HOST/LOGIN/PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSV FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Guide
Contents Page iv
69
69
70
71
72
72
72
72
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
74
76
76
76
76
76
77
77
77
77
77
77
78
78
78
79
79
79
81
81
81
81
82
82
82
82
83
83
83
83
85
86
86
86
86
86
86
87
87
87
87
87
87
88
88
88
88
88
89
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Section
Page
4.3.5 Archive configuration (Continued)
MEDIA FILE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSV DATE/TIME FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FTP FILE FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.6 Event configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SOURCE 2 SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JOB NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CATEGORY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WHILE/ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVENT EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.7 Event Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.8 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESSAGE ENTRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.9 User Linearisation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.10 Batch recording option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUDITOR MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BATCH SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . THERMAL UNIFORMITY SURVEY (TUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATOR INITIATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NON OPERATOR INITIATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVENT SOURCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.11 Maths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMAINING CONFIGURATION ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUNCTION DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODBUS ADDRESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.12 Totalisers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.13 Counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COUNTER MODBUS ADDRESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.14 Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurable parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELF-START EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.15 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODBUS ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.16 Master comms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MASTER COMMS CONFIGURATION MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETECT THIS SLAVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETECT ALL SLAVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHARE SOCKET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . READING DIGITAL VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MASTER COMMS DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.17 Output channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MASTER COMMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANALOGUE OUTPUTS (RETRANSMISSION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.18 Demand Writes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEMAND WRITE CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEMAND WRITES WITH AUDIT TRAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
89
90
90
91
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
94
95
95
98
98
100
100
100
100
101
104
107
107
108
108
112
112
135
138
138
143
143
143
143
144
147
147
147
148
148
149
149
149
150
151
152
153
153
154
154
155
156
158
159
165
171
172
172
173
174
174
176
177
User Guide
Contents Page v
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Section
Page
4.3.19 E-mails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-MAIL CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-MAIL DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.20 Reports configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.21 Ethernet/IP™ Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESSAGING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE ENTRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURING A PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.22 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRIAL MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIRTUAL CHANNELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMULATION OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 SECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Access levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING PERMISSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACCESS WHEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOMAIN NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEW PASSWORD/RETYPE PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECT FROM REMOTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOTE USER NAME/REMOTE PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOGIN DISABLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDIT OWN PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGE ALARM SETPOINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDIT MATHS CONSTANT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET MATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESET TOTALISERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESET COUNTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . START/RESET TIMERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET CLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUST I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARCHIVING CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAVE/RESTORE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PASTE/DELETE FILES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FULL CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FULL SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BATCH CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAN SIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAN AUTHORIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERFORM UPGRADES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVENT PERMISSION 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVENT PERMISSION 2 TO 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDIT OUTPUT CHANNEL DEFAULT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACTION DEMAND WRITES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FORCE CHANGE OF PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENTER BATCH DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALLOW WEB SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Management (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGES NOT RECORDED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Add user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEW USER ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEW FULL USER NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEW DOMAIN NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEW PASSWORD/RETYPE PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BASED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.4 Remove user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5 Change Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLE SHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.6 Clear Password Cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USER PASSWORD AUTHENTICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PASSWORD CACHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR PASSWORD CACHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Guide
Contents Page vi
178
178
179
180
181
182
184
184
185
186
188
194
195
195
196
197
198
198
199
199
199
199
199
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
201
201
201
201
201
201
201
201
201
201
201
201
202
202
202
202
203
203
203
208
208
208
208
208
208
209
209
209
210
210
210
210
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Section
Page
4.4.7 Active Directory server setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 NETWORK KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUMENT NUMBER/MAC ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP ADDRESS LOOKUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOOTP TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUBNET MASK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEFAULT GATEWAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNTP SERVER ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNTP CLIENT ENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNTP SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EUROPRP SERVER ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACTIVE DIRECTORY SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PASSWORD CACHE EXPIRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCAL HOST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOMAIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRIMARY/SECONDARY DNS SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 Locale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LONG DATE FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.3 Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.4 Input adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.5 Output Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.6 Master Comms Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.7 Ethernet Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.8 Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPY RULES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.9 Job search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEARCH RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.10 Customise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FONT SIZE EXAMPLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.11 About. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUMENT VARIANT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIG REVISION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAST UPDATED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AT VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CREATED ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECURITY REVISION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUPPORT FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 JOBS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 No Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2 Drive relay category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.3 Totaliser category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.4 Message category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.5 Maths category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.6 Clock category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.7 Counter category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.8 Timer category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.9 Batch category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.10 Recording category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.11 Trend category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.12 Output category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.13 Demand Writes category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.14 Alarm category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.15 Archive category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.16 Email category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
210
213
213
213
213
213
214
214
214
214
214
214
215
215
215
215
216
216
216
216
216
217
219
219
219
220
221
223
223
223
224
225
225
226
226
227
228
229
229
229
229
229
229
230
230
231
231
231
231
232
232
233
233
234
234
235
236
237
237
238
238
239
User Guide
Contents Page vii
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Section
Page
4.7.17 Report category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEND REPORT TO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 FILER OPTION MENU KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 THE HIDE KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 FILE STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 BRIDGE (REMOTE VIEWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Minimum PC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUPPORTED PDA CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 CONNECTION DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Direct PC connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.2 PC To remote recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.3 Networked systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 RECORDER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.3 Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL ALARM SOUND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.1 Display Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.2 Alarm acknowledgement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3 Status line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.4 Error messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NETWORK CONNECTION HAS TIMED OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNABLE TO CONNECT TO HOST .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNABLE TO RESOLVE HOSTNAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FAILED TO AUTHENTICATE THE USER NAME ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BRIDGE SESSIONS ALREADY RUNNING ON ... . . . THERE APPEARS TO BE NO FREE DISK SPACE ON ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YOU ARE ALREADY RUNNING A FULL BRIDGE SESSION ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YOU ARE AUTHENTICATING FULL BRIDGE ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SCREEN BUILDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.1 Display Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.2 Importing/Exporting screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMPORTING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPORTING SCREENS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 DISPLAY CREATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 Before starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.2 Screen components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.3 The properties page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KEY DESCRIPTIONS (UPPER KEYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPTIONS PAGE ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.4 Screen creation example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 PARAMETER DEFINITIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 Basic parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2 Advanced parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 COMPONENT DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1 Group Vertical/Horizontal Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.2 Group vertical bargraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.3 Group horizontal bargraph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.4 Group numeric display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.5 Channel vertical/horizontal bargraph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.6 Channel Numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.7 Channel data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Guide
Contents Page viii
239
239
239
239
240
240
240
242
243
243
244
244
245
245
245
245
246
246
246
246
247
248
249
250
250
250
250
251
251
251
251
251
251
251
251
251
252
252
253
253
254
254
254
254
255
256
256
258
259
259
263
263
265
271
271
271
271
272
272
272
272
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Section
Page
7.4.8 Dialogue Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.9 Navigation Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.10 Operator button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.11 Event Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.12 Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.13 Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.14 Round rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.15 Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.16 Polyline- series of points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.17 Polygon - closed area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.18 Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.19 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.20 Arc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 MEASURING UNIT COMPARISONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.1 XGA screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.2 QVGA screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Function Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAGNOSTIC CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXCEPTION CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATA ENCODING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.3 Invalid multiple register writes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.4 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TO SEND A LOGIN REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.5 Text messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LONG MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 ADDRESS MAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 ADDRESS ALLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1 Instrument data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.2 Channel configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.3 Channel Run-Time data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
272
272
273
273
273
274
274
274
275
276
277
277
277
278
278
279
279
279
279
280
280
280
280
280
281
281
281
281
281
284
286
286
288
290
290
291
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
303
303
304
304
305
305
306
306
307
307
308
308
User Guide
Contents Page ix
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Section
Page
8.4.4 Group data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.5 Feature identification table (FIT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.6 Indirection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.7 IEEE 32-bit channel configuration data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.8 IEEE Area Channel run-time data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.9 Permanent ID table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 DATA TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUNCTION CODES AND EXCEPTION CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEXT STRINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.1 Function code 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXCEPTION RESPONSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.2 Function code 04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.3 Function code 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXCEPTION RESPONSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.4 Function code 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.5 Function code 16 (Hex 10). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXCEPTION RESPONSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 ANALOGUE OUTPUT OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 SIGNAL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 OUTPUT ADJUST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1 Adjustment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2 Adjustment removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 EVENT INPUT OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Guide
Contents Page x
309
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
315
318
318
318
318
319
319
319
320
320
320
321
321
321
322
322
322
323
323
324
324
325
325
326
326
327
327
328
328
328
328
329
329
329
329
330
330
330
330
330
330
331
331
331
331
332
332
332
332
332
332
332
334
334
334
334
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Section
Page
11 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 FUSING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 Fuse Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.2 Access to the user connections/fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.3 User wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ASCII PRINTER OUTPUT OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.1 Serial communications ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.2 DC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3.1 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LINK ERROR COUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROTOCOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BAUD RATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP BITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINTER TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINTER NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINTER STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINTER TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINT MESSAGES FROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESSAGES TO PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3.2 Reports configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NUMBER OF FIELDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FIELD N TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STYLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LINE FEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 IMPORTING PRINTER DRIVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 REPORT EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.1 Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP NUMBER 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.2 Channel configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.3 Event Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVENT NUMBER 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.4 Report Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5.5 Serial Communications Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 TSP600 SWITCH SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 PORTABLE CASE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1 BASIC OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1.2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUPPLY VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERNAL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY (TRS) OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2.1 Internal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 HTM2010 QUARTERLY TEST KIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.2 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUPPLY VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERNAL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
335
335
335
335
335
337
338
338
338
338
338
339
339
339
339
340
340
340
340
340
340
340
340
340
340
341
341
341
341
341
342
342
342
343
344
344
344
344
344
344
344
344
345
345
345
346
347
348
349
349
349
349
349
349
351
351
353
353
353
353
353
354
354
User Guide
Contents Page xi
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Section
13.4 THERMOCOUPLE OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.2 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUPPLY VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . THERMOCOUPLE WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 LOW SUPPLY VOLTAGE OPTION*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 REMOTE CJC BLOCK OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.2 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 REMOTE CJ BLOCK OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 LARGE FRAME RECORDER WITH INTEGRAL CJC BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.3 Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 LARGE FRAME RECORDER WITH REMOTE CJC BLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.2 Signal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 SMALL FRAME RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.2 Signal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 TUS OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 PRE CALIBRATION AND POST CALIBRATION ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 INPUT ADJUST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUST PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 CHART MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 OTHER ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annex A: SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation category II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pollution degree 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Recorder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Universal input board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORST CASE ERROR CALCULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREVIOUS INSTRUMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Relay output board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Event input board). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Analogue output board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (ASCII Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annex B: REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.1 MAIN DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.2 SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.3 DISPLAY TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.4 TOUCH CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.4.1 Touch screen calibrate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.4.2 Touch screen verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.4.3 Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.5 SYSTEM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Guide
Contents Page xii
Page
355
355
355
355
355
356
357
358
359
359
359
359
360
361
361
361
361
361
363
364
364
364
364
367
368
368
368
368
370
371
371
371
371
372
373
374
374
375
375
375
375
376
379
381
382
383
384
384
384
385
385
385
386
386
386
387
387
387
388
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Section
Page
B1.6 DIAG SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.6.1 MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.6.2 Software version number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.6.3 Serial 1/Serial 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.6.4 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.6.5 Lockable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.6.6 Option boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EVENT INPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.6.7 Input boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.6.8 Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B1.7 QUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2.1 TOUCH SCREEN CLEANING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2.2.1 Battery replacement procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2.3 FLAP RELEASE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B3 OPTION ENABLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B4 COLOUR SELECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B5 TCP PORT NUMBERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B6 ASCII CHARACTERS FOR SERIAL COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B7 TIME ZONE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B8 HISTORY MAINTENANCE OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B8.1 KEYCODE EXTRACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B8.2 ERASING HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B9 MENU STRUCTURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annex C: WEB SERVER DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C2 INTERNET LINKS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3 ACCESS TABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3.1 INSTRUMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3.1.1 Instrument alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3.1.2 Global channel alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3.2 TRENDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3.2.1 Horizontal trend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3.2.2 Vertical trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3.2.3 Numeric display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3.3 MESSAGE LOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3.4 HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3.5 ABOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
388
388
388
389
389
389
389
389
389
389
390
390
390
390
391
391
393
394
394
397
398
399
400
400
400
401
415
415
415
415
415
415
415
416
416
417
417
417
418
418
419
User Guide
Contents Page xiii
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
This page is deliberately left blank
User Guide
Contents Page xiv
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
SAFETY NOTES
WARNING
Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the apparatus, or disconnection of
the protective earth terminal is likely to make the apparatus dangerous under some fault conditions. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Note: in order to comply with the requirements of safety standard BS EN61010, the recorder shall
have one of the following as a disconnecting device, fitted within easy reach of the operator, and
labelled as the disconnecting device.
a. A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC947-1 and IEC947-3
b. A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool
c. A separable plug, without a locking device, to mate with a socket outlet in the building.
1. Before any other connection is made, the protective earth terminal shall be connected to a protective conductor. The mains (supply voltage) wiring must be terminated within the connector in such
a way that, should it slip in the cable clamp, the Earth wire would be the last wire to become disconnected.
2. In the case of portable equipment, the protective earth terminal must remain connected (even if the
recorder is isolated from the mains supply), if any of the I/O circuits are connected to hazardous voltages*.
3. The mains supply fuse within the power supply is not replaceable. If it is suspected that the fuse is
faulty, the manufacturer’s local service centre should be contacted for advice.
4. Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired, the unit shall be made inoperative, and secured against accidental operation. The manufacturer’s nearest service centre should be contacted
for advice.
5. Any adjustment, maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage, should be avoided
as far as possible and, if inevitable, shall be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the
hazard involved.
6. Where conductive pollution (e.g. condensation, carbon dust) is likely, adequate air conditioning/filtering/sealing etc. must be installed in the recorder enclosure.
7. Signal and supply voltage wiring should be kept separate from one another. Where this is impractical, shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring.
8. If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by
the equipment might be impaired.
* A full definition of ‘Hazardous’ voltages appears under ‘Hazardous live’ in BS EN61010. Briefly, under
normal operating conditions, hazardous voltages are defined as being > 30V RMS (42.2V peak) or > 60V
dc.
SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING
One or more of the symbols below may appear as a part of the recorder labelling.
!
Refer to the manual for instructions
Protective earth
This recorder for ac supply only
This recorder for dc supply only
This recorder for either ac or dc supply
Risk of electric shock
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 1
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
USER GUIDE
1 INTRODUCTION
This document describes the installation, operation and configuration of a paperless graphic recorder.
The recorder comes in two versions, which differ in physical size, and in the number of I/O channels and
options available, but otherwise are identical (i.e. the operation and configuration procedures are the
same for both).
The standard recorder comes equipped for FTP transfer and is also fitted with ‘Bridge’ (Remote viewing)
software.
1.1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER
The recorder is despatched in a special pack, designed to give adequate protection during transit.
Should the outer box show signs of damage, it should be opened immediately, and the recorder examined. If there is evidence of damage, the instrument should not be operated and the local representative
contacted for instructions. After the recorder has been removed from its packing, the packing should
be examined to ensure that all accessories and documentation have been removed. The packing should
then be stored against future transport requirements.
2 INSTALLATION
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
Figures 2.1a and 2.1b give installation details for the small and large frame cases respectively.
Note: It is recommended that the rear face of the panel be centre-punched at suitable positions
to locate the tips of the case clamps. Otherwise, particularly on smooth surfaces, the clamps can
‘wander’ as they are tightened, leading to inefficient clamping and possible damage to the recorder mounting slots.
The unit is inserted through the panel aperture from the front of the panel. With the weight of the recorder supported, a panel clamp is inserted into each of the mounting slots (one each on the left- and
right-hand sides). The jacking screws are then tightened sufficiently to clamp the recorder into position.
EXCESS FORCE SHOULD NOT BE USED IN TIGHTENING THESE SCREWS.
User Guide
Page 2
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2 INSTALLATION (Cont.)
Standard terminal cover: 246.5 mm
Long terminal cover: 288 (closed); 415mm (open)
24.75
mm
211.5 mm
137 mm
102 mm
Side elevation
(RHS)
35 mm
Front view
106.9 mm
Safety Earth
144 mm
144 mm
Access Flap
Panel thickness = 3 to 25 mm. Optimum thickness
depends on panel material
x
or
5.44 x 5.44 inches
(+0.04 - 0.00)
137 mm
Panel cutout
138mm x 138mm (+1 - 0)
View on underside
Minimum recommended inter-unit spacing
Side clamps
x = 15 mm (0.6 inch)
y = 10 mm (0.4 in)
Top/bottom clamps
x = 10 mm (0.4 in)
y = 15 mm (0.6 inch)
y
Vertical
Panel clamping
Maximum installed angle
a˚ = b˚ = 45 degrees max
a˚ b˚
Figure 2.1a Mechanical installation details - small frame unit
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 3
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2 INSTALLATION (Cont.)
260.90 mm
292 mm
Front view
Side elevation
Safety Earth
279 mm
28.34
mm
211 mm
216 mm
292 mm
Access Flap
x
Panel thickness range = 6 to 25 mm.
Optimum thickness depends on panel material
Panel cutout
281mm x 281mm (+1 - 0)
Minimum recommended inter-unit spacing
Side clamps
x = 25 mm (1 inch)
y = 12.5 mm (0.5 in)
279 mm
or
11.07 x 11.07 inches
(+0.04 - 0.00)
View on underside
Top/bottom clamps
x = 12.5 mm (0.5 in)
y = 25 mm (1 inch)
Vertical
y
MAXIMUM INSTALLED ANGLE
a˚ = b˚ = 45 degrees max
a˚ b˚
Panel mounting technique
Figure 2.1b Mechanical installation details -large frame unit
User Guide
Page 4
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
2.2.1 Signal wiring
Figures 2.2.1a and 2.2.1b show connector locations for the small and large-frame recorders respectively.
The figures are not to the same scale.
Figure 2.2.1c shows details of universal input board wiring and figure 2.2.1d gives the pinouts for option
boards.
CONNECTOR WIRING DETAILS
Maximum wire size = 4.13mm2 (11 AWG)
Minimum wire size = 0.081mm2 (28 AWG)
Design torque = 0.35Nm.
USB 1
USB 2
USB Ports (option)
Safety Earth
(M4)
USB 1
USB 2
USB Ports (option)
Safety Earth
(M4)
E
L
Port 1
Serial comms (option)
Port 2
Ethernet
RJ45
E
N
N
L
Mains (supply)
connection
Port 1
Serial comms (option)
Port 2
Ethernet
RJ45
Mains (supply)
connection
Option slot 1
Option slot 2
Option slot 1
Option slot 2
Option slot 3
Option slot 4
Option slot 3
Option slot 4
Input channels 7 to 12
Input channels 1 to 6
Input channels 1 to 6
USB 1
USB 2
USB Ports (option)
Safety Earth
(M4)
E
L
Port 1
Serial comms (option)
Option slot 1
Port 2
Ethernet
RJ45
N
Mains (supply)
connection
Option slot 2
Input channels 13 to 18
Input channels 7 to 12
Input channels 1 to 6
Figure 2.2.1a Connector locations - small frame units
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 5
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2.2.1 SIGNAL WIRING (Cont.)
USB Ports (option)
Port 1
USB1
USB2
Ethernet
RJ45
Serial comms (option)
Option board 1
Option board 3
E
Port 2
Safety Earth
(M4)
N
L
Mains (supply)
connection
Option board 5
Option board 6
Option board 7
Option board 8
Not used
Option board 9
Option board 2
Option board 4
Input
Inputchannels
channels43
1 to 748
Input channels 37 to 42
Input
Inputchannels
channels31
1 to 736
Input channels 25 to 30
Input
Inputchannels
channels19
1 to 724
Input channels 13 to 18
Input
Input channels
channels 71 to
to 12
7
Input channels 1 to 6
Figure 2.2.1b Connector locations - large frame units
User Guide
Page 6
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2.2.1 SIGNAL WIRING (Cont.)
Input board pinouts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Channels
1, 7, 13, 19, 25,
31, 37, 43
Channels
2, 8, 14, 20, 26,
32, 38, 44
Channels
3, 9, 15, 21, 27,
33, 39, 45
V+ V- I
V+ V- I
V+ V- I
V+ V-
I
Cold
junction
V+ V-
Channels
Channels
Channels
4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 5, 11, 17, 23, 29, 6, 12, 18, 24, 30,
34, 40, 46
35, 41, 47
36, 42, 48
V+ V- I
V+ V- I
I
V+ V-
Attenuator
assembly
+
+
-20 to + 20 V dc
Thermocouples
dc millivolts
V+ V-
I
RTD
-200 to + 200 V dc
V+ V-
I
RTD
3-wire resistance
thermometer
V+ V-
I
2-wire resistance
thermometer
-30V < Vin < +0.8V = active
+2V < Vin < 30V = not active
+0.8 < Vin < 2V = not defined
I
Shunt
assembly
+
-
V+ V- I
DC milliamps
V+ V-
I
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
V+ V-
I
Not active (2 to 30 V)
nc
Active (0.8 to -30 V)
com
Vin
no
Minimum contact = 60m sec
Digital input (contact closure)
(Not channels 1, 7, 13 etc)
User 0V
Digital inputs (voltage levels)
(Not channels 1, 7, 13 etc)
Figure 2.2.1c Analogue Input board wiring
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 7
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2.2.1 SIGNAL WIRING (Cont.)
Relay outputs
Max number of boards = 4 for small frame or 9 for large frame
nc
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3
nc c no nc c no nc c no
Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3
c
no
Contacts shown in
power off/alarm state
nc c no nc c no nc c no
Three changeover relays
nc
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Rly 1 Rly 2
Rly 3 Rly 4
c nc c nc
c nc c nc
Rly 1 Rly 2
Rly 3 Rly 4
c nc c nc
c
c nc c nc
Contacts shown in
power off/alarm state
Four normally closed relays
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Rly 1 Rly 2
Rly 3 Rly 4
c no c no
c no c no
Rly 1 Rly 2
Rly 3 Rly 4
c no c no
c
no
Contacts shown in
power off/alarm state
c no c no
Four normally open relays
Event inputs (max 4 option boards)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 C
Event input Number
1
2
3
4
5
Event input Number
6
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
Behaviour undefined for
+0.8 < Vin < +2 V
+2 to +30 V
+0.8 to -30 V
C
Input 6 shown;
inputs 1 to 5 identical
User 0V
Contact closure inputs
Voltage inputs
Analogue outputs (max 4 option boards)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
+
V+ –
I+
Channel
1
V+ –
I+
Channel
2
V+ –
I+
Channel
1
V+ –
I+
Channel
2
I+
V+ –
-
Voltage
outputs
V+ –
-
I+
+
Current
outputs
Figure 2.2.1d Option wiring sheet 1
User Guide
Page 8
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2.2.1 SIGNAL WIRING (Cont.)
1
5
6
9
View on solder-bucket face
of user socket
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EIA232C
Signal
NC
Rx
Tx
DTR
Signal ground
NC
NC
NC
EIA485 (5-wire)
Pin Signal
1 RxA
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 Signal ground
6 RxB
7 TxA
8 TxB
9
EIA485 (3-wire)
Pin Signal
1 Link to pin 7
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 Signal ground
6 Link to pin 8
7 TxA/RxA
8 TxB/RxB
9
Figure 2.2.1d (Cont.) Option wiring sheet 2 (Serial communications)
2.2.2 Supply voltage wiring
WARNING
DC supply voltages must never be applied to recorders fitted with isolated transmitter power supplies.
Note: The minimum recommended wire size is 20AWG equivalent to 16/0.2 (0.5mm2).
LINE SUPPLY
The supply voltage to the recorder is terminated using an IEC socket which is connected to the mating
plug at the rear of the recorder. The recorder is suitable for use with all ac voltages between 85 and 265
V RMS (47 to 63 Hz), and requires 50 W max. power. For recorders without transmitter power supplies,
supply voltages between 110V dc and 370V dc are also suitable.
LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY OPTION*
Not suitable for recorders fitted with the isolated transmitter power supply option.
The low voltage supply option is terminated at a three-pin connector (plug mounted on recorder - socket
on supply cable) as shown in figure 2.2.2. The option allows the use of ac or dc supplies with the following characteristics:
AC:20 to 42V RMS (45 to 400 Hz)
DC:20 to 54V (See warning above)
Power: 50 W max.
+V or ac
Earth
0V or ac
Figure 2.2.2 Low voltage supply pinout (view on fixed connector face)
*Consult factory for availability
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 9
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2.3 ACCESS FLAP
Note: See also section 2.4 if the lockable flap option is fitted. Lockable flaps are identified by means of a padlock symbol printed towards the right hand end of the flap label.
Stylus storage
Door lock (option)
a) Insert finger(s) and pull forwards and down (small frame)
USBFront
SD or
Compact Flash
card
b) Behind flap details (small frame)
Stylus
storage
SD or
Compact
Flash card
USB
Front
lock
Door n)
io
t
(op
c) Insert finger(s) and pull forwards and down (large frame)
d) Behind flap details (large frame)
Figure 2.3 Access flap detail
The access flap is located immediately below the recorder screen. To open the flap, insert one or more
fingers under the flap handle, and pull it outwards and down (figure 2.3). A lockable version of the flap is
available - see section 2.4 for details. Located behind the flap are (from left to right):
1. a stylus (press to eject)
2. a slot for a Compact Flash or Secure Digital (SD) card
3. a USB port (usbfront).
User Guide
Page 10
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2.3.1 Stylus
A stylus suitable for use on the touch screen is located in a storage area to the left of the Compact Flash/
SD Card slot.
2.3.2 Card slot
The slot for the Compact Flash or SD card is located centrally behind the flap. If an SD card is already
fitted, it is removed by pressing on the card, to unlatch it, then pulling the card out of the slot. If a Compact Flash card is already fitted, it is removed by a double operation of the eject button. See details in
figures 2.3.2a and 2.3.2b, below
Caution
Removal of the memory device whilst archiving is in progress causes irreparable damage to the
filing structure on the device, rendering it unusable. For this reason, archiving should be suspended (section 4.1) (wait for the green section of the disk icon (section 3.1.3) to go ‘white’) before
the device is removed. It is strongly recommended that the ‘Remove Media’ facility described in
section 3.1.4 (Summary menu) be used to ensure that it is safe to remove the memory device. For
recorders fitted with a lockable flap, see also section 2.4.
Eject button
(Press twice)
SD card
(Push in - Push out)
Figure 2.3.2a SD card details
Compact
Flash card
Figure 2.3.2b Compact Flash card details
LED INDICATORS
Three LED indicators are located above the card slot as shown in figure 2.3.2c, below.
Card activity
LED (yellow)
Power/watchdog
LED (green)
USBFront
Power LED (yellow)
Figure 2.3.2c indicating LEDs (SD card
Compact Flash card similar)
Card-slot
2.3.3 USB Front Port
A type-A USB socket is located to the right of the Compact Flash/SD Card slot. This port can be used to
connect a mouse, a keyboard, a barcode scanner, a ‘memory stick’ or a floppy disk drive. If more than
one such device is required at a time, two further, rear panel USB ports (USB 1 and USB 2) are available as
an option. Maximum current per USB device = 500 mA.
Note: It is the responsibility of the user to establish the electromagnetic susceptibility of any USB
peripheral connected to the recorder. Refer to the USB port specification in Annex A for details.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 11
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2.4 LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION
This option allows the access flap below the display screen to be locked against unauthorized access to
the Compact Flash/SD card. It also provides some protection (in the form of a warning message) against
the inadvertent removal of such a card whilst archive data is being written to it. Removal of the memory
device whilst it is being written to will not only corrupt the current archive, but might also damage the
memory device irreparably, rendering it unusable. See also section 3.1.4.
Notes:
1. Control of the flap lock is available only to users with ‘Archiving Control’ permission enabled.
2. Control of the flap lock is not possible via Bridge software.
3. The description below applies only to Archive data.
2.4.1 Flap lock operation
ARCHIVE INACTIVE
1. Touch the root menu or alarm status area at the top of the screen.
2. Touch the ‘Unlock Flap’ key (figure 2.4.1a).
3. Archiving is suspended, the internal solenoid releases the catch, to allow the flap to be opened, and
a pop-up message appears ‘OK to remove archive media’ (figure 2.4.1b).
4. After approximately five seconds, the solenoid returns the catch to the locked position. The flap
can be returned to the closed position whether or not the flap lock is engaged. It is up to the user to
ensure that the flap is properly closed and locked.
Touch Root menu key or Alarm area
(e.g. channel alarm symbol)
Summary
Instrument Alarm Summary
Ack all Alarms
Root Menu
Alarm Summary
Home
Operator
File
Unlock Flap
Message Log
Goto View
Goto Group
Unlock Flap
Batch Summary
Figure 2.4.1a Unlock Flap key locations
Archive Media
OK to remove archive media
Ok
Figure 2.4.1b ‘OK to remove archive media’ message
User Guide
Page 12
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2.4.1 FLAP LOCK OPERATION (Cont.)
ARCHIVE ACTIVE
1. Touch the root menu key or alarm status area at the top of the screen.
2. Touch the ‘Unlock Flap’ key (figure 2.4.1a).
3. The flap unlocks for 5 seconds in the normal way (to allow access to the stylus and the usbfront port),
but a warning message appears on the screen (figure 2.4.1c).
a) If the ‘Cancel’ key is operated, the message disappears. Subsequently, if this is a Demand Archive the ‘Demand archive finished’ message appears when the archive is complete. Archiving
is not suspended, so operate the ‘Suspend Archiving’ key before removing the memory device.
This ensures that no attempt will be made by the recorder to write to the device until ‘Resume
Archiving’ is operated.
b) If the ‘Cancel’ key is not operated (the warning message remains on the screen), then when the
archive is complete, archiving is automatically suspended and the flap unlocks again for five
seconds, allowing the memory device to be removed. The message on the screen changes to
‘OK to remove archive media’ (figure 2.4.1b), although, for demand archives this is masked by
the ‘Demand archive finished’ message.
DO NOT REMOVE Archive Media!
Will advise when OK to remove...
Cancel
Figure 2.4.1c ‘Do Not Remove Archive Media’ message
4. Archiving automatically resumes:
a. 15 seconds (max.) after a memory device is inserted.
b. after 10 minutes if no new memory device is inserted (i.e. the flap was opened for a reason other
than to replace the memory device).
Note A System message is generated each time the flap is unlocked.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 13
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY
The operator interface consists of a touch-sensitive screen, showing either process variable values in one
of a number of formats, or, showing configuration or operational details for use in setting up the recorder.
This section (3) describes the process variable displays. Section 4 describes the Configuration displays.
Figure 3, below, depicts a typical trend display for a large-frame unit and gives details of the various
areas of the display page. The small frame display is similar, but the navigation keys are printed on a strip
below the chart area instead of being drawn on the screen.
Notes:
1. Dialogue boxes, message boxes etc. cause Process Variable displays to ‘freeze’ for as long as
the box is on display. Root and Option menus (amongst others) time-out (i.e. are removed from
the display) after approximately one minute. Messages, however, are displayed until the operator takes action to remove them. It should be noted, especially, that several message boxes
may be active at one time, but only the oldest one is visible, until it is removed to reveal the
‘next oldest’ message, and so on.
2. Many of the screen components can be customised as to colour/size etc. as described in section 4.6.10 (Customise).
TRUNCATION OF NUMERIC VALUES
If the amount of space on the display page is insufficient to display the full width of the process variable
or scale value, then the displayed value is rounded down and the number of decimal places reduced. If
the width is still too restricted, the value is displayed in ‘scientific’ format, or if this is still too wide, the final
visible character of the integer part of the value is replaced by a ‘?’ (as depicted in figure 3.4.4b)
Page Name and batch status
(if option fitted)
Current access level or
user name
Status bar
Channel descriptor
Channel scale
Off channel(s)
Logged out
Change battery alarm
Channel alarm
Instrument alarm
Group name
No Batch in Progress
99%
Channel 1
0.00
20.00
28/05/05 11:51:33 Alarms(s) off 3(1)
Disk icon
(% free space)
40.00
60.00
Alarm threshold marker
(absolute high)
Other traces
(Pen icon)
Channel value
FTP activity indicator
Configuration locked indicator
Time and date
73.98V
80.00
100.00
Current trace alarm
icons
11:52:04
Scale (Current) trace
(Diamond icon)
28/01/04
11:50:44
28/05/05
Channel 3 alarm 1 off
time and date
An animated bar appears
over the date, when the
recorder is busy.
Though normally pale
blue, the bar is goldcoloured when the
recorder configuration is
being updated remotely
via Bridge software.
11:49:24
28/05/05
Time/date stamp
28/05/05 11:47:51 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
Channel 3 alarm 1 on
time and date
11:48:04
28/05/05
11:46:44
28/05/05
11:45:24
28/05/05
Navigation keys
Figure 3 Trend display definitions (large frame unit)
User Guide
Page 14
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY (Cont.)
CURRENT TRACE ALARM ICONS
In each of the different types of PV display, each channel’s faceplate gives the status of the channel’s
alarms. The status of each alarm is shown by one of the icons depicted in table 3, either flashing (if it is
active and unacknowledged) or on continuously (if it is active and acknowledged). (See section 3.1.4,
below, for a description of how to acknowledge alarms.) Absolute alarm threshold icons and deviation
alarm bars appear in any display which includes a scale (except circular charts). For deviation alarms the
bar stretches from (Reference - Deviation) to (Reference + Deviation).
Note:‘Trigger’ alarms do not display threshold marks or bars, or faceplate symbols.
Absolute High
Absolute Low
Deviation out
Rate-of-change Rising
Rate-of-change Falling
Absolute Absolute Deviation Rate of
low
high
In / Out change
d R d
No
Horizontal
indication
scales
Vertical
No
R
indication
scales
For Deviation alarms, R = Reference; d = deviation
d d
Deviation in
Faceplate symbols
Scale symbols
Table 3 Alarm icons
3.1 STATUS BAR
This appears across the top of the display, and contains the items described below.
3.1.1 Current access level
There are four access levels available (Logged out, Operator, Engineer and Service), and the current level
is displayed in this key at the top left hand corner of the display. Touching this key calls the login page as
described in section 3.3.1 (Access to configuration) below. If a user has been added (using the ‘Add User’
part of the Security setup - section 4.4.3, below), then the ‘Full User Name’ is displayed instead of the access level.
3.1.2 Page name
Initially this shows the current group’s descriptor. The name changes according to context for example
‘Operator’ or ‘Config-Archive’ If the Batch option is fitted, this area contains batch information as well
as the page name. Touching the area calls the Batch Status page. See section 4.3.10 for further Batch
details.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 15
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.3 Alarm indication
This area of the display can contain a number of status icons: Instrument alarm, Channel alarm, Battery
change, Disk status, FTP in progress, Configuration locked, and so on. Pressing this area of the screen
calls the ‘Summary menu’ (section 3.1.4) allowing the user to view active instrument alarms, to acknowledge all channel alarms, to display the Alarm Summary or Message Log page. Media removal strategy is
also controlled from this pop-up. If the access flap ‘Lock’ option is fitted, see also section 2.4.
For channel alarm symbols refer to ‘Current Trace Alarm Icons’, above.
INSTRUMENT ALARM
This indicator appears, flashing, if any of the following errors are active. The instrument alarm summary
page, described in Section 3.1.4, allows the user to view such instrument alarms as are active.
Active Directory server error
Archive failed -(message)
Battery-backed RAM cleared
The Active Directory server (section 4.5.1) cannot be accessed.
Message explains archive failure.
This message appears if the battery has failed, and the unit has
been switched off.
Clock failure Internal clock was corrupt at power up, or the time has never been
set. Can be caused by battery failure, in which case the battery
icon will also be visible. The error is cleared by setting the time and
date. Server time forced to 00:00 1/1/1900.
Channel error
Indicates a hardware failure in the channel circuit or in the internal
CJ temperature measurement
Channel failure
Indicates a hardware failure in the input channel circuit (see note).
DHCP Server failure
For instruments with IP address lookup set to ‘Get from DHCP
Server’, this alarm occurs if the recorder cannot obtain an IP address from the server. See section 4.5 for details.
Archive failed. A file which has not been archived, has been detected.
FTP Archiving file lost
FTP Archiving too slow
Remote archive is too infrequent. The recorder effectively switches
to ‘Automatic’ (section 4.3.5) to ensure that data is not lost.
FTP Primary Server Failure
This error is set if the recorder fails, after two attempts, to establish
communications with the primary server as defined in Archive Configuration (section 4.3.5). After the second attempt has failed, the
Secondary server is tried.
FTP Secondary Server Failure
This error is set if the recorder fails, after two attempts, to establish
communications with the secondary server as defined in Archive Configuration (section 4.3.5). See also ‘FTP Primary Server Failure, above.
Insufficient non-volatile memory... There is insufficient memory available for the configuration. Can
be caused by use of Rolling Average maths functions.
Internal flash: \application\ required repairError found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \history\ required repair Error found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \screens\ required repair Error found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \user\ required repair Error found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \user\ is full Appears if the User partition is full. To clear, either user screens
must be simplified or files must be deleted from \User\, or both.
Maths Channel failure
Appears if, for example, the divisor of a divide function is zero.
Media Archiving file lost
Archive failed. A file which has not been archived, has been detected.
Media Archiving too slow
Archive is too infrequent. The recorder effectively switches to ‘Automatic’ (section 4.3.5) to ensure that data is not lost.
Network boot failure
The recorder is unable to establish connection with the BootP or
DHCP server. This might be caused by, for example, cable failure,
network hardware failure, etc.
Output channel failure
Indicates a hardware failure in the output channel circuit (see note).
Note: Unlike other instrument alarms, Channel Failure and Output channel failure are not self clearing.
Once the cause of failure is rectified, the recorder must be power-cycled in order to clear the alarm.
User Guide
Page 16
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.3 ALARM INDICATION (INSTRUMENT ALARMS) (Cont.)
Paper Low/Paper Out
Printer not responding
Warning messages from the ASCII printer (if fitted).
There is a fault in the serial comms link with the ASCII printer (if fitted).
Recording failure - (message) Message explains recording failure - due to file error, internal overflow etc.
Removable media failure
This error is set if the archive storage device is corrupt, wrongly
formatted etc. Becomes active only when an Archive is attempted.
Removable media full
Archive storage device full. Becomes active only when an Archive
is in progress.
SNTP server failure
This error is set if:a) the year received from the server is < 2001 or > 2035 or
b) the configured SNTP server cannot be accessed.
Time synchronisation failure
Set if 5 or more ‘Time change events’ are caused by the SNTP
server within 24 hrs. A ‘Time change event’ occurs whenever the
recorder time is found to be more than 2 seconds different from
the server time. The alarm does not appear until 24 hours have
elapsed since the first of the five or more Time Change events occurred.
USB over currentUSB power fault - too much current being drawn by a USB device
(max 500 mA).
USB power fault key
USB power fault - too much current being drawn by all USB devices
(max 1100 mA)
USB unsupportedUnsupported USB device inserted.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 17
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.3 ALARM INDICATION (Cont.)
CHANNEL ALARM
This red ‘bell’ indicator appears if any channel is in alarm. The symbol is illuminated continuously if all
alarms are acknowledged or flashes if any active alarm is unacknowledged. Refer to ‘ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’ below, for details of how to acknowledge alarms.
CHANGE BATTERY
This flashing indicator first appears when the battery voltage (checked every 15 minutes) indicates that
the battery is approaching the end of its useful life. The indicator continues to flash until the battery is
replaced (B2.2 in Annex B). The indicator does not appear if the battery is not fitted.
DISK ICON
This shows the free space available on whatever mass storage medium is fitted (if any), and selected for
Archive destination (note 1). The disk icon appears soon after the device is inserted (but see note 2).
During archiving, the colour of the central area of the disk changes to green (see note 3). No other disk
activity (e.g. save/restore configuration) is indicated.
This area of the icon coloured
green during any archive activity
(not necessarily to the device
selected in Archive configuration).
99%
Figure 3.1.3 Archive activity indication
Notes
1. The icon appears only when a memory device is present, AND when that memory device has
been selected in the ‘Archive to media’ selection in archive configuration (section 4.3.5). For
example: if a memory stick is inserted in ‘usbfront’, but Archive to Media is set to ‘mediacard’,
then the disk icon appears only if a suitable card is present in the ‘mediacard’ slot.
2. When a disk is inserted into a USB floppy disk drive which is connected to the recorder, the disk
icon appears only after the disk has been accessed, (either by reading from it or writing to it),
or after the file system has been opened by touching the ‘file’ key. (This note does not apply for
disks which have been inserted before the disk drive is plugged in.)
3. The central area goes green whenever local archiving is taking place - not only when archiving
is taking place to the memory device selected in Archive configuration.
FTP ICON
The FTP icon appears to the right of the disc icon position whenever transfer activity is taking place.
CONFIGURATION LOCKED INDICATOR
This symbol appears only when Bridge software is being used, in the following situations:
1. Whilst units are ‘synchronising’ configuration changes
2. Whilst configuration is taking place. If the reconfiguration is taking place at the host pc (Bridge ‘Full’
only), then the symbol appears at the target instrument, and vice-versa.
TRIAL MODE INDICATOR
This symbol is displayed whilst the recorder Trial Mode (section 4.3.22) is enabled.
User Guide
Page 18
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.4 Summary menu
This pop-up display appears if the Alarm Indication area at the top of the display is touched. Figure
3.1.4a shows the display.
Touch Alarm area
(e.g. channel alarm symbol)
Summary
Instrument Alarm Summary
Ack all Alarms
Alarm Summary
Batch Summary
Message Log
Remove Media
Figure 3.1.4a Summary pop-up menu
INSTRUMENT ALARM SUMMARY
Instrument Alarm Summary
Maths Channel Failure
Printer Error
Ok
Figure 3.1.4b Typical Instrument alarm summary display
This contains a list of the currently active instrument alarms. For a list of possible alarms and their definitions, see section 3.1.3, above.
ACK ALL ALARMS
Ack all Alarms
Confirm acknowledge of alarms?
Yes
No
Figure 3.1.4c Ack all Alarms display
‘Yes’ confirms all active, unconfirmed alarms.
This page can also be displayed by touching an alarm in the alarm summary page, described below.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 19
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.4 SUMMARY MENU (Cont.)
ALARM SUMMARY PAGE
As shown in figure 3.1.4d, below, the alarm summary page contains the following information for the current group:
1. Alarm identifier. This appears as a point ID, followed by the relevant alarm number in parentheses.
For example, Alarm 1 on maths channel 6 would appear as: D6 (1). Maths channels are prefixed by
‘D’. Totalisers are prefixed by ‘T’ and Counters are prefixed by ‘C’. Input channels are not prefixed.
2 Alarm threshold for absolute alarms only
3 The current process value for the point
4 An alarm symbol (see Table 3). Alarm symbols flash until acknowledged.
Notes:
1. Alarms are always listed in Point/Alarm order with input channels first, followed by derived
channels, totalisers and counters, if these options are fitted.
2 When the alarm source returns to its non-alarm state: Unlatched alarms are removed from
the list whether or not they have been acknowledged; latched alarms remain displayed until
acknowledged. See section 4.3.3 for a description of alarm types and actions.
3. There are no time or history components associated with the Alarm Summary. If Alarm messages have been enabled in the relevant group’s configuration (section 4.3.2), then alarm initiation/acknowledgement times and dates can be found from the trend and trend history displays,
described in section 3.4 or in Message log described later in this section.
4. If an alarm is active on a channel which is not included in any group, then although the channel
alarm symbol will flash, the alarm will not appear in any of the alarm summary pages.
Touch Alarm area
(e.g. channel alarm symbol)
Summary
Instrument Alarm Summary
Ack all Alarms
Alarm Summary
Batch Summary
Message Log
Goto Group
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3 Group 4
Unlock Flap
Group 5
Group 6
Alarm Summary: Group 5
1(1)
2 (1)
2 (2)
3 (1)
4(1)
Water temp 1a
Water temp 1b
Water temp 1b
Alarm setpoint
0il pressure
Transfer (Absolute alarms only)
Channel no.
(alarm no.)
60.0000 C
30.0000 C
10.0000 C
250.000 PSI
Ack Alarm
Channel
descriptor
68.5277
23.4531
Touch alarm to23.4531
call 'Acknowledge'
260.3425
dialogue box.
15.3678
Confirm acknowledge of alarm?
Yes
No
Current process
value
Alarm type
symbol
Figure 3.1.4d Alarm Summary display
User Guide
Page 20
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.4 SUMMARY MENU (Cont.)
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Alarms can be acknowledged individually, on a group basis, or globally (all alarms).
INDIVIDUAL ALARMS
Individual alarms are acknowledged from the alarm summary page by touching the relevant item (highlights yellow), then touching ‘Yes’ in the resulting pop-up confirmation box. Figure 3.1.4d, above, attempts to show this process.
GROUP ALARMS
Alarms can be acknowledged on a group basis by calling the alarm summary page for the relevant
group, then pressing the Options key (section 3.2), the ‘Ack Group Alarms’ key and finally, ‘Yes’ in the
resulting pop-up confirmation box. Figure 3.1.4e below, attempts to show this process.
Alarm Summary: Group 1
1(1)
2 (1)
2 (2)
3 (1)
4(1)
Water temp 1a
Water temp 1b
Water temp 1b
0il pressure
Transfer
60.0000 C
30.0000 C
10.0000 C
250.000 PSI
Option Menu
68.5277
23.4531
23.4531
260.3425
15.3678
Batch
Note
Ack Group Alarms
Ack Group Alarms
Confirm acknowledge of alarms?
Yes
No
Figure 3.1.4e Group Alarm acknowledgement
ALL ALARMS
To acknowledge all active alarms, touch (e.g.) the channel alarm icon at the top of the screen. From the
resulting ‘Summary’ menu, select ‘Ack all Alarms’, then finally, touch ‘Yes’ in the resulting pop-up confirmation box.
Note: The options menu is context sensitive, and may, therefore, not appear as illustrated above.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 21
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.4 SUMMARY MENU (Cont.)
BATCH SUMMARY
If the Batch option is fitted (section 4.3.10) a ‘Batch Summary’ key appears in the Summary menu.
Note: The following description shows the situation where batch ‘Scope’ is configured as ‘Group’.
The description is similar when ‘Scope’ = ‘Instrument’ except that there is only one line (Instrument), instead of one line per group.
As shown in figure 3.1.4f, below, the Batch Summary page contains the following batch information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Group names in group number order (if Scope = Group) or Instrument Name if scope = ‘Instrument’
Batch active indicator (green spot)
Initiation time and date
Elapsed time for the batch
Batch Field 1 and its ‘value’.
Touch Alarm area
(e.g. channel alarm symbol)
Summary
Instrument Alarm Summary
Ack all Alarms
Alarm Summary
Batch Summary
Message Log
Unlock Flap
Batch Summary - Group Mode
ColourMix1
ColourMix2
ColourMix3
ColourMix4
Mix1
Mix2
Group 7
Group 8
Batch
Group
9 running
indicator
Group
10
Group 11
Add Inputs
Group names
25/04/06 09:12:18
25/04/06 08:45:13
25/04/06 08:50:07
25/04/06 09:03:53
00:00:00
24/04/06 23:11:48
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
Batch start
time and date
00:02:41
00:29:46
00:24:40
00:11:06
00:00:00
09:57:49
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
00:00:00
Batch Number:
Batch Number:
Batch Number:
Batch Number:
Mixed batch:
Mixed batch:
Batch field 1
Batch field 1
Batch field 1
Batch field 1
Batch field 1
Batch field 1
Elapsed Batch Field 1
time
text
060425C1
060425M1
060425Y1
060425K1
060424R..
Click to highlight
Mix2
Full Details
Batch Field 1
values
Batch Control
Sort (ON)
Highlight (OFF)
Exit
Figure 3.1.4f Batch Summary page (Group mode - sort OFF; highlighting ON))
Touching anywhere on a group row calls a pop-up menu as shown above. The functions of this menu are
as follows:
User Guide
Page 22
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.4 SUMMARY MENU (Cont.)
BATCH SUMMARY (Cont.)
FULL DETAILS
Touching this key calls the Batch Details page showing the group name, batch status and batch field
details.
BATCH CONTROL
This calls a page similar to the Full Details page, but including a ‘NEW’ key to allow the operator to start a
new batch. If the batch is configured as ‘Start/Stop’ a ‘Stop’ key is also included allowing the user to stop
the batch.
SORT
If Sort is Off (default), the groups appear in Group number order with Group 1 at the top and group 12 at
the bottom. The key legend is ‘Sort (ON)’.
If Sort is On, those groups with batches running appear (in group number order) at the top of the list, followed by any remaining groups (also in group number order). The key legend is ‘Sort (OFF)’.
HIGHLIGHT
If Highlight is Off (default), then all groups’ text appears in white. The key legend is ‘Highlight (ON)’.
If Highlight is On then the text associated with groups which have batches running appears in green.
Remaining groups’ text is in white. The key legend is ‘Highlight (OFF)’.
EXIT
Closes the pop-up menu. (It closes itself after approximately 50 seconds.)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 23
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.4 SUMMARY MENU (Cont.)
MESSAGE LOG
Note: Message log can also be selected using the Root menu/Goto View/Message log key. This
goes immediately to the first Message Log page for the current group to the screen (i.e. the ‘Goto
Group’ menu does not appear).
If there are more messages than can be displayed in the height of the screen, a scroll bar appears to allow ‘hidden’ messages to be displayed.
Messages are retrieved from the history files in batches of 100 messages. If there are more than 100
messages, ‘Earlier messages..’ appears after the hundredth message. Touching ‘Earlier messages..’ calls
the option menu, and touching ‘Earlier messages..’ in this menu, calls the next batch of 100, and so on. If
applicable, operating ‘Later messages..’ / ‘Later messages..’ calls the previously displayed 100 messages.
As can be seen from figure 3.1.4g the list of messages can be ‘filtered’ both by type and by time. For
example, setting the message type to ‘Alarm’ and the period filter to ‘Last Day’ excludes all messages
except alarm messages which have occurred within the previous 24 hours. (For clarity, the figure shows
both filters open. In fact, only one can be open at a time)
Touch Alarm area
(e.g. channel alarm symbol)
Summary
Instrument Alarm Summary
Ack all Alarms
Alarm Summary
Batch Summary
Message Log
Unlock Flap
Goto Group
Group 1
Group 3 Group 4
Group 5
Engineer
Group 2
Group 6
Group 5
Batch number:050405A12
All Messages
09:06:22
05/04/05
All History
System
Last Hour
Message Log: Group name
05/04/05 09:06:18 Alarm(s) on 1(1)
Alarms
Last Day
05/04/05 09:06:18 Operator's name: Andrew
Power Up
Last 3 Days
05/04/05 09:06:18 Customer: FishesRus
General
Last Week
05/04/05 09:06:18 Batch number:020205A12
05/04/05 09:06:18 Config Revision:682759
Security Revision
Batches
Last746261
Month
05/04/05 09:06:18 Batch start (Engineer)
Logins
All History
05/04/05 08:50:30 Configuration revision 682,759 was 682,758
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Name files by Signings
batch true was false
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) On start log 3 Audit
was 1Trail
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Field 3 Operator's name: was Batch field 3
Reports
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Field 2 Customer: was Batch field 2
All Messages
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Field 1 Batch number:
was Batch field 1
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Batch fields 3 was 1
05/04/05 08:50:50 Config,Signed:Engineer, Authorized:Engineer,New batch fields
04/04/05 16:42:11 Alarm(s) off 2(1)
04/04/05 16:32:50 Alarm(s) off 1(1)
04/04/05 16:31:05 Batch stop (Engineer)
04/04/05 16:31:05 Stop Batch,Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,Belt Failure
04/04/05 16:29:33 Alarm(s) Ackd 1(1) 2(1)
04/04/05 16:28:05 Ack all alarms,Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,Belt Failure
04/04/05 16:27:13 Alarm(s) on1(1)
04/04/05 16:27:13 Alarm(s) on2(1)
04/04/05 14:06:22 Config Revision:682759 Security Revision 746261
04/04/05 14:06:22 Batch start (Engineer)
Figure 3.1.4g Message log page showing message-type picklist
User Guide
Page 24
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.4 SUMMARY MENU (Cont.)
MESSAGE LOG (Cont.)
MESSAGE TYPE FILTER
All Messages
System
Alarms
Power Up
General
Batches
Logins
Signings
Audit trail
Reports
All messages are displayed
Only System messages and instrument alarms are listed
Only alarm on/off and acknowledgement messages appear.
Displays power up messages only including Config Revision and Security revision are
included. See ‘About’ (section 4.6.11) for more details.
Displays e-mails, messages sent via Modbus, operator notes/custom messages etc. if they
do not have to be ‘signed’ (Auditor option 21CFR11 only - see section 4.4 for more details).
If the notes etc. are signed, they appear in the ‘Signings’ message type list.
Displays only batch messages (including Config and Security Revisions if either Auditor
option is enabled).
Lists only changes in login.
This list contains only notes, messages etc. that have been signed (and authorized). This
category is used only when ‘Require Signing’ (and ‘Require Authorization’) is (are) enabled
in the Security/Management menu- see section 4.4 for more details.
This list contains Configuration change messages only. This category is used only when
‘Audit Trail’ is enabled - see section 4.4 for more details.
For each report, this contains all the Report’s fields (set up in ‘Reports’ configuration) on
separate lines. Line Feed fields are ignored (i.e. they do not appear).
PERIOD FILTER
This picklist allows the user to select one of the following to define the period of time that the message
list is to encompass:
All History, Last Month (28 days), Last Week, Last 3 Days, Last Day or Last Hour.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 25
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.4 SUMMARY MENU (Cont.)
MESSAGE LOG (Cont.)
OPTION MENU
Touching a message (highlights yellow) calls the Option Menu* as shown in figure 3.1.4h, below.
Engineer
Group name
Batch number:050405A12
All Messages
09:06:22
05/04/05
All History
Message Log: Group name
05/04/05 09:06:18 Alarm(s) on 1(1)
05/04/05 09:06:18 Operator's name: Andrew
05/04/05 09:06:18 Customer: FishesRus
05/04/05 09:06:18 Batch number:020205A12
05/04/05 09:06:18 Config Revision:682759 Security Revision 746261
Option Menu
05/04/05 09:06:18 Batch start (Engineer)
05/04/05 08:50:30 Configuration revision 682,759 was 682,758
Batch
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Name files by batch true was false
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) On start log 3 was 1
Note
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Field 3 Operator's name: was Batch field 3
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Field 2 Customer: was Batch field 2
Enter History
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Field 1 Batch number: was Batch field 1
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Batch fields 3 was 1
Full Details
05/04/05 08:50:50 Config,Signed:Engineer, Authorized:Engineer,New batch fields
04/04/05 16:42:11 Alarm(s) off 2(1)
Refresh
04/04/05 16:32:50 Alarm(s) off 1(1)
04/04/05 16:31:05 Batch stop (Engineer)
04/04/05 16:31:05 Stop Batch,Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,Belt Failure
04/04/05 16:29:33 Alarm(s) Ackd 1(1) 2(1)
To call Option Menu, touch message
04/04/05 16:28:05 Ack all alarms,Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,Belt
Failure
04/04/05 16:27:13 Alarm(s) on1(1)
(highlights yellow) or Option key
04/04/05 16:27:13 Alarm(s) on2(1)
04/04/05 14:06:22 Config Revision:682759 Security Revision 746261
04/04/05 14:06:22 Batch start (Engineer)
Figure 3.1.4h Message Log options menu
Batch
Note
Enter history
See section 4.3.10.
See section 3.5.
Operating the Enter History key causes the recorder to display that page of history
which includes the highlighted message. See section 3.4 for details of trend history.
When in Trend history mode, operating the Message Log key calls that message log
page which contains those messages which are nearest the trend history cursor time.
Full details
If the highlighted message is wider than the display, the whole message can be displayed by operating the ‘Full Details’ key.
Refresh/Earlier messages../Later messages..
‘Refresh’ places (at the top of the screen), any messages, which have occurred since
the Message Log page was last entered, or since the last ‘Refresh’. If earlier or later
messages have been selected, then ‘Refresh’ is replaced by ‘Earlier messages..’ or
‘Later messages..’ as appropriate, and operating the key calls the next or previously
displayed group of 100 messages to the display respectively.
* The option menu can also be called by touching the option key. In this case:
a. Enter History calls the current Trend History display, as described in section 3.4, and
b. Because no message is highlighted, the ‘Full Details’ key is not enabled,
Notes:
1 Selecting ‘Enter History’ whilst either ‘Earlier Messages’ or ‘Later Messages’ is highlighted calls
the current History page.
2 If the Option Menu has ‘timed out’ leaving a message highlighted, and the option key is operated, then this is equivalent to reselecting the message.
User Guide
Page 26
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.1.4 SUMMARY MENU (Cont.)
REMOVE MEDIA
Note: See section 2.4 if the ‘Lockable Door Flap’ option is fitted.
This key is provided to help ensure that any local memory storage device is removed only when it is ‘safe’
to do so.
Touching the key results in either an ‘OK to remove archive media’, or a ‘DO NOT REMOVE Archive Media! message, as appropriate. See figure 3.1.4i
Caution
Removal of memory devices such as SD cards or Compact Flash cards whilst archiving is taking
place can lead to permanent, irreparable damage to the device, rendering it unusable.
Archive Media
OK to remove archive media
Ok
DO NOT REMOVE Archive Media!
Will advise when OK to remove...
Cancel
Figure 3.1.4i Remove archive media messages
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 27
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.2 NAVIGATION KEYS
Above the lower edge of the display screen are six keys (as shown below, for the small frame unit) which
allow the user to perform various context-related tasks such as to change the display mode (section 3.4),
to access the recorder configuration, to archive data, to select groups etc. In addition to this, left and
right arrow keys or open/close folder keys appear when relevant.
Page up
Page down
Left
Right
Close
folder
Open
folder
Left
cursor
Right
cursor
Option
Root
Figure 3.2 Navigation keys
3.2.1 Key functions
Page up
Used, as appropriate, to recall the previous (higher level) display page, to call the previous
display mode and to scroll through previous text entries.
Where relevant, the function of this key is mimicked by the ‘Close folder’ key.
Page down Used, where appropriate, to call a further (lower level) display page, to call the next display
mode and to scroll through previous text entries.
Where relevant, the function of this key is mimicked by the ‘Open folder’ key.
Left arrow
Used a) to select the previous group, b) to navigate backwards through a text string when
editing or c) to select the previous channel whilst in configuration. Where relevant, the
function of this key is mimicked by the ‘Left cursor’ key.
Right arrow Used a) to select the next group, b) to navigate forwards through a text string when editing
or c) to select the next channel whilst in configuration. Where relevant, the function of this
key is mimicked by the ‘Right cursor’ key.
Option
Calls a pop-up Options menu allowing the user to carry out functions such as entering/
quitting history, turning channel cycling on and off etc. according to context.
Root
Calls the ‘Root Menu’ as described below. To quit the Root menu, touch the root key again.
ROOT MENU KEYS
Home
Causes a return to the ‘Home’ page from any page in the recorder. As delivered, the
‘Home’ page is the Group 1, vertical trend display as depicted in figure 3, but this can be
edited (in Config/Views) to be any of the other available groups’ display modes - Horizontal
trend, Vertical bargraph etc.
Causes the top level Operator page to appear. The appearance of this display is dictated by
Operator
the security level that the recorder is set to, and by the access level of the user. As despatched
from the factory, the recorder is in ‘logged out’ mode and the Operator page contains only
‘Archive’, ‘Security’ and ‘System’ keys. Further details appear in ‘Access to configuration’ below.
File
Allows the file system in that area of Flash memory that is accessible to the user, and the file
system on any bulk storage device fitted, to be viewed. See section 5 for details.
Remove MediaThis key is provided to help ensure that any local memory storage device is removed only when
it is ‘safe’ to do so. Touching the key results in either an ‘OK to remove archive media’, or a ‘DO
NOT REMOVE Archive Media! message, as appropriate. For more details see section 3.1.4.
Unlock Flap Replaces ‘Remove Media’ (above) for recorders fitted with the lockable flap option (section
2.4).
Goto View Allows the user to select the display mode for the current group, as shown in figure 3.2.1a.
Display modes not enabled for this group in Config/Views configuration page (section
4.3.4) do not appear. As an alternative, display modes can be scrolled-through using the
up and down arrow navigation keys.
Goto View also offers an alternative means of entry to the Alarm Summary page described in
section 3.1.4, and also allows entry to the current group’s Message Log pages, described below.
User Guide
Page 28
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.2.1 KEY FUNCTIONS (Cont.)
ROOT MENU KEYS (Cont.)
Goto Group Allows a group to be selected for display. Groups which are not ‘display enabled’ in the
Config/Views page (section 4.3.4) are greyed. An alarm icon appears (as shown for groups
1 and 4, in figure 3.2.1b, below) for any group containing one or more points in alarm. The
icon flashes if any of the group’s alarms have not been acknowledged.
Notes:
1. If there is insufficient space on the display screen for all the enabled groups or views, ‘More...’
keys appear, as necessary, to allow further items to be displayed for selection.
2. In normal operating (e.g. trend) displays, the right arrow key can be used to scroll through
groups in ascending group number order. The left arrow key can be used to scroll through
groups in descending group number order.
Root Menu
Home
Operator
File
Remove Media
Goto View
Goto Group
Goto View: Group 1
Alarm Summary
Message Log
Vertical Trend
Circular Trend
Horizontal Bargraph
Horizontal Trend
A display mode appears only if it is enabled for the
current group.
Vertical Bargraph
User screen keys appear only if a User Screens
Numeric Page option is fitted and the relevant screen is enabled
for the current group.
User Screen 1
User Screen 2
User Screen 3
More...
See Views configuration (section 4.3.4) for enable/
disable details.
Figure 3.2.1a Root menu with Goto View sub menu
Goto Group
Root Menu
Home
Operator
File
Remove Media
Goto View
Goto Group
Group 1
Group 3
Group 2
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Groups which are not display
enabled in 'Views' configuration
(section 4.3.4) are 'greyed'.
Figure 3.2.1b Root menu with Goto Group sub menu
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 29
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.2.1 KEY FUNCTIONS (Cont.)
ALARM SUMMARY
The Root menu/Goto View/Alarm summary key calls the Alarm summary page for the current group to
the screen. Alternatively, Alarm summary can be selected from the Alarm, Message and Media menu,
but in this case, the user must select an alarm summary group from a pop-up (Goto Group) menu. See
section 3.1.4 for more details of the alarm summary page.
MESSAGE LOG
The Root menu/Goto View/Message log key calls the Message Log page for the current group to the
screen. Alternatively, Message Log can be selected from the Alarm, Message and Media menu, but in
this case, the user must select a ‘Group’ for the Message Log display from a pop-up (Goto Group) menu.
See section 3.1.4 for full details of the message log.
User Guide
Page 30
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.3 FIRST SWITCH-ON
When power is applied the recorder initialises, and once this process is complete, the home page is
displayed. It is unlikely that this will contain any useful information because the input channels will not, as
yet, have been configured to suit the type of input signals being applied to them, as described in section
4.
Notes:
1 There is no on/off switch associated with the recorder.
2 Date, time and the message ‘Power Up’ are printed on the chart each time power is applied to
the recorder, followed by a similar message giving ‘Config Revision’ and ‘Security Revision’.
3 A red line is drawn across the width of the chart at power up
The recorder has four security levels as follows:
Logged out Initially, no access to recorder configuration is possible. Only Archive, Login/security and
the System ‘About’ functions can be accessed - via the root menu. Limited or full access
can be permitted from ‘Engineer’ level.
Operator* No access to recorder configuration is possible until access permissions have been set up.
Section 4.4.1 describes how limited or full access can be permitted by an operator with
‘Engineer’ level access.
Engineer* Accessed initially, by entering ‘100’ as the password (section 3.3.1, below). Full access to all
recorder functions is available. Section 4.4.1 describes how the Engineer level password
can be edited and an Operator password can be entered if required. The section also describes how access permission to some or all of the recorder functions can be granted, or
not, to individual user names and default security levels (except ‘Service’).
Service
Full access to all recorder functions and to areas of recorder memory for diagnostic purposes. For use only by Service Engineers.
*Note: For units with the Auditor 21CFR11 Option enabled, the default Engineer and Operator
passwords are both ‘100’.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 31
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.3.1 Access to Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
As shown in figure 3.3.1a, once the recorder has initialised, touch the current access level key
Touch the ‘Logged out’ field and then touch ‘Engineer’ from the resulting picklist.
Touch the blank Password area to call the keyboard display (see figure 3.3.1b).
Touch <Numeric><1><0><0><OK> to enter the password ‘100’. The screen reverts to the ‘Home’
page.
Operation of the Root key followed by a touch on the Operator key calls the top level page allowing
access to the Archive, Save/Restore, Config, Security, Network and System areas described in section 4 below.
1
Touch Current
access level key
Group name
Logged out
Channel 1
0.2000
0.0000
11:52:59
05/04/05
0.4000
0.6000
0.8000
Login
Select the required access level and enter the password if
required.
User Logged out
Logged out
Operator
Engineer
3
0.0237V
1.0000
11:52:04
05/04/05
2
Touch 'logged out'
area...
...then touch access
level required.
Service
11:49:24
05/04/05
Touch the password window when it appears, and enter the password.
The Engineer level password is '100' when the unit is despatched from
the factory. Passwords can be edited in 'Security' as described in section 4.4.1.
The screen reverts to the home page, with the new access level displayed in the 'Current access level' key
11:46:44
05/04/05
Close
Figure 3.3.1a Access to configuration
Notes:
1. For units which have the Auditor 21CFR11 Option enabled, the default Operator password is
‘100’. Otherwise no password is required for default Operator level access. In either case the
Operator access level password can be edited in ‘Security’ configuration. (Section 4.4.1.)
2. The login screen, above, can also be called by operating the Root menu, then ‘Operator’ then
‘Security’, then ‘Login’. In such a case, the screen reverts to the ‘Operator’ page rather than
returning to the home page once login has been achieved.
3. Figure 3.3.1a shows ‘Login by user list’ which is the default method. If either Auditor option
and/or the Security management option is enabled, an alternative procedure is possible where
each user has to enter a name and associated password - i.e. there is no list of users/access
levels to choose from. See section 4.4.2 (Management) for details.
4. For Active Directory users, a password expiry warning message (below) pops up on log-in,
stating how many days remain before the password expires (configured at the Active Directory
server).
Warning
Fred password expires in 2 days
Ok
User Guide
Page 32
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.3.1 ACCESS TO CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
TROUBLE SHOOTING
For Active directory users, if login fails, check that the Active Directory Server system alarm is not active
(section 3.1.3) and that one of the TLS options is enabled (section 4.5.1). At the Active Directory server,
check that the password has not expired and that ‘Change Password at next login’ has not been enabled.
TEXT STRING ENTRY
The keyboard which appears when the password area is touched is the same as that which appears when
any non-numeric text string entry is required (e.g. channel descriptor). Figures 3.3.1b and 3.3.1c below
are an attempt, within the limitations of the illustrating process, to depict the available keyboards and
thus the available character set. Actual entry of the text string is by touching the relevant keys.
When editing existing text strings, the existing text string appears highlighted, and will be replaced in its
entirety by the first character entered. To avoid this, the left arrow key* can be touched to ‘unhighlight’ it.
The down and up arrow keys can be used to scroll through previously entered text strings.
Immediately below the keyboard are six keys with the functions listed below. When active, the background colour changes to yellow for as long as the key is active.
Shift*
Caps*
BSpc
Ovr
Ok
Cancel
Once the shift key has been pressed, the next-entered letter appears as a capital; subsequent letters are in lower case.
When pressed, all subsequent letters appear as capital letters until the Caps key is operated again
This backspace key deletes character to the left of the cursor.
If selected, the next-entered character replaces (overwrites) the existing character to the
right of the cursor position. If not selected, the next-entered character in inserted into the
existing text string at the cursor position.
Used to save the new text string and to return to the page from which the keyboard was called.
Causes a return to the page from which the keyboard was called without saving the new string.
*Notes
1. The character on each display key is always a capital letter, whether or not the actual character
being entered is in capitals or lower case.
2. The cursor keys mimic the function of the left and right arrow Navigation keys.
3. As an alternative, text may be entered using a suitable keyboard connected via the USB port
behind the access flap or (if the relevant option is fitted) one of the USB ports at the rear of the
instrument (section 2.2.1).
Cursor keys
Text string
(all * for password)
Tabs show
active keyboard
(tab positions vary
according to context)
**
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
˚
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
\
.
Alphabet
Shift
Shift key
Alphabet 2
Numeric
Caps
BSpc
Caps Lock
Symbols
Ovr
Ok
Cancel
Backspace
Overprint
(shown active)
Figure 3.3.1b Alphabet 1 keyboard
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 33
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.3.1 ACCESS TO CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
TEXT STRING ENTRY (Cont.)
Text String
Ä
Å
Á
À
a
Æ
Ç
É
È
Ë
Ê
Í
Ì
Ï
Î
Ó
Ò
Ô
Ö
º
Ü
Ú
Ù
Û
ÿ
Ñ
α
β
Γ
δ
ε
η
θ
�
≠
Σ
τ
φ
�
Alphabet
Alphabet 2
Numeric
Symbols
Caps
BSpc
Ovr
Shift
Ok
Cancel
Text String
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
–
E
Alphabet 2
Numeric
Symbols
Caps
BSpc
Ovr
0
Alphabet
Shift
.
,
Ok
Cancel
Text String
!
"
£
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
-
_
+
=
{
}
[
]
:
;
@
'
~
#
<
>
,
.
?
/
|
'
3
±
√
¿
¡
¥
¢
2
Alphabet
Shift
Alphabet 2
Numeric
Symbols
Caps
BSpc
Ovr
Ok
Cancel
Figure 3.3.1c Alternative keyboards
User Guide
Page 34
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4 DISPLAY MODES
The display modes described below allow the currently displayed group’s process values (channels, totalisers etc.- known collectively as points) to be displayed as vertical, horizontal or circular ‘chart’ traces, as
vertical or horizontal bargraphs or as numeric values. The various display modes are cycled-through using the up/down arrow keys, or a specific mode (or view) can be selected from the Root Menu ‘Goto View’
key. Groups can be scrolled through using the left/right arrow keys. The Home key returns the user to the
Home page (defined in Configuration/Views - section 4.3.4) from anywhere in the Operator or Configuration pages in the recorder. When dispatched, the Home page is Group 1, vertical trend display. See also
the Screen builder description in section 7.
TREND HISTORY
Trend history, allows the user to review group history. The maximum amount that can be reviewed
depends on a number of factors, including how many points are configured, how rapidly the traces are
changing and so on. At a recording rate of 20 mm/hour (see group configuration - section 4.3.2), with
all channels configured, a minimum of 30 day’s worth of traces is available for viewing, provided that the
group contents are not re-configured during this period (in which case, the history starts at the end of the
re-configuration). The amount of trace visible on the screen depends on the recording rate, the higher
the rate, the less trace is visible at any one time.
Notes:
1. Trend history mode is available only for groups with ‘Recording Enable’ enabled (Group configuration - section 4.3.2) and only for vertical, horizontal or circular trend display modes.
2. Trend history mode is vertical for vertical and circular trend modes and horizontal for horizontal
trend mode.
3. Channel cycling is inhibited in trend history mode. To increment the current channel, touch the
faceplate.
4. Group faceplates are not displayed in trend history mode.
5. Operation of the Root/Goto View/Message Log key (section 3.2.1), when in history mode, displays a message log page containing messages which occurred at or near the selected cursor
time.
6. With A/B switching selected, traces are displayed with the ‘A’ or ‘B’ span/zone, colour settings
etc. obtaining at the cursor time. See sections 4.3.2, 4.3.3 and 4.7, for more details of A/B
switching.
To enter trend history mode, the option key can be used (as shown for vertical trend mode in figure
3.4.1b), or the trace area of the screen can be continuously touched until the screen blanks prior to redrawing. A ‘Preparing History, please wait’ message appears whilst the re-drawing calculation is taking
place. Although tracing stops whilst trace history mode is active, no data is lost. Process Variable values
are saved in the recorder memory. Alarms are still scanned-for and any associated action taken.
The trend history display is similar to the real-time trend display, but with a dark background and with the
addition of a slider control and arrow keys for selecting that part of trend history which is to be displayed.
The controls are used as follows:
1
2
3
Touching an arrow key key causes the trace history to move an incremental amount.
Holding an arrow key continuously, causes continuous movement.
Touching and dragging the slider, whilst observing the time/date display, allows the user to select
the section of history exactly. Touching the slider bar either side of the slider causes a page shift in
the relevant direction. The Page up and Page down keys also provide this function.
On first entry to trend history mode, the channel value and the time and date shown in the faceplate
are those at the top edge of the chart. Touching the screen causes a cursor to appear at point of screen
contact. This cursor can be ‘touched and dragged’ to provide a reference point on the current trace.
The displayed value date and time refer to the cursor intersection with the current channel. To return to
real-time trending, the Option key is operated, followed by ‘Exit History’.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 35
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4 DISPLAY MODES (Cont.)
TIME CHANGE RECORDS
For vertical and horizontal trend modes a line is drawn across the width of the chart whenever a time
discontinuity in the record occurs. These lines disappear if a configuration change which causes group
history to be lost, is made (such as adding a new channel to a group).
Red line
Blue line
Green line
A red line is drawn on the trend history chart at power up.
A blue line indicates that recording has been disabled/enabled in Group Configuration
(section 4.3.2), or by a recording job (section 4.7.10). Blue lines are not drawn when the
Simulation Option is active.
A green line appears if there has been a time change as a result of a clock job (section
4.7.6), an SNTP synchronisation or by the operator physically changing the recorder time.
Note: Changes from standard time to daylight saving time and back again are not ‘green lined’ in
this way
3.4.1 Vertical Trend display
This display (figure 3.4.1b) shows each point in the display group as though it were being traced on a
white chart. It is possible to change the appearance of the chart in the System key ‘Customise’ area of
configuration (section 4.6.10). It is recommended that some thought be given to ensuring good contrast
between trace colours and background colour.
One of the channels is said to be the ‘current’ or ‘scale’ channel. This channel is identified by its diamond
shaped pen icon and by its descriptor, digital value and scale being displayed on a ‘faceplate’ across the
full width of the screen, above the chart. If a channel is included in the display group but its status is ‘not
good’ for some reason, then its pen icon is hollow.
Faceplates for all the group channels can be displayed, by using the Faceplates On/Off key in the option
menu. If selected On, faceplates (showing colour, descriptor, digital value and units) for all the group’s
channels appear either above the current channel’s faceplate or, if there are too many to fit across the
screen, at the right hand edge of the screen. When necessary, a slider bar appears to allow further (hidden) faceplates to be viewed.
Each channel in the display group becomes the ‘current’ channel, in turn, for approximately 10 seconds
– i.e. the channels are cycled-through, starting with the lowest numbered channel. Once the final channel in the group has been displayed for 10 seconds, the lowest numbered channel is returned to and the
sequence repeats. This scrolling process can be enabled or disabled using the Channel Cycling On (Off)
key in the Option menu.
To select a particular channel to be the current channel, the relevant pen icon can be touched. To cycle
through the channels manually, the faceplate area is touched repeatedly until the required channel is
reached.
The Horizontal Trend display can be called using the down arrow key. Alternatively, any one of the enabled display modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
Option Menu
Option
Key
Batch
Note
Faceplates On/Off
Channel Cycling Off
Enter History
Figure 3.4.1a Option Menu (Typical)
User Guide
Page 36
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4.1 VERTICAL TREND DISPLAY (Cont.)
Home
Channel 1
700.87˚C
Channel 1
Trend display mode
Group name
Engineer
Channel 2
487.39˚C
400.00
Channel 3
235.68˚C
480.00
Channel 4
378.99˚C
560.00
Channel 5
0.49V
640.00
Channel 6
0.85V
11:52:59
05/04/05
700.87
720.00
800.00
11:52:04
05/04/05
05/04/05 11:51:33 Alarms(s) off 3(1)
11:49:24
05/04/05
05/04/05 11:47:51 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
11:46:44
05/04/05
Group faceplates (appear only if
Faceplates selected On from
option menu). If there are too
many faceplates to fit across the
screen, they appear down the
right edge instead.
Faceplate for current
channel.
Touch and release faceplate to increment channel
(or touch pen to select
channel).
If Channel Cycle On:
Current channel increments every 10 seconds.
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Faceplates On/Off
Channel Cycling Off
Enter History
Preparing History, please wait
Trend History mode
Group name
Engineer
Channel 1
400.00
480.00
05/04/05 18:33:04 Alarms(s) off 3(1)
Cursor
05/04/05 18:28:22 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
560.00
686.84 ˚C
640.00
720.00
Value at cursor
time/date
Press
arrow keys
to move
minimum
amount
11:53:09
04/05/04
04/05/04 11:49:54
800.00
11:52:04
05/04/05
Real time/date
Cursor time/date
(Touch faceplate to
increment channel.)
Press bar to
move one
pageful
11:49:24
05/04/05
14:46:44
05/04/05
Page
Page
backwards in time
forwards in time
(show newer data) (Show older data)
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Exit History
Message Log
Figure 3.4.1b Trend display mode and trend history mode
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 37
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4 DISPLAY MODES (Cont.)
3.4.2 Horizontal Trend display
Entered from the Vertical Trend display by means of the down arrow key, or selected via the Root Menu
‘Goto View’ key, this display mode (figure 3.4.2a) is similar to the Vertical Trend display described in section 3.4.1 above, except that the traces are produced horizontally rather than vertically.
Group name
Engineer
Channel 1
7 0 0 . 8 7˚C
14:21:30
06/04/05
800
Current pen icon
Faceplates for current
channel.
Touch either faceplate to
increment channel
(or touch pen to select
channel).
Bargraph
Non-current
pen icon
Time
(at adjacent gridline)
14:11:00
06/04/05
Message bar
14:13:40
06/04/05
Alarm mark
(Abs High)
06/04/05 12:02:20 Alarm(s) off 2 (1)
Latest message
14:16:20
06/04/05
400
If this arrow head is displayed,
then touching the message bar
displays previous messages
Figure 3.4.2a Horizontal Trend Display
One of the channels is defined as being the ‘current’ or ‘scale’ channel and this is identified on the chart
by its pen icon being diamond shaped rather than triangular as for non-current channels. If a channel
is included in the display group, but its status is ‘not good’ for some reason, then its pen icon is hollow.
Each channel in the display group becomes the ‘current’ channel, in turn, for approximately 10 seconds
– i.e. the channels are cycled-through, starting with the lowest numbered channel. Once the final channel in the group has been displayed for 10 seconds, the lowest numbered channel is returned to and the
sequence repeats. This scrolling process can be stopped using the Channel Cycling key in the Option
menu.
There are two faceplates associated with this display mode, one above the ‘chart’, showing the current
channel’s descriptor and its digital value; the other - to the right of the ‘chart’ - showing a bargraph representation of the current channel’s value, together with a scale showing the low and high range values
for the channel. Touching either of these faceplates causes the current channel number to increment.
To select a particular channel to be the current channel, the relevant pen icon can be touched. In either
case, the bargraph and the background colour of the channel descriptor take the colour of the new current channel.
Touching the trace for a few seconds, or using the Option key then ‘Enter History’ calls the Horizontal
trend history page. See section 3.4, above for more details.
Time and date are printed on the ‘chart’ immediately to the right of grid lines, and it is to these grid lines
that the printed time and date relate.
User Guide
Page 38
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4.2 HORIZONTAL TREND MODE (Cont.)
Below the ‘chart’ is a message bar, containing the latest message. If there is more than one message, an
arrow head icon appears near the right-hand end of the message bar. If this arrow head appears, then
touching the message bar calls a pop-up box (figure 3.4.2b) which displays the latest messages. If there
are more messages than can be displayed in the box, a slider control appears, which can be used to access previous messages, up to a total of 60 messages. Further messages, cause the oldest messages to
be discarded to keep the total to 60.
Note: At power-up, only those messages which occurred within the ‘time width’ of the page are
displayed
Group name
Engineer
Channel 1
7 0 0 . 8 7˚C
14:21:30
06/04/05
800
View Messages
06/04/05 12:02:20 Batch Number 050406-3
06/04/05 11:11:41 Config Revision:218 Security
Revision:3
06/04/05 11:11:34 Batch start (Engineer)
06/04/05 11:09:34 Alarm(s) on 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:09:26 Alarm(s) off 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:07:41 Alarm(s) on 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:07:34 Alarm(s) off 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:05:34 Alarm(s) on 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:05:26 Alarm(s) off 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:03:41 Alarm(s) on 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:03:34 Alarm(s) off 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:01:34 Alarm(s) on 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:01:26 Alarm(s) off 1 (2)
06/04/05 10:59:41 Alarm(s) on 1 (2)
06/04/05 10:59:34 Alarm(s) off 1 (1)
06/04/05 10:57:34 Batch Number 050406-2
06/04/05 10:55:41 Config Revision:218 Security
Revision:3
06/04/05 10:55:34 Batch start (Engineer))
Ok
14:11:00
06/04/05
14:13:40
06/04/05
06/04/05 12:02:20 Alarm(s) off 2 (1)
14:16:20
06/04/05
400
Figure 3.4.2b Horizontal Trend mode message dialogue box
The circular trend mode, if enabled, can be called by using the down arrow key. Alternatively, any one of
the enabled display modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 39
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4.3 Circular Trend
This allows up to 12 points to be traced as though on a circular chart. More than 12 points can be included in the group, but only the first 12 traces and their associated faceplates are included in the realtime display. Entering Trend History mode (by using the Options button or by continuously touching the
screen for a few seconds), allows all the points to be reviewed, but only in vertical trend history mode,
described in section 3.4 above.
For large frame recorders, two alternative views called ‘Full Screen’ and ‘Normal View’ are available and
are toggled between by means of a push-button key near the top left corner of the screen. In each case,
faceplates can be displayed, or not, as required, using the Option key ‘Faceplates On/Off’ selection. The
diameter of the chart is independent of faceplate on/off selection. When quitting History, Normal view
is always returned to. Small frame recorders use only ‘full screen’ view, (except when viewed via Bridge
software when the small frame recorder behaves in the same way as the large frame recorder).
Notes Alarm icons (section 3) do not appear on circular trend scales.
TREND MODES
The way in which traces are laid down on the chart depends on the action to be taken when the chart is
‘full’, as set up in group configuration - section 4.3.2. The user can select ‘Rotate’ or ‘New Chart’.
ROTATE
In the following description, the word ‘segment’ is used interchangeably with ‘Major chart division’. The
number of Major chart divisions is a function of the selected chart speed, as described in Group Configuration (section 4.3.2).
With ‘Rotate’ selected, the traces start one major chart division anti-clockwise from the top of the chart
and trace clockwise until they reach the top of the chart (‘12 o’clock’). At this point, the chart, complete
with time stamps and traces, rotates one major chart division anticlockwise, and the tracing process continues. When the chart is ‘full’, the oldest segment-full of tracing is removed, leaving an empty segment
to be traced-on when the chart rotates.
Figures 3.4.3b and 3.4.3c, below show Circular trending in ‘Rotate’ mode.
NEW CHART
With ‘New Chart’ selected, tracing starts at top of the chart (12 o’clock) and continue to trace clockwise
round the chart, back up to the vertical. When the chart is full, it is cleared, new timestamps are displayed, and tracing restarts from the top of the chart.
The start time of the tracing can be set as a part (‘Start at’) of group configuration, the choices available
depending on the time per revolution setting. The start time is placed at top centre of the chart, and
‘backfilled’, clockwise, round to the current time.
Figure 3.4.3a, below, shows New Chart mode.
Note: The use of ‘12 o’clock’ above is intended to be illustrative and only to explain angles in
terms of a normal analogue clock face. It does not mean that this position must actually be noon
or midnight in real time.
User Guide
Page 40
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4.3 CIRCULAR TREND (Cont.)
06/04/05 10:00
10:05
10:55
10:50
10:10
10:45
10:15
10:40
10:20
10:35
10:25
10:30
Figure 3.4.3a Circular trend - New chart mode
NORMAL VIEW
Normal view is available only for large frame recorders (also small frame recorders when viewed via
Bridge software). As shown in figure 3.4.3b, below, this provides a view of the chart, together with scale,
chart speed, message bar and navigation keys. The figure shows a view with faceplates selected on.
Group name
Logged out
Furnace 1 Temp 13
Full Screen
1500.0000
1 hr/rev
897.3476˚C
0.0000
0.0000
1500.000
06/04/05 10:10
Scale for left half
06/04/05 11:05
of chart
Scale
for10:15
right
14/08/02
half of chart
11:05:33
06/04/05
Furnace 1 Te..
Chart Speed
1125.0956˚C
Furnace 1 Te..
1113.9806˚C
06/04/05 11:00
06/04/05 2 10:20
Furnace 1 Te..
1200.9456˚C
06/04/05 10:25
06/04/05 10:55
Chart zero
Flow 1
1365.21l/hr
06/04/05 10:50
06/04/05 10:30
Flow 2
1299.65l/hr
Chart Full scale
06/04/05 10:35
06/04/05 10:45
06/04/05 10:40
Flow 3
989.54l/hr
06/04/05 11:07:52 Engineer,Restarted 11:07
Figure 3.4.3b Circular Trend normal view (with faceplates)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 41
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4.3 CIRCULAR TREND (Cont.)
NORMAL VIEW FEATURES
Scales
Two scales are provided, one for the left hand side of the chart, the other for the right hand
side. Channel scaling is a part of channel configuration, as described in section 4.3.3,
below. The scales apply only to values along the horizontal line through the centre of
the chart. Values for other angles (times) can be most easily found from the trace history,
selected from the Option key, or by touching anywhere in the chart or in the green background area for a few seconds.
Chart speed This displays the currently selected speed of revolution of the chart. This speed is set up as
a part of Group configuration (section 4.3.2)
Faceplates Up to 12 faceplates can be displayed, giving point values and alarm indication.
Message Bar The message bar at the bottom of the screen displays the latest message. If an up arrow
appears at the right hand end of the bar, there is more than one message. Touching the
message bar calls a ‘View Messages’ window, detailing previous messages. See the description in section 3.4.2 for more details.
FULL SCREEN DISPLAY
As shown in figure 3.4.3c, below, this maximizes the chart diameter, leaving only the chart, chart speed
and faceplates (if selected on) on display. The figure shows a view with faceplates selected off. For the
large frame recorder, faceplate on/off selection can be made only from one of the other display modes,
as the navigation keys are not visible in this display mode.
Group name
Logged out
11:05:33
06/04/05
1 hr/rev
06/04/05 10:10
Normal View
06/04/05 11:05
06/04/05 10:15
06/04/05 10:20
06/04/05 11:00
06/04/05 10:25
06/04/05 10:55
06/04/05 10:50
06/04/05 10:30
06/04/05 10:35
06/04/05 10:45
06/04/05 10:40
Figure 3.4.3c Circular Trend full screen view (with faceplates selected off)
FULL SCREEN FEATURES
Faceplates
User Guide
Page 42
As described above for Normal View features
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4.3 CIRCULAR TREND (Cont.)
TIMESTAMPS
Time and/or date are displayed at every major chart division. The following rules apply:
1. For chart durations of a week or more, only the date is displayed
2. For chart durations of less than a week, both time and date appear, with the following exception:
In ‘New Chart’ mode (unless the chart ‘bridges’ midnight), the date appears only at top centre of the
chart. All other chart divisions are identified by time only.
OTHER NOTES
1. Adaptive recording results in two traces per trend, as in other trend display modes.
2. For successful circular trend display, ‘Circular Settings’ must be enabled for the relevant group (section 4.3.2), and ‘Circular Trend’ must be enabled for the group, in Views configuration (section 4.3.4).
If Circular Trend is enabled, but Circular Settings is disabled, then, although the circular chart will
appear, it is unlikely that it will contain any trends.
3. The circular chart speed is unaffected by A/B switching of Trend Speed/Interval (section 4.3.2).
4. Circular trends backfill only to the previous power up.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 43
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4 DISPLAY MODES (Cont.)
3.4.4 Vertical bargraph
Entered from Circular Trend mode by means of the down arrow key, or selected from the Root Menu
‘Goto View’ key, this display mode shows the Process Variable (PV) values as vertical bars with faceplates
containing digital values and alarm data. There are two versions, one with faceplates above the bars (1 to
6 channels - figure 3.4.4a); the other (with faceplates at the right hand edge of the display - figure 3.4.4b)
is used where there are more than six channels.
Note: The description above refers to the 180 mm version of the recorder. For the 100 mm version, the faceplates appear above the bars for one or two points, but to the right of the bars for
three or more points.
Operation of the option key calls the Option menu display for this display page, allowing faceplates to be
selected on or off. This feature is available for vertical trend, circular trend and vertical bargraph displays
only.
To call the horizontal bargraph display mode, use the down arrow key. Alternatively, any one of the enabled display modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
Trend history mode is not available from this display mode.
FACEPLATES ABOVE THE BARS
See figure 3.4.4a.
As the number of channels in the display group increases, the bars and their faceplates get narrower,
FACEPLATES AT RIGHT-HAND EDGE
See figure 3.4.4b.
As the number of PVs increases, the bars get narrower. As the bars get narrower, so the scale values
become truncated as shown in figure 3.4.4b. The bars have a set minimum width, and if the total number
of points in the group cannot be displayed within the width of the screen, a horizontal scroll bar appears,
allowing ‘hidden’ bars to be viewed. Similarly, the faceplates reduce in height to a minimum readable
height. If there are more point faceplates than can be accommodated within the height of the screen, a
vertical scroll bar appears, allowing hidden faceplates to be displayed as required.
User Guide
Page 44
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4.4 VERTICAL BARGRAPH (Cont.)
Group name
Logged out
Channel 1
Channel 2
700.87˚C
Channel 3
487.39˚C
Channel 4
235.68˚C
Channel 5
378.99˚C
11:48:56
06/04/05
0.49V
800.00
800.00
400.00
400.00
1.00
400.00
400.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Figure 3.4.4a Vertical bargraph display (1 to 6 channels)
Group name
Logged out
80? 80? 40? 40?
1.0
1.0 80? 80? 40? 40?
1.0
1.0 500 500 500 500 500 500 100 100 100 100 100 100
Channel
1
11:49:37
06/04/05
700.87 C
Channel 2
487.39 C
Channel 3
235.68 C
Channel 4
378.99 C
Channel 5
0.49�
Channel 6
0.85�
Channel 7
689.43 C
Channel 8
483.72 C
Channel 9
255.81 C
Channel 10
375.01 C
Channel 11
0.53V
Channel 12
0.79�
Channel 13
235�
40? 40?
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 40? 40?
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0Channel
14
235�
Figure 3.4.4b Vertical bargraph display (more than 6 channels)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 45
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4 DISPLAY MODES (Cont.)
3.4.5 Horizontal bargraph
Entered from Vertical bargraph by means of the down arrow key, or selected using the Root Menu ‘Goto
View’ key, this display mode shows the Process Variable (PV) values as horizontal bars with digital values
and alarm data displayed, as shown in figures 3.4.5a and 3.4.5b.
Notes:
1. For large frame recorders, single column format is used when there are up to 12 channels in the
display group; double column for more than 12 channels. For small frame recorders, only the
single column mode is employed, with a scroll bar when necessary.
2. For large frame recorders, up to 26 points can be displayed simultaneously; for small frame
recorders the maximum is 5 points. In either case, if more points are enabled than can be
displayed within the height of the screen, a vertical scroll bar appears allowing currently hidden
channels to be accessed.
Trend history mode is not available from this display mode.
To call numeric display mode, use the down arrow key. Alternatively, any one of the enabled display
modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
User Guide
Page 46
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4.5 HORIZONTAL BARGRAPH (Cont.)
Logged out
Channel 1
Group name
11:58:08
06/04/05
700.87˚C
800.00
400.00
Channel 2
487.39˚C
800.00
400.00
Channel 3
235.68˚C
400.00
0.00
Channel 4
378.99˚C
400.00
0.00
Channel 5
0.49V
1.00
0.00
Figure 3.4.5a Horizontal bargraph display (single column example)
Logged out
Group name
Channel 1
Channel 2
400.00
0.00
Channel 4
0.49V
0.00
Channel 10
0.53V
0.00
235V
235V
0
Channel 19
316A
64%
26%
0
800.00
700.87˚C
0.79V
700.87˚C
1.00 0.00
Channel 14
Channel 16
Channel 18
500 0
Channel 20
Channel 22
56%
Channel 24
100 0
400.00
1.00
235V
700.87˚C
320A
700.87˚C
500
500
332A
700.87˚C
54%
700.87˚C
500
100
47%
700.87˚C
100 0
0
Channel 23
1.00
100 0
0
Channel 21
Channel 12
400.00
700.87˚C
500 0
0
Channel 17
400.00 0.00
500 0
0
Channel 15
0.85V
700.87˚C
800.00 400.00
400.00
Channel 13
Channel 6
Channel 8
Channel 9
0.00
400.00 0.00
700.87˚C
1.00 0.00
Channel 7
Channel 11
800.00
800.00 400.00
Channel 3
Channel 5
700.87˚C
12:00:09
06/04/05
100
81%
700.87˚C
100
Figure 3.4.5b Horizontal bargraph display (dual column example)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 47
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4 DISPLAY MODES (Cont.)
3.4.6 Numeric
Entered from Horizontal bargraph mode by means of the down arrow key, or selected using the Root
Menu ‘Goto View’ key, this display mode shows the Process Variable (PV) values as digital values. The
format (which is automatically selected) is based on the number of channels in the display group. Figures
3.4.6a, 3.4.6b and 3.4.6c, show typical (large frame) examples of the one, two and three column versions
of this display mode respectively. Within each version, the process variable display areas expand or contract to fill the screen.
Trend history mode is not available from this display mode.
A further operation of the down arrow key returns to Vertical Trend Display mode described in section
3.4.1 above, or if user screens are fitted and enabled, to the first user screen (section 7). Alternatively, any
one of the enabled display modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
Logged out
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Group name
11:54:50
06/04/05
700.87
487.39
235.68
378.99
0.49
Figure 3.4.6a Numeric display mode (1 to 5 channels example)
Note: Figures 3.4.6a, b and c apply to the large frame instrument. For the small frame instrument,
the single column display (figure 3.4.6a) is used for groups with up to four points enabled, and the
two column display (figure 3.4.6b) is used, with scroll bar if necessary, for groups with more than
four points. The small frame recorder does not employ a three-column mode (figure 3.4.6c).
User Guide
Page 48
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4.6 NUMERIC DISPLAY MODES (Cont.)
Logged out
Channel 1
Group name
Channel 2
700.87
Channel 3
12:02:27
06/04/05
487.39
Channel 4
235.68
Channel 5
378.99
Channel 6
0.49
0.85
V
Figure 3.4.6b Numeric display mode example (6 channels)
Logged out
Channel 1
Group name
Channel 2
700.87
Channel 4
Channel 3
487.39
Channel 5
378.99
Channel 7
Channel 6
Channel 8
Channel 10
483.72
375.01
0.53 V
235 V
0.79 V
Channel 15
235 V
Channel 17
320 A
255.81
Channel 12
Channel 14
Channel 16
0.85 V
Channel 9
Channel 11
Channel 13
235.68
0.49 V
689.43
12:04:13
06/04/05
235 V
Channel 18
316 A
331 A
Channel 19
64 %
Figure 3.4.6c Numeric display mode example (19 channels)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 49
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.5 OPERATOR NOTES
Note: Operator notes should not be confused with similar messages, (described in section 4.3.8),
which appear as a result of job action.
It is possible for the user to enter a note, of up to 120 characters, at any time, from any display page (not
from configuration pages). Each note is associated with the current display group and becomes a part of
that group’s history. The notes appear on vertical and horizontal trend displays only, although they can
be entered in any display mode.
The note appears on the chart and in the Message Log, preceded by the date, time and current full user
name, as shown in the first example below. If ‘Audit Trail’ is enabled, the note contains audit trail information, as shown in the second example below. See section 4.4.2 for details of the Auditor options.
06/04/06 13:51:11 Frederick Bloggs, New Spray nozzles fitted to Line A, Tube 1.
Date and time
Full user name
Message
06/04/06 13:51:11 Note, Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,New Spray nozzles fitted to Line A, Tube 1.
Audit trail information (if enabled)
Date and time
Message
To enter a message:
1. Press the Option key, then the ‘Note’ key
2. If necessary enter Signature and Authorization passwords (Auditor 21CFR11 option only - see section
4.4.2).
3. Touch the note area of the resulting pop-up display (see note below).
4. Enter the required text of up to 120 characters (spaces are also counted as characters). Press Ok
when finished.
5. View the note and
a.
press the Ok button to enter the note OR
b.
re-touch the text area to edit the note OR
c.
press the Cancel key to quit note entry.
Option Menu
Option
Key
Batch
Note
Note
Faceplates On/Off
Channel Cycling Off
Operator Notes list.
Appears if note area is touched continEnter
History(approx).
uously for
2 seconds
List entries are made in Instrument
Configuration (section 4.3.1)
Operator Note
00:0A:8D:00:20:A0
AM Shift started
AM Shift finished
PM Shift started
PM Shift finished
Figure 3.5 Access to Note entry page
Note: Touching the note area continuously for two seconds or more, causes a list of pre-defined
messages to appear. Touching one of these messages selects it as the operator note, which can
then be edited in the normal way (if required) before the OK key is operated. There are a maximum of 13 pre-defined messages, 12 of which are user editable in the Configuration/instrument
menu (section 4.3.1), the 13th being the non-editable MAC address of the recorder.
User Guide
Page 50
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER
As described in the ‘Access to Configuration’ (section 3.3.1) above, the setting-up of the recorder is divided into the following areas:
Archive
Section 4.1 - Allows manual archiving of data to a memory device or to a remote host (FTP
transfer).
Save/restore Section 4.2 - Allows new configurations to be created and saved, and saved configurations
to be ‘restored’. Save/Restore also allows the importing and exporting of User Linearisation Tables and, if the relevant options are fitted, User Screens and Printer Drivers.
Config
Section 4.3 - This is the major channel/alarm option etc. area of configuration.
Security
Section 4.4 - Allows passwords to be entered and edited and allows the Engineer-level
password holder to enable/disable areas of configuration to Operator-level password
holders. New users can be added, with their own user names, passwords and access level
permissions.
Network
Section 4.5 - This area sets up the IP address/host names etc. used in FTP transfer, Bridge
and SNTP applications.
System
Section 4.6 - Allows
a) Time and date to be set (Clock).
b) Language, date/time format, time zone, and daylight saving start and finish dates to
be set (Locale).
c) Software upgrades to be carried out (Upgrade).
d) Input channels to be adjusted for errors in transducer inputs (Input Adjust).
e) Output channels (if fitted) to be adjusted (Output Adjust - see section 9.4).
f) A Master Comms Diagnostics page to be displayed (if Master Comms option fitted
and enabled).
g) A Network diagnostics page to be displayed (Ethernet diagnostics).
h) Configuration items (e.g. input channels) to be copied, to speed up configuration
(Copy).
i) Search criteria to be entered to allow the user to locate trigger sources for a specific
job (Job search).
j) The appearance of the display screens to be customised (Customise).
k) Details of the hardware and software associated with the recorder to be displayed
(About).
Note: In all the following descriptions, if a change is made to a menu item, then the item text
changes to red, until it is ‘applied’
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 51
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.1 ARCHIVE
Notes:
1. The archiving functions described below can also be initiated by job action - see section 4.7.15.
2. Archiving is carried out on a group by group basis, with a message being sent to each group
when its archive is finished. When all the groups have been archived, a pop-up appears to
inform the user that archiving is complete. Because of the sequential nature of this process, the
time given in this pop-up is different from the times which appear in the messages generated
for the individual groups.
3. For floppy disk drives (connected via a USB port), it is not recommended that archiving be enabled for more than one group (see ‘Group’ configuration - section 4.3.2)
4.1.1 Local Archive
Caution
Removal of the memory device whilst archiving is in progress causes irreparable damage to the
filing structure on the device, rendering it unusable. For this reason, archiving should be suspended before the device is removed. It is strongly recommended that the ‘Remove Media’ facility
described in section 3.1.4 (Summary menu) be used to ensure that it is safe to remove the memory
device. For recorders fitted with a lockable flap, see also section 2.4.
Archive
Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Local
Last Archive 13/09/2005 11:02:42
Remote
Media mediacard
Section 4.1.2
Select Media card or USB port
Bring Archive Up To Date
Archive Last Hour
Archive Last Day
Archive Last 7 Days
Archive Last 31 Days
Archive All
Suspend Archiving
Cancel Archive
Archive Transfer Inactive
Media Full 08/09/2006 00:34:57
Media Size 31954944
Bytes
Free Space 28786688
Bytes
Figure 4.1.1 Local archive configuration
Local archive allows the user to initiate data transfer to the device defined in the ‘Media’ picklist for all
groups with ‘Archive to Media’ enabled (Group configuration - section 4.3.2). Archiving is initiated by
touching the relevant archive period key (e.g. Last Day’). The memory device can be selected as ‘mediacard’ (the integral Compact Flash or SD card), or a USB port can be selected if, for example, a memory
stick is to be the destination device. USBfront is located behind the flap below the screen. If the option
is fitted, USB 1 and USB 2 ports are located at the recorder rear panel.
Archiving starts as soon as the selection is made, and cannot be stopped until completed, unless the
Cancel Archive key is operated, in which case the archive will be stopped after a confirmatory message
has been responded to. The Cancel key is active only if ‘Archiving Control’ is enabled in Security/Access
(section 4.4) for the current login.
User Guide
Page 52
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.1.1 LOCAL ARCHIVE (Cont.)
BRING ARCHIVE UP TO DATE
This causes the recorder to archive all history files created since the last manual or automatic (section
4.3.5) archive.
ARCHIVE ALL
This causes the recorder to archive all its history files.
If the memory device becomes full before archiving is complete, archiving pauses and a pop-up request
appears, asking for a replacement. If this request is not responded to within 10 minutes of its appearance, archiving is aborted.
Unattended archiving can be paused by the user (e.g. to change media without losing data) by operating
the ‘Suspend Archiving’ / ‘Resume Archiving’ button. Any archiving in progress is allowed to complete
before the ‘Suspend Archiving’ request takes effect. Transfer activity is indicated in the ‘Archive transfer’
window.
Below the selection buttons are a number of status windows relating to the selected memory device.
‘Media Full’ is an estimate, based on the current configuration, of when the memory device will become
full. The meanings of the ‘Media Size’ and ‘Free Space’ values are self evident.
If automatic archiving is active (section 4.3.5), then automatic and manual archives will operate on a first
come-first served basis. Some files will be saved twice in such a circumstance, the later archive’s files
overwriting any earlier archive’s files which have the same name.
ARCHIVING WITH THE LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION
For recorders fitted with the lockable flap (section 2.4) it should be noted that when the flap is opened,
archiving is automatically suspended. It is therefore necessary to press on the ‘Resume Archiving’ key
before any attempt is made to carry out a demand archive.
Before removing the memory device, archiving should be suspended again, using the ‘Suspend Archive’
key. This ensures that the memory device can be safely removed.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 53
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.1.2 Remote archiving (FTP transfer)
This allows archiving of recorder files, for all groups with ‘Archive via FTP’ enabled, to a remote computer,
connected (using the RJ45 telephone type connector at the rear of the recorder) either directly, or via a
network . ‘Archive via FTP’ is enabled/disabled as part of Group configuration - section 4.3.2.
In order to carry out a successful transfer, details of the remote host must be entered in the Archive section of the ‘Config’ menu (section 4.3.5).
Note: An FTP server must be running on the remote host.
Figure 4.1.2 shows the menu for remote archiving. The Archive last hour/day etc. keys allow the user to
determine which files are to be archived. Selection of ‘Bring Archive Up To Date’ causes the recorder to
select whichever of the Last Hour/Last Day etc. categories is appropriate in order to bring the archive up
to date. The ‘Last Archive’ window shows the time and date of the previous archive. The Archive Transfer
window shows archive status as ‘Active’ or ‘Inactive’.
Archive
Local
Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Last Archive 08/09/2005 12:00:00
Remote
Bring Archive Up To Date
Section 4.1.1
Archive Last Hour
Archive Last Day
Archive Last 7 Days
Archive Last 31 days
Archive All
Cancel Archive
Archive Transfer Inactive
Figure 4.1.2 Remote archive strategy configuration
Additionally, a user on a remote PC has full viewing capabilities, can extract recorder files at any time, and
can access those items of recorder configuration that are associated with the user’s login. For successful
connection, ‘Connect from Remote’ must be enabled and the ‘Remote user name’ and ‘Remote password’ must be defined in one of the accounts (all in the Security access menu (section 4.4.1)).
Notes:
1. In order to view history files when accessing the instrument remotely, the recorder’s address,
the ‘Remote user name’ and the ‘Remote password’ must be supplied to an FTP client such as
PC Review or Microsoft® Internet Explorer.
2.When accessing files using Microsoft® Internet Explorer, the address (URL) field can be in one
of two forms:
a ftp://<instrument IP address>. This allows the user to log in as the anonymous user (if the
instrument has any account with ‘Remote user name’ set to ‘Anonymous’ and a blank password).
b ftp://<user name>:<password>@<instrument IP address> to log in as a specific user.
3. For IE5 users only: Microsoft® Internet Explorer displays, by default, history files only. To exit
the history folder, either uncheck the Tools/Internet Options/Advanced/Browsing/”Enable
folder view for FTP sites” option, or check the Tools/Internet Options/Advanced/Browsing/”Use
Web based FTP” option.
User Guide
Page 54
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.2 SAVE / RESTORE
As shown in figure 4.2a, touching the ‘Save/Restore’ key calls the picklist: Save, Restore, New, Text,
Import/Export Screen, Import/Export User Linearisation, Import Printer Driver. Import/Export Screen
choices appear only if the User screens option is fitted.
Archive
Save as 6100A
File Name config
Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Configuration Data
Security Data
Save
Restore
Save
Network Data
New
Screen Data
Text
File Name config
Restore
Import Screen
Export Screen
Save As Text
Import User Linearisation
File Name
Export User Linearisation
See 'Screen Builder'
description (section 7).
Import Printer Driver
See 'ASCII Printer Output option' description
(section 12)
User Linearisation 1) UserLin1
File Name userlin
Configuration Data
Security Data
Network Data
Screen Data
New/Default
Import Export
Figure 4.2a Save/Restore menu
Where a file name is required, then, if the displayed file name is suitable, operation of the ‘Save’, ‘Restore’, ‘Import’ or ‘Export’ key will initiate the action. If, instead, a file name has to be entered, this is
carried out as follows:
Touching the filename window causes a pop-up menu to appear, giving a list of ‘Volumes’ in the Flash
memory or on the memory device (if inserted). Figure 4.2b shows an imaginary Volume contents list,
displayed by touching the name ‘user’, then operating the down arrow or ‘open folder’ key. (See section
5, below for more details). Once the correct folder is open, either select an existing file, or enter a new
filename, by touching the FileName window and entering the name using the pop-up keyboard(s) as described in section 3.3.1 above. Operation of the Save/Restore key initiates the action.
\user\
Hide
Name
cal\
config\
Filter1a
Type
Folder
Folder
Config
Date
03/04/05 12:35:08
01/04/05 10:27:13
05/03/05 10:22:23
user\
Folder
11/02/05 14:01:08
06/04/05 15:41:30
lib\
sdb\
Folder
Folder
05/03/05 10:23:14
Bytes
4445
Save
FileName Filter1b
Cancel
Figure 4.2b Typical volume contents page
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 55
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.2.1 Save
Touching this item allows the current configuration to be saved in the recorder’s memory. Files saved in
this way are not in a ‘readable’ format and are used only for archive /security purposes or for transfer to
another, similar, recorder.
SAVE AS
This selection box allows a configuration to be saved, if required, in a format suitable for importing into
previous recorder models. The default is always the current instrument.
4.2.2 Restore
Touching this item allows the user to select or type-in a previously saved configuration file name, which
will then be used as the current configuration. Touching the ‘Restore’ key completes the operation.
Check boxes allow one or more of Configuration Data, Security data (note 3), Network data and Screen
data to be chosen for the restore function.
Notes:
1 Screen data restores faceplate status for vertical trend and vertical bargraph modes, and user
screen information (if the option is fitted).
2. If archiving is in progress when a ‘Restore’ is requested, the Restore operation will be delayed
until the archive is complete (maybe several minutes). If required, the ‘Cancel Archive’ key (section 4.1 above) can be used to speed up the Restore process, at the cost of losing the archive
data.
3. If ‘Centralised Security’ is active (part of Security/Management configuration - section 4.4.2)
‘Security Data’ is not selectable (either for ‘Restore’ or for ‘New’ (below)).
4. If the file to be restored has been created using ‘C-Edit’ software, each of the characters used
in the file name must lie within the unicode range 0 to 255, or the file name might not be displayed correctly.
4.2.3 New
Touching this item causes the factory entered default configuration to be loaded for use, or for editing.
Operation of the New/Default key completes the operation. Tick boxes allow one or more of Configuration Data, Security data (note 3 above) and Network data to be chosen for the restore default function;
only those items which are ticked are replaced by default values.
For recorders with the User Screens option (section 7), a further tick box is displayed - ‘Screen Data’
4.2.4 Text
This is identical to the ‘Save’ function described above, but the configuration is saved in ASCII format, and
can be transferred to a computer and read, printed etc. as required. It is not possible, using this means,
to modify the configuration and then re-load it.
4.2.5 Import screen
This field appears only if the User Screens option (section 7) is fitted, and allows a previously exported
User Screen file to be imported.
4.2.6 Export screen
This field appears only if the User Screens option (section 7) is fitted, and allows a User Screen to be exported to a removable memory device or to the internal Flash memory. The exported screen can subsequently be imported either into this recorder or into a different recorder.
User Guide
Page 56
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.2.7 Import User Linearisation
The Import Linearisation feature allows linearisation tables to be imported either from the Compact
Flash/SD card, USB device or if Bridge ‘Full’ software is fitted, directly from the host PC.
Touching the User Linearisation field allows the user to select which of ‘UserLin1’ to ‘UserLin4’ is to contain the imported file.
Touching the File Name field, calls a popup menu similar to that shown in figure 4.2b. This allows the user
to select the table to be imported.
The file must be comma separated ASCII as follows:
n,
X1,Y1
X2.Y2
X3,Y3
.
.
Xn,Yn
where ‘n’ is the total number of XY pairs in the table, and or each pair, X is the input value, and Y is the
linearised value corresponding to X. See section 4.3.9 for full details.
Note: Imported linearisation tables will not become effective until after the next configuration
‘Apply’ operation.
4.2.8 Export User Linearisation
Similar to ‘Import user Linearisation’, above, the Export Linearisation feature allows linearisation tables
created in the recorder to be exported either via the Compact Flash/SD card or if Bridge ‘Full’ software is
fitted, directly to the host PC. See section 4.3.9 for full details.
4.2.9 Import printer driver
Similar to ‘Import user Linearisation’, above, this allows driver (.uhi) files for new printer types to be imported either via the Compact Flash/SD card, or USB memory stick, or if the Bridge ‘Full’ option is fitted,
directly from the host PC. See section 12 for further details.
Note: Imported printer drivers do not become effective until after the next configuration ‘Apply’
operation.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 57
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3 CONFIG KEY
Touching this key calls the top level configuration pick list:
Instrument,
Groups,
Channels,
Views,
Archive,
Events,
Event Buttons,
Messages,
User Linearisations,
Batch,
Maths,
Totalisers,
Counters,
Timers,
Connections,
Master Comms,
Output Channels,
Demand Writes,
Emails,
Reports,
EtherNet/IP Server
Options
Notes:
1. Figure 4.3b gives an overview of the configuration menus.
2. If an option is not fitted, it does not appear in the above list.
When making changes to the configuration the name of each changed parameter is displayed in red
(instead of the normal black) until the ‘Apply/Discard’ key has been operated. For example, in channel
configuration, if a thermocouple were to be changed from Type J to Type K, ‘Lin Type’ would appear in
red, until the Apply key is operated.
Should an attempt be made to leave configuration with unsaved changes, a warning message appears,
allowing the user to apply the changes, to discard the changes or to return to configuration (Cancel).
Config
Data Has Been Modified
Apply
User Guide
Page 58
Discard
Cancel
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Save/Restore
Source 2 Point Alarm
On Math 12
Event Number 1) Event 1
Source 1 Alarm on Group
On Group 1) Group 1
Discard
Apply
Retype password * * * * *
Secondary password * * * * *
Days
Mb
Discard
Secondary remote host 0.0.0.0
Secondary login name a n o n y m o u s
Retype password * * * * *
Primary password * * * * *
Primary remote host 0.0.0.0
Primary login name a n o n y m o u s
Security
Remote
Remote path / r e c o r d e r / G r o u p 1
Ftp File format Binary
Show Remote settings
Archive to Remote None
Flash Size 9 9 . 2 5
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1
Duration 1 0 8 . 0 6
Compression Normal
Apply
Not Source 2
Source 2 Sense
Descriptor Event 1
Job Number 1
Category No Action
Operator And
Source 1 Sense Source 1
Alarm 2
Config
Events �
(Section 4.3.6)
See sheets 2 to 4
for further items
Events
Archive
Views
Channels
Groups
Instrument
Archive
0
Circular Trend
1) Group 1
Group
Discard
Discard
= Disabled
s
Days
25.96
100
Discard
No Action
1
Off
1
26
4
Numeric
%
%
0
TurbineTempA
Off
None
None
None
0
Apply
PV Format
Max Decimal Digits
Colour
Alarm Number
Enable
Job Number
Category
Cold Junction Type
Descriptor
A/B Switching
Spanned
Zone Low
Zone High
Offset
Scale Type
Filter
Break Response
V
C
C
C
100
07/04/05 08:46:45
0
Type K
Thermocouple
5.0002
Discard
List of all available points
(input channels, maths channels, totalisers etc.).
1) TurbineTempA
Apply
Etc.
TurbineTempA
TurbineTempB
Disable
Enable
Selection 1-3,7,9,11-20
Channel
mm/hr
1
s
mm/hr
1,200
from Channel 3
Grid Type From Point
Channel Number
Value
Input Type
Lin Type
Range Low
Range High
Range Units
Scaled
Channels �
(Section 4.3.3)
Adaptive
Group 1
mm/hr
1) Group 1
Trend Speed 1,200
Trend Interval 1
Circular Settings
Group Number
Trend Units
Descriptor
Trend Type
A/B Switching
Recording Enable
Recording Speed
Discard
Recording Interval
Trend History Duration
Groups �Archive to Media Enable
(Section 4.3.2) Archive via FTP Enable
Alarm Message
Ack Message
Point Type
Days
Mb
Days
Mb
s
Figure 4.3b Configuration menu overview sheet 1
Apply
Removable Media Capacity 3 3 . 1 8
Media Full event limit 100 %
Media Size 30.4746094
Archive to Media None
Media file format Binary
On Media Full Overwrite
Flash Size 9 9 . 2 5
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1
Duration 2 6 . 9 5
Show Local settings
Media mediacard
Compression Normal
Local
Apply
Minutes
1) Group 1
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric Page
User Screen 1
User Screen 2
User Screen 3
User Screen 4
User Screen 5
Bridge User Screens 0
Home Time-out
Home Group
Scope
Group
Display Enable
Home Page
Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend
Circular Trend
0
0
12
0
0
Instrument
100 %
%
50
30 Minutes
1
Apply
Instrument Name
Normal Display
Saver Display
Save After
Modbus Address
Modbus Security Disabled
Comms Channel Timeout
Preset Hour
Preset Minute
Disable Warning Dialogs
Show Operator Notes List
Views �
(Section 4.3.4)
Instrument
(Section 4.3.1)
System
Archive
(Section 4.3.5)
Network
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3 CONFIG KEY (Cont.)
User Guide
Page 59
�������
User Guide
Page 60
��������
�������
������
��������
�
������
����������
�����
�
�
�����������������
�����������������
�������
������������� �
����������� �
���������� �����������
�������������
��������� �
���������� �
�������� �
��������� ���
���������� ����
��������� �������
������������������ �
������ �
������������ �
������ ���
���������� �
�������� ���������
�
�����������������
��������
������
���������
�����
�����������������
��������������
�������������������
��������������
��������������
�
���������
�
��������������������
�
������
�
������
�
�����������
�
������
����������������
������
�����
��������
�����������
������������
�����
������
������������
����� �������
�������
��������
�������
��������
�����������
�
�
�
���
Figure 4.3b Configuration menu overview sheet 2
����� �������
���������
�
���
�
��
�
�������
����
����
����
��
����
�������
�
����
����
��
��
�����
���������
������
���������
������������ �������
����� �����
���������������
��������������
�����
�� �
�� �
�� �
�� �
���������������� �
������ �������
���������� ��������
������������������ �����������
��������������������
���������������
��������
���������
����������������
��������������������
�����������
�����
����������
�������������
���������
����������
��������
���������
����������
���������
������������������
������
������������
������
����������
��������
��������������
���������������
�������������
����������
����
����
������������
���������������
���������������������
������������������������
������������
����� ����������
����� �����
����� �������
�����
���������������
�����������
���������������
�����������
��������������������
�����
����������������
���������������
�������������������
������������ �
����������� �
�������
������� ��������������
������� ��������������
������� �����������
������������ �
������� ���������
������������ �
������� �������������
������������� �����������
���������� ����������
������
���������������������
���������������
��������������
����������������
����������������
����������
����������������
����������
����������������
����������������
���������������� �����������������
������� ���������������������������������������
�������������� ���������������
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3 CONFIG KEY (Cont.)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Profile
Timeout
Retry
Max Block Size
Share Socket
Login Required
Username
Password
Port Serial 1
Apply
Discard
Messages To Print
System
Alarms
Power Up
General
Batches
Logins
Signings
Audit Trail
Print Messages From 1) Group 1
Printer Test
Printer Status Not Responding
Printer Name Star TSP600(1)
Printer Type Star TSP600
Parity Even
Stop Bits 1
Baud Rate 9600
Connection EIA232
Protocol ASCII Printer
Reset Error Count
Archive
Discard
ms
Port Serial 1
Apply
ms
Discard
Data Bits 8
Timeout 250
First Start Char 0
Second Start Char 0
First End Char 13
Second End Char 10
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Baud Rate 19200
Connection EIA232
Protocol ASCII (input)
Reset Error Count
Link Error Count 0
ASCII Input
0
Preset now
Units
OFF
1) Counter 1
Discard
%
%
Units
Units
Units
Units
Apply
Seconds
Seconds
These fields appear
only if 'Self start' is
enabled.
These buttons appear
only after 'Apply' has
been operated
Discard
Descriptor Timer 1
Self start
Date Any
Month Any
Hour Midnight
Minute Any
Second Any
Duration 60
Repeat after 0
Job Number 1
Category No Action
Start now
Reset now
Timer number 1) Timer 1
Enable
Remaining 00:00:00
Repeat in 00:00:00
Timers
Section 4.3.14
Apply
Descriptor Counter 1
A/B Switching
Scale Low 0
Scale High 1
Zone Low 0
Zone High 100
Scale Type None
Colour 0
Alarm Number 1
Enable Off
Job Number 1
Category No Action
Counter number
Enable
Value
Counters (option)
Section 4.3.13
Units
Preset
Figure 4.3b Configuration menu overview sheet 3
Apply
Timeout 1000
Enable error code B
Enable Talk Through
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Baud Rate 19200
Connection EIA232
Protocol Modbus Master
Reset Error Count
Port Serial 1
Modbus Master
Discard
Link Error Count 0
Apply
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Baud Rate 19200
Connection EIA232
Protocol Modbus Slave
Reset Error Count
Port Serial 1
Link Error Count 0
Modbus Slave
Master Comms
Connections
Timers
Counters
Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Master Comms (option)
Section 4.3.16
ASCII Printer
Detect All Slaves
Online
Discard
Username
********
Third Party
250
ms
3
124
Register
Link Error Count 0
Apply
Ethernet
149.121.30.0
1
Remote_1
1) Remote_1
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Connections (option)
Section 4.3.15
0.125
1
2
Detect This Slave
High Priority interval
Medium priority interval
Low priority interval
Store diagnostics
Slave
Enable
Online
Descriptor
Network
IP Address
Modbus address
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3 CONFIG KEY (Cont.)
User Guide
Page 61
User Guide
Page 62
Channel.4.pv
Channel.5.pv
Ch
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Default Table
���������� ���������
Discard
Sender
Discard
(currently 0)
(currently 0)
Autoconfigure
���������������������� �
������������������ ��
����������������� ��
Apply
Discard
3) {1},{2},{3},{4}
Figure 4.3b Configuration menu overview sheet 4
Message
Include Message
Text
Cold store alarm
Subject
Cold store temp. sensor 1 too hot. Instrument name,
Instrument number, chan 1Alarm1
SMTP (Email)
Email1
1) Email1
etc.
Protocol
Descriptor
Rcpt10
(currently 1)
Select List Number
e-mail address of 2nd Recipient on this list
List1
e-mail address of 1st Recipient on this list
Email Number
��� ��������
Seconds
1) List1
60
Rcpt2
Rcpt3
Output channels
(Section 4.3.17)
e-mail address to which e-mail failure messages to be sent
IP Address of recorder
25
mail server name
Discard
System
Rcpt1
Descriptor
Recipient List
Retry Time
Errors To
������� ���������
����������������� ��
Apply
Mail Server
Port Number
Apply
Style Normal
Network
Email (Section 4.3.19)
Reports (Section 4.3.20)
Options
EtherNet/IP Server
Reports
Emails
Demand Writes
Field 1 Type Date & Time
����������� ��������
������������ ��
Security
Report 1) Report 1
Descriptor Report 1
Number of Fields 1
Rcpt4
Options
(Section 4.3.22)
Show Errors
EtherNet/IP
(Section 4.3.21)
Config
Output channels
See sheets 1 to 3 for
previous Config items
Save/Restore
���������� ��������
�������������������� ���
������������ �����
�������������� �����
������� ��������
���������������� ���������
����� ��������
������ ���
�������� ��
���������� ���
����� ���
���������������� ���
��������������� ���
�������������������� ����������
Apply
Wizard
Channel.3.pv
Input 200
Channel.2.pv
Input 3
Server - - > Client
Input 2
Inputs
Channel.1.pv
I/O Table
Input 1
Online
eiptable
Export Table
Status
eiptable
Import Table
Archive
Parameter Alarm setpoint 2
Apply
Send On Power Up
Disable Retries
On Error Write Default
Allow Constant Edits
Discard
Source Channel 1
Default 0
Point Type Channel
Point Number 1
Descriptor Write 1
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder
Demand Write
Status OK
Demand Type Master Comms
Enable
Write number 1) Write 1
Demand Writes
(Section 4.3.18)
Discard
Comms Channel
High/Low
0
100
Channel
1
Medium Priority
Output 1
1) Channel 4
0
Master Comms
1) Furn Recorder 2
1) Output 1
Apply
Output Channel Number
Enable
Output Type
Slave
Parameter
Scaling
Scale Low
Scale High
Point Type
Point Number
Process Value
Descriptor
Source
Default
On Error Write Default
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3 CONFIG KEY (Cont.)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.1 Instrument configuration
Instrument Name
Normal Display
Saver Display
Save After
Modbus Address
Modbus Security Disabled
Comms Channel Timeout
Preset Hour
Preset Minute
Disable Warning Dialogs
Show Operator Notes List
Instrument
100 %
%
50
3 0 Minutes
1
s
0
02
1
0
0
= Disabled
MAC Address 00:0A:8D:00:20:A0
Operator Note 1 AM Shift started
Operator Note 12
Apply
These fields appear
only if 'Show Operator
Notes List' is enabled
Discard
Figure 4.3.1 Instrument Configuration menu
INSTRUMENT NAME
Allows the entry of an alphanumeric name for the recorder, up to 20 characters long. See section 3.3.1
for text entry techniques.
NORMAL/SAVER DISPLAY
Allows normal and ‘saver’ display brightnesses to be defined. Defaults are Normal = 100%; Saver = 50%
SAVE AFTER
The number of minutes (between 1 and 99 inclusive), which are to elapse after a screen operation, before
the screen brightness changes from ‘normal’ to ‘saver’. Default is 30 minutes.
MODBUS ADDRESS
Allows a Modbus address between 1 and 247 to be set up, for use when the instrument is acting as a
Modbus slave.
MODBUS SECURITY DISABLED
When using MODBUS, it is possible, by ‘checking’ this field to allow a host computer to access the recorder without its first having to supply a valid User name and Password. This box must be checked if this unit
is acting as a Modbus slave in order for the unit to be detected. Once communications have been established, Modbus security can be enabled, providing that the Slave’s Remote user name and password
have been entered at the Master. See also section 8.2.4.
COMMS CHANNEL TIMEOUT
Allows a number of seconds (between 1 and 999) to be entered. If none of the channels set to ‘Comms’ is
communicated with, within this period, an event source (Comms channel timeout) is set, and remains set
until the next communication. An entry of 0 disables the time out.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 63
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.1 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
PRESET HOUR
Enter an hours number between 0 and 23 for use with Clock Job - Preset clock.
PRESET MINUTE
Enter a minutes number between 0 and 59 for use with Clock Job - Preset clock.
Note: See section 4.7 for a description of recorder jobs, and section 4.5.1 for further details of
time synchronisation.
DISABLE WARNING DIALOGS
Checking this box prevents instrument alarm messages from appearing on the screen.
SHOW OPERATOR NOTES LIST
Enabling this field produces a list of 13 entries which can be used in Operator Notes. The first entry is the
MAC address of the recorder and is not editable. The remaining 12 entries (of up to 60 characters each)
are freely editable.
Any one of these predefined notes can be selected (as described in section 3.5) by touching the Operator Note area continuously for two seconds, then touching the required note from the picklist which appears. Once selected the predefined note can be edited before use, like a normal Operator Note. Such
editing does not affect the original note entered here in Instrument Configuration.
User Guide
Page 64
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.2 Group configuration
Note: Groups 1 to 6 is a standard recorder feature. The supply of groups seven to twelve is an
optional extra.
Group configuration allows the user to define the following:
a
b
c
d
e
f
Group trend speed/interval
Group recording speed/interval
Group descriptor
Group content
Circular Trend speed and chart-full operation
Chart grid divisions
The production of alarm messages and the saving of group data to Flash memory, to removable memory
device and/or to remote computer (FTP transfer) can also be enabled / disabled from this menu.
Group Number
Trend Units
Descriptor
Trend Type
A/B Switching
Trend Speed
Trend Interval
Circular Settings
Circular Speed
Circular Chart Full
Start At
1) Group 1
mm/hr
Group 1
Select Group
Select
mm/hr or in/hr
Select
Normal or Adaptive
Adaptive
1,200
mm/hr
1
s
1 week
Not editable if 'Circular
settings' enabled
Appear only if 'Circular Settings' enabled.
New Chart
Monday
Grid Type From Point
Select None, Linear, Log
or 'From Point'
from Channel 3
Recording Enable
Recording Speed 1,200
Recording Interval 1
Trend History Duration 314.36
Archive to Media Enable
Archive via FTP Enable
Alarm Message
Ack Message
Days
Grid Divisions - Minor 1
Grid Type Log
mm/hr
s
Grid Type Linear
Grid Divisions - Major 5
Editable only if
'Recording Enable'
is enabled.
Grid Decades 5
= Enabled
Point Type Totaliser
Selection 1-3,5,7,9
Enable
Disable
TurbineTempA
TurbineTempB
Etc.
Apply
List of all available points
(input channels, maths
channels, totalisers etc.).
Discard
Figure 4.3.2a Group configuration menu
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 65
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.2 GROUP CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
GROUP NUMBER
Allows a particular group to be selected for configuration.
TREND UNITS
Allows mm/hr or inches per hour to be selected for the ‘chart’ speed. Automatically converts the trend
speed field below.
DESCRIPTOR
Allows the group name to be edited. See section 3.3.1 for text entry techniques.
TREND TYPE
This allows the selection of Adaptive Recording for vertical and horizontal trend modes. The purpose
of adaptive recording is to ensure that rapid, short duration spikes (for example), are represented on the
‘chart’ even at low trend speeds. This allows the user to extend the total amount of history stored in the
recorder (by using slow trend speeds) without losing transient data.
The adaptive recording method works by measuring the input signal at the normal 125 msec period,
and saving the maximum and minimum values, continuously, over the period of trend update. When the
trend is updated, both maximum and minimum values are traced on the chart - i.e. two traces are produced for each channel in the group.
The faceplates and pen positions are still updated every second, as normal.
Notes:
1 During the period between updates, the maximum and minimum values are shown on the
trend as a horizontal line just beneath the pen, where the ends of the line represent the minimum and maximum values so far. This line is removed at trend update time.
2. Adaptive recording takes twice as much memory as normal recording, so to maintain the total
amount of history stored, the trend speed must be reduced to 50% of that which would be
used for non-adaptive recording.
3. In Trend History mode, both minimum and maximum values for the cursor position are shown
on the faceplate. See section 3.4 for a description of trend history.
Figure 4.3.2b shows the difference between normal and adaptive recording, at slow trend rates. Note
that rapid changes in signal, (such as those shown in the circled area of the ‘actual signal’) are largely
filtered out by Normal Tracing, but is displayed by the Adaptive Trace. Figure 4.3.2b is for illustrative
purposes only, as traces such as these could never appear on the chart together.
Max/Min
bar
Actual input signal
Normal trace
Adaptive trace
Figure 4.3.2b Adaptive recording compared with Normal tracing
User Guide
Page 66
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.2 GROUP CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
A/B SWITCHING
If enabled, this function allows alternative values for Trend speed/interval and Recording speed/interval
to be entered. ‘A’ values are used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched-to by job action, as
described in section 4.7.
TREND SPEED/TREND INTERVAL
Allows the ‘chart’ speed to be selected either as mm or in per hour, or as an interval. Entering a value in
one field automatically converts the value in the other field. A trend interval of N seconds is equivalent to
1200/N mm/hr chart speed; a chart speed of P mm/hr is equivalent to a trend interval of 1200/P seconds.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second Trend Speed /Interval value can be entered. Trend Speed/Interval
‘A’ is used during normal operation. Trend Speed/Interval ‘B’ is switched to by job action, as described
in section 4.7.
Note: Trend speed/interval are not editable fields if ‘Circular Settings’ is enabled.
CIRCULAR SETTINGS
When checked, this checkbox causes the Circular Speed/Chart Full/Start At fields, described below, to
appear. When checked, the Trend Speed and Trend Interval fields described above are disabled (i.e.
they are no longer editable).
Note: If Circular Settings is not enabled, here in Group configuration, but Circular Trend is enabled for the group in Views configuration (section 4.3.4), then, although the circular chart will appear, it is unlikely that the chart will contain any trends.
CIRCULAR SPEED
This field allows the chart speed to be selected from a pick list, as detailed in table 4.3.2, below. The
table also shows the number of major and minor chart divisions.
CIRCULAR CHART FULL
This allows ‘New Chart’ or ‘Rotate’ to be selected from a picklist. See section 3.4.3 for details. Table 4.3.2
shows the major and minor chart divisions for each chart speed.
START AT
This item, (which appears only if ‘New Chart’ has been selected in ‘Circular Chart Full’, above) allows the
user to select a start time and/or date for the new chart. The exception is for a chart speed of 1 hr/rev,
which always starts on the hour.
New Chart Start at
Chart spd. Chart divs
(1 rev per) Major Minor Start at choices
Examples/comments
1 hour
12
2
On the hour
2 hours
12
2
4 hours
12
2
4 hours/rev.; Start at 12.
6 hours
12
2
00 to 23 at
This chart will start at 1200 hrs and re-start at
8 hours
8
2
00:00 hrs
1600, 2000, 2400, 0400, 0800 hrs etc.
12 hours
12
2
16 hours
8
2
1 day
12
2
2 days/rev.; Start Monday.
2 days
12
2
Day of week at
Chart starts Mon. 00:00:00 and restarts Weds, Fri etc,
1 week
7
4
00:00:00
At each power-on, the system resets to the first week
2 weeks
7
4
Day of week at of the period, with the most recent 'Start at' day of the
4 weeks
4
7
00:00:00
week at the top of the chart.
30 days
30
0
Table 4.3.2 Circular chart speed details
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 67
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.2 GROUP CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
GRID TYPE
Grid type allows the chart grid type to be defined for the group being configured. This is not necessarily
related to channel scale (section 4.3.3), unless ‘From point’ is selected, when the grid matches the scale
of the selected point.
NONE
No chart grid is traced.
LINEAR
The chart grid is linear, with the major and minor divisions defined by the fields Grid Divisions - Major and
Minor, which appear if ‘Linear’ is selected as grid type. Figure 4.3.2c, below, defines major and minor
divisions.
LOG
The chart grid is logarithmic, with the number of decades being selected in the ‘Grid Decades’ field
which appears if ‘Log’ is selected as Grid Type. Figure 4.3.2c gives an example.
Note: For the small frame recorder, the minor divisions within each decade are shown only for
groups with ‘Number of decades’ ≤ 5.
FROM POINT
This allows the chart grid to be aligned with the scale of a particular ‘point’, selected in the ‘from’ field
which appears if ‘From Point’ is selected as ‘Grid Type’
Five major divisions
Linear scale
Two minor divisions
Nine major divisions
Linear scale
Three minor divisions
Three decades
Log scale
Figure 4.3.2c Typical chart grid definitions
RECORDING ENABLE
This tick box allows the logging of this group’s data to the flash memory to be enabled/disabled. When
disabled:
a
b
c
The recording speed/interval fields are not editable, and Trend History duration is set to zero.
Display trends are present on the chart, but are not preserved when changing ‘Views’.
It is not possible to enter trace history if ‘Recording Enable’ is not selected.
Notes
1 A blue line is drawn across the chart, when recording is re-enabled to indicate a time change in
the trace.
2 If a ‘Recording enable’ job (section 4.7.10) is set to act on a particular group, then the group will
be recorded only whilst the job is active, and only if Recording is enabled for the group.
User Guide
Page 68
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.2 GROUP CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
RECORDING SPEED/RECORDING INTERVAL
If recording is enabled, these fields are as for trend speed/interval but define the rate at which data is
saved to Flash memory. This value also affects how much trace history appears per screen in trend history mode (section 3.4). If recording is not enabled, these fields are ‘greyed’ and not editable.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second Recording Speed /Interval value can be entered. Recording Speed/
Interval ‘A’ is used during normal operation. Recording Speed/Interval ‘B’ is switched to by job action, as
described in section 4.7.
Note: With large numbers of points configured in one or more groups, the total amount of data
generated per iteration may exceed the amount that can be written to the internal FLASH memory
in the time available. Such a situation may also arise if many messages are being generated. The
recorder responds by reducing the recording speed, and a message ‘Recording failed - internal
overflow. Slowing recording interval of fastest group(s)’ appears, to draw the user’s attention to
the situation.
TREND HISTORY DURATION
Gives an estimated time to fill the group’s trend history area of the Flash memory. The calculation is
based on the archive rate, the compression ratio, the flash size and on the exact nature of the data. (Rapidly changing values use more space than static/slowly changing values.) If A/B switching is enabled the
calculation is based on Recording Speed/Interval ‘A’.
Changing the contents of one group may affect the Trend History Duration of other groups. This happens because the recorder attempts to store, as nearly as possible, the same amount of history for all
groups, regardless of how many points there are in the groups.
For ‘empty’ groups, or if Recording is not enabled for a group, the Trend History Duration is displayed as
‘0’ Days.
ARCHIVE TO MEDIA ENABLE/ARCHIVE VIA FTP ENABLE
If recording is enabled, these tick boxes allow the archiving of this group’s data to removable mass storage media and/or to a remote host (FTP) to be enabled or disabled. If recording is disabled, these fields
cannot be edited.
Note: When recording to floppy disk drives (via a USB port), it is recommended that only one
group be set up with ‘Archive to media’ enabled. This is because history files are typically 400kB
in size and this limits the number of files which can be saved to a 1.4MB floppy disk, to three. If
more than one group is set up to archive, and if ‘Overwrite’ strategy is selected, then it is likely that
all the data for one or more of the groups will be lost. No warning is given.
ALARM MESSAGE
This box allows the printing of alarm on and off messages on the ‘chart’ to be enabled or disabled as required. Alarm messages appear on the trend display and in PC Review in the form HH:MM:SS Alarm ON
n/m and HH:MM:SS Alarm OFF n/m, where ‘n’ is the relevant channel number and ‘m’ is the alarm number
(1 or 2).
ACK MESSAGE
This tick box allows the printing of alarm acknowledgement messages on the ‘chart’ to be enabled or
disabled as required. Acknowledge messages appear on the trend display and in PC Review in the form
HH:MM:SS.
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE
Alarms are acknowledged as described in section 3.1.4.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 69
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.2 GROUP CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
POINT TYPE/SELECTION
The ‘Point Type’ box, together with the ‘Selection’ box immediately below, offers a quick way of editing
the contents of a group, as follows:
1. Select the type of point (Channel, Maths, Totaliser or Counter) to be edited from the Point Type drop
down menu.
2. Enter the numbers of all the points of the selected type to be added or deleted, in the ‘Selection’
box. See notes below for further details.
3. Click on ‘Enable’ to add the selected points to the group contents, or on ‘Disable’ to remove them.
4. Repeat for other point types, as required.
Notes:
1. The status of all points not included in the selection box, remains unchanged.
2. Point numbers are entered individually, or as one or more ranges, separated by commas (if applicable). For example, an entry of ‘1-3,6,9-11’ would cause points 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 10 and 11 to be
added or removed from the group contents. Only numeric characters, commas and hyphens
(minus signs) are accepted. If any other character (including space(s)) is included in the list, the
edit will fail, with a message ‘Invalid Selection’ appearing when the ‘Enable’ or ‘Disable’ key is
operated..
3. Ranges must be complete: ‘1-’ is not acceptable.
4. Each group may contain any or all points, but for vertical and horizontal trend modes, only the
first 36 are displayed, and for circular trend mode, only the first twelve are traced..
5. If a point number is entered which is greater than the number of that point type fitted, then the
selection is ignored. For example, if totalisers 1-60 are selected for deletion, and only 12 are
enabled, then the range will be accepted, and totalisers 1 to 12 deleted from the group’s contents.
Alternatively, a group’s contents can be edited using the tick-boxes, to include the ticked items in, or to
exclude non-ticked items from, the group, as required.
User Guide
Page 70
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.3 Channel/Alarm configuration
Figure 4.3.3a below, shows a typical configuration menu for an input channel. (For maths channels see
section 4.3.11.) The actual fields that appear depend on what input type is selected, what linearisation
type is selected, and so on.
Channel Number 1) Channel 1
Select channel number
Value 6.6893
14/09/05 15:10:53
Off, T/C, mV,V, mA, RTD, Ohms,
Digital, Comms or Test
Input Type Thermocouple
Lin Type Type K
These fields vary according to
Input Type selection
Range Low 0
Select Linearisation type
(e.g.Type K)
˚C
Range High 100
˚C
Range Units ˚ C
Select: Celsius, Fahrenheit, Kelvins or Rankine
Scaled
Scale Low 0
V
V
Scale High 1
Units V
These fields appear only if
'Scaled' is selected.
V
Offset 0
Select: None, Linear or Log
(Log available only if 'Scaled' is ticked.)
Scale Type Linear
Scale Divisions - Major 1 0
These fields vary with the type of scale selected
Scale Divisions - Minor 1
Select: None,
2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128 or 256 seconds
Filter None
Break Response None
Select: None, High or Low
Cold Junction Type Internal
Select: Off, Internal, External, Remote.
Descriptor Channel 1
A/B Switching
Allows Span A high/low, Span B high/low, Zone A high/low,
Zone B high/low and Colour A/B values to be entered for use
by Trend jobs.
Spanned
Span Low 0
V
Span High 1
V
Zone Low 0
These fields appear only if
'Spanned' is selected.
%
%
Zone High 100
Pv Format Numeric
Select Numeric or Scientific
Max Decimal Digits 4
Colour 0
Alarm Number 1
Select Alarm number
Enable Unlatched
Type Absolute High
Setpoint Source Constant
Threshold 0
V
Hysteresis 0
V
Dwell 0
s
Job Number 1
These fields vary according to
Alarm Type selection
Select Job number
Category Drive Relay
Relay Board 1
These fields vary according
to the selected job category
Relay Number 1
while Active
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.3a Channel/alarm configuration menu (typical)
Notes
1. Numeric values (e.g. ‘input low’) can be up to 10 characters including decimal point
2. Refer to section 3.3.1 for numeric and text entry techniques.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 71
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Example: A type J thermocouple is used to measure a temperature range of 100 to 200 degrees Celsius.
This thermocouple output is transmitted to the recorder by a 4 to 20 mA transmitter, for display as an efficiency value between 0 and 100%. In such a case, the following values would be set up:
Input type = milliamp
Input low = 4.0
Input high = 20.0
Shunt = 250 Ohms
Lin Type = Type J
Range Low = 100
Range High = 200
Range Units = ˚C
Scaled =
Scale low = 0.0
Scale high = 100
Scale units = %
Note: The following description shows all possible fields. The recorder itself edits the list and
shows only those fields appropriate to the setup so far. For example, the ‘Shunt’ field appears only
for mA input type.
CHANNEL NUMBER
The current channel and its descriptor are displayed. Touching the window area allows another channel
to be selected for configuration. Alternatively, the right and left arrow keys at the bottom of the screen
can be used to increment and decrement, respectively, the channel number.
VALUE
Shows the current value of the channel, together with either ‘Unadjusted’ or the date and time of channel
adjustment (section 4.6.4).
INPUT TYPE
According to the options available, one of the following may be selected as input type: thermocouple,
millivolt, Volt, milliamp, RTD, Ohms, Digital (not channel 1, 7 etc.), Modbus Comms Input, Ethernet/IP
Comms Input, Test or Master Comms.
Select Modbus Comms Input if the channel is to be written-to via Modbus. Use Ethernet/IP if the channel
is to be written-to by an Ethernet/IP client. Master Comms must be selected if this channel is to be read
from another instrument.
Note: See section 4.3.16 for details of Master Comms, section 4.3.21 for details of the EtherNet/IP
option and section 4.3.15 for Modbus comms (Connections).
LIN TYPE
The following linearisation tables are available as standard:
Linear, square root, x3/2, x5/2, UserLin1, UserLin2, UserLin3, UserLin4 (see section 4.3.9 for user linearisations)
Thermocouple types B, C, D, E, G2, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U, NiMo/NiCo, Platinel, Ni/NiMo, Pt20%Rh/
Pt40%Rh
Resistance thermometer (RTD) types Cu10, Pt100, Pt100A, JPT100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni120, Cu53.
For input ranges, accuracies etc. associated with the above thermocouple/RTD tables, see Annex A.
User Guide
Page 72
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
INPUT LOW
Enter the lowest value to be applied to the input terminals (e.g. 4.00).
INPUT HIGH
Enter the highest value to be applied across the input terminals (e.g. 20.00).
SHUNT
Allows a shunt resistor value to be entered for input type = mA. Commonly used values are 100 ohms
and 250 ohms. Note that shunt resistors are connected to the input connector. The recorder cannot
detect whether a shunt is fitted, or if one is, what value it has. Therefore it is the responsibility of the user
to ensure that the ohmic value of any shunt fitted matches the shunt value entered in this field.
RANGE LOW
Enter the lowest value of the required linearisation range (e.g. 100)
RANGE HIGH
Enter the highest value of the required linearisation range (e.g. 200)
RANGE UNITS
Selectable from degrees Celsius, degrees Fahrenheit, Kelvin or Rankine.
SCALED
This box allows the user to select low and high values and units for a scale. This box must be ticked if
logarithmic scales are to be used.
SCALE LOW
Enter the scale value to correspond with input range low (e.g. 0).
SCALE HIGH
Enter the scale value to correspond with input range high (e.g. 100).
SCALE UNITS
Enter up to five characters of unit descriptor (e.g.%).
Note:
User linearisation tables units,
To set user linearisation table units to temperature units (˚C for example), the Range Units selection box can be used.
To enter custom units, ‘Scaled’ must be selected. Scale low must be set to Range Low; Scale
high must be set to Range High. The required Units string is entered in the Scale units text
entry box.
OFFSET
Allows a fixed value to be added to or subtracted from the process variable. Recorder accuracy figures
no longer apply if an offset is included.
If the TUS option is fitted (section 15), Offset can not be applied to channels used as reference channels
(e.g. channels 6, 12, 18 etc.).
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 73
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
SCALE TYPE
This field allows ‘None’, ‘Linear’ or ‘Log’ to be selected as scale type. For linear scales, the number of
major/minor scale divisions can be selected. This does not affect the ‘chart’ grid divisions, which is set up
as a part of Group configuration (section 4.3.2). Figures 4.3.3b1 and 4.3.3b2 show various examples.
NONE
Channels with Scale Type selected to ‘None’, appear with no scale information in any display mode.
LINEAR
Channels with Scale Type = Linear, appear with scale information in all display modes (except numeric).
The number of major and minor divisions can be selected from subsequent fields. Examples are shown
in figure 4.3.3b1.
SCALE DIVISIONS - MAJOR
Appears for Linear Scale types only. Setting major divisions to 1, means that the scale consists only of
‘zero’ and full scale. Setting Major divisions to 2, means that the scale has divisions at zero, 50% and full
scale, and so on. Intermediate scale values appear at major divisions if there is sufficient space. Default =
10 for large frame recorders or 5 for small frame units.
SCALE DIVISIONS - MINOR
Appears for Linear Scale types only. With minor divisions set to 1 (default), the scale major divisions are
not divided i.e. no minor division tick marks appear . Setting Minor divisions to 2, means that each major
scale division is divided into two, and so on. See figure 4.3.3b1 for an example showing five minor divisions.
LOG
For some input type selections, this appears only if ‘Scaled’ is ticked.
Channels with Scale Type = Log, appear with logarithmic scales. These scales have major divisions at
each decade boundary, and (space permitting), minor divisions for mantissa values 2 to 9. Examples are
shown in figure 4.3.3b1. Because of the nature of logarithms, neither negative values nor the value 0 can
be used as scale ‘zero’. Linear inputs are traced as exponental curves (figure 4.3.3b2).
LOG/LINEAR
For some input type selections, this appears only if ‘Scaled’ is ticked.
Channels with Scale Type = Log/Linear, appear with logarithmic scales. These scales have major divisions
at each decade boundary, and (space permitting), minor divisions for mantissa values 2 to 9. Examples
are shown in figure 4.3.3b1. Because of the nature of logarithms, neither negative values nor the value 0
can be used as scale ‘zero’. Linear inputs are traced as straight lines (figure 4.3.3b2).
User Guide
Page 74
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Scale = Linear: Major divisions = 10; Minor divisions = 1
(Standard for 180mm recorders )
Channel 2
388.33V
0.00
1000.00
Scale = Linear: Major divisions = 10; Minor divisions = 5
Intermediate scale values displayed only if room permits.
Channel 2
0.00
100.00
200.00
300.00
400.00
5 minor
divisions
500.00
600.00
700.00
800.00
388.33V
900.00
1000.00
Scale = Log
Number format = Scientific (1.00 x100 to 1.00 x106)
Channel 2
1.00E0
1.00E1
1.00E2
1.00E3
1.00E4
1.00E5
388.33V
1.00E6
Scale = Log
Number format = Numeric (1.00 to 1,000,000.00 )
Channel 2
1.00
10.00
100.00
1000.00
10000.00
100000.00
388.33V
1000000.00
Figure 4.3.3b1 Scale type examples (large frame)
Channel 47
0.0000
10.0000
20.0000
30.0000
40.0000
50.0000
60.0000
70.0000
80.0000
41.6667V
90.0000
100.0000
10:44:18
25/05/06
10:42:58
25/05/06
4 minute triangle
Linear Scale - Log Grid
10:41:38
25/05/06
10:40:18
25/05/06
Channel 47
0.0000
10.0000
20.0000
30.0000
40.0000
50.0000
60.0000
70.0000
80.0000
41.6667V
90.0000
100.0000
10:49:18
25/05/06
10:47:58
25/05/06
4 minute triangle
Linear Scale - Linear Grid
10:46:38
25/05/06
10:45:18
25/05/06
Channel 47
1.0000
10.0000
41.4250
V
100.0000
11:57:21
25/05/06
11:56:00
25/05/06
4 minute triangle
Log Scale - Log Grid
11:54:40
25/05/06
11:53:20
25/05/06
Channel 47
1.0000
10.0000
6.4158V
100.0000
12:13:21
25/05/06
12:12:00
25/05/06
44minute
minutetriangle
triangle
Log/Linear
Log/LinearScale
Scale--Log
LogGrid
Grid
12:10:40
25/05/06
12:09:20
25/05/06
Figure 4.3.3b2 Trace examples for different scale types (large frame)
Note: Grid type is selected in Group configuration. Grid (and chart text) colour is defined in
‘Trend Foreground’ in System/Customisation configuration
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 75
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Input
FILTER
For ‘noisy’ slowly changing signals, damping can be used to filter
noise so that the underlying trend can be seen more clearly. None,
2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 or 256 seconds can be selected.
It is not recommended that damping be used on quickly changing
signals.
BREAK RESPONSE
95%
3x
Damping
Recorder
response
Effect of damping on step
change in input signal
Figure 4.3.3c Channel filter
For thermocouples and other low level inputs (i.e. input voltages less than 150 mV), the recorder can be
made to respond in one of the following ways, if a break in the input circuit is detected.
None trace drifts with the input wiring acting as an aerial.
High trace placed at full scale.
Low trace placed at scale ‘zero’.
COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION (CJC)
For input type = thermocouple, None, Internal, External or Remote can be selected for cold junction
compensation.
INTERNAL
Internal CJC is by means of an RTD connected across pins 11 and 12 of the input board connector.
EXTERNAL
If the cold junction is maintained (by the user) at a known, fixed
temperature, ‘external’ should be selected. An extra numeric
entry box appears to allow the user to enter the temperature at
which the cold junction is maintained.
Break Response
Cold Junction Type
External CJ Temp
Descriptor
None
External
0
Channel 1
REMOTE
‘Remote’ is selected if the cold junction temperature
Break Response None
is to be measured by an external device connected
Cold
Junction Type Remote
to the instrument. An extra picklist appears which
Remote
CJ
Temp from Channel 3
˚C
allows the user to select any input or maths channel
Descriptor Channel 1
to act as the cold junction temperature source channel. The temperature units displayed here, are those
of the channel being configured, not those of the CJ source channel. The CJ source channel must be
configured appropriately for the external device, and must provide a value which is consistent with the
configured channel’s units.
DESCRIPTOR
Allows a text string of up to 30 characters (including spaces) to be entered for the channel descriptor (e.g.
‘Turbine 2 tempA’).
A/B SWITCHING
If enabled, this function allows alternative Span, Zone and Trace Colour values to be entered. ‘A’ values
are used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
User Guide
Page 76
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
SPANNED
This box, when selected, allows span low and high values to be entered. For example, in an input range
of 0 to 600 deg C, it may be that the temperature range between 500 and 600 degrees is of most interest. In such a case, setting span low to 500 and span high to 600 will cause the recorder to display only
that part of the input range, and this will fill the zone width which is selected next, effectively magnifying
the area of interest.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second set of span low and span high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are
used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
ZONE
This allows the portion of the chart which the channel occupies to be defined in terms of percent, where
the left edge of the chart is 0% and the right hand edge is 100%. For example, setting a low value of 50
and a high value of 100 causes the channel trace to be confined to the right hand half of the chart.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second set of zone low and zone high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are
used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
PV FORMAT
This allows the PV value, alarm setpoints, hysteresis values etc. to be displayed as normal numeric values (Numeric) or in ‘Scientific’ format (Scientific). When ‘Scientific’ is selected, values are displayed and
entered as a decimal number between 1 and 10† (the mantissa), followed by a multiplier (the exponent).
E.G. to enter a value of 1244.5678, the value entered would be 1.2445678E3, where 3 represents the
number of places that the decimal point has been shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a
number between 1 and 10†. To enter a value of 0.0004196, the entry would be 4.196E-4.
† Notes
1. Strictly this is a number less than 10, as 10 would be 1.0E1.
2. There must be at least one number after the decimal point.
MAXIMUM DECIMAL DIGITS
This defines the number of decimal places in the process value. Settable between zero and nine. Leading and trailing zeros are not displayed. Values too long for the available displaying width are truncated
as described in section 3.
COLOUR
Allows the trace colour to be selected from a colour chart. Each of the 56 available colours is displayed
with a number, and it is this number which is entered. The background colour to the selection box changes to the selected colour.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second colour selection can be entered. Colour ‘A’ is used during normal
operation. Colour ‘B’ is switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
ALARM NUMBER
Allows an alarm to be selected for configuration.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 77
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
ENABLE
Allows the alarm to be defined as Off, Unlatched, Latched or Trigger.
Off
Unlatched
Latched
Trigger
Alarm is disabled and the remainder of the alarm configuration is hidden.
Unlatched alarms become active when the trigger source becomes active and remain active until the source returns to a non-active state.
The indicator is on (flashing before acknowledgment - steady after acknowledgement) until the alarm clears.
Alarm messages are printed if enabled in group configuration.
Latched alarms become active when the trigger source becomes active and remain
active until the alarm is acknowledged AND the trigger source has returned to a nonactive state.
The indicator is on (flashing before acknowledgment - steady after acknowledgement) until the alarm has been acknowledged AND the trigger source has returned
to a non-active state.
Alarm messages are printed if enabled in group configuration.
Continuous jobs remain active only whilst the alarm trigger source is active. I.E. the
job finishes when the alarm clears, whether acknowledged or not.
When triggered all associated jobs are initiated, and continuous jobs remain active
until the alarm clears. There is no alarm indication, and no messages are printed.
TYPE
This field appears only when the alarm Enable is not selected Off. Each alarm can be defined as absolute
high, absolute low, deviation-in, deviation-out, rate-of-change rise or rate-of-change fall.
Absolute High Absolute Low
Deviation in
Deviation out
Rate of change As shown in figure 4.3.3d, an absolute high alarm becomes active when the channel
value exceeds the threshold value. The alarm remains active until the channel value
falls below (Threshold minus hysteresis). If a dwell value is defined, the alarm does
not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded.
As shown in figure 4.3.3d, an absolute low alarm becomes active when the channel value falls below the threshold value. The alarm remains active until the channel
value exceeds (Threshold + hysteresis). If a dwell value is defined, the alarm does
not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded.
As shown in figure 4.3.3e, a deviation-in alarm becomes active whenever the channel value enters the band: Reference ± Deviation. It remains active until the channel
value leaves the band: Reference ± (Deviation+ Hysteresis). If a dwell value is defined, the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded.
As shown in figure 4.3.3e, a deviation-out alarm is active whenever the channel value
leaves the band Reference ± Deviation. It remains active until the channel value
enters the band: Reference ± (Deviation - Hysteresis). If a dwell value is defined, the
alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded.
As shown in figure 4.3.3f, rate of change alarms become active whenever the signal
value changes by more than a specified amount within a specified period. If a dwell
value is defined, the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been
exceeded. An averaging period can be set to remove the effects of sudden, but
short-lived changes, such as noise spikes on the signal.
Note: Alarm icons appear at the display, as described in section 3.
SETPOINT SOURCE
Allows the user to choose either a fixed, user-defined value (constant) or the value of another point (input
channel, maths channel, totaliser etc.) to be chosen as the trigger point. In the latter it is possible, for
example, to trigger an alarm, when one channel’s value rises above, falls below etc. the value of a second
channel.
User Guide
Page 78
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
PARAMETERS
Figures 4.3.3d, e and f illustrate the following terms for the different alarm types.
Threshold
Hysteresis
Dwell
Reference
Deviation
Amount
Change Time
Average time
For Absolute alarms, this defines the value (in engineering units) at which an alarm is
triggered. The alarm also returns to its non-active state at this value (unless a hysteresis value has been set). If a dwell value is set, the alarm does not become active
until this dwell time has elapsed.
Defines a ‘deadband’ (in engineering units) to eliminate spurious triggering if the
signal value is hovering around the trigger point. The deadband lies:
Below Absolute High thresholds
Above Absolute Low thresholds
Outside the deviation band for Deviation-in alarms
Inside the deviation band for Deviation-out alarms.
Allows a dwell period to be entered in seconds. The alarm does not take effect until
this period has expired. If an alarm clears before the dwell period has expired, the
alarm is ignored.
For Deviation alarms, this is the central value of the deviation band.
For Deviation alarms, this value defines the width of the deviation band, each side of
the reference value. I.E. the total width of the deviation band is 2 x Deviation value.
For Rate-of-change alarms, this value defines the minimum amount by which the
signal value would have to change, within the ‘Change Time’ period (below), in order
for the alarm to become active.
For Rate-of-change alarms, this selects the time period (Per second, Per minute,
Per hour) within which the change in signal value must exceed the Amount value
(entered in the preceding field) in order for the alarm to become active. See Rate-ofChange example below for more details.
For rate-of-change alarms, this allows an average period to be entered for signal
smoothing.
HYSTERESIS EXAMPLE
Threshold = 100 units; Hysteresis = 5 units
With the above settings, an absolute high alarm would become active if its input were to rise above 100
and would remain active until its value fell to below 95 units. An absolute low alarm would become active
if its input fell below 100 units, and would remain active until its input rose above 105 units. Deviation
alarms behave in a similar manner.
RATE-OF CHANGE ALARM EXAMPLE
Rate-of-change alarms allow the user to enter an ‘amount’ (say 3 degrees) and a time period (say 1
minute) , and if the process value changes by the specified amount or more, within the specified time
period (more than 3 degrees in a minute in this example), then the alarm becomes active.
The recorder uses its iteration rate of 125 msec (1/8th second) as the time base for it calculations. For our
example, 3 degrees per minute equates to 3/60 degrees per second or 3/(60 x 8) = 0.00625 degrees per
iteration. If a change greater than this is detected, then the alarm becomes active.
In order to reduce sensitivity, an averaging period can be configured. This means that an average of all
the 1/8th second samples is taken over the specified period, and the alarm becomes active only if the
average value exceeds the specified rate of change.
Configuring a dwell time can also reduce ‘jitter’ because, if during the specified dwell time, any one sample is non active, then the elapsed dwell time is reset to zero. The alarm becomes active only after the
dwell time has elapsed i.e. only if the rate of change has been exceeded for every software cycle throughout the specified dwell time.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 79
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Absolute high alarm definitions
Absolute low alarm definitions
symbol
symbol
Input signal
Threshold
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Input signal
Threshold
Hysteresis: no
Dwell: 0 secs
Hysteresis: no
Dwell: 0 secs
Hysteresis: no
Dwell: D secs
D
D
D
D
D
D
Hysteresis: no
Dwell: D secs
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0 Secs
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: D Secs
D
D
D
D
D
D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0 Secs
D
D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: D Secs
= alarm active
D is in seconds up to 999999.
Hysteresis is in engineering units
D
D
= alarm active
D is in seconds up to 999999.
Hysteresis is in engineering units
Figure 4.3.3d Absolute alarm definitions
Deviation-out alarm definitions
symbol
Hysteresis
Deviation-in alarm definitions
symbol
Hysteresis
Reference
Deviation
Deviation
Hysteresis
Deviation
Reference
Deviation
Hysteresis
Input signal
Input signal
Hysteresis: no
Dwell: 0 secs
Hysteresis: no
Dwell: 0 secs
Hysteresis: no
Dwell: D secs
D
D
D
D
Hysteresis: no
Dwell: D secs
D
D
D
D
D
D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0 Secs
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: 0 Secs
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: D Secs
D
D
D
D
Hysteresis: yes
Dwell: D Secs
= alarm active
D is in seconds up to 999999.
Hysteresis is in engineering units
D
D
= alarm active
D is in seconds up to 999999.
Hysteresis is in engineering units
Figure 4.3.3e Deviation alarm definitions
Rate-of-change alarm definitions
Rate-of-change rise active
Fall symbol
Amount
Rise symbol
Rate-of-change fall active
'Change Time' units
(seconds, minutes or hours)
Present
time
A rate-of-change alarm is active if the channel value changes by more than 1 amount unit in less than 1 time
unit. Dwell delays the alarm-on time. Averaging removes the effects of spurious 'spikes'.
Figure 4.3.3f Rate-of-change alarm definitions
User Guide
Page 80
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
JOB NUMBER
Select the required job number.
CATEGORY
Select the required job to be carried out when the channel is in alarm (e.g. Drive relay) See section 4.7
for a description of job categories.
WHILE/ON
Allows the action of the alarm job to be chosen as
a. while active, while inactive or while unacknowledged for continuous jobs (e.g. drive relay), or,
b. on going active, on going inactive or on acknowledgement for ‘one-shot’ jobs (e.g. increment counter).
Figure 4.3.3g, below, shows the various actions graphically. For ‘While unacknowledged’ and ‘on acknowledgement’ settings, two cases are shown, one where the alarm goes inactive before acknowledgement; the other where the alarm is acknowledged whilst the alarm is still active. The coloured (shaded)
areas show the duration for which continuous jobs run; the down arrows show trigger points for ‘oneshot’ jobs. See section 3.1.4 for details on how to acknowledge alarms.
Active
Active
Alarm trigger
Alarm trigger
Inactive
Inactive
While active
On going active
While inactive
On going inactive
Acknowledge
While unacknowledged
(latching alarm)
While unacknowledged
(non-latching alarm)
While unacknowledged
(latching alarm)
While unacknowledged
(non-latching alarm)
Job goes inactive even if
alarm not yet acknowledged
Acknowledge
Job goes inactive even if
alarm still active
Acknowledge
On acknowledgement
(latching alarm)
On acknowledgement
(non-latching alarm)
On acknowledgement
(latching alarm)
Job triggers even if alarm
not yet acknowledged
Acknowledge
Job triggers even if
alarm still active
On acknowledgement
(non-latching alarm)
Figure 4.3.3g Graphical representation of job actions
ALARM MESSAGES
Alarm on/off and alarm acknowledge message printing on the chart can be enabled/disabled as a part
of ‘Group configuration’ described in section 4.3.2. See section 3.1.4 for details on how to acknowledge
alarms.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 81
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.4 Views Configuration
This part of the recorder’s configuration allows groups to be set up (either individually, or globally) to
include the various display modes described in section 3.4, above, and user screens (if fitted). When enabled, a display mode is added to the Group’s ‘Goto View’ menu and to the up/down arrow scroll list.
Home Group and Home Page picklists allow a group and display mode to be defined for display when
the Home key is pressed in the Root menu.
Home Time-out 0 Minutes
Home Group 1) Group 1
Select group for
Home display
Select Instrument or Group
Scope Group
Select group for
These fields appear
Group 1) Group 1
display mode enable
only if Scope = 'Group'
Display Enable
Select Home
Home Page Circular Trend
display mode for
Vertical Trend
instrument or for
selected group
Horizontal Trend
Circular Trend
= Enabled
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric Page
User Screen 1
User screens appear only if the Screen Build-
User Screen 2
User Screen 3
User Screen 4
User Screen 23
User Screen 24
Bridge User Screens 0
Apply
er option (Section 7) is fitted.
Bridge user screens are accessible only from
a remote PC which has Bridge software
installed and running.
Discard
Figure 4.3.4a Views Configuration menu
HOME TIMEOUT
The recorder returns to the specified home page after the timeout value of minutes has elapsed since the
last touch on the display. Timeout action is inhibited if a configuration is incomplete (there are changes
which have not been ‘Applied’), or if a system-generated message (e.g. ‘Clock Failure’) is on display. User
displays (e.g. Root menu) are timed-out after approximately 50 seconds.
A value of zero disables the time-out function. Valid entries are between 1 and 99 minutes.
HOME GROUP
This picklist allows a particular group to be selected for display when the root menu ‘Home’ key is
pressed.
SCOPE
The remaining items of Views configuration can be selected to act globally (Instrument) or to act on individual groups (Group). When ‘Instrument’ is selected, enabled display modes appear in all groups’ up/
down arrow scroll lists and are active in the Root Menu ‘Goto View’ menu (figure 4.3.4b). When ‘Group’
is selected, each group can be set up with individual display mode lists. For the particular group on display, the up and down arrow keys can be used to scroll through the enabled display modes, or a particular mode can be selected using the ‘Goto View’ menu.
User Guide
Page 82
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.4 VIEWS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
GROUP
This field appears only if ‘Scope’ is set to ‘Group’, and allows each group to be selected for display configuration. For other items of Group configuration, see Section 4.3.2.
DISPLAY ENABLE
This field appears only if ‘Scope’ is set to ‘Group’, and allows the selected group to be enabled or disabled for display. When enabled, the group can be displayed either by using the ‘Root menu/Goto
screens/Group N’ selection (figure 4.3.4b) or can be scrolled-to using the right/left arrow keys. When
disabled, the group is ‘greyed’ in the ‘Root menu/Goto screens/Group N’ selection and is skipped when
using the right/left arrow keys. It is not possible to disable the Home group.
HOME PAGE
Allows a particular display mode to be selected as the default display, either for all groups (Scope = instrument) or on a group-by-group basis (Scope = group).
DISPLAY MODE ENABLING
A series of tick boxes allow the various display modes to be added to (or removed from) the up/down
arrow scroll list and to be activated/deactivated in the Root menu ‘Goto View’ menu, either for all groups
(Scope = instrument) or on a group-by-group basis (Scope = group). It is not possible to disable the
selected Home page mode.
Note: If Circular Trend view is enabled here in Views configuration, but the ‘Circular settings’
checkbox is not enabled in Group configuration (section 4.3.2), then, although the circular chart
will appear, it will not contain any trends.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 83
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.4 VIEWS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
USER SCREENS 1 to N
This field appears only for recorders with the Screen Builder option (fully described in section 7). Up to
24 user screens can be included in the up/down arrow scroll list and to be active in the Root menu ‘Goto
View’ menu (figure 4.3.4b).
In addition to the 24 screens accessible from the recorder display, up to 100 extra screens, which can be
accessed only by using Bridge ‘Full’ software, can be specified. The number selected should be kept to
the minimum necessary, in order to reduce the number of ‘Goto View’ ‘More...’ displays. Once created
a Bridge screen can be copied to one or more recorder screens 1 to 24 if required, making it accessible
from the recorder.
Root Menu
Home
Operator
File
Remove Media
Goto View
Goto Group
Goto Group
Goto View: Group 1
Alarm Summary
Message Log
Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend
Circular Trend
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric Page
User Screen 1
User Screen 2
User Screen 3
More...
Group 1
Group 3
Group 5
Group 2
Group 4
Group 6
Figure 4.3.4b Goto View and Goto Group submenus
User Guide
Page 84
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.5 Archive configuration
Notes:
1. For the sake of brevity, the phrase ‘memory device’ is used for whatever mass-storage medium
is fitted to the recorder (integral or via a USB port).
2. CSV format files are not as secure as Packed Binary format files.
This allows an archive strategy to be set up for saving data to a local memory device or to a remote PC.
The local strategy includes archive period, memory device full operation, compression factor and an estimate of the maximum-time-to-next-archive to avoid data being overwritten in memory (Duration).
The recorder uses a dedicated area of its Flash memory as an archive data buffer, which means that data
is written to the memory device or remote PC only when required, rather than continuously.
In order to carry out a successful remote archive, details of the remote host must be entered both in this
Archive section of the ‘Config’ menu, and in Network configuration (section 4.5). Further, the current access level must have ‘Connect from remote’ enabled in the Security/Access menu (section 4.4.1).
Compression Normal
Flash Size 9 9 . 2 5
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1
Duration 1 0 8 . 6
Show Local settings
Media mediacard
Select: Normal or High
Mb
Days
Select Local or Remote settings
Select Media card or USB port
Archive to Media Automatic
Archiving Hourly
Select archive frequency
Appears only for 'Automatic'
Media file format Binary
On Media Full Overwrite
Select Binary and/or CSV
Select: Overwrite or Stop
Media Size 30.4746094
Mb
Removable Media Capacity 3 3 . 1 8
Media Full event limit 100 %
Apply
Days
Discard
Figure 4.3.5a Archive configuration menu (Local settings)
Compression Normal
Select: Normal or High
Flash Size 9 9 . 2 5
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1
Duration 1 0 8 . 0 6
Mb
Show Remote settings
Archive to Remote None
Days
Ftp File format Binary
Select archive interval
Select Binary and/or CSV
Remote path / r e c o r d e r / G r o u p 1
Primary remote host 0.0.0.0
Primary login name a n o n y m o u s
Primary password * * * * *
Retype password * * * * *
Secondary remote host 0.0.0.0
Secondary login name a n o n y m o u s
Secondary password * * * * *
Retype password * * * * *
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.5b Archive configuration menu (Remote settings)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 85
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
COMPRESSION
Select Normal or High compression. ‘Normal’ compresses the data but still provides an exact copy.
‘High’ compresses more, but channel values are saved only to 1 part in 108 resolution. This field does not
appear if ‘CSV’ is selected as file format (see below).
Note: Where very high values are involved (e.g. some totaliser values) ‘High’ compression may
cause the value displayed by the recorder, and held in the history file, to be incorrect. This problem may be solved by moving the relevant point to a group using ‘Normal’ compression, or by
re-scaling the totaliser to read (for example) TeraWatt hours instead of Megawatt hours.
FLASH SIZE
Allows the size of the internal flash memory to be viewed by the user.
SHORTEST TREND HISTORY / DURATION
This shows which group has the shortest amount of Flash memory allocated to its history record. Providing the archive period is less than the value displayed in the Duration window, no data will be lost from
any group. If the archive period is greater than this value, then some of the data in one or more groups
will have been overwritten and therefore lost.
If there is more than one group with the same Shortest Trend History Duration, the group with the lowest
number is displayed. (E.G. If groups two and four both have the same duration, ‘Group 2’ will appear in
this window.)
Note: Trend history duration depends on many factors, as described in Group Configuration (section 4.3.2) above.
CSV CHECK BOXES, DATE/TIME FORMAT
These appear only if the ‘Media File Format’ or ‘FTP file format’ are set to either ‘CSV’ or ‘Binary and CSV’.
Refer to ‘CSV Files’ at the end of this subsection (4.3.5).
SHOW
This allows the fields which are to appear below ‘Show’ to be applicable to the local memory device (Local Settings), or to the setting up of a remote host path for archiving purposes (Remote settings). The
following descriptions contain all the fields which may appear in either menu.
MEDIA
For ‘Local’ setting only
For standard recorders, this allows ‘mediacard or ‘usbfront’’ to be selected as the local archive destination. If the USB option is fitted, the two rear USB ports (usb1 and usb2) also appear in the pick list. USB
ports may support both floppy disk drives and ‘memory sticks’.
User Guide
Page 86
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
ARCHIVE TO MEDIA
For ‘Local’ setting only:
None
Hourly
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Automatic
Archive must be initiated by the operator (section 4.1)
Archive occurs on the hour every hour
Archive occurs at 00:00* hrs each day
Archive occurs at 00:00* hrs every Monday
Archive occurs at 00:00* hrs on the 1st of each month
The recorder selects the least frequent archive period (Hourly, Daily, Weekly, Monthly), which is guaranteed not to lose data as a result of either the internal Flash, or the
local memory device, running out of space (calculated assuming that the memory
device is initially ‘empty’). When Automatic is selected, a further, non-editable menu
item appears, showing which of the archive frequencies has been selected.
*Note: Archive times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving hour changes. Thus if the archive is set
to ‘daily’, ‘weekly’ or ‘ monthly’ then, during ‘Summer Time’, the archive will occur an hour late (i.e.
at 01:00 hrs. instead of midnight).
MEDIA FILE FORMAT/FTP FILE FORMAT
Allows ‘Binary’ (.uhh) files, ‘CSV’ (.csv) files or ‘Binary and CSV’ to be chosen for FTP transfer. For further
details of CVS archiving, see description at the end of this subsection (4.3.5).
ON MEDIA FULL
For ‘Local’ setting only:
Overwrite
Stop
Oldest data is replaced with latest data when storage medium is full.
Archiving stops when the storage medium is full.
Note: When in ‘Overwrite’ mode, the recorder will overwrite only those files which it has itself
created. Thus, if a storage medium is inserted which contains history files from another recorder,
these cannot be overwritten. The file names are of the form UUU....UUUIIIIIIFFGGSSSSSS, where
IIIIII represent the lowest three bytes of MAC address of the recorder which created the file (see
section 4.5.1). It is not possible for the user to delete files created by another instrument (i.e. one
with a different MAC address).
MEDIA SIZE
For ‘Local’ setting only, this displays the capacity of the memory device.
REMOVABLE MEDIA CAPACITY
For ‘Local’ setting only, this gives an estimated time to fill the archive medium, based on the archive rate,
the compression ratio, the storage medium size and on the exact nature of the data. (Rapidly changing
values use more space than static/slowly changing values.) When archiving to Floppy disks (via USB port),
this field remains empty until after the first archive has taken place.
MEDIA FULL EVENT LIMIT
For ‘Local’ setting only, this allows the user to specify a percentage-full value for the storage medium,
at which the event source ‘Archive media % full’ is triggered. The event remains active until the storage
medium is replaced, or has data removed from it to make more room available.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 87
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
ARCHIVE TO REMOTE
For ‘Remote’ setting only:
None
Hourly
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Automatic
Archive to host is initiated by the operator (section 4.1.2)
Archive to host occurs on the hour every hour
Archive to host occurs at 00:00* hrs each day
Archive to host occurs at 00:00* hrs every Monday
Archive to host occurs at 00:00* hrs on the 1st of each month
The recorder selects the slowest out of ‘Hourly’, Daily, Weekly or Monthly, which is
guaranteed not to lose data (depends on the size of the Trend History Buffer).
*Note: Archive times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving hour changes. Thus if the archive is set
to ‘daily’, ‘weekly’ or ‘ monthly’ then, during ‘Summer Time’, the archive will occur an hour late (i.e.
at 01:00 hrs. instead of midnight).
REMOTE PATH
For Remote setting only, this specifies the route to a folder or directory on the remote host, set up as a
part of that host’s FTP configuration. The path name may be up to 103 characters in length.
PRIMARY REMOTE HOST
For ‘Remote’ setting only:
If a Domain Name Server (DNS) is specified in the Network key ‘Name’ page (figure 4.5.2), then the
Primary Remote Host is the server name. If DNS is not selected, then the Primary Remote Host is the IP
address of the remote host, set up in the host’s Control Panel\Network.
PRIMARY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD
For ‘Remote’ setting only:
Login name and password of the remote host account assigned either by the Network administrator, or in
the Guest account of the remote host’s FTP Server or User Manager configuration. The password, which
must be of between eight and 20 characters, must be entered twice to ensure integrity.
SECONDARY REMOTE HOST/LOGIN/PASSWORD
For ‘Remote’ setting only:
As for primary versions, but for a secondary host. The secondary route is used only if the primary route
fails.
User Guide
Page 88
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
CSV FILES
This allows archive files to be transferred in comma-separated-values (CSV) format, to a memory device
or, via FTP, to a remote host computer.
Compression Normal
Binary format only
Flash Size 9 9 . 2 5
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1
Duration 1 0 8 . 8 6
CSV include Values
CSV include Messages
CSV include Header details
CSV include Column headings
CSV Date/Time format Text
CSV use Tab delimiter
Show Local settings
Archive to Media None
Media file format Binary and CSV
On Media Full Overwrite
Media Size 30.4746094
Disk Archive Capacity 3 3 . 1 8
Media Full event limit 100 %
Apply
Mb
Days
Mb
Days
Discard
Figure 4.3.5c CSV archive menu items
MEDIA FILE FORMAT
For Local Settings only, this allows ‘Binary’, ‘CSV’ or both to be selected for file type when archiving. ‘Binary’ is the proprietary format used by the instrument and it requires other software (e.g. Review Software) to interpret the data, before it can be presented in spreadsheets, shown as if on a chart etc. Binary
files have the extension ‘.uhh’.
CSV format is a standard open-file format for numeric data. A simple ASCII-based format, it is readable
by a wide range of PC applications as well as being suitable for direct import into many commercial databases. CSV files have the extension ‘.csv’.
Note: CSV is ASCII based, and cannot interpret Unicode characters. Some characters available to
the user will therefore be displayed incorrectly in CSV files.
If ‘CSV’ or ‘Binary and CSV’ is selected, a number of extra check boxes appear. Figure 4.3.5c above,
shows a typical menu page. Figure 4.3.5d below, shows the effects of enabling the CSV check boxes,
with the exception of ‘CSV use Tab delimiter’ the use of which is as follows:
CSV USE TAB DELIMITER
Despite its name, CSV does not always use commas as separators.
For example, in some countries, the decimal point is represented by a full stop (period), whilst in other areas, a comma is used. In order to avoid confusion between the comma as a decimal point and the comma
as a separator, a different separator is used, usually the semicolon.
The instrument automatically chooses a separator suitable for use with the ‘Locale’ selected in System
Configuration (section 4.6.2). ‘CSV Use Tab delimiter’ allows the user to override this choice, and force
the instrument to use tabs as separators. This can be particularly useful when moving the data from one
locale to another.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 89
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
CSV DATE/TIME FORMAT
Allows ‘Text’ or Spreadsheet numeric to be selected. Text causes a time/date to appear in the spreadsheet. Spreadsheet numeric displays the number of days since December 30th 1899. The decimal part
of the value represents the latest 6 hours, so DDD---DDD.25 represents 0600 hrs, DDD---DDD.5 represents noon etc. Numeric format is more easily interpretable by some spreadsheets than Text format is.
Click/drag separator
to edit field width
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
A1
A
B
= Instrument
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Distil temp
Serial Number
9921
4.0
Instrument Name=
Software Version
Mac Address
Country= GB
00:AB:8D:80:26:C0 Language= en
Group Name
Tank Temps
40 -C
Tank1 Temp1
Low=
0 High=
Tank1 Temp2
Low=
40 -C
0 High=
40 Deg C
Tank1 Temp3
Low=
0 High=
Tank2 Temp1
Low=
40 Deg C
0 High=
Tank2 Temp2
Low=
40 Deg C
0 High=
40 Deg C
0 High=
Tank2 Temp3
Low=
+20 Deg C
-20 High=
Difference Low=
Date/Time Tank1 Temp1
Difference
Tank1 Temp1
Tank1 Temp1
Tank2 Temp1
Tank2 Temp2
Tank2 Temp3
Deg C
-C
-C
Deg C
Deg C
Deg C
Deg C
6.61
09.39.0
23.49
23.74
24.01 31.2334 29.7693 30.0983
6.13
09.44.0
23.53
23.70
23.88 30.6458 29.0673 29.9083
5.91
09.49.0
23.57
23.68
23.91 30.0945 28.8936 29.9083
6.47
09.54.0
23.50
23.69
23.99 31.1437 29.4387 30.0235
09.54.0 08/04/05 14:09:54 Alarm off
End of Archive
Ready
Right click, then:
Format cells...
Select 'Time' as number category
Select time/date 'Type' as required
J
K
L
Timezone= GMT
M
N
O
Include header
details
Include column
headings
Include values
Include messages
Tank Temps~8026C026000002A9
Figure 4.3.5d CSV data example
FTP FILE FORMAT
The above description for ‘Media file format’ also applies to ‘Remote’ setting.
User Guide
Page 90
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.6 Event configuration
A number of internal and external (Event input option) triggers are available for use in initiating Events
which will then run job lists. Events can have up to two sources each, but can themselves be used as
sources allowing a large number of inputs to be used. Input sources can be logically combined, and can
be inverted if required.
Event Number 1) Event 1
Source 1 Alarm on Group
On Group 1) Group 1
Select 1 to 96
Select source 1
Make source 1 sub selection (if any)
Source 2 Point Alarm
On Math 12
Alarm 2
Select source 2
Make source 2 sub selection (if any)
Make sub-sub selection (if any)
Source 1 Sense Source 1
Operator
Select source inversion or not
Select logic combination: Only, AND,
And
OR, NAND, NOR, XOR.
Select source inversion or not
Not Source 2
Source 2 Sense
Descriptor Event 1
Select job number
Job Number 1
Category No Action
Select Job Category
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.6 Event configuration menu layout (typical)
EVENT NUMBER
Allows the required event (1 to 96) to be selected for configuration.
SOURCE TYPES
Note: Event sources associated with options appear only if those options are fitted.
Off
The event is disabled
Global alarm
The event is active whilst any one or more alarms is active.
Global Unack’d alarm The event is active as long as there is an unacknowledged alarm present.
Comms channel timeout
The event is set if no communication has been made with ‘Comms’ channels within
the Comms channel timeout period set in Instrument configuration (section 4.3.1).
The source is reset when the next communication occurs.
Timer active
The event is triggered when a specified timer (section 4.3.14) becomes active.
Batch Running*
The event is triggered when a batch is started and remains active until the batch
stops. If Scope = ‘Group’ in Batch configuration (section 4.3.10) then a group can
be specified. If Scope = ‘Instrument’, the group select field does not appear. If the
Batch option is not fitted, ‘Batch running’ does not appear in the picklist.
Batch Start*
The event is triggered, fleetingly, when a batch is started If Scope = ‘Group’ in Batch
configuration (section 4.3.10) then a group can be specified. If Scope = ‘Instrument’,
the group select field does not appear. If the Batch option is not fitted, ‘Batch running’ does not appear in the picklist.
Event
Allows another event to be specified as a source.
Point alarm
Triggered by the specified alarm on the specified point.
Unack’d point alarmTriggered by the specified alarm on the specified point. Remains active until the
alarm is acknowledged (section 3.1.4).
Alarm on Group
Triggered if any alarm in the specified group becomes active.
(Continued)
* Batch stop also available - see below.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 91
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.6 EVENT CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
EVENT SOURCES (Cont.)
Unack’d Alarm on Group
Triggered if any alarm in the specified group becomes active. The event
remains active until the alarm is acknowledged.
Instrument alarm
This source triggers an event if any of the following becomes active:
Any, Input channel failure, Removable media failure, Removable media
full, No removable media fitted, FTP primary server failure, FTP secondary
server failure, Maths channel failure, Clock failure, Unrecognised PCCard,
Recording failure - overflow, Network not found, SNTP server failure, Time
synchronisation failure, Battery backed RAM cleared. See section 3.1.3 for
Instrument alarm details.
The event remains active until the instrument alarm clears.
Power up
A transient event is triggered at power up.
Maths channel partial failure For recorders fitted with Maths channels (section 4.3.11), this event is set if,
say, one of the inputs to a group averaging function becomes invalid. In
such a case, the average will be calculated on the remaining input values,
but the result may not be as accurate as expected. Loss of one input can
also be important in functions such as Fvalue, where several sensors may
be distributed within the load and their outputs used in a group minimum
calculation for input into the Fvalue equation.
Battery Low
This event is set when the battery is reaching the end of its useful life. The
event remains active until the battery is replaced (see Annex B for details).
Archive media % full
Triggered when the archive medium has reached the % fullness defined in
Archive configuration (section 4.3.5).
Invalid Password Entry
Transient event at the point of an invalid password entry attempt
User Login Account Disabled Transient event at the point when an account is disabled because the
number of password re-tries has been exceeded (Section 4.4.2). Available
only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted.
User Logged In
This event becomes active whenever a user with the specified Event Permission logs in. The event remains active until all local and remote users,
with the specified permission, have logged out. See also section 4.4.1 (Access levels).
Event Button
Allows the operation of an event button (if Screen Builder option fitted section 7) to be used as an event source. See section 4.3.7 for Event Button details.
Master Comms Slave Failure If the Master Comms option is fitted, this event source allows either a communications failure with a specifiable remote device, or communications
failure with ‘Any’ connected remote device to be used as an event source.
See section 4.3.16 for more details.
Event input board
If one or more Event Input option boards are fitted, this allows a contact
closure or negative going voltage signal to be used as an event source.
The required input is defined by specifying a Board number and an Input
number. Refer to Section 10 for more details. The menu item does not appear if Event input boards are not fitted.
Email Failure
Triggered if an attempt to send an e-mail (section 4.3.19) is unsuccessful.
Batch Stop
The event is triggered, fleetingly, when a batch is stopped. If Scope =
‘Group’ in Batch configuration (section 4.3.10) then a group can be specified. If Scope = ‘Instrument’, the group select field does not appear. If the
Batch option is not fitted, ‘Batch Stop’ does not appear in the picklist.
SOURCE 1 SENSE
Allows source 1 to be used in its normal sense (Select ‘Source 1’) or inverted (Select ‘Not Source 1’).
Example: Source 1 is alarm 1 on channel 3
With Source 1 Sense = Source 1, the event is active whenever channel 3 alarm 1 is active.
With Source 1 Sense = Not Source 1, the event is active whenever the alarm is not active.
User Guide
Page 92
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.6 EVENT CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
OPERATOR
This allows a logical combination of input sources to be used to trigger an event. The selections and their
definitions are shown in table 4.3.6, below.
Operator
Event active when:
Event not active when:
Only
S1 Active
S1 not active
AND
S1 and S2 both active
S1 and/or S2 not active
OR
S1 and/or S2 active
S1 and S2 both not active
NAND
S1 and/or S2 not active
S1 and S2 both active
NOR
S1 and S2 both not active
S1 and/or S2 both active
XOR
S1 or S2 active
S1 and S2 both active or both not
active
S1 = Source 1; S2 = Source 2
Table 4.3.6 Logical operators for event sources
SOURCE 2 SENSE
Allows source 2 to be used in its normal sense (Select ‘Source 2’) or inverted (Select ‘Not Source 2’).
Example: Source 2 is Group 1 Batch Running
With Source 2 Sense = Source 2, the event is active whilst the batch is running.
With Source 2 Sense = Not Source 2, the event is active whilst the batch is not running.
DESCRIPTOR
Allows a text string to be entered as the event title. See section 3.3.1 for text entry techniques.
JOB NUMBER
Select the required job number for this event.
CATEGORY
Select the required job to be carried out when the channel is in alarm (e.g. Drive relay) See section 4.7
for a description of job categories.
WHILE/ON
Allows the action of the alarm job to be chosen as
a. while active, while inactive or while unacknowledged for continuous jobs (e.g. drive relay), or,
b. on going active, on going inactive or on acknowledgement for ‘one-shot’ jobs (e.g. increment counter).
See also figure 4.3.3g and associated text.
EVENT EXAMPLE
An event is to be active whenever Channel 1 Alarm 1 is active whilst Channel 3 alarm 2 is not active.
Source 1 = Point alarm (On = Channel 1; Alarm = 1)
Source 2 = Point alarm (On = Channel 3; Alarm = 2)
Source 1 Sense = Source 1
Operator = And
Source 2 Sense = Not Source 2
It is possible to achieve the same result by inverting both Source senses and using the Nor operator.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 93
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.7 Event Buttons
This configuration item appears only if the Screen Builder Option is fitted (section 7).
The Event Button configuration menu allows a number of ‘Push-Buttons’ to be set up for use as event
sources. Buttons can be defined as ‘Unlatched’ (push = on; release = off) or ‘Latched’ (push once = on;
push again = off etc.).
Note: Unlatched button action occurs when the button is released.
Unlatched types have a single text string associated with them. Latched types have two text strings, one
for the ‘On’ (latched) state; the other for the ‘Off’ state. Figure 4.3.7 shows the configuration menu.
Event buttons are independent of the Security Management option, described in section 4.4.2. This allows individual buttons to be a) entirely open to the user, b) to require signing, or c) to require both signing and authorization, as required.
Button Number 1) Button 1
Descriptor Button 1
Type Latched
Text Off Text
Latched Text On Text
Require Signing
Require Authorisation
Select 1 to 96
Select Latched or Unlatched
Enter button text
Enter latched text
(appears only if Type = latched)
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.7 Event Button option configuration menu
Button number
Descriptor
Type
Text
Allows selection of the button (1 to 96) which is to be configured.
Allows a button name, of up to 20 characters, to be entered.
Select Latched or Unlatched, as defined above.
For unlatched buttons, this allows entry of the legend which is to appear on the button when displayed. For latched buttons, this is the legend which appears when the
button is in its non-active (off) state.
Latched Text
This field appears only if Type = Latched, and allows entry of the legend which is to
appear on the button when in its active (on) state.
Require Signing
If this field is enabled, then the button can be used only by those whose ‘Can Sign’
permission is enabled in the ‘Access’ menu described in section 4.4.1. When the button is operated in the User screen, a ‘signature’ page appears which requires the entry of the correct password for the selected user, and of a note which would normally
be used to give the reason for the operation.
Require Authorisation
This field appears only if ‘Require Signing’ is enabled. If Require Authorisation is enabled, then the button can be used only by those whose ‘Can Authorize’ permission
is enabled in the ‘Access’ menu described in section 4.4.1. When button operation is
attempted, a ‘signature’ page (figure 4.4.2b) appears which requires the entry of the
correct password for the selected user, and a note which would normally be used to
give the reason for the change.
Notes:
1 ‘Require Signing’ and ‘Require Authorisation’ appear only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted.
2. If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted, a message appears on the chart after authorization and/
or signing are complete. The example below shows the message when both Signing and Authorisation are enabled.
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Button Descriptor,Signed:Engineer,Authorised:Engineer,Note
User Guide
Page 94
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.8 Messages
This feature allows messages to be sent, by job action (section 4.7), to the display, to a specified group or
to all groups. Messages can also be included in e-mails (section 4.3.19). The messages are of the form:
Date, Time, Message. The message can be just text (up to 80 characters), or it can include up to nine embedded items which are typed into the message as {1} to {9}. The embedded values represented by {1} to
{9} are selected from picklists.
If a Group-destination message contains more characters than can be displayed on the screen (depends
on recorder model), the right-hand part of the message is invisible to the user. The message appears in
full in the message log (section 3.1.4) and when Review Software is used. Display-destination messages
are always fully visible.
MESSAGE ENTRY
The message configuration page is shown below in figure 4.3.8 The page is accessed from the Root
menu/Operator/Config menu.
Message Number 1) The value of
Select message to be configured
Message The value of {1} = {2} & {3} = {4}, {5}
Replace {1} with Source Descriptor
Replace {2} with Source Value
Replace {3} with Specified Descriptor
{3} source Totaliser 1
Replace {4} with Specified Value
{4} source Totaliser 1
Replace {5} with Config Revision
Replace {6} with Blank
Select embedding source
Select point whose
descriptor, value etc. is
to be inserted
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.8 Message entry configuration page.
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Message Number
Message
Replace {n} with
Select the required message from the picklist.
Enter the message by using the pop-up keyboards (section 3.3.1)
A picklist allowing the user to select data to be embedded in the message:
Source Descriptor: The descriptor of the source which triggers the job message.
Source Value: The instantaneous value of the source at trigger time.
Source Alarm Data: Details (see table 4.3.8) of the source alarm at message trigger
time.
Alarm Type
Absolute
Deviation
Embedded details
Enable, Type (high or low), Threshold, Status
Enable, Type (in or out), Reference, Deviation, Status
Rate of change Enable, Type (rise or fall), Amount, Change time, Status
Table 4.3.8 Alarm details versus alarm type
Note: If any of ‘Source Descriptor’, ‘Source Value’ or ‘Source Alarm Data’ are embedded in a message which is triggered by a job which cannot be associated with a specific source (e.g. event,
timer), then the embedded value will be: ?????.
(Continued)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 95
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.8 MESSAGES (Cont.)
Replace {n} with (Cont.)
Specified Descriptor, Specified Value, Specified Alarm data: Produces a further field
‘{n} source’, described below.
Batch Status: Causes the status (‘Active’ or ‘Inactive’) of the current batch to be embedded. See Section 4.3.10 for details of the Batch option.
Batch Field data: Allows a selected batch field to be included in the message. If
a batch is not running at the time the message is triggered, the Batch field data is
replaced by ‘?????’. See Section 4.3.10 for details of the Batch option.
Note: Group number must be entered if the batch is configured for Group mode.
Instrument Name: Allows the Instrument Name (as entered in Configuration/Instrument - section 4.3.1) to be included in the message.
Instrument Number: Causes the instrument number (Network/Address - Section
4.5.1) to be embedded.
Config Revision: Embeds the Config File Version number (System/About - section
4.6.11) in the message
Local User: Embeds the currently logged-in user (e.g. ‘Engineer’, ‘JohnW’, etc.)
{n} source
This field appears only if the previous field (Replace {n} with) is selected as ‘Specified
Descriptor’, ‘Specified Value’ or ‘Specified alarm data’. The associated picklist(s) allow
a specific point, and a specific alarm (if appropriate) to be selected. It is thus possible to configure, say alarm 1 on channel 2, to produce a message giving the descriptor and/or value of, say, totaliser 1.
Notes:
1. n = 1 to 9
2. The example below is intended to clarify message entry techniques.
User Guide
Page 96
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.8 MESSAGES (Cont.)
EXAMPLE
To configure Message 2 to read “The value of Chan two = (Value channel 2) & Tot one = (Value totaliser
1)”
Before configuring the message:
In channel configuration:
Set channel 2 descriptor to: Chan two
Set Channel 2 alarm job to:
Category: Message
Send message(s) to: All Groups
First message: 2) Message 2
Last Message: 2) Message 2
On: Active
In Totaliser configuration:
Set Totaliser 1 descriptor to: Tot one
In Messages configuration:
1. Select Message 2.
2. Access the Symbols keyboard (section 3.3.1) and enter, without spaces, {}={}&{}={}
3. Access the Numeric keyboard and insert 1, 2, 3, 4 within the braces to give: {1}={2}&{3}={4}
4. Access the Alphabet keyboard, and insert text and spaces: The value of {1} = {2} & {3} = {4}
5. Set ‘Replace {1}’ to “Source Descriptor’
6. Set ‘Replace {2}’ to ‘Source Value’
7. Set ‘Replace {3}’ to ‘Specified Descriptor’
8. Set ‘{3} source’ to Tot one
9. Set ‘Replace {4}’ to ‘Specified Value’
10. Set ‘{4} source’ to ‘Tot one’
The result of this is that, should the channel 2 alarm go active, the following message would be sent to all
groups, appear on the ‘chart’ and become part of all groups’ histories:
18/10/01 11:19:58 The value of Chan two = 6.0˚C & Tot one = 3383.8073 Units
Note: On some models, the message may be wider than the screen. If necessary, the message
can be shortened (e.g. use ‘Ch2’ instead of ‘Chan two’), or it can be viewed in full, either in Message log, (section 3.1.4) or by using Review Software, if available.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 97
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.9 User Linearisation Tables
The Channel configuration item ‘Lin Type’ includes 12 linearisation tables called, initially, UserLin1 to
UserLin12. This User Linearisation part of the instrument configuration allows the user to enter linearisation look-up tables of between two and 66 pairs of points.
The pairs of points are entered as X1Y1, X2Y2... ...XnYn,
where ‘n’ is the specified number of points.
X1 to Xn represent the inputs to the function.
Y1 to Yn represent the corresponding outputs from the function.
Notes:
1. Each Y value must be unique - i.e. there cannot be more than one X value with the same Y value
assigned to it.
2. Each X value (other than the first) must be greater than the previous one.
3. Each Y value (other than the first) must be greater than the previous one.
4. To specify units other than temperature units, the channel ‘scaled’ facility must be used. The
scale low/high values should be set to be the same as the range low/high values, and the required units entered
The import/export Linearisation tables feature described in ‘Save/Restore’ (section 4.2) offers an alternative way of entering linearisation tables.
Figure 4.3.9a shows the default configuration page. Figure 4.3.9b shows a simple table for relating water
depth to water volume for a cylindrical tank with a conical bottom.
User Linearisation 3) UserLin3
Descriptor UserLin3
Format Numeric
Number of Points 2
Select Numeric
or Scientific
X1 0
Y1 0
X2 1
Y2 1
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.9a User linearisation configuration page
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
User Linearisation Allows a user linearisation table to be selected for configuration.
Descriptor
Allows the user to enter a name of up to 20 characters (including spaces) for the table.
Format
This allows the point pair values to be entered as normal numeric values (Numeric)
or in ‘Scientific’ format (Scientific). When ‘Scientific’ is selected, values are displayed
and entered as a decimal number between 1 and 10† (the mantissa), followed by
a multiplier (the exponent). E.G. to enter a value of 1244.5678, the value entered
would be 1.2445678E3, where 3 represents the number of places that the decimal
point has been shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a number between
1 and 10†. To enter a value of 0.0004196, the entry would be 4.196E-4. Figure 4.3.9b,
below, gives further examples.
† Notes
1. Strictly this is a number less than 10, as 10 would be 1.0E1.
2. There must be at least one number after the decimal point.
User Guide
Page 98
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.9 USER LINEARISATION TABLES (Cont.)
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Number of points This is used to enter the total number of point pairs in the table. The following XY
fields increase in number up to the entered value. (A scroll bar appears if there are
more points than can be displayed in the available screen height.)
X1 to XN
The input values to the table, where N is the ‘Number of Points’ entered above.
Y1 to YN
The resulting, corresponding output values from the look-up table.
Y
3 metres
6.5 metres
60
Volume (cubic metres)
50
40
Point
pair
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Numeric
X
Y
0
0.0
0.5
0.074
1
0.589
1.5
1.988
2
4.712
3
11.771
4
18.840
5
25.908
6
32.977
7
40.045
8
47.114
8.5
50.648
Scientific
X
Y
0.0E0 0.0E0
0.5E0 7.4E-2
1.0E0 5.89E-1
1.5E0 1.988E0
2.0E0 4.712E0
3.0E0 1.1771E1
4.0E0 1.8840E1
5.0E0 2.5908E1
6.0E0 3.2977E1
7.0E0 4.0045E1
8.0E0 4.7114E1
8.5E0 5.0648E1
2 metres
30
20
10
X
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Depth (metres)
Figure 4.3.9b Sample User Linearisation table.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 99
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.10 Batch recording option
Batch records form a part of recording history and are included in the normal archiving process to a
removable SD or Compact Flash card or to a remote PC (sections 4.1 and 4.3.5). Batches can be initiated
directly by the operator (if access permission is granted), automatically whenever a specified counter
changes value, by job or remotely via MODBUS/TCP.
Batches can be defined as start/stop, or continuous and can incorporate all channels, or just those associated with a specified Group. For start/stop batches, the batch record starts when the batch is started,
and continues until it is stopped. For continuous batches, the batch record starts when the batch is
started and continues until the next batch is started, or until batch recording is disabled.
When using ‘PC review’ software the ‘Go to Batch’ feature can be used to select a particular batch record.
If ‘ Name files by Batch’ is enabled a separate history file is created for each batch.
For each batch start, a start message is printed:
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Batch start (User Full Name)
Where DD/MM/YY is the date, HH:MM:SS is the time, and User Full name is either the current user name,
the security level (e.g. Engineer) or ‘Automatic’ if the batch has been initiated by job, or ‘Modbus’ if triggered remotely. A similar message is printed at Batch Stop. (There are no stop messages associated
with continuous batch selection).
In addition to the above start/stop messages, up to six lines of text can, if required, be printed on the
‘chart’ at the start of a batch and, if required, at the end of a batch. The messages are in two parts,
which for the sake of this document, are called ‘Headings’ and ‘Values’ The Headings are entered in
Fields 1 to 6 in Batch Configuration. The Values associated with these headings are entered by the operator at initiation.
AUDITOR MESSAGES
If either Auditor option is fitted a Config/Security Revision message appears immediately after the Batch
Start message:
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Config Revision:NNNNNN Security Revision:SSSSSS
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Batch start (User Full Name)
BATCH SUMMARY
A Batch Summary page can be displayed from the Summary menu described in section 3.1.4, above.
THERMAL UNIFORMITY SURVEY (TUS)
Certain aspects of the batch operation are affected by the TUS option. In particular, the operator can be
made to carry out an input adjust procedure before the batch starts, after it finishes, or both. Full details
are to be found in section 15.
User Guide
Page 100
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.10 BATCH RECORDING OPTION (Cont.)
CONFIGURATION
Note: See section 15 for
details of the TUS option.
Figure 4.3.10a Batch configuration menu
As depicted in figure 4.3.10a, the following configuration entries can be made:
SCOPE
Allows the user to define all configured channels (instrument) or just those in a particular group, for batch
control. If ‘Group’ is selected, a further picklist appears allowing a specific group to be selected.
SHOW BATCH ENTRY LIST
Enabling this field produces a list of 13 entries which can be used as field entries when starting or storing
a batch (as described in ‘Operator initiation’, below). The first entry is the MAC address of the recorder
and is not editable. The remaining 12 entries (of up to 60 characters each) are freely editable. This is a
different list from that entered (for Operator notes) in Instrument configuration (section 4.3.1).
ENABLE
Allows the batch function to be switched on or off.
BATCH MODE
Allows batch mode to be selected as Continuous or Start/Stop.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 101
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.10 BATCH RECORDING CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
BATCH FIELDS
Allows the number of messages to be printed at batch start/stop to be selected between one and six.
FIELD 1
This field is the first of up to six which can be used as headings for batch information. Headings can be up
to 20 characters long (including spaces). In the example shown in Figure 4.3.10a, Heading 1 (Field 1) has
the entry ‘Batch Number:’. When initiating the batch, the operator has to enter a value to be associated
with this heading (see below), unless ‘Use Counter’ is selected in the following ‘Batch Number’ field.
BATCH NUMBER
This allows the Value entered for Field 1’s heading to be selected as ‘Use Text’ or ‘Use Counter’.
USE TEXT
USE COUNTER
When Text is selected, the value for field 1 is entered by the operator on initiation of
the batch.
When Counter is selected, a further field appears (‘counter’) allowing a specific counter to be selected from a picklist. The selected counter initiates a new batch whenever it changes value, and the counter value is appended to the text associated with
Field 1 (but see note 2). See section 4.3.13 for details of counters.
Notes:
1. Start batch is initiated on any change in counter value - not just increment.
2. It is recommended that when ‘Use Counter’ is selected, then only counter 1 be used as the
batch initiator. Other counters may be selected, but operation is not guaranteed.
FIELDS 2 TO 6
Fields 2 to 6 are also used as headings for batch information. Values for these headings must be entered
by the operator prior to Batch initiation. See also ‘On new clear’, below. Headings can be up to 20 characters long (including spaces).
ON START LOG
This defines how many of the selected Fields are to be printed at batch start. An entry of ‘1’ means that
only Field 1 will be printed. An entry of ‘2’ means that Fields 1 and 2 will be used, and so on. An entry of
0 means that only the ‘Batch Start’ message will be printed. It is not possible to print only, say, Field 3. If
Field 3 is required, it must be preceded by Fields 1 and 2.
ON STOP LOG
As for On start log, above, but for batch stop. This item appears only if Start/Stop is selected as batch
mode.
ON NEW CLEAR
For ‘Use Text’ Batches only, this allows the user to clear none or more of the batch entries at each batch
start. In the example above, if the user enters a batch number of say 050825.001, with Customer Name:
FishesRus, Operator name: Marvin, Supervisor: Fred, then setting ‘On New Clear’ to ‘1’, causes the batch
number to be cleared, and to have to be re-entered, each time a new batch is started.
In a similar way, setting ‘On New Clear’ to ‘2’ means that the batch number value and the Customer
Name: value to be cleared. A new batch cannot be started without new values first being entered.
User Guide
Page 102
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.10 BATCH RECORDING CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
NAME FILES BY BATCH
As an aid to identification, if ‘Name Files by Batch’ is selected, the Batch Name, as entered by the operator, is inserted into the history file name. For example, if a batch name of 060511.001 is amongst the
items archived to disk, then this file will appear in the form:
Group Name~060511.001~YYYYMMDD_HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH,
Where YYYYMMDD is the date (e.g.20060511 = 11th May 2006) and HH----HH is a 16 digit hex code*
used by the recorder and by review software to identify the file. If name files by batch is not selected, the
Batch name is not included, and the file appears as:
Group Name~YYYYMMDD_HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH,
*The HHH--HHH code contains the following information:
�
����������������������
����������������������
��������������������
�������������������
�
�
�
�����������������������������������������
��������������������������
�������������
�������������������������������
PRE CALIBRATION
This item appears only if the TUS option is fitted. When enabled, the user must carry out an input adjust
procedure prior to batch start. If Audit Trail is enabled, messages appear on the chart for each channel
adjusted:
05/10/10 11:22:09 1) Channel 1 Pre cal high 4.998, Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 11:22:00 1) Channel 1 Pre cal low 0.998, Post cal low 1.000
POST CALIBRATION
As above, for Pre calibration, but when enabled, the adjust procedure must be carried out on batch stop.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 103
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.10 BATCH RECORDING CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
OPERATOR INITIATION
If the TUS options is fitted - see section 15.
This section describes how the operator initiates a new batch. Batches can be initiated from any of the
trend, bargraph or numeric display modes, but the start/stop and other messages appear only on the
Vertical Trend screen, in the trend history display and in Message Log. Batch information and status are
retained whilst power is off.
To initiate a batch, either
1, Operate the Option key, then press ‘Batch’ in the Option Menu* which appears, or
2. Touch the coloured message area at the top of the screen. The batch Status page appears - in this
example - with no batch running.
3. Press ‘New’. A new display page appears (figure 4.3.10b), showing all the headings entered in Field 1
to Field 6 during configuration. If the Batch Fields entry is less than 6, then only the selected number
appear (in our example, 4).
*Notes:
1. The option menu is context sensitive, so its appearance may differ from the example shown.
2. Batches can also be started and stopped from the Batch Summary page as described in section 3.1.4.
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Faceplates On/Off
Channel Cycling Off
Enter History
'Group' data appears only if
Scope = Group (Section 1.2)
Group Group 1
Status No batch in progress
New
User Guide
Page 104
Close
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.10 BATCH RECORDING CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
OPERATOR INITIATION (Cont.)
‘Values’ can now be entered for these headings by entering strings of up to 60 characters (including
spaces).
This may be done by touching the empty field and using the resulting pop-up keyboard to type-in the
entry, or by touching the field continuously for two seconds or more and then selecting one of the predefined Batch Entry messages previously entered in the configuration page. In the latter case, the predefined message may be edited in the normal way before being Applied. Such editing has no effect on the
original message.
Once the entries are complete, operation of the Start button initiates batch recording. Operation of the
Store button saves the configuration for later initiation by job, by counter or via MODBUS/TCP.
The Values entry page is replaced by the batch status page (figure 4.3.10c), this time showing details of
the batch in progress. This page allows the batch to be stopped or a new one triggered.
Note: Text may also be entered using a suitable keyboard connected via the USB port behind the
access flap or (if the relevant option is fitted) one of the USB ports at the rear of the instrument
(section 2.2).
Batch - Furnace1 Temps
Batch Number: 060509.015
Customer Name: FishesRus
Operator name: Marvin
Supervisor:
00:0A:8D:00:20:A0
Batch Entry list.
Appears if batch entry area is touched
continuously for 2 seconds (approx).
List entries are made in Batch Configuration.
FishesRus
Marvin
Arthur
Tricia
Jason
Manky Clothes Ltd.
Rat's Nest Hair Co.
These keys not shown whilst the Batch
Entry list displayed
Store
Start
Close
Figure 4.3.10b Batch values entry page
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 105
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.10 BATCH INITIATION (Cont.)
Batch - Group 1
Status Batch in progress
Batch Number: 050822.001
Customer Name: FishesRus
Operator Name: Marvin
Supervisor: Fred
New
Stop Close
Figure 4.3.10c Status page (Batch running)
BATCH MESSAGE DISPLAY
The messages are displayed on the Graph Trend display as shown in figure 4.3.10d, below. This figure
uses the example given in the previous sections, and uses only four messages. Further messages would
appear above message 4. The figure also shows that time and date are added to the messages, and that
the currently running batch number is given in the Group name area. Touching this area calls the Batch
status page. In this job-triggered batch, the alarm triggering the job also appears (as shown).
Engineer
Channel 1
400.00
22/08/05
22/08/05
22/08/05
22/08/05
22/08/05
22/08/05
22/08/05
Group 1
Batch Number 050822.001
480.00
560.00
Batch trigger source
12:14:31
12:14:31
12:14:31
12:14:31
12:14:31
12:14:31
12:14:31
Touching this area calls the
640.00
720.00
batch status
page
Alarm(s) on 3(1)
Supervisor: Fred
Operator Name: Marvin
Customer name: FishesRus
Batch number: 050822.001
Config Revision:48 Security Revision 1
Batch start (Automatic)
700.87
12:14:17
22/08/05
800.00
12:13:46
22/08/05
Operator entries
Batch start message
Date and time automatically printed
12:11:06
22/08/05
12:08:26
22/08/05
Figure 4.3.10d Typical Batch start messages
User Guide
Page 106
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.10 BATCH INITIATION (Cont.)
NON OPERATOR INITIATION
Batch start/stop can be initiated by job, by counter or via MODBUS/TCP
JOB INITIATION
As described in section 4.7.9, a job can be set up to initiate a batch whenever the job source becomes
active. If ‘Scope’ is set to ‘Group’ a specific group can be selected (default = Group 1) and the job will act
only on the batch associated with this group. Batch ‘Start’ jobs automatically start the batch using the
entries made during the ‘Store’ function, described above. ‘Display Batch Dialog’ jobs allow the user to
enter the field values manually, before the job starts.
COUNTER INITIATION
If Batch Number is selected as ‘Use Counter’, then a new batch will automatically be started whenever the
selected counter changes value (increment, decrement or preset). The new value of the counter is used
as the value associated with Field 1.
For the other fields to have values printed on the chart, these must have been entered as described
above for Operator initiation, then the ‘Store’ button touched.
The ‘On new clear’ setting is ignored, the stored values being used each new batch.
Batch start messages are of the form:
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Batch start (Automatic)
Batch recording cannot be stopped by Counter action.
MODBUS INITIATION
In order to initiate batch recording via MODBUS/TCP, a Batch Start flag has to be set (value = 0001). For
Scope = Group, the flag for the specified group must be set. For Scope = Instrument any group’s Batch
Start flag may be used.
The address of the flag for group 1 is decimal 42364; the address for group N is {42364 + 629(N-1)}
For further details of the Modbus TCP option see section 8.
If Batch mode = Start/Stop, batches can also be stopped via MODBUS. The address for group 1 is 42365;
the address for group N is {42364 + 629(N-1)}. Again the value must be set to 0001.
Modbus start messages are of the form:
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Batch start (Modbus)
Stop messages are similar.
EVENT SOURCES
As described in section 4.3.6 , ‘Batch Start’, ‘Batch Running’ and ‘Batch Stop’ can be selected as event
sources. If ‘Scope’ = ‘Group’ in Configuration (described above), then the user can select which group’s
batch is to be used as the event source.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 107
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 Maths
CONFIGURATION
This feature allows a range of mathematical functions to be performed. Figure 4.3.11a shows a typical
configuration page - the selected maths function determines which configuration fields actually appear.
Select maths
channel number
Maths Number 1) Fo 1
Value 32.65
Mins
Reset now
Function
Fvalue of
Sterilizing Temp
Temperature interval
Low cut off
Units
Descriptor
A/B Switching
Scale Low
Scale high
Zone low
Zone high
Scale Type
PV Format
Max Decimal Digits
Colour
Alarm Number
Enable
Job Number
Category
Current value
Reset button appears only
for resettable functions
fValue
Select Required maths function
Channel 1
Select Source input
121.1
10
75
Mins
Fo 1
0
Mins
60
Mins
%
0
%
100
None
Select None, Linear or Log
Numeric
Select Numeric, Elapsed Time,
Scientific, Time or Date
2
26
1
Off
1
Select Alarm number
Select: Off, Unlatched,
Latched orTrigger
Select Job number
No Action
Select job category
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11a Maths configuration menu (typical - varies from function to function)
MATHS NUMBER
Allows the user to select the required maths channel for configuration. The maximum number of maths
channels is selected in the Virtual channels section of the Configuration/Options display, described in
section 4.3.22 .
VALUE
This field shows the current value of the selected maths channel. If the channel has not yet been configured, the value reads ‘Off’.
RESET NOW
This button appears only after a resettable function has been selected. Operation of the button sets the
maths value to zero.
User Guide
Page 108
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 MATHS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Function
This picklist allows the relevant maths function to be selected. In the following description, the word
‘channel’ is used as an umbrella term for input channels, maths channels, totalisers etc.
Off
Allows the function to be disabled. Once ‘Apply’ has been actioned, all configuration for this Maths number is lost.
Constant
Allows a maths channel to be set to a constant value.
Add
Allows any channel or a constant value to be added to any other.
Subtract
Allows any channel or a constant value to be subtracted from any other.
Multiply
Allows any channel or a constant value to be multiplied by any other.
Divide
Allows any channel or a constant value to be divided by any other. Should the value
of the divisor pass through zero, ‘Maths Channel N error’ and ‘Maths Channel Failure’
messages appear.
Group average*
The instantaneous value of all the channels in the source group added together and
divided by the number of channels in the group. For example, in a group of four
channels whose instantaneous values are 4, 8, 2 and 6, the group average is (4 + 8
+ 2 + 6) / 4 = 5. The relevant source group is selected by picklist. Should a channel
return a non-valid value, it is excluded from the calculation, and the result of the function is the average of the remaining channels.
Group minimum* The lowest value of any of the channels in the source group. For example, in a group
of four channels whose instantaneous values are 4, 8, 2 and 6, the group minimum is
2. The required source group is selected by picklist. Should a channel return a nonvalid value, it is excluded from the calculation, and the result of the function is the
minimum of the remaining channels.
Group maximum* The highest value of any of the channels in the source group. For example, in a
group of four channels whose instantaneous values are 4, 8, 2 and 6, the group
maximum is 8. The required source group is selected by picklist. Should a channel
return a non-valid value, it is excluded from the calculation, and the result of the function is the maximum of the remaining channels.
*Note:
If a maths channel with a Group function is contained within its own source group, then it will
act on itself as well as on the other group contents, thus changing the calculation.
For example, if Group 1 were to contain channel 1, channel 2 and maths channel 1, where
maths channel 1 had the function ‘Group Maximum’ for Group 1, then the Group Maximum
would become a latching function, showing the highest value ever reached by channel 1, channel 2 or maths channel 1 since the group was configured. In order to trace the instantaneous
highest value, channel 1 and channel 2 would have to be contained in e.g. Group 1, and the
group maximum channel contained in, say, Group 2, but with a source of ‘Group 1’.
Modbus Comms input
Allows Modbus communications to be selected for reading values from slave instruments - see section 4.3.15.
Ethernet/IP Comms Input
Allows Ethernet/IP communications to be selected for reading values from client
instruments - see section 4.3.21.
Stopwatch
This causes the value of the maths channel to increment in milliseconds. The value
can be displayed in milliseconds (PV format = numeric), or in HH:MM:SS (PV format =
elapsed time).
The value can be held, using a ‘Disable’ job or set to zero either using a ‘reset’ job or
by the operation of the ‘Reset now’ button in the maths configuration page. See section 4.7 for a description of jobs.
The function value is retained during power off.
Note: The scale low and high values are displayed in numeric format for both numeric and
elapsed time display formats
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 109
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
Copy
Copies the value of a selected point to the maths channel being configured. Allows
extra alarms to be set up for the copied point.
Polynomial
Provides a polynomial curve fit for the specified point, using up to 8 orders,
Fvalue
This function calculates ‘equivalent time at sterilizing temperature’ for temperatures
above and below the sterilizing temperature. FO (dry) and FH (steam) sterilizing
calculations can be carried out, by entering the correct constant. The value can be
held, using a ‘Disable’ job or set to zero (prior to the next run) using a ‘reset’ job. See
section 4.7 for a description of jobs. The function value is retained during power off.
Switch
Allows two channels (‘A’ and ‘B’) to be selected as alternative sources for the selected
maths channel to copy. The maths channel copies source ‘A’, unless a ‘Switch to B’
job is active on the maths channel. See section 4.7 for Job descriptions.
Linear Mass Flow This function calculates mass flow from linear-type transducer outputs.
Root Mass Flow
This function calculates mass flow from square root-type transducer outputs.
Rolling Average This takes the average value of a single channel over a specified number of readings
taken at a specified interval. The function value is retained during power off.
MKT Mean Kinetic Temperature. A single calculation to simulate non-isothermal effects of
variations in storage temperature.
10 to the power Output = 10 raised to the power of the selected input value.
Group Latched Minimum
Outputs the minimum value reached by any of the points in a selected source group
since last reset. The function ignores points that are not producing valid PV. A disable job stops the function reading its input. A reset job sets the function to the
current minimum value within the group. Note that for proper operation, the maths
function must be in a group which is not the source group. If this is not the case, it
will always see itself as the lowest valued point in the group, and Reset operations
will have no useful effect.
Group Latched Maximum
As for Group Latched Minimum, above, but outputs the maximum value of the
source group.
Sample and Hold This function is initiated by a trigger job. At trigger time, the selected point value
is sampled, and its value at trigger time is output continuously by this function. On
reset, the PV becomes ‘No data’.
Square Root Outputs the square root of the value of the selected point.
High Select Allows two points to be selected as inputs. The output of the function is the value of
that input point which currently has the higher value.
Low Select Allows two points to be selected as inputs. The output of the function is the value of
that input point which currently has the lower value.
Saturated Steam Mass Flow
Calculates mass flow in kg/s for saturated steam, using either the steam temperature
(Celsius) or pressure (MPa) as appropriate to the process.
Saturated Steam Heat Flow
Calculates the energy flow in kJ/s for saturated steam, using either the steam temperature (Celsius) or pressure (MPa) as appropriate to the process.
Saturated Steam Heat Consumed
Calculates the heat consumed in kJ/s for saturated steam, using the inlet steam temperature (Celsius) or pressure (MPa) (as appropriate to the process), and the return
(condensate) temperature.
Group MKT Calculates Mean Kinetic Temperature of a specified group of channels
User Guide
Page 110
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
Log Base 10
Takes log10 of selected input. (For example: Input = 2 gives maths function value =
0.3010)
Log Base e
Takes loge of selected input. (For example: Input = 2 gives maths function value =
0.6931)
e to the power
Takes natural antilog of input. (For example: Input = 0.6931 gives maths function
value = 2)
Modulus
This function copies the magnitude of the input value, without the sign. For example,
the modulus of value +100 = +100; the modulus of -100 = +100.
Channel Maximum Maths function value is the minimum value the input point has reached since last
reset. When reset, the value is reset to the current input value.
Channel Minimum Maths function value is the minimum value the input point has reached since last
reset. When reset, the value is reset to the current input value.
Channel Average Takes the average value of the selected channel over a specified time period. The
time period must be a multiple of 125 msecs. For example, a period of 0.2 seconds
would be rejected, but a period of 0.25 seconds would be accepted.
Master comms
Allows a maths channel to read point values from other instruments on the Modbus
link.
Rate of change
Produces a value for the speed at which a signal changes over a specified period.
O2 Correction
This function carries out O2 correction of gas measurements for use in Continuous
Emissions Monitoring applications.
Relative Humidity This uses wet and dry bulb temperatures and atmospheric pressure inputs to produce a percentage Relative Humidity reading.
Zirconia probe
Allows oxygen concentration and oxygen potential to be determined by solving the
Nernst oxygen equation.
Timestamp
When triggered by an event or alarm job, this causes the current number of milliseconds since 00:00 hrs on 1st January 1970 to appear as the function value. If the selected PV format is date or time, the result is displayed as date or time, respectively.
Config Revision Number*
Allows the Configuration Revision number to be used as the input to a maths channel. When this maths channel is included in a group, the user can determine the
Configuration Revision number obtaining at any time in the history record.
Security Revision Number*
Allows the Security Revision number to be used as the input to a maths channel.
When this maths channel is included in a group, the user can determine the Security
Revision number obtaining at any time in the history record.
*Note: See ‘About’ in section 4.6 for a description of the Configuration and Security Revision numbers.
Thermocouple Cal Correction
Defines correction points allowing offsets to be added to channel inputs to compensate (for example) for equipment errors.
SCALE LOW / SCALE HIGH
The ‘zero’ and full scale values for the maths function, as displayed. If A/B switching is enabled, a second
set of scale low and scale high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are used during normal operation. ‘B’
values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 111
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
PV FORMAT
Numeric
Elapsed time
Scientific
Time/date
Provides a decimal value for the maths channel.
Shows the maths channel value in HH:MM:SS (hours minutes, seconds) format.
Normally used only for time functions. For other functions, elapsed time counts in
milliseconds e.g. a PV of 10000 would be displayed as 00:00:10; a PV of 60000 would
be displayed as 00:01:00
Values are displayed and entered as a decimal number between 1.0 and 10† (the
mantissa), followed by a multiplier (the exponent). E.G. to enter a value of 1244.5678,
the value entered would be 1.2445678E3, where 3 represents the number of places
that the decimal point must be shifted to the left in order to convert the value to
a number between 1 and 10†. To enter a value of 0.0004196, the entry would be
4.196E-4.
For timestamp functions, displays the timestamp as time or date as selected, instead
of a number of milliseconds, as would be displayed in numeric format.
† Notes
1. Strictly this is a number less than 10, as 10 would be 1.0E1.
2. There must be at least one number after the decimal point.
REMAINING CONFIGURATION ITEMS
The remaining configuration items are identical with the relevant items in Input Channel configuration
(section 4.3.3).
FUNCTION DETAILS
POLYNOMIAL FIT
A polynomial curve fit of up to eight orders:
A0 + A1(X) + A2(X2) + A3(X3) + A4(X4) + A5(X5) + A6(X6) + A7(X7) + A8(X8) where X is the value of the
source channel and A0 to A8 are constants. Figure 4.11.3b shows the configuration items for a third order
fit with channel 2 used as the source (X), and A0 = 1, A1 = 2, A2 = 3 and A3 = 4.
Maths Number
Value
Function
Orders
Polynomial of
A0
A1
A2
A3
1) Math 1
OFF
Polynomial
Units
3
Channel 2
1
Math 1
2
0
3
1
4
Figure 4.11.3b Polynomial configuration fields (3rd order)
User Guide
Page 112
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
FVALUE
To calculate the equivalent time at Sterilizing Temperature (for temperatures below, at and above Sterilizing Temperature) both in dry (FH) and steam (FO) sterilizing environments, using the following equation:
ma t −Target temp
Fval t = Fval t−1 + T × 10
€
Where Fvalt
Fvalt-1
T
mat
Target temp
Z
Z
=F value at time t (minutes)
=F value last iteration
=Internal recorder iteration interval (minutes)
=Value of temperature measuring channel
=121.1˚C for FO; 170˚C for FH
=Temperature interval representing a factor-of-10 reduction in killing efficiency
=10˚C for FO; = 20˚C for FH
User configuration consists of entering the channel which is measuring temperature, the relevant sterilizing temperature and temperature interval (Z-value) and a low cut-off value, if required.
Figure 4.3.11c shows the configuration fields for measuring Fo, using channel 1 as the temperature input
channel, Fo values for target temperature (121.1˚C) and z-value (10˚C), and 75˚C as the low cut-off value,
below which killing credits are not to be counted.
Maths Number 2) Math 2
Value OFF
Reset now
Function
F value of
Sterilizing Temp
Temperature interval
Low cut off
fValue
Channel 1
121.1
10
75
Figure 4.3.11c Fo setup example
APPLICATION NOTE
To ensure that sterilizer loads which contain materials with differing thermal inertias are thoroughly sterilized, a typical sterilizer has up to 12 different measuring points within the load. To ensure accuracy, the
temperature sensors should be calibrated, and the channel adjustment facility used to compensate for
any inaccuracies found.
If each of the inputs is used to compute an F value, each of these values can then be used as an input to a
Group Minimum function, with a high absolute alarm set at the correct F value. The alarm output can be
used to sound a warning, or an associated relay can be linked into the autoclave control system to signify
the end of a sterilization cycle.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 113
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
LINEAR MASS FLOW
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors
outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the recorder manufacturer takes
no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack.
The equations solved is:
QMt =
where,QMt =
K =
Rg =
€
Z =
Flow t =
AbsP t =
Temp =
Scaling factor
K
Flow t × AbsPt
×
Temp
Rg × Z
Mass flow (in kg/sec), at time ‘t’
Scaling factor (see below)
Specific gas constant in J/kg-K (see below)
Compressibility factor (see below)
Measured value from the flow meter at time ‘t’
Absolute pressure of the fluid at time ‘t’ in kPa(A)
Temperature of the fluid in Kelvins
This is determined from an assumed value of Qm at a known Flow, AbsP and Temp.
The value is chosen to give an output within the range low scale to high scale.
Specific gas constantThe specific gas constant for any gas is available from published tables. For convenience, the value for a number of common gases is given in table 4.3.11a, below.
Gas
RG
(J/kg-K)
Air
Ammonia
Carbon dioxide
Carbon monoxide
Ethylene
Hydrogen
Methane
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Steam
287.1
488.2
188.9
296.8
296.4
4116.0
518.4
296.8
259.8
188.5
461.4
Table 4.3.11a Common gas constants
User Guide
Page 114
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
LINEAR MASS FLOW (Cont.)
Commpressibility factor (Z-Factor)
Compressibility factor is a density-related measure of how far a particular gas deviates from a ‘perfect’ gas under any set of temperature and pressure conditions, and
is given by the equation:
where:
€
Z=
P 1
×
T ρ
Z =
P =
T =
ρ =
Compressibility factor
Absolute pressure of the gas in kPa(A)
Absolute temperature of the gas (Kelvins)
gas density at pressure P and temperature T (from published tables)
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Figure 4.3.11d shows the relevant part of the configuration menu for a maths channel with ‘Linear Mass
Flow’ function selected.
Maths Number 1) Math 1
Units
Value 123.4567
Function Linear Mass Flow
Flow Channel 1
Temperature Channel 2
Absolute Pressure Channel 3
Scale o/p
Ma
Gas Constant
Z
Units
0
0
0
0
Units
J/kg-K
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11d Linear mass flow menu
Flow
Temperature
Absolute Pressure
Scale o/p
Ma
Gas Constant
Z
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Allows the input channel measuring the flowmeter output to be entered
Allows the input channel measuring the fluid temperature (Kelvins) to be entered
Allows the input channel measuring the absolute gas pressure (kPa(A)) to be entered
Full scale output from the flowmeter in flowmeter units (S)
Full scale input range set for ‘Flow’ channel in flowmeter units (mamax)
the relevant gas constant in J/kg-K
The compressibility factor described above.
User Guide
Page 115
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
ROOT MASS FLOW
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors
outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the recorder manufacturer takes
no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack.
The equation solved is:
QMt =
where QMt =
K =
€
Rg =
Z =
DeltaP t =
AbsP t =
Temp =
K2
DeltaPt × AbsPt
×
Rg × Z
Temp
Mass flow (in kg/sec), at time ‘t’
Scaling factor (see below)
Specific gas constant in J/kg-K (see below)
Compressibility factor (see below)
Measured value across the orifice plate at time ‘t’
Absolute pressure of the fluid at the up-stream tapping at time ‘t’ in kPa(A)
Temperature of the fluid at the up-stream tapping in Kelvins
Scaling factor
This is determined from an assumed value of Qm at a known DeltaP, AbsP and Temp.
The value is chosen to give an output within the range low scale to high scale.
Specific gas constantThe specific gas constant for any gas is available from published tables. For convenience, the value for a number of common gases is given in table 4.3.11a, above.
Compressibility factor (Z-Factor)
Compressibility factor is a density-related measure of how far a particular gas deviates from a ‘perfect’ gas under any set of temperature and pressure conditions, and
is given by the equation:
where:
€
User Guide
Page 116
Z=
P 1
×
T ρ
Z =
P =
T =
ρ =
Compressibility factor
Absolute pressure of the gas in kPa(A)
Absolute temperature of the gas (Kelvins)
gas density at pressure P and temperature T (from published tables
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
ROOT MASS FLOW (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Figure 4.3.11e shows the relevant part of the configuration menu for a maths channel with ‘Root Mass
Flow’ function selected.
Maths Number 1) Math 1
Units
Value 123.4567
Function Root Mass Flow
Delta Pressure Channel 1
Temperature Channel 2
Absolute Pressure Channel 3
Scale o/p 0
Ma 0
Gas Constant 0
J/kg-K
Z 0
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11e Root mass flow menu
Delta Pressure
Allows the input channel measuring the differential pressure output from the orifice
plate to be entered
Temperature
Allows the input channel measuring the fluid temperature (Kelvins) at the upstream
tapping to be entered
Absolute Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the absolute gas pressure (kPa(A)) to be entered
Scale o/p
Full scale output from the flowmeter in flowmeter units (S)
Ma
Full scale input range set for ‘Flow’ channel in flowmeter units (mamax)
Gas Constant
The relevant gas constant in J/kg-K
Z
The compressibility factor described above.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 117
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
ROLLING AVERAGE
This calculates the average value of the last R samples of a channel, taken at N second intervals, where R
and N can be defined by the user. At initiation, up to the time of the first sample reading, the displayed
value is the average of the channel sampled every iteration (i.e. at 8 Hz.).
The number of readings over which the average can be taken is limited by the amount of free RAM
instantaneously available, and is thus dependent on the overall configuration of the recorder. An instrument alarm is generated if there is insufficient free RAM available - see section 3.1.3 for details.
Maths Number 4) Math 4
Value OFF
Reset now
Function
Average of
Number of samples
Sample Interval
Rolling Average
Channel 1
10
60
s
Figure 4.3.11f Rolling average menu
MEAN KINETIC TEMPERATURE (MKT)
MKT is defined as ‘the isothermal temperature that corresponds to the kinetic effects of time-temperature distribution’. The recorder calculates MKT, using the equation below:
Tk =
−ΔH
R
−ΔH
−ΔH
−ΔH
⎛ −ΔH
⎜ e RT1max + e RT1min + ... + e RTNmax + e RTNmax
ln⎜
2N
⎜
⎝
⎞
⎟
⎟
⎟
⎠
where: Tk = The required mean kinetic temperature in Kelvins
ΔH = The heat of activation
€
R = The universal gas constant
T1max = The highest temperature reached during the first measurement period (in Kelvins)
T1min = The lowest temperature reached during the first measurement period (in Kelvins)
TNmax = The highest temperature reached during the Nth measurement period (in Kelvins)
TNmin = The lowest temperature reached during the Nth measurement period (in Kelvins)
N = The total number of measurement periods
As described in ‘Configurable items, below, this is simplified for the recorder user , to four entries viz:
The number of the channel measuring temperature, the number of samples to be used, the time between
the samples and the relevant ‘Heat of Activation’.
Note: The input temperature must be in Kelvins. This can be achieved either by setting the relevant channel’s units to Kelvins, or by using a further maths channel to convert the measuring units
to Kelvins.
(K = ˚C + 273.15 or K = 0.555(˚F -32) + 273.15).
User Guide
Page 118
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
MEAN KINETIC TEMPERATURE (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE ITEMS
Figure 4.3.11g shows the configurable items for the MKT function.
Maths Number 1) Math 1
Value 0.0000
Function MKT
Mean Kinetic Temperature of Math 2
Number of samples 52
Sample interval 604800
Heat of Activation 83.144
Units Units
Units
s
kJ/mole
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11g MKT function parameters
Mean Kinetic Temperature of
Select the source from which MKT is to be derived. This may be an input channel,
scaled in Kelvins, or it can be a maths channel used to convert a different temperature scale into Kelvins (see ‘Note’ on previous page).
Number of SamplesEnter the number of samples over which the MKT is to be measured.
Sample interval
Enter the time period, in seconds, between samples. At each sample interval, the
maximum and minimum temperatures reached by the input source, since the last
sample, are entered into the equation.
Heat of Activation The default value is an average value based on many common organic reactions. Allows the user to enter an alternative value, if known.
EXAMPLE 1: To Produce a 4-weekly value of MKT, taking samples every day.
Number of samples = 28
Sample interval = No. of seconds in a day = 24 x 60 x 60 = 86,400
EXAMPLE 2: To produce an annual value of MKT, taking samples every week.
Number of sample = 52
Sample interval = No. of seconds in a week = 7 x 24 x 60 x 60 = 604,800
Notes
1 This function produces a ‘rolling’ result. I.E. when the final (Nth) sample has been taken, the
next sample (N + 1)th replaces Sample 1, the (N + 2th) sample replaces Sample 2, and so on.
2 During the first sample, the current minimum and maximum values of temperature are entered
into the equation at the recorder iteration rate (i.e. 8Hz).
3. The number of readings over which the value can be taken is limited by the amount of free RAM
instantaneously available, and is thus dependent on the overall configuration of the recorder.
An instrument alarm is generated if there is insufficient free RAM available - see section 3.1.3
for details.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 119
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
SATURATED STEAM MASS FLOW
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors
outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the recorder manufacturer takes
no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack.
The equation solved is:
QMt =
Flow t
d
VLT + ΔVT ( 100
)
where,QMt = Mass flow (in kg/sec), at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
Flow t = Measured flow in m3/sec. at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
VLT = Volume of liquid per kg of steam (m3/kg) at temperature T ˚C
€
∆VT = V VT - VLT, where V VT is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T ˚C
d = Dryness factor between 0 (no vapour) and 100 (no liquid)
VLT and ∆V T are available from published tables (note 2), but the recorder user need only enter ‘values’ for
measured flow and either the temperature or the pressure of the steam. These ‘values’ can be constants,
input channels or maths channels. Figure 4.3.11h and accompanying parameter descriptions give full
details.
Maths Number 1) Math 1
Value 123.4567 Units
Function Saturated Steam Mass Flow
Flow Channel 1
Use Temperature
Temperature Channel 2
%
Dryness 0
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11h Typical Saturated Steam Mass Flow configuration page
PARAMETERS
Flow
Use
Temperature
Pressure
Dryness
Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate. If
‘Constant’ selected, a further ‘box’ allows the value for the constant to be entered.
Allows the user to select Temperature (˚C) or Pressure (MPa) for the calculation.
Appears only if Use = Temperature. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel
supplying the steam temperature. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a
value for the constant to be entered.
Appears only if Use = Pressure. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the steam pressure. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a value for
the constant to be entered.
Table 4.3.11b, below, gives multipliers for converting some common pressure units
to MPa. More details may be found at websites http://www.ex.ac.uk/trol/scol/
ccpress.htm and http://www.onlineconversion.com/pressure.htm, amongst others.
Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam. 0 = no vapour; 100 = no liquid.
Notes:
1 The units of kg/sec and m3/sec are used above for simplicity. In fact any time unit can be used.
For example if the measured flow is in m3/hour, then the Mass flow will be in kg/hour.
2. ASME Steam tables 1999, from IAPWF IF97.
User Guide
Page 120
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
SATURATED STEAM MASS FLOW (Cont.)
PRESSURE UNITS CONVERSION
There is a wide range of pressure measuring units in use throughout the world. The following table
gives a multiplication factor for converting some common units to MPa (MegaPascals), to four significant
figures. Further conversion factors can be found at the websites given on the previous page. (Where the
conversion is to Pascals, not to MegaPascals, the factors given have to be divided by 1,000,000.)
Pressure units
Atmospheres
Bar
kg/cm2
kNewton/m2
kPa
mBar
Lb/ft2
Lb/in2 (PSI)
Multiplier for
MPa
0.1013
0.1
0.09 807
0.001
0.001
0.0001
0.00 004 788
0.006 895
Mercury (inches of) 0.003 386
Mercury (mm of)
0.0 001 333
Pressure units
Multiplier for
MPa
Newtons/cm2
Newtons/m2
0.01
Tonnes/m2
0.009 807
Pascals
Tons(UK)/ft2
Tons(US)/ft2
0.000 001
0.000 001
Water (feet of)
0.1 073
0.09 576
0.002 989
Water (mm of)
0.000 009 807
Water (inches of)
0.0 002 491
Table 4.3.11b Pressure unit conversion
The table above shows multiplying factors to convert common pressure units to MPa. This conversion is
carried out as follows:
Example: A pressure transducer, connected to input channel 3 gives an output in the range 10 to 100 PSI.
The input to a steam equation in maths channel 1 requires the pressure units to be MPa. To convert, set
up a further maths channel (e.g. No. 2) as shown below, then use maths channel 2 as the source channel
for the pressure input to the steam equation.
The suggested scale low/high values are based on the resulting pressure range in MPa - i.e 0.06895 to
0.6895.
Maths Number 2) Steam Pressure
Value 0.0348
Function Multiply
Multiply Channel 3
Units
by Constant
Constant Value 0.006895
Units MPa
Descriptor Steam Pressure
MPa
Scale low 0
Scale high 1
MPa
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11i PSI to MPa conversion example
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 121
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
SATURATED STEAM HEAT FLOW
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors
outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the recorder manufacturer takes
no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack.
The equation solved is:
⎛
⎞
Flow t
⎟ h + ΔhT ( d )
QEt = ⎜
100
⎜ V + ΔV d ⎟ LT
T ( 100 ) ⎠
⎝ LT
(
)
where, QEt = Heat energy flow (in kJ/sec), at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
Flow t = Measured flow in m3/sec (Note 1)
VLT = Volume of liquid per kg of steam (m3/kg) at temperature T ˚C
€
∆V T = V VT - VLT, where V VT is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T ˚C
d = Dryness factor between 0 (no vapour) and 100 (no liquid)
hLT = Enthalpy of the liquid in kJ/kg at temperature T ˚C
∆hT = hVT - hLT, where hVT is the enthalpy of vapour in kJ/kg vapour at temperature T ˚C
VLT and ∆V T; hLT and ∆hT are available from published tables (note 2), but the recorder user needs only to
enter ‘values’ for measured flow and either the temperature or the pressure of the steam. These ‘values’
can be constants, input channels or maths channels. Figure 4.3.11j and accompanying parameter descriptions give full details.
Maths Number 2) Math 2
Value 987.6543 Units
Function Saturated Steam Heat Flow
Flow Channel 1
Use Pressure
Pressure Channel 2
%
Dryness 10
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11j Typical Saturated Steam Heat Flow configuration page
PARAMETERS
Flow
Use
Temperature
Pressure (note 3)
Dryness
Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate. If
‘Constant’ selected, a further ‘box’ allows the value for the constant to be entered.
Allows the user to select Temperature (˚C) or Pressure (MPa) for the calculation.
Appears only if Use = Temperature. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel
supplying the steam temperature. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a
value for the constant to be entered.
Appears only if Use = Pressure. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the steam pressure. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a value for
the constant to be entered.
Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam. 0 = no vapour; 100 = no liquid.
Notes:
1 The units of kg/sec and m3/sec are used above for simplicity. In fact any time unit can be used.
For example if the measured flow is in m3/hour, then the Mass flow will be in kg/hour.
2. ASME Steam tables 1999, from IAPWF IF97.
3. See ‘Saturated Steam Mass Flow’ above for details of pressure unit conversion
User Guide
Page 122
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
SATURATED STEAM HEAT CONSUMED
Note: The following assumptions are made with regard to this implementation:
1. The condensate return is 100% wet saturated water. No flash steam component is included.
2. The same mass leaves the system as enters it.
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors
outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the recorder manufacturer takes
no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack.
The equation solved is:
⎛
⎞
Flow t
d
⎟ h + ΔhT1( 100
QEt = ⎜⎜
) − hLT 2
d ⎟ LT1
V
+
ΔV
T1( 100 ) ⎠
⎝ LT1
(
)
where, QEt = Heat energy consumed (in kJ/sec), at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
Flow t = Measured flow in m3/sec (Note 1)
€
VLT1 = Volume of liquid per kg of steam (m3/kg) at temperature T1 ˚C
∆V T1 = V VT1 - VLT1, where V VT1 is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T1 ˚C
d = Dryness factor between 0 (no vapour) and 100 (no liquid)
hLT1 = Enthalpy of the liquid in kJ/kg at temperature T1 ˚C
∆hT1 = hVT1 - hLT1, where hVT1 is the enthalpy of vapour in kJ/kg vapour at temperature T1 ˚C
hLT2 = Enthalpy of the condensate liquid in kJ/kg at temperature T2 ˚C
VLT1 and ∆V T1; hLT1, hLT2 and ∆hT1 are available from published tables (note 2), but the recorder user needs
only to enter ‘values’ for measured flow, either the temperature or the pressure of the steam and the temperature of the condensate. These ‘values’ can be constants, input channels or maths channels. Figure
4.3.11l and accompanying parameter descriptions give full details.
Figure 4.3.11k is a simplified sketch of a typical installation, showing where flow rate, pressure and temperature readings are taken.
Steam supply
Inlet
flow
Inlet pressure
or temperature
Heat
exchanger
Process 1
Heat
exchanger
Process 2
Condensate
temperature
Steam
Trap
Steam
Trap
Condensate
Figure 4.3.11k Measurement transducer - typical locations
Notes:
1 The units of kg/sec and m3/sec are used above for simplicity. In fact any time unit can be used.
For example if the measured flow is in m3/hour, then the Mass flow will be in kg/hour.
2. ASME Steam tables 1999, from IAPWF IF97.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 123
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
SATURATED STEAM HEAT CONSUMED (Cont.)
Maths Number 2) Math 2
Value 987.6543 Units
Function Saturated Steam Heat Consumed
Inlet Flow Channel 1
Use Pressure
Inlet Pressure Channel 2
%
Inlet Dryness 23.8
Return Temperature Channel 3
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11l Typical Saturated Steam Heat Flow configuration page
PARAMETERS
Inlet Flow
Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate. If
‘Constant’ selected, a further ‘box’ allows the value for the constant to be entered.
Use
Allows the user to select Temperature (˚C) or Pressure (MPa) for the calculation.
Inlet Temperature Appears only if Use = Temperature. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel
supplying the steam temperature. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a
value for the constant to be entered.
Inlet Pressure
Appears only if Use = Pressure. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the steam pressure. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a value for
the constant to be entered.
Inlet Dryness
Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam. 0 = no vapour; 100 = no liquid.
Return TemperatureSelect ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the condensate temperature If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a value for the constant to be
entered.
*Note: See Saturated Steam Mass Flow, above, for details of pressure unit conversion
GROUP MKT
Similar in operation to MKT, described above, except that the MKT is derived from a specified group of
points rather than a single point. For each sample period, the maximum and minimum values reached by
any point(s) within the specified group are saved, and used as inputs to the Equation.
Maths Number 1) Math 1
Value 0.0000
Function Group MKT
Source 1) Group 1
Number of samples 3
Sample interval 0.125
Heat of Activation 83.144
Units Units
Units
s
kJ/mole
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11m Group MKT configuration page
User Guide
Page 124
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
RATE-OF-CHANGE
The equation solved is:
dPV Int − Int−p
=
×R
P
dt
Where:
dPV/dt = Rate of change of PV with time
Int = Input value ‘this time’
€ Int - P = Input value ‘last time’ (i.e. ‘this time’ – P)
P = Sample period (i.e. ‘this time’ – ‘last time’) in seconds. Only periods that are a multiple of
0.125 seconds are accepted.*
R = Scaling factor. Generally, R is the number of seconds in the required ‘per unit time’ value.
For example: if R = 1, the rate is ‘per second’; if R = 60, the rate is ‘per minute’; if R = 3600,
the rate is ‘per hour’.
*Note: For channels being read over Modbus, the ‘priority intervals’ set in the Modbus Master
configuration menu (section 4.3.16) may cause the readings to be inaccurate or to be continuously
zero. For this reason, a minimum sample period of 1 second is recommended.
Maths Number 1) Math 1
Value 0.0000
Units
Reset now
Function
Rate of change of
Sample period
Rate Scalar
Units
Rate of change
1) Channel 1
0.125
0.125
s
Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11n Rate of change configuration menu
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 125
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
OXYGEN (O2) CORRECTION
This function carries out O2 correction of gas measurements for use in Continuous Emissions Monitoring
applications. The equation calculated is:
Correction =
€
20.9% − Specified O2
× Measured Gas
20.9% − Measured O2
where,
Specified O2=specified oxygen entered as a constant 5-digit value (prescribed for the particular process).
Measured O2=measured oxygen, entered as a channel number (gas analyser input) (See application
note, below).
Measured Gas=the measured gas, entered as a channel number (gas analyser input).
APPLICATION NOTE
Some Authorities allow Oxygen correction to be made ONLY if the Measured Oxygen value is above a
limit specified by such Authorities.
For the oxygen correction function to conform with this requirement it is necessary to ‘Filter’ the Measured Oxygen value using a High Select function, with ‘Measured Oxygen’ and the Specified Limit constant as its inputs. The output from this function (derived channel number) is then used as the ‘Measured
oxygen’ value.
Maths Number 1) Math 1
Units
Value 0.0000
Function O2 Correction
Measured O2 Channel 1
Measured Gas Channel 2
%
Specified O2 0
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11p Oxygen correction configuration menu
User Guide
Page 126
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
This determines the percentage relative humidity from wet and dry temperature and atmospheric pressure inputs.
Standard temperature and pressure at sea level are defined as 1.01325 Bar, and 15˚C. Pressure varies
with height as indicated in table 4.3.11c. The standard psychrometric constant is 0.000666 (6.66 x 10 -4).
The equation solved is:
RH =
A 0 + wA1 + w 2 A 2 + w 3 A 3 + w 4 A4 + w5 A 5 − {p × AbsP(d − w)}
A 0 + dA1 + d2 A 2 + d3 A 3 + d4 A 4 + d5 A 5
Where:
RH = Percentage relative humidity
A0 = 6.17204663 x 10 -3
€
A1 = 4.28096024 x 10 -4
A 2 = 1.53342964 x 10 -5
A3 = 2.40833685 x 10 -7
A4 = 3.04249240 x 10 -9
A5 = 2.65867713 x 10 -11
p = Psychrometric constant (0.000666)
AbsP = Pressure in Bar (absolute not gauge)
d = Dry bulb temperature in degrees Celsius
w = Wet bulb temperature in degrees Celsius
Geometric height
(metres)
Pressure
(Bar)
-250
0
250
500
750
1000
1500
2000
1.04365
1.01325
0.983576
0.954612
0.926346
0.898762
0.845596
0.795014
Table 4.3.11c
Atmospheric pressure versus height
Maths Number 1) Math 1
Units
Value 0.0000
Function Relative Humidity
Wet bulb temperature Channel 1
Dry bulb temperature Channel 2
Pressure Channel 3
Psychrometric Constant 6.66E-4
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11q Relative humidity configuration menu
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 127
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
ZIRCONIA PROBE
A zirconia (oxygen) probe consists of two platinum electrodes bonded to a pellet or cylinder of zirconia.
At elevated temperatures, such a probe develops an emf across it which is proportional to probe temperature and to the log of the difference in oxygen partial pressure between its two ends.
OXYGEN CONCENTRATION
In order to measure oxygen concentrations, one end of the probe is inserted into the atmosphere to be
measured, whilst the other is subjected to a reference atmosphere. For most applications, air provides a
suitable reference (reference input = 20.95 for air).
The temperature of the probe is normally measured using a type K or type R thermocouple. The temperature effect on the thermocouple is such, that for successful operation, the probe temperature must
be greater than 973K (700˚C).
The equation solved by the maths function is:
P2 =
P1
E
10 0.0496×T
where: P2 = Partial pressure of oxygen in the sampled gas (%)
P1 = partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere (%) (20.95% for air)
E = Electromotive force (emf) across the probe in mV
€
T = Probe temperature in Kelvins
Figure 4.3.11r shows the configuration menu. Figure 4.3.11s shows oxygen concentration versus probe
emf for various temperatures.
Maths Number 1) Math 1
Units
Value 0.0000
Function Zirconia Probe
Probe temperature Channel 1
Probe emf Channel 2
Reference Partial Pressure 20.95
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11r Zirconia probe function configuration menu
To obtain a useful result, it is necessary to scale correctly.
The channel which is measuring the probe output would normally need to be set to: Input Type = mV;
Input low = 0; input high = 100..
A typical temperature-measuring channel might be set up as:
Input Type = Thermocouple; Lin type = Type K; Range low = 273; Range high = 1800, Range units = K.
The maths channel scaling would typically be configured as:
Units = %; Scale Low = 0; Scale High = 5 (for boiler flues) or 10 (for kilns).
User Guide
Page 128
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
ZIRCONIA PROBE (Cont.)
1
8
100
6
4
2
1
8
10
6
Percent Oxygen
4
2
1
8
1
6
4
15
14
˚C
2
˚C
00
13
˚C
˚C
C
80
0˚C
0˚C
60
4
˚C
˚C
300
400
˚C
500
6
0˚C
70
8
0˚
90
1
˚C
00
˚C
00
11
00
12
10
0.1
00
00
2
0.01
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
1
200
Probe EMF (mV)
Figure 4.3.11s Probe emf versus temperature
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 129
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
ZIRCONIA PROBE (Cont.)
OXYGEN POTENTIAL
The oxygen potential of an atmosphere is a measurement of its ability to oxidise or reduce. For any element, a value of oxygen potential (free energy of formation) is known. Above this value, the material will
oxidise, below it, no oxidisation will occur. Figure 4.3.11t, below, is a free energy diagram for a number of
oxidising processes.
Oxygen potential is given by the equation
Op = 0.00457 × T × log Opʹ
Where: Op =Required oxygen potential (in kilocalories)
T =Probe temperature (in Kelvins)
€
Opʹ =Partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere (in atmospheres)
It can be shown that, because the oxygen potential of air is essentially constant over the range 870 to
1450 kelvins, the zirconia probe output is proportional to the oxygen potential of an atmosphere, according to:
E =(10.84 × T) + 40 mV (in the range 870 to 1450 K)
Thus, it is possible to measure oxygen potential directly from a zirconia probe, using a standard input
channel of the instrument, scaled in units of oxygen potential. A typical configuration might be:
Input Type
Input low
Input high
Scale low
Scale high
Units
=mV;
=40;
=1124;
=-100;
=0;
=kCal.
Such a configuration would be suitable over the temperature range 873 to 1473 K (600 to 1200 ˚C).
User Guide
Page 130
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
ZIRCONIA PROBE (Cont.)
u+
2C
-50
4Cu
+ O2
→
O2
→
uO
O4
e3
2C
M
O2
Ni +
T
+ O2
→
+
Sn
O
2Co
O2
M
+ O2
n
2Z
M
r
4C
→
O2
+3
nO
2Mn
-150
4V
r O3
2C 2
+ O2
O2
+3
t
O2
O2
→
Zr
+ O2
+
Mg
2
2H 2
600
H O
→2 2
+ O2
700
800
2FeO
900
M
C + O2 → CO2
m
1000
O2
5
a+
4T
→
O5
2Ta 2
M
1500
M
l+
→
1200
1400
m
t
SiO 2
4A
O2
1100
1300
m
M
T
iO 2
→T
M
T
+ O2
500
2
1600
T
ZrO 2
2CO
CO
→2
V 2O 3
-200
→
m
300
400
M
→2
Si +
Ti +
2
M
O2
T T
O
2Mn
→
NiO
6FeO + O2 → 2Fe3O4
+O
2 →2
CO
2Z
→
200
Sn
→
2F
2C
b
→
→
e + O2
T
100
6F
m
2
2Co
-100
→
2
+O
4F
O
2Cu 2
O
S2 + 2O2 → 2S 2
Oxygen potential (kilocalories)
O3
e2
M
milliVolts
Air
3O 2
→
O
Mg
2
T
e+
2B
Th
2000
2100
M
2200
M
O2
+ O2
→
→
2300
eO
2B
ThO
1800
1900
l O3
2A 2
B
1700
2400
2
2500
2600
-250
2700
2800
2900
0
500
1000
Degrees Celsius
1500
2000
Note:
Colours serve no purpose in the figure above, other than to simplify interpretation.
Change of state
Melting point
Boiling point
Sublimation point
Transition point
Element
Oxide
M
B
S
T
m
b
s
t
Figure 4.3.11t Free energy diagram
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 131
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
GROUP MINIMUM
The following description assumes a group name of ‘Furnace 1’, which contains four channels with descriptors ‘Temp 1’, ‘Temp 2’, ‘Temp 3’ and ‘Temp 4’
The output of the Group Minimum function is the current lowest value of any of the points in the source
group. The required source group is selected by picklist.
Should a point return a non-valid value, it is excluded from the calculation, and the result of the function
is the minimum of the remaining points.
DESCRIPTORS
As a part of the Group Minimum function configuration, it is possible to select one of two types of descriptor: ‘User Defined’ and ‘Minimum Channel’. Figure 4.3.11u, below shows the relevant area of the
configuration page.
Maths Number 1) Furnace 1 min temp
Maths Number 1) Group 1 minimum
Value Value
Value 234.67
Function Group Minimum
Function Group Minimum
Source 1) Furnace 1
Source 1) Furnace 1
Units
Units
Descriptor type User defined descriptor
Descriptor Furnace 1 min temp
Descriptor type Minimum Channel Descriptor
User entered
descriptor
Descriptor Temp 1
Descriptor of channel
with lowest current value
Figure 4.3.11u Group minimum configuration page
User Defined Descriptor.
This allows a descriptor to be entered in the normal way. For example ‘Furnace 1 min
temp’. This descriptor is copied to the Maths Number field at the top of the display
page.
Minimum Channel Descriptor
This selection causes the descriptor of the point with the instantaneous current lowest value in the group, to become the (non-editable) maths channel descriptor. For
example if the four channels in the group (Temp 1 to Temp 4) have the instantaneous values 800, 950, 790 and 873 respectively, then the Descriptor will be ‘Temp 3’ .
Should Temp 3 rise above 800, whilst all the others remain static, then the Descriptor
would become ‘Temp 1’.
The ‘Maths Number’ field which normally copies the maths channel descriptor, contains instead the text: ‘N) Group N minimum’, where ‘Group N’ is the default name of
the source group.
A typical application of the ‘Minimum channel descriptor’ would be to include the
descriptor in a message sent to the chart on a regular basis by a Timer function.
Section 4.3.8 describes the entry of the messages, and section 4.3.14 describes the
setting up of timers.
(Continued)
User Guide
Page 132
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
GROUP MINIMUM (Cont.)
A typical message entry would be:
Message: Lowest temperature is {1} at chan {2}
Replace {1} with: Specified Value
{1} source: Group 1 minimum
Replace {2} with: Specified Descriptor
{2} source: Group 1 Minimum
resulting in a message such as:
22/08/08 14:22:06 Lowest temperature is 790.00 Units at chan Temp 3.
where ‘Units’ is the text entered in the Group Minimum maths channel configuration, not that for the input
channel, although typically, they would be the same.
Note: The Group configuration checkboxes for maths channels with ’Minimum Channel Descriptor’ selected, are ‘greyed’ thus preventing such channels from being used as inputs to their own
source group. See section 4.3.2 for Group configuration details.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 133
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)
THERMOCOUPLE CAL CORRECTION
This function allows two correction value tables, each of up to 25 points to be entered. For each point,
a correction value can be entered, and the recorder will interpolate between points. The output of this
maths function is the sum of the source channel and the two correction values. The Instrument correction values are obtained from a recorder calibration carried out by the user or by an agency; the thermocouple correction values are obtained from the thermocouple test certificate.
Figure 4.3.11v shows a configuration page with an ‘Inst Calibration’ table of three points, and a ‘T/C calibration‘ table of four points.
������������
�����
��������
������������
�������������
�����������������������
���������������
���������������
���������������
���������������
���������������
���������������
����������������������
��������������
��������������
��������������
��������������
��������������
��������������
��������������
��������������
�����
����������
���������
������
�����
���������������������������
������������
��������
�
��
����
���
���
���
�����
�
�
����
���
����
���
�����
���
����
�����
������
����� �������
Figure 4.3.11v Thermocouple Cal correction configuration page
Thermocouple
Select any real or virtual channel, or ‘Constant’ as the source channel.
Serial number
Enter an identifier for the thermocouple.
Inst calibration points Enter the number of Instrument calibration points that are to be used (25 max.).
Inst cal temp n
The nth calibration point where ‘n’ = 1 to the ‘Inst calibration points’ value.
Inst cal corr n
The correction value for the nth calibration point.
T/C calibration points Enter the number of Thermocouple calibration points that are to be used (25 max.).
T/C cal temp n
The nth calibration point where ‘n’ = 1 to the ‘T/C calibration points’ value.
T/C cal corr n
The correction value for the nth calibration point.
Other parameters are as described in ‘Channel configuration’ (section 4.3.3)
Note: Each ‘cal temp’ value must be higher than the previous one.
User Guide
Page 134
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 MATHS OPTION (Cont.)
MODBUS ADDRESSING
For units fitted with the Modbus TCP comms option, the following table gives hex addresses for maths channel
1. Generally: Maths channel N parameter address = maths channel 1 parameter address + 162 (N-1) (decimal).
For full details of the Modbus TCP implementation, see section 8.
A/B switching
MATHS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA
CHANNEL 1
B values are not accessible via Modbus. Span, Zone, Colour etc. are all
setting A
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Ch1 Span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only
Ch1 Span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only
Ch1 Zone high
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
Ch1 Zone low
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
Ch1 PV type
Input type
Enum
Read only
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch1 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Channel colour (0 to 55) Enum
Read only
Ch1 Colour
(See Annex B for RGB definitions)
Ch1 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only
Spare
Ch1 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Ch1 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Ch1 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20
Read only
Spare
Ch1 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel
Uint16
Read only
Ch1 PV format
Enum
Read only
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
Ch1 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch1 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only
0 = Absolute low
1 = Absolute high
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch1 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch1 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch1 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
2FF1 (12273)
2FF2 (12274)
2FF3 (12275)
2FF4 (12276)
2FF5 (12277)
1
1
1
1
1
2FF6 (12278)
1
2FF7 (12279)
1
2FF8 (12280)
2FFB (12283)
2FFD (12285)
3001 (12289)
3005 (12293)
3009 (12297)
300D (12301)
3017 (12311)
3021 (12321)
3022 (12322)
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
3023 (12323)
305F (12383)
60
1
3060 (12384)
1
3061 (12385)
3062 (12386)
306C (12396)
306D (12397)
306E (12398)
306F (12399)
3079 (12409)
307A (12410)
307B (12411)
307C (12412)
3086 (12422)
3087 (12423)
3088 (12424)
3089 (12425)
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 135
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 MATHS OPTION (Cont.)
MATHS CHANNEL RUN-TIME DATA
This table show addresses for maths channel 1 run-time data. Generally: channel N address = channel 1
address + 3(N-1) (decimal)
CHANNEL 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch1 value
Ch1 status
Ch1 Alarms
Current process value (PV) Scaled
Read/Write
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0:0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15: Spare
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
A2BA (41658)1
Read only
A2BB (41659)
-
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
A2BC (41660)
Register
Length
1
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
IEEE 32-BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA
The following table shows addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for Maths channel 1.
Generally, Parameter address for channel N = Parameter address for channel 1 + 36(N-1) (decimal).
CHANNEL 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch1 span high
Upper span value (Display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch1 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch1 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch1 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Ch 1 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Ch 1 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
DF73 (57203)
DF75 (57205)
DF77 (57207)
DF79 (57209)
DF7B (57211)
DF7D (57213)
DF7F (57215)
DF81 (57217)
DF83 (57219)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
User Guide
Page 136
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.11 MATHS OPTION (Cont.)
IEEE 32-BIT CHANNEL RUN-TIME DATA
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for maths channel 1.
Generally, Parameter address for channel N = Parameter address for channel 1 + 4(N-1) (decimal).
CHANNEL 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Channel 1 value
Channel 1 status
Channel 1 Alarms
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15: Spare
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Read/Write F9EF (63983)
Read only
F9F1 (63985)
2
1
-
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
F9F2 (63986)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
User Guide
Page 137
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.12 Totalisers
INTRODUCTION
Each totaliser allows the user to maintain a running total of any input channel, or of any maths channel.
Using the maths functions, it is possible to totalise combinations of input channels, so the value of two
channels added together, or the difference between two channels could be totalised if required. The
totaliser equation is :
tot t = tot t−1 +
where tot t =
tot t-1 =
€
mat =
PSF =
USF =
ma t
PSF × USF
totaliser value this sample*
totaliser value last sample*
value of totalised channel this sample*
Period Scaling Factor (See Period scaler description below)
Units Scaling Factor (See Unit scaler description below)
*Note: Time between samples = Recording interval set in Group configuration.
See ‘Update information’ in Annex A for details.
CONFIGURATION
Figure 4.3,12, below, shows a typical (enabled) totaliser configuration page
Totaliser Number
Enable
Value
Total of
Low Cutoff
High Cutoff
Units
Preset
Preset now
User Guide
Page 138
Allows any of the available totalisers to be selected from the picklist, for configuration.
Allows the user to enable/disable the totaliser.
Shows the (dynamic) current value of the selected totaliser.
Allows an input channel or a maths channel to be selected as the source to be totalised.
The value of the source channel (in engineering units) below which it is not to be
totalised.
The value of the source channel (in engineering units) above which it is not to be
totalised.
The totalised units (e.g. m3)
Allows the entry of a 10-character positive, or nine-character negative value from
which the totaliser is to start counting.
Direction of counting is defined by the sign of the Unit scaler viz: + = increment; - =
decrement.
Operation of this key initiates the totaliser preset.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.12 TOTALISER CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Totaliser Number
Enable
Value
Total of
Low cut off
High cut off
Units
Preset
Select totaliser
number
1) Totaliser 1
123456
Channel 1
Units (totaliser)
0
ch units Units of channel
being totalised
ch units
999999
Units
0
Select channel etc. to be totalised
Units (totaliser)
Preset now
Period scaler 1
Unit scaler 1
Descriptor Totaliser 1
A/B Switching
Scale Low 0
Units (totaliser)
Units (totaliser)
Scale High 1
Zone Low 1
%
Zone High 100
%
Scale Type None
Select None, Linear or Log
Select
Numeric or Scientific
Numeric
PV format
Max Decimal Digits 4
Colour 0
Select Alarm number
Alarm Number 1
Select: Off,
Unlatched,
Enable Off
Latched,
Trigger
Job Number 1
Select Job number
Select Job category
Category No Action
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.12 Totaliser configuration menu
Period Scaler
Unit Scaler
Scale Low/High
The totaliser equation works in seconds. If the totalised channel units are other than
‘per second’ a period scaler other than the default (1) must be entered. For example,
if the input channel is in litres per hour, then the period scaler would have to be the
number of seconds in an hour (3600).
If, for example, the input channel is in litres per hour, the totalised value will be in
litres, unless the unit scaler is set to a value other than 1. If it is more convenient, the
totalised value can be in thousands of litres by setting the unit scaler to 1000. Setting the unit scaler negative causes the totaliser to decrement rather than increment.
The ‘zero’ and full scale values for the totaliser, as traced on the screen.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second set of scale low and scale high values can be
entered. ‘A’ values are used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by
job action, as described in section 4.7.
The remaining configuration items are identical with the relevant items in Input Channel configuration
(section 4.3.3), except that Log/Linear scale type is not available. For job information, see section 4.7.
Note: Selecting ‘High’ compression in Archive configuration may cause very high totaliser values
to be displayed incorrectly by the recorder and held incorrectly in the history file. This problem
may be solved by moving the relevant point to a group using ‘Normal’ compression, or by re-scaling the totaliser to read (for example) TeraWatt hours instead of Megawatt hours.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 139
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.12 (Cont.) TOTALISER MODBUS ADDRESSING
For units fitted with the Modbus TCP comms option, the following table gives addresses for totaliser 1
configuration data
Generally: Totaliser N parameter address = totaliser 1 parameter address + 162 (N-1) (decimal).
For full details of the Modbus TCP implementation, see section 8.
TOTALISER CONFIGURATION DATA
TOTALISER 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only
Span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only
Zone high
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
Zone low
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
PV type
Input type
Enum
Read only
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55)
Enum
Read only
(See Annex B for RGB definitions)
Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only
Spare
Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20
Read only
Spare
No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel
Uint16
Read only
PV format
Enum
Read only
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only
0 = Absolute low
1 = Absolute high
3 = Deviation out
2 = Deviation in
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
6F39 (28473)
6F3A (28474)
6F3B (28475)
6F3C (28476)
6F3D (28477)
1
1
1
1
1
6F3E (28478)
1
6F3F (28479)
1
6F40 (28480)
6F43 (28483)
6F45 (28485)
6F49 (28489)
6F4D (28493)
6F51 (28497)
6F55 (28501)
6F5F (28511)
6F69 (28521)
6F6A (28522)
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
6F6B (28523)
6FA7 (28583)
60
1
6FA8 (28584)
1
6FA9 (28585)
6FAA (28586)
6FB4 (28596)
6FB5 (28597)
6FB6 (28598)
6FB7 (28599)
6FC1 (28609)
6FC2 (28610)
6FC3 (28611)
6FC4 (28612)
6FCE (28622)
6FCF (28623)
6FD0 (28624)
6FD1 (28625)
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
User Guide
Page 140
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.12 (Cont.) TOTALISER MODBUS ADDRESSING
RUN-TIME DATA
This table shows addresses for totaliser 1. Generally: totaliser N address = totaliser 1 address + 3(N-1)
(decimal)
TOTALISER 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Value
Status
Alarms
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15: Spare
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Read/Write A3E6 (41958)
Read only
A3E7 (41959)
1
1
-
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
A3E8 (41960)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
IEEE 32-BIT CONFIGURATION DATA
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for Totaliser 1. Generally, Parameter address for totaliser N = Parameter address for totaliser 1 + 36(N-1) (decimal).
TOTALISER 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Span high
Upper span value (Display full scale)
Float
Read only
Span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
ED83 (60803)
ED85 (60805)
ED87 (60807)
ED89 (60809)
ED8B (60811)
ED8D (60813)
ED8F (60815)
ED91 (60817)
ED93 (60819)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 141
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.12 (Cont.) TOTALISER MODBUS ADDRESSING
IEEE AREA TOTALISER RUN-TIME DATA
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for totaliser 1. Generally, Parameter address for totaliser N = Parameter address for totaliser 1 + 4(N-1) (decimal).
TOTALISER 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Totaliser 1 value
Totaliser 1 status
Totaliser 1 Alarms
User Guide
Page 142
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15: Spare
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Read/Write FB7F (64383)
Read only
FB81 (64385)
2
1
-
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
FB82 (64386)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.13 Counters
INTRODUCTION
The virtual channels option introduces a user-configurable number of counters, which can be preset, disabled, incremented or decremented by Job action. If access is permitted, the user can preset the counter to
a selected value, as and when required, from the configuration page. See section 4.7 for Job details and section 4.3.22 for a description of virtual channels. If the Batch option is fitted (section 4.3.10), then batches can
be started whenever counter 1 changes value, and if this is done, the current value of counter 1 is appended
to batch field 1. (Other counters can be selected for Batch initiation, but operation is not guaranteed.)
CONFIGURATION
Figure 4.3.13 shows a typical (enabled) counter configuration page. The page is accessed from the Root
menu/Operator/Config menu.
Counter number
Enable
Value
Units
Preset
Select counter
number
1) Counter 1
Units
OFF
Units
0
Units
Preset now
Descriptor Counter 1
A/B Switching
Scale Low 0
Units
Scale High 1
Units
%
Zone Low 0
%
Zone High 100
Select None or Linear
Scale Type None
Colour 0
Select Alarm number
Alarm Number 1
Select: Off,
Unlatched,
Enable Off
Latched,
Trigger
Job Number 1
Select Job number
Select Job category
Category No Action
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.13 Typical Counter configuration menu
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Counter number Allows any of the available counters to be selected for configuration
Enable
Allows the user to start/stop counting by enabling/disabling the counter.
Value
Shows the current dynamic value of the counter
Units
Allows a text string of up to 5 characters to be entered as a units description
Preset
Allows a counter value to be entered for manual or job action preset.
Scale low/high
The values to appear at the scale end points. If A/B switching is enabled, a second
set of scale low and scale high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are used during
normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section
4.7.
The remaining configuration items are as described for input channels in section 4.3.3, except that Log/
Linear scales are not available.
Note: An absolute high alarm (for example) with a threshold of 10, will not be triggered until the value
exceeds 10 (i.e. counter value = 11). In order to trip the alarm at 10, a threshold lower than 10 must be
entered (e.g. threshold = 9.5). A similar situation exists for absolute low and deviation alarms.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 143
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.13 COUNTERS (Cont.)
COUNTER MODBUS ADDRESSING
For units fitted with the Modbus TCP comms option, the table below gives addresses for counter 1
configuration data. Generally: Counter N parameter address = counter 1 parameter address + 162 (N-1)
(decimal). For full details of the Modbus implementation, see section 8.
COUNTER CONFIGURATION DATA
COUNTER 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only
Span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only
Zone high
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
Zone low
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
PV type
Input type
Enum
Read only
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only
Colour
Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only
Spare
Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20
Read only
Spare
No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel
Uint16
Read only
PV format
Enum
Read only
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only
0 = Absolute low
1 = Absolute high
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (see note)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
8EDD (36573)
8EDE (36574)
8EDF (36575)
8EE0 (36576)
8EE1 (36577)
1
1
1
1
1
8EE2 (36578)
1
8EE3 (36579)
8EE4 (36580)
8EE7 (36583)
8EE9 (36585)
8EED (36589)
8EF1(36593)
8EF5 (36597)
8EF9 (36601)
8F03 (36611)
8F0D (36621)
8F0E (36622)
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
8F0F (36623)
8F4B (36683)
60
1
8F4C (36684)
1
8F4D (36685)
8F4E (36686)
8F58 (36696)
8F59 (36697)
8F5A (36698)
8F5B (36699)
8F65 (36709)
8F66 (36710)
8F67 (36711)
8F68 (36712)
8F72 (36722)
8F73 (36723)
8F74 (36724)
8F75 (36725)
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
User Guide
Page 144
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.13 COUNTERS (Cont.)
RUN-TIME DATA
This table shows addresses for counter 1. Generally: Counter N address = counter 1 address + 3(N-1)
(decimal)
COUNTER 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Value
Status
Alarms
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15: Spare
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Read/Write A47C (42108)
Read only
A47D (42109)
1
1
-
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
A47E (42110)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
IEEE 32-BIT CONFIGURATION DATA
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for Counter 1. Generally, Parameter address for counter N = Parameter address for counter 1 + 36(N-1) (decimal).
COUNTER 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Span high
Upper span value (Display full scale)
Float
Read only
Span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (see note)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
F48B (62603)
F48D (62605)
F48F (62607)
F491 (62609)
F493 (62611)
F495 (62613)
F497 (62615)
F499 (62617)
F49B (62619)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 145
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.13 COUNTERS (Cont.)
IEEE AREA COUNTER RUN-TIME DATA
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for counter 1. Generally, Parameter address for counter N = Parameter address for counter 1 + 4(N-1) (decimal).
COUNTER 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Counter 1 value
Counter 1 status
Counter 1 Alarms
User Guide
Page 146
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12: 0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13: 0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15: Spare
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Read/Write FC47 (64583)
Read only
FC49 (64585)
2
1
-
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
FC4A (64586)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.14 Timers
INTRODUCTION
This feature supplies 12 count-down timers which can be used for general timing purposes. The timers
can be either one-shot or repeating, and can be initiated in the following ways:
1.
2.
3.
4.
directly by the operator from the configuration page (if access permission is granted),
by job action (see section 4.7),
at a predefined time/date,
every ‘time period’, where the ‘time period’ can be configured to be anything from 1 second to 1
year. For example, setting seconds to ‘30’ and leaving all other fields ‘Any’, the timer will start every
minute on the half minute. Setting seconds to ‘30’ and minutes to ‘0’ will cause the timer to start at 30
seconds past each hour.
Note: Times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving changes. Thus if the timer is set to trigger on a
daily, weekly, etc, basis, then, during ‘Summer Time’, the trigger will occur an hour late (i.e. at 01:00
hrs. instead of at midnight).
The full range of jobs is described in section 4.7. ‘Timer Active’ is defined as an internal event trigger
(section 4.3.6).
CONFIGURATION
Figure 4.3.14 shows a typical timer configuration display. The page is accessed from the Root menu/Operator/Config menu.
Timer number 1) Timer 1
Enable
Remaining 00:00:00
Repeat in 00:00:00
Select timer
Reset now
Start now
Descriptor Timer 1
Self start
Date Any
Month Any
These fields appear
only if 'Self start' is
Hour Midnight
enabled.
Minute Any
Second Any
Duration 60
Seconds
Repeat after 0
Seconds
1
Select
Job number
Job Number
Select Job
Category No Action
category
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.14 Typical timer configuration page
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 147
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.14 TIMERS (Cont.)
Configurable parameters
Timer number
Enable
Remaining
Repeat in
Reset now
Start now
Descriptor
Self Start
Duration
Repeat after
Allows a specific timer to be selected for configuration
Allows the user to enable/disable the selected timer
This is a dynamic display showing the time remaining in hours:minutes:seconds format.
For repeat timers, shows the time remaining before the repeat is initiated. Display is
00:00:00 whilst timer is counting down.
Allows a running timer to be reset to 00:00:00.
Allows the operator to initiate the timer.
Allows a descriptor to be entered for the timer.
If enabled, this causes date and time selection fields to appear as shown in figure
4.3.14 above.
Date:
allows a day number to be selected from a picklist of 1 to N and ‘Any’,
where N is the maximum number of days in the selected month.
Month: allows a month number to be entered from a picklist of 1 to 12 and ‘Any’.
Hour:
allows an hour number to be selected from a picklist of 1 to 23, ‘Midnight’
and ‘Any’.
Minute: allows a minutes number to be entered from a picklist of 0 to 59 and ‘Any’.
Seconds: allows a seconds value to be entered from a picklist of 0 to 59 and ‘Any’.
Allows the user to enter a count-down time period in seconds.
Allows the user to enter a repeat rate. It should be noted that the repeat value
includes the duration time. For example, to time down from 50 seconds, every
minute, a ‘Duration’ value of 50 seconds should be entered, with a ‘Repeat after’
value of 60 seconds (not 10 seconds).
Note: If Month = ‘Any’, and Day = 31, then the timer will not be triggered in February, April, June,
September or November. Similarly, if Day = 30, the timer will not be triggered in February, and so
on.
Job configuration is as described in section 4.7.
SELF-START EXAMPLE
To preset Totaliser number 1 to zero, daily, at midnight:
In totaliser configuration, enter 0 as the Preset value for Totaliser 1.
In timer configuration, select:
1.
2.
3
4
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Timer number
Enable
Self start
Date Month Hour
Minute
Second
Duration
Repeat after
Job number
Job category
Action
Totaliser
On
User Guide
Page 148
Timer 1
enabled
enabled
Any
Any
Midnight
0
0
0.125
0
1
Totaliser
Preset
Totaliser 1
Active
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.15 Connections
INTRODUCTION
ASCII (INPUT)
Note: See Section 12 for details of the ASCII Printer Output option.
This mode allows the recorder to receive simple ASCII messages from, for example, barcode readers,
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), Global Positioning Systems (GPSs) (NMEA-0183 protocol) etc.
Messages are sent to as many groups as are set up to receive them, and become a part of these groups’
histories, and appear on vertical and horizontal trend displays in the following format:
23/08/05 10:25:06 (Serial), Message of up to 85 characters
Date and time
Source
Message
MODBUS RTU
This allows the recorder’s serial communications ‘port’ to be used as Modbus master or Modbus slave.
When acting as a master, the unit can communicate with up to 16 slaves. Use of the Serial port is complementary to the use of Ethernet connections.
Note: When configuring a unit as a Modbus slave, it is recommended that the Instrument and
Point Configurations give easily identifiable instrument and point names (descriptors).
INSTALLATION
If the option is fitted, two 9-way D-type connectors (plugs) are fitted at the rear of the recorder, as shown
in section 2.2.
TERMINATION AND BIASSING (Not EIA232)
If the communications line is left open-ended, the end of the cable acts as a reflector, returning what
can appear to be ‘true’ data signals back down the line. A receiver cannot distinguish between ‘true’ and
reflected data, with the result that the ‘true’ data is corrupted.
In order to avoid this, a termination resistor is fitted across the line at the final instrument. If the value of
this resistor is equal to the characteristic impedance of the cable (e.g. 120 Ohms), then the line appears
to be of infinite length and no reflections occur. Such a value however, does not always give the best
signal-to-noise ratio, so a compromise value (e.g. 220 Ohms) is normally selected to give the optimum
performance in reducing unwanted reflections and in improving the signal-to-noise ratio. The recorder
communications port is terminated as shown in figure 4.3.15a, below, for a single point-to-point application.
5 Volts
100k�
TxB
Transmit lines
from sender
TxA
RxB
Receiver
device
220�
RxA
100k�
0 Volts
Recorder
Figure 4.3.15a Recorder termination (single-drop EIA485 application)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 149
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.15 CONNECTIONS (Cont.)
CONFIGURATION
The default (ASCII) Serial comms configuration menu is as shown in figure 4.3.15b below. Figures 4.3.15c and
4.3.15d show the alternative menus for Modbus slave and Modbus master selections, respectively. If the ASCII
Printer Output option is fitted, a fourth Protocol choice (ASCII Printer) appears - see section 12 for details.
Note: The serial communications hardware is limited to one start bit.
Port Serial 1
Select port
Link Error Count 0
Reset Error Count
Protocol ASCII (input)
Connection EIA232
Baud Rate 19200
Stop Bits 1
Select required Baud rate.
Select 1 or 2
Parity None
Select None, Odd or Even
Data Bits 8 Select 7 or 8
Timeout 250 ms Enter required Timeout value
First Start Char 0
Enter decimal ASCII value between 0
Second Start Char 0
and 127. (0 = no character.)
See User Guide, (section B6) for list.
First End Char 13
Second End Char 10
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Select Group(s) to receive messages
(
= Receive)
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.15b Serial Communications configuration menu (ASCII input)
Port Serial 1
Link Error Count 0
Port Serial 1
Select port
Link Error Count 0
Reset Error Count
Protocol Modbus Slave
Connection EIA232
Baud Rate 19200
Stop Bits 1
Apply
Select required Baud rate.
Select None, Odd or Even
Discard
Figure 4.3.15c
Serial Communications configuration menu (Modbus slave)
User Guide
Page 150
Reset Error Count
Protocol Modbus Master
Connection EIA232
Baud Rate 19200
Stop Bits 1
Select 1 or 2
Parity None
Select port
Parity None
Timeout 1000
Enable error code B
Enable Talk Through
Apply
Select required Baud rate.
Select 1 or 2
Select None, Odd or Even
ms
Discard
Figure 4.3.15d
Serial Communications configuration menu (Modbus master)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.15 CONNECTIONS (Cont.)
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
SERIAL PORT
Allows the user to select the port to be used for serial communications.
LINK ERROR COUNT
A Link error count is provided for every slave. The count is incremented every time there is a framing
error, a parity error or a Cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error. The ‘Reset Error Count’ key is used to reset
the count to zero.
PROTOCOL
For the Serial communications board option, ASCII (input), Modbus Slave, Modbus Master or ASCII
Printer protocols are available.
CONNECTION
Allows EIA232 or EIA485 to be selected as transmission standard.
BAUD RATE
Allows a Baud rate to be chosen from a picklist of: 300, 600, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400. This value
must be the same for all devices in the serial link.
STOP BITS
Selectable as 1 or 2. This value must be the same for all devices in the serial link.
PARITY
Allows Parity to be chosen from a pick list of: None, Odd, Even. This value must be the same for all devices in the serial link.
DATA BITS
For ASCII (input) protocol only, selectable as 7 or 8. This value must be the same for all devices in the serial link.
TIMEOUT
For ASCII (input) protocol, this allows a timeout value to be entered of between 50 and 3000 msec inclusive. A value of 0 = no timeout. See also ‘Messaging Information’ below.
For Modbus Master protocol, this allows a timeout to be entered of between 100 and 9,999 msec (inclusive), An error code B is generated (if so configured - see ‘Enable Error Code B’ below). If the master has
not received a reply to a request within the timeout period. For slaves configured with their own timeout
periods, these will override the entry here.
MESSAGE START/END CHARACTERS
For ASCII (input) protocol only, the message can be prefixed by 0, 1 or 2 specific characters and can be
suffixed by 0, 1 or 2 specific characters. The First and Second Start and End characters are entered as
decimal ASCII codes between 0 and 127 as required. 0 = no character, 10 = Line Feed; 13 = Carriage
Return. See Annex B for a list of ASCII codes. If only one start or end character is required, the first character must be entered, and the second character be entered as zero.
GROUP SELECTION
For ASCII input protocol, this allows groups to be deselected/selected for receipt of the messages. A
checked box indicates that the associated group will receive the messages.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 151
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.15 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS (Cont.)
ENABLE ERROR CODE B
For Modbus Master only.
If enabled, this causes an error code B to be generated in the event of a timeout or a Cyclic Redundancy
Check (CRC) error.
ENABLE TALK THROUGH
For Modbus Master only.
If disabled, this prevents ‘external’ (Ethernet) masters from accessing the slaves connected to this instrument. (I.E. only this instrument can act as a master to its slaves.)
MESSAGING INFORMATION
Characters are read into a buffer, until the end of message characters are received, or until the timesince-last-character exceeds the entered Timeout value. Date, Time and ‘(Serial)’ are then prefixed to the
message, which is then sent to the selected groups. The date and time relate to when the first buffered
character was received. If Start-of-message characters are configured, characters will be read into the
buffer only after these characters have been received.
The buffer holds up to 120 characters plus date/time etc. and start/end-of-message characters . Further
characters are discarded until End-of-message is received, or timeout occurs.
Message characters below Hex 20 (decimal 32) will be replaced by question marks (?).
Message characters above Hex 7F (decimal 127) will be treated as Unicode.
MESSAGING RULES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
If no start-of-message characters are configured, but a timeout value other than 0 has been entered,
the new message starts after the timeout period has elapsed.
If no end-of-message characters are configured, but a timeout value other than 0 has been entered,
the new message ends after the timeout period has elapsed.
If start-of-message characters are configured, and a timeout value other than 0 has been entered, all
characters prior to the Start-of-message characters are ignored.
If start-of-message characters are configured but neither end characters nor timeout have been configured, then this is an invalid configuration.
Should this configuration be a requirement, if the same characters are entered as end-of-message
characters instead, then each message will be sent to the groups when the next message is received.
If no start or end-of-message characters are entered and no timeout value is entered, all received
characters are discarded
If a received message is deemed to be corrupt, it is discarded and the software will await a further
message.
Start and End-of-message characters are removed before the messages are sent to the groups.
MODBUS ADDRESS
When acting as a slave, the recorder will respond both to the address set in Instrument Configuration
(section 4.3.1) and to address 255 (used by some network scanning software).
User Guide
Page 152
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 Master comms
INTRODUCTION
This option allows the unit to be used as a Modbus Master unit, as well as a Modbus Slave. The instrument can communicate using the Ethernet (RJ45) connection, or by means of one of the serial communications ports (if fitted - see section 4.3.15 for details) or both simultaneously.
Master Configuration consists of entering a Modbus Address, and, for Ethernet connection, an IP address or DNS path name for each of the available remote devices which are to be used as slaves. The
configuration also allows three different priority intervals to be entered, and read/write parameters can
be configured to be accessed at one of these three rates.
The unit comes complete with a number of ‘Profiles’ for known instruments. This allows it to ‘recognise’
an instrument as a slave type, and simplifies the read/write process for ‘known’ instruments, by presenting commonly used Parameters by name. Other parameters can be accessed by entering the relevant
register’s address. The unit will also communicate with ‘third party’ instruments, but in such a case, the
user has to define the required read/write register addresses derived from data supplied by the manufacturer of the instrument.
Once the remote unit has been recognised by the master, the master and slave units can be configured
to carry out the following:
1. By setting a master input channel to: Type = ‘Master Comms’, selected parameters can be read by
the master from a selected slave. This master channel can then be included in display groups, can
have alarm setpoints, run jobs etc., independently of the original channel. In a similar way, maths
functions can be read by setting a master Maths channel to: Function = ‘Master Comms’.
2. The ‘Demand Write’ feature can write values to a selected parameter in a selected slave, as a oneshot update. Demand Writes can be initiated by operator action, or they can be initiated by job action or (if the User Screens option is fitted), by Operator Key action.
3. For slaves whose input and/or maths channels can be set to ‘Modbus Comms Input’, the master’s
‘Output channels’ feature can copy master input or maths channels to a selected slave, as a continuous process.
Notes
1. If reading from or writing to more than one instrument, it is recommended that some thought
be given to instrument and point descriptors, as confusion can easily arise. This is particularly
true if Bridge is connected to a master which has several slaves attached.
2. If ‘Link error’ occurs whilst connected to a Modbus slave, the slave’s delay parameter (if any)
should be enabled. If no such parameter is available, the slave’s manufacturer should be contacted for advice.
An example configuration is given later in this section showing how to set up a master unit to read inputs
from two slaves, and to re-write one of these channels to a third slave.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 153
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
MASTER COMMS CONFIGURATION MENU
A typical master comms configuration page is shown in figure 4.3.16a, below.
Note: For the sake of completeness, the figure below shows all possible fields, even though some
are actually mutually exclusive (e.g. ‘Login Required’ does not appear for ‘Profile = Third party’).
High Priority interval
Medium priority interval
Low priority interval
Store diagnostics
Slave
Enable
Online
Descriptor
Network
IP Address
Modbus address
0.125
1
2
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
1) Remote_1
Remote_1
Select 'Ethernet' or Serial port
Ethernet
149.121.30.0
IP Address field appears
1
Detect This Slave
Profile
Timeout
Retry
Max Block Size
Share Socket
Login Required
Username
Password
Apply
only if 'Ethernet' selected
as Network type.
Third Party
250
ms
3
124
Register
Appears only if Profile slave type supports login security
Username
********
Discard
Detect All Slaves
Appear only if 'Login Required'
is selected
Figure 4.3.16a Master Comms configuration menu.
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Priority intervals
This allows three levels of update rate to be entered. These rates are used in point
configuration, to define how often a value is read. In order to optimise the performance of the serial link, it is recommended that the slowest rate consistent with requirements be selected. The interval is entered in multiples of 1/8th second (0.125
seconds).
In some cases, two update rates can be defined. For example, when reading a Process Value (PV) channel from a slave, it is possible to set the reading frequency of the
PV to the highest rate available, but other, less frequently changing, values (scale
low/high for example) can be read at a slower rate.
Store Diagnostics If enabled, diagnostics information is kept in non-volatile memory, and is thus retained during power cycling.
Slave
A picklist of slaves, initially called ‘Remote Device N’. When the device is detected,
this name changes to the detected Instrument’s Descriptor (if any) or a default tag.
The slave name can be edited in the ‘Descriptor’ entry field below.
User Guide
Page 154
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Enable
Online
Descriptor
Network
If this window is not selected, none of the following fields appears, and the Remote
Device cannot be accessed.
If enabled, normal communications with the slave are carried out. When disabled,
the connection with the slave is terminated.
Allows a new name for the slave device to be entered. (This name is used only within
the master - it does not overwrite the Instrument Descriptor in the slave itself).
Select Ethernet or a Serial port. All the slaves on the link must have the same communications parameter values (e.g. Baud Rate) as are set for the master. See Section
4.3.15 for Serial Communications Configuration details.
Note: Serial ports appear in the selection list only if ‘Protocol’ has been set to ‘Modbus Master’ in
the Serial Comms Configuration (section 4.3.15).
IP Address
This field appears only if Network = Ethernet. This must match the IP address or DNS
name of the slave. For this unit, this information is to be found in Network/Address
and Network/Name respectively. For other instruments, refer to the documentation
supplied with those instruments.
Modbus Address For Ethernet links, Modbus addresses are associated with the IP address. This
means that, for any IP address, the range of Modbus addresses used for slaves can (if
required) be the same as the range used by a unit with a different IP address.
For Serial communications, each unit (including the master) must have a unique Modbus address.
For the unit described by this manual, the Modbus address is accessed in ‘Instrument’ configuration (section 4.3.1). For other instrument the documentation supplied with those instruments should be referred to.
Profile
A pick list of supported instrument types. Third party is used as a default, and for
non-listed instrument types. This field is updated automatically if the slave is Detected.
Timeout
Allows a timeout period to be set for the read/write process. See ‘Retry’ below, and
‘Disable Retries’ in section 4.3.17.
Retry
Allows entry of the number of times the master attempts to get a response from the
slave, before aborting. If not successful, an error message appears.
Max Block size
Always 124 for supported instruments, this field is editable for ‘Third party’ instruments. The maximum block length supported by a particular instrument is found
from that instrument’s documentation.
Share Socket
This item appears only for slaves with Network = Ethernet.
When enabled, allows a reduction in the number of links between a master and
multiple slaves. See ‘Share Socket’, below for more details. Generally, it is recommended that this item is left at the default for the particular slave being configured.
Login Required
Some slaves require a user name and password to be entered before access can be
gained. The user name and password set here in the master Comms configuration
must match those of the slave.
For this type of instrument, the user name is the ‘Remote user name’ and the password is the ‘Remote password’ set up in the Security/Access configuration (section
4.4.1). Password is necessary only when Modbus security disabled is not selected in
‘Instrument’ configuration (section 4.3.1). For other types of instrument, refer to the
documentation supplied with that instrument.
Username/Password See Login Required, immediately above
DETECT THIS SLAVE
This button causes the master to search for the slave set up on this configuration page. If the search is
successful, the Remote Device name changes to the instrument name or default tag.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 155
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
DETECT ALL SLAVES
Network Ethernet
Overwrite existing slaves
Timeout 500
From Node 149.121.130.200
For 50
Node(s)
Modbus Address 1
To 2
Abort
Start
Discard
Apply
Re-Scan
Figure 4.3.16b Detect all slaves set-up menu
The ‘Detect All Slaves’ key is used to detect any slaves connected to the system, within certain search
parameters.
Operation of the button calls a display page (figure 4.3.16b) which allows the entry of a start IP address,
a range of IP addresses, and a range of Modbus addresses. In the above example, the search is carried
out for all devices with Modbus addresses in the range 1 to 2 inclusive, associated with instruments which
have IP addresses between 149.121.130.200 and 149.121.130.249 inclusive.
PARAMETERS AND KEYS
Network
Allows the user to select a network to search over.
Overwrite existing slaves
The Auto Detect results page (see below) lists all the instruments found within the
search parameters, along with a ‘tick box’ for each one. Each instrument whose tick
box is enabled is assigned to the ‘Remote Device’ list in the Master Comms configuration page. If ‘Overwrite existing slaves’ is enabled, then newly found instruments
will temporarily over write instruments previously configured there. The list becomes
permanent when the Modbus configuration page ‘Apply’ key is operated, but any of
the slaves can be edited, if required, prior to this.
Timeout
The search for a slave is aborted if it does not respond within this time, and the
search moves on to the next slave.
From Node
The start address for the search
For (nodes)
The number of contiguous addresses to be searched starting with the ‘From Node’
address.
Modbus Address The lowest Modbus address for the search. The search will seek all slaves whose
Modbus Address lies between the value entered here, and the value entered in the
‘To’ field, below, inclusive.
To
The highest Modbus address to be included in the search.
Abort
This key allows the user to quit the search
Start
Once the search information has been entered, operation of the Start key causes the
unit to search for any instruments which respond to the search criteria.
Discard
Returns to the Modbus configuration page, without saving.
Apply
Saves the details of the detected slaves to the Modbus configuration page. The
changes to the configuration page are temporary
Re-scan
Allows the user to repeat the scan, with the same or edited search criteria.
User Guide
Page 156
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
AUTO DETECT PAGE
The ‘Autodetect’ page displays the progress of the search. Once the search is complete, the results are
displayed as shown in figure 4.3.16c, below. For example, the top two lines show that devices with Modbus addresses 1 and 2 were detected at IP address 149.121.130.211.
For instrument types similar to those described in this manual, the Instrument Descriptor is displayed in
the list. For other instruments, if the type is recognised, then the instrument type ID (e.g. model number)
appears. As can be seen from the figure, the instrument descriptors for the first two detected instruments have been edited (section 4.3.1); the second two have the default descriptor (Instrument), and the
final one is a model 2747.
Note: The model number ‘2747’ is used for illustrative purposes only. If such an instrument type
exists, it should not be assumed from the above that it will be recognised by the auto detect system.
Auto Detect
Please select required slave devices
Furnace temps 1 at 149.121.130.211/1
Furnace Temps 2 at 149.121.130.211/2
If 'Overwrite existing slaves' is not enabled, AND the
number of detected slaves is greater than the number
of free slots, then this text reads 'Please select a
maximum of N slave devices', where N is the difference between the number of slaves detected and the
number of free slots.
If the user selects more than N devices, only the first
N selected devices are used.
Instrument at 149.121.130.232/1
Instrument at 149.121.130.236/1
2747 at 149.121.130.237/1
Abort
Start
Discard
Apply
Re-Scan
Figure 4.3.16c Auto detect results page
As can be seen from the figure above, each instrument has a tick box associated with it. The user enables
those instruments which are to be included in the Slave List, by touching the relevant boxes. Operation
of ‘Apply’ then causes the selected instruments to be incorporated into the Slave list in the Modbus Master configuration page.
If ‘Overwrite existing slaves’ is enabled, existing slaves are overwritten starting with slave 1 in the list.
If ‘Overwrite existing slaves’ is not enabled, then new slaves selected from the Auto detect page will be
inserted into the free slots in the slave list.
Note: A ‘free slot’ is either an empty slot, or a slot containing a slave which has not yet been enabled.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 157
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
SHARE SOCKET
This advanced configuration feature is used to improve communications performance, to take advantage
of the higher speed of Ethernet links compared with ‘Serial’ links. It is recommended that the default
value (enabled or disabled according to type) be left as despatched from the factory, unless there is
good reason to change it.
A socket is the name given to a logical connection between two Ethernet nodes. The establishment and
maintenance of sockets is controlled by the recorder, and the user has no control other than to enable
or disable the ‘Share sockets’ facility. The share socket feature is available only for slaves configured as
Ethernet devices (i.e. Network = Ethernet).
The upper illustration in figure 4.3.16d, shows master 1 communicating with slaves 1 to n via an Ethernetto-Serial converter, called a Modbus Gateway. In such a case, it is more efficient to allow all the slaves to
communicate over one link between master 1 and master 2, than to establish individual links between
master 1 and each of the slaves. In this example, ‘Share sockets’ should be enabled.
The lower illustration show a similar situation, except that master 2 is not just a gateway, but is a measuring device in its own right. In such a case, Socket 1 is used for high speed communications between
master 1 and master 2, and Socket 2 is used to link master 1 to the slaves individually. In this case ‘Share
Sockets’ should be disabled for master 2, and enabled for all other devices.
Master 1
Ethernet
Socket 1
IP address:
123.123.1.2
Modbus address: 10
Serial link (RS485)
Master 2
(TCP-Gateway)
Socket 1 communicates with IP Address
123.123.1.2, Modbus addresses 1 to n
IP:123.123.1.2
IP:123.123.1.2
IP:123.123.1.2
Modbus Address 1
Modbus Address 2
Modbus Address 3
Slave 1
Socket 1
Master 1
Ethernet
IP address:
123.123.1.2
Modbus address: 10
Slave 2
Slave 3
IP:123.123.1.2
IP:123.123.1.2
Modbus Addr. n-1
Modbus Address n
IP:123.123.1.2
IP:123.123.1.2
Modbus Addr. n-1
Modbus Address n
Slave n-1
Slave n
Serial link (RS485)
Master 2
(Instrument)
Socket 2
Socket 1 Communicates with IP address
123. 123.1.2, Modbus address 10.
Socket 2 communicates with IP Address
123.123.1.2, Modbus addresses 1 to n
IP:123.123.1.2
IP:123.123.1.2
IP:123.123.1.2
Modbus Address 1
Modbus Address 2
Modbus Address 3
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 3
Slave n-1
Slave n
Notes:
1. The IP address '123.123.1.2' is for demonstration purposes only
2. Modbus address can be any number between 1 and 247, but must be
unique per IP address.
3. Modbus addresses need not be consecutive
Figure 4.3.16d Share socket examples
User Guide
Page 158
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
This display page, shown below, is called from the Operator/Config/Channels as described in section
4.3.3. A similar page appears in the Operator/Config/Maths configuration described in section 4.3.11.
The actual picklists which appear, depend entirely on the type or model of instrument being read from. It
is assumed that the user knows which parameters are to be accessed.
The following sections describe
a. a typical input channel configuration page with ‘Master Comms’ selected as Input Type, and a recorder or data acquisition unit as slave.
b. a typical input channel configuration page with ‘Master Comms’ selected as Input Type for a slave
controller.
c. the situation where ‘User Defined’ has been selected as Parameter. In such a case, the user must
determine the required register number from the documentation supplied with the slave.
Note: For completeness, figures 4.3.16e, 4.3.16f and 4,3,16g show all possible configuration fields.
The fields that actually appear are slave-model, and parameter dependent.
Channel Number
Value
Input Type
Slave
Digital
Parameter
1) Read 1
Unadjusted
-0.4670
Master Comms
1) Furn 1 Recorder
Copies descriptor entry
Select required slave
Select required slave parameter type
Process Value
Appears only for some slave types
Scaling None
Point Type
Point Number
Process Value
PV Format
Span Low
Span High
Zone Low
Zone High
Max Decimal Digits
Colour
Units
Descriptor
Alarm Number
Enable
Apply
Channel
Select Required Slave parameter point
1
Select iteration rate for
Medium Priority
parameter update
Numeric
0
Units
1
Units
0
%
100
%
4
0
Units
Read 1
1
Trigger
Discard
Figure 4.3.16e Channel configuration page - Typical Recorder
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 159
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
RECORDER/DAQ CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
TYPICAL RECORDER PARAMETERS
The following parameters may be accessible from a recorder or data acquisition unit, depending on
model number. Figure 4.3.16e, above, refers
Notes:
1. Items such as Scale, Zone and descriptor may be editable (white background) or not (grey background), depending on model.
2 This description includes only those items which are unique to input channels with Input Type =
Master Comms. For other items please see section 4.3.3.
Channel Number
Slave
Digital
Parameter
Scaling
Point type
Point number
Group Number
Process Value
Span
Allows the user to select the number of the channel to be configured. As soon as
Modbus master is selected as input type, the display changes from ‘Channel 1’ (for
example) to ‘Read 1’. This legend stays as ‘Read 1’ ‘until a descriptor is entered (below), which immediately overwrites it.
Allows the user to select (from a picklist), the slave from which data is to be retrieved.
The picklist contains all the Remote Devices configured as slaves in the Master
Comms Configuration described above.
Allows data to be read into a digital input.
Allows the user to select Alarm setpoints, Process Value, Batch status (model dependent) or ‘User defined’ to be selected. ‘User defined’ allows a (decimal) register
address to be entered
For some slaves, scale zero (scale low) is returned as value 0 and full scale (scale high)
as value 65,535 (Hex FFFF) with intermediate values having proportionate values.
For example the value 15, would be represented as 32,767 (7FFF) for a channel scale
0 to 30, as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100, and a value of 45 for a
channel scaled 30 to 60. In order to convert this reading to an understandable value,
a scaling factor must be entered. If the low and high scale entries match the slave
channel’s scale, the master reading will be the same as the slave’s reading.
Selecting ‘High/Low’ allows Scale low and Scale high values to be entered for the
selected parameter. If ‘None’ is selected, the process value is displayed as a proportion of 64k.
This item appears for Alarm setpoints and Process Value parameters only. Point type
allows the relevant point type (i.e. input channel, maths channel, totaliser etc.) in the
slave to be selected.
This item appears for Alarm setpoints and Process Value parameters only. Point
number allows the relevant point number in the slave to be selected.
This item appears for Parameter = ‘Batch Status’ only. Group number allows that
group, the status of which is to be read, to be defined.
Allows one of three rates to be set for reading the Process Value. The three rates
(Low, Medium and High) have the values set in the Master Comms configuration.
Where the input value is scaled (see above), this ‘Span’ setting sets the Zero and Full
Scale values for the channel. This is different from the situation obtaining in input
channels, where span and scale have different meanings.
Remaining items are as described in Channel Configuration in section 4.3.3.
User Guide
Page 160
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
TYPICAL CONTROLLER PARAMETERS
The following parameters may be accessible from a controller, depending on type.
Note: Figure 4.3.16f is a typical page and may show more or fewer items than appear on the actual
screen for a particular controller
Channel Number
Value
Input Type
Slave
Digital
Parameter
Loop Number
Process Value
PV Format
Span Low
Span High
Zone Low
Zone High
Max Decimal Digits
Colour
Units
Descriptor
Alarm Number
Enable
Reflects descriptor entry
1) Read 1
Unadjusted
-0.4670
Master Comms
Select Required slave
1) Furn 1 Control
Select Required slave
Working Setpoint
Select required loop parameter
1
Medium Priority
Select iteration rate for
parameter update
Numeric
0
Units
Units
1
0
%
100
%
4
0
Units
Read 1
1
Trigger
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.16f Typical Controller parameter page
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 161
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
TYPICAL CONTROLLER PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Channel Number
Slave
Digital
Parameter
Loop number
Process Value
Span
Zone etc.
Allows the user to select the number of the channel to be configured. As soon as
Modbus Master is selected as input type, this changes from ‘Channel 1’ (for example)
to ‘Read 1’. Once communication with the slave is established, this will change to the
descriptor of the remote channel (unless the controller type does not support this
item, in which case a suitable descriptor can be entered later in the configuration).
Allows the user to select (from a picklist), the slave from which data is to be retrieved.
The picklist contains all the Remote Devices configured as slaves in the Master
Comms Configuration described above.
Allows data to be read into a digital input.
Allows the user to select a specific parameter (table 4.3.16a shows a typical set) or
‘User defined’ to be selected. ‘User defined’ allows a (decimal) register address to
be entered (see ‘User defined’, below).
Allows the user to enter a Loop Number for the parameter read.
Allows one of three rates to be set for reading the Process Value. The three rates
(Low, Medium and High) have the values set in the Master Comms configuration.
This ‘Span’ setting allows the Zero and Full Scale values for the parameter to be entered.
The remaining items are as described in Channel Configuration in section 4.3.3.
Alarm status
Auto/Manual
Process value
Read alarm active status
Read alarm unacknowledged status
Working output power
Working setpoint
Table 4.3.16a Typical Controller read parameters
User Guide
Page 162
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
USER DEFINED REGISTERS
As previously mentioned, ‘User Defined’ can be selected for all slaves and for some slave types it is the
only way of accessing some or all parameters.
The number of the register holding the required parameter is to be found in the user documentation supplied with the slave. For instance, if the unit to which this manual refers, were to be a slave, then the list
of registers is to be found in section 8. For example, for this instrument, to determine what type of alarm,
alarm 1 on channel 2 is, register 396 would be used, and the expected value would be 0 for Absolute
low, 1 for absolute high, 2 for Deviation in, 3 for Deviation out, 4 for Rate-of-change high or 5 for Rate-ofChange low.
Channel Number
Value
Input Type
Slave
Digital
Parameter
Function Code
Register
Data Type
Scaling
Decimal Places
Process Value
PV Format
Span Low
Span High
Zone Low
Zone High
Decimal digits
Reflects descriptor, once the
1) Read 1
Unadjusted Apply key has been operated.
0.0400
Master Comms
Select required slave
1) Furn1 Recorder2
Select required slave parameter
User Defined
Select Function Code
Read holding registers (3)
Enter required register number (decimal)
396
UInteger (16 Bit)
Select Data Type
Decimal Places
Select 'None' or 'Decimal Places'
Enter No. of decimal point shifts
2
Select iteration rate for
Medium Priority
continuous parameters
Numeric
0
Units
Units
1
0
%
100
%
4
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.16g Configuration page for user defined parameters
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 163
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
This section defines those parameters which are unique to user defined registers.
Value
Function Code
Register
Data Type
Scaling
User Guide
Page 164
Shows the value returned from the selected register, as modified by the scaling factor (if any).
Allows Modbus function code 03 or 04 to be selected. In some implementations,
the functions of the two codes are identical. In others, the codes have different functions. See the documentation supplied with the slave for a list of supported Modbus
codes. For this instrument see section 8.2.1.
A decimal number representing the required parameter’s location in the slave’s
Modbus Register map. This information must be determined from the documentation supplied with the slave. For this instrument, section 8.4 contains listings for a
number of instrument, groups, and input channels. For details of maths, totalisers
etc., refer to the relevant option description.
Select a suitable data type for the selected parameter (again from the slave documentation). For this instrument, a list of relevant data types is given in section 8.4.
Whether Scaling appears or not is Model and Parameter dependent. If scaling is required, the choice may be ‘Decimal Places, or High/Low, again according to Model.
Decimal Places
Allows a dividing factor to be entered. An entry of 1, divides the returned value by
10. An entry of 2, divides by 100 etc. for successful implementation, there must be
a sufficient number of decimal places defined in the ‘Max Decimal Digits’ configuration field for the value to be displayed with the required precision. ‘None’ leaves the
returned value unchanged.
For some slaves, scale zero (scale low) is returned as value 0 and full scale (scale high)
as value 65,535 (Hex FFFF) with intermediate values having proportionate values.
For example the value 15, would be represented as 32,767 (7FFF) for a channel scale
0 to 30, as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100, and a value of 45 for a
channel scaled 30 to 60. In order to convert this reading to an understandable value,
a scaling factor must be entered. If the low and high scale entries match the slave
channel’s scale, the master reading will be the same as the slave’s reading.
Selecting ‘High/Low’ allows Scale low and Scale high values to be entered for the
selected parameter.
If ‘None’ is selected, the process value is displayed as a proportion of 65,535.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
READING DIGITAL VALUES
Digital values can either be the open/closed status of a discrete input, or it can be a status string showing, for example Instrument Status, if ‘User Defined’ is selected as Parameter Type,
OPEN/CLOSED STRINGS
The text strings for the open and closed statuses of a digital input channel can be read by ‘Enabling’ the
Digital checkbox for the relevant slave and Channel number. The strings returned will be those entered
in the slave channel’s configuration.
The default values are representations of an open switch (for Open) and a closed switch (for Closed). Figure 4.3.16h shows these two states.
Open String
Closed String
Figure 4.3.16h Default Open/Closed depictions
STATUS BITS
This allows the user to view the value of a bit in a status word such as Instrument Status, Channels in
Group etc. The relevant Register is accessed by entering its decimal number into the Register field which
appears when ‘User Defined’ is selected as Parameter.
Example
Figure 4.3.16i, below shows a master channel configuration page which causes a message* to be sent to
allgroups if the memory device inserted in a slave recorder is full. Open / closed strings are also entered
as Disk OK and DiskFull respectively, so that if this channel is included in a group, then whichever of these
legends is appropriate will be displayed in the channel faceplate.
* Note: The message string is entered as a part of Message Configuration as described in section
4.3.8.
From the recorder’s documentation, Instrument Status is held at register number 22. As can be seen
from table 4.3.16b, disk full status is reported by bit 4.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Item being tested
Not used
Not used
Not used
Card/Disk.
Card/Disk
Not used
Not used
Channel status.
Status
Value
Always zero
1
Always zero
2
Always zero
4
0 = Inserted
1 = Missing
8
0 = Not full
1 = Full
16
Always zero
32
Always zero
64
0 = No failures 1 = Channel failure 128
Table 4.3.16b Instrument status (Register 22)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 165
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
READING DIGITAL VALUES EXAMPLE (Cont.)
Channel Number
Value
Input Type
Slave
Digital
Parameter
1) Card in?
Card in
Master Comms
1) Recorder
User Defined
Function Code Read input reg (4)
Register
Data Type
Bit Position
Process Value
Zone Low
Zone High
Colour
Open String
Closed String
Descriptor
Alarm Number
22
Bit (from register)
3
Medium Priority
75
%
100
%
0
Card in
Card out
Card in?
1
Enable Trigger
Type
Active when
Dwell
Job Number
Digital
Card out
s
0
1
Category Message
Send Message(s) to All Groups
First Message 1) Card missing
Last Message 1) Card missing
On Active
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.16i Example configuration page
User Guide
Page 166
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
This example describes a recorder (Furn1 Master) acting as a master to two other recorders (Furn1
Record and Furn2 Record) and a controller (Furn1 Control). This example shows only the configuration
pages necessary to set up the master input/output channels and the slave Comms channel. It is assumed
that:
a. the master comms configuration has been completed with Remote devices 1, 2 and 3 set up as Furn1
Control, Furn1 Record and Furn2 control, respectively.
b. all recorders are of the type described in this manual. Other types of slave may need more inputs, or
different inputs to be entered.
EXAMPLE (see figure 4.3.16j)
to:
Read Loop1 PV from Controller 1 to Channel 1 of Recorder 1 (the master)
Read Channel 1 from Recorder 2 to Channel 2 of the master
Write Channel 2 of the Master to Channel 1 of Recorder 3.
Controller 1
(Slave 1)
Furn1 Control
Furn1 PV1
Recorder 2
(Slave 2)
Furn1 Record
Furn1 Temp1
Channel 1
Recorder 1
(Master)
Furn1Master
Channel 2 Channel 2
Recorder 3
(Slave 3)
Furn2 Record
Channel 1
Figure 4.3.16j Required setup
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 167
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
MASTER CHANNEL 1 SETUP
Master channel 1 setup, to read the Loop1 PV from ‘Furn1 Control’ into channel 1, is shown in figure
4.3.16k, below. Note that, for this example that a Span High of 100 and Descriptor ‘Furn1 PV1’ have been
entered. The span zero and span high values should match those of the PV being read.
Channel Number
Value
Input Type
Slave
Digital
Parameter
Loop Number
Process Value
PV Format
Span Low
Span High
Zone Low
Zone High
Max Decimal Digits
Colour
Units
Descriptor
Configuration Data
Alarm Number
Enable
1) Furn1 PV1
Unadjusted
33.2453
Master Comms
1) Furn1 Control
Process Value
1
Medium Priority
Numeric
0
Units
Units
100
0
%
100
%
4
0
Units
Furn1 PV1
Low Priority
1
Trigger
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.16k Master Channel 1 setup example
User Guide
Page 168
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
MASTER CHANNEL 2 SETUP
Master channel 2 setup, to read the Channel 1 PV from ‘Furn1 record into channel 2’, is shown in figure
4.3.16l, below.
Channel Number
Value
Input Type
Slave
Digital
Parameter
Point Type
Point Number
Process Value
PV Format
Span Low
Span High
Zone Low
Zone High
Max Decimal Digits
Colour
Units
Descriptor
Configuration Data
Alarm Number
Enable
2) Furn1 Temp1
658.3654 Unadjusted
Master Comms
2) Furn1 Record
Process Value
Channel
1
Medium Priority
Numeric
0
Units
1000
Units
0
%
100
%
4
1
Units
Furn1 Temp 1
Low Priority
1
Trigger
Discard
Apply
Figure 4.3.16l Master Channel 2 setup example
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 169
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
MASTER OUTPUT 1 SETUP
This shows the setup required in order to output the master’s channel 2 (Furn1 Temp1) to Furn2 Record
channel 1. The Descriptor Furn1 Temp1 has been entered as the Output Name. This happens to be the
same as the channel descriptor, but could be any required text string.
Output Channel Number
Enable
Output Type
Slave
Parameter
Point Type
Point Number
Process Value
Descriptor
Source
Default
On Error Write Default
1) Furn1 Temp 1
Master Comms
3) Furn2 Record
Comms Channel
Channel
1
Medium Priority
Furn1 PV1
2) Furn1 Temp1
0
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.16m Master Output 1 setup example
SLAVE INPUT CHANNEL 1 SETUP
Figure 4.3.16n shows how to set up a slave channel to read an input from a master. Note that the scaling
of this channel must match the scaling of the source channel.
Channel Number
Value
Input Type
Scale Low
Scale High
Units
1) Furn1 Temp1
658.3654 Unadjusted
Slave Comms
0
Deg C
1000
Deg C
Deg C
Scale Type Linear
Scale Divisions - Major 10
Scale Divisions Minor 1
Descriptor Furn1 Temp 1
A/B Switching
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.16n Slave channel setup
User Guide
Page 170
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)
MASTER COMMS DIAGNOSTICS
Master Comms Diagnostics appears as an additional item on the System Menu. For details of the other
items see section 4.6.
Most items are self-evident.
The Total requests and Bad requests totals both exclude retries. The numbers in parentheses are exception code numbers as described in table 8.2.1b.
The Initiate Comms Test is a loop-back test that sends a message to the selected slave and waits for it to
be returned. If the test is successful, the ‘Successful Comms Test’ is incremented. If not successful, one
(or more) of the error box values is incremented.
Figure 4.3.16p shows a typical page.
Archive
Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Clock
Locale
Slave 1) Furn recorder 1
Actual High Priority 2
Actual Medium Priority 1
Actual Low Priority 0.125
Modbus Address 1
Slave Status Online
Last Transaction Status OK
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Upgrade
Input Adjust
Output Adjust
Master Comms Diagnostics
Ethernet diagnosticcs
Total Requests 1308
Bad requests 10
Good requests 1298
Illegal function codes (01) 0
Illegal addresses (02) 0
Illegal Values (03) 0
Slave Failures (04) 0
No Gateway path (10) 0
Gateway Target Fail (11) 0
Timed out requests 10
Master Rejects 0
Retried requests 4
Serial Link Error Count 0
Successful Comms Tests 1
Initiate Comms Test
Reset Diagnostics
Figure 4.3.16p Master Comms diagnostic page
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 171
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.17 Output channels
‘Output Channels’ appears as a configuration item only if either or both of the Master Comms or Analogue outputs options is fitted.
MASTER COMMS
For Master Comms, this feature allows a Master Unit to write one (or more) of its points to one (or more)
slaves’ channels. Figure 4.3.17a shows a typical configuration page.
Output Channel Number
Enable
Output Type
Slave
Parameter
Scaling
Scale Low
Scale High
Point Type
Point Number
Process Value
Descriptor
Source
Default
On Error Write Default
1) Output 1
Master Comms
1) Furn Recorder 2
Select 'Off'', 'Master
Comms', 'mA' or 'V'
Comms Channel
High/Low
Scaling items appear only
0
for some slave types
100
Channel
Select destination point
1
Medium Priority Select iteration rate
Output 1
1) Channel 4 Select source point
0
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.17a Typical output channel configuration page
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Output Channel Number
Allows the user to select the Output to be configured.
Enable
Allows the output channel to be enabled or disabled.
Output Type
Select Master Comms
Slave
Select the slave to be written-to.
Parameter
Select required parameter from picklist (varies according to slave type/model)
Scaling
If this field appears (depends on slave type), the Low and High scaling should match
that of the slave Channel being written to.
Point Type
Allows a point type to be chosen from a picklist. (Picklist items vary according to
slave type/model)
Point Number
For recorders, allows a point number to be entered. This point must be configured
as ‘Comms’ or ‘Slave Comms’ etc. (depending on slave type or model) at the slave.
Loop Number For Controllers, allows a loop number to be selected from a picklist.
Process Value
Allows the selection of High, Medium or Low priority interval, as defined in the Master Comms configuration page in section 4.3.16.
Descriptor
Allows a descriptor of up to 20 characters to be entered for the output channel
name.
Source
This allows the user to select the source point to be written to the slave destination
point.
Default
This is the value written, if the source is in ‘Error’, and the ‘On error Write Default’
item (below) has been enabled.
On Error Write Default
If this item is enabled, the default value is written instead of the selected Source, if
the Source is in ‘Error’.
User Guide
Page 172
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.17 OUTPUT CHANNELS (Cont.)
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS (RETRANSMISSION)
For Analogue outputs, this feature allows the user to direct any recorder point to a pair of rear panel
terminals (figure 2.2.1d), either as a voltage signal or as a current signal, as required. Figure 4.3.17 shows
a typical configuration page. See section 9 for Output Adjust details.
Output Channel Number
Enable
Output Type
Descriptor
Range Low
Range High
Offset
Source span low
Source span high
Data Source
On Error
1) Output 1
V
Output 1
0
10
0
0
10
Channel 1
Drive Off
Apply
Discard
Select 'Off', 'Master
Comms', 'mA' or 'V'.
Select source point
Select 'Drive Off', 'Drive
High' or 'Drive Low'.
Figure 4.3.17b Typical analogue output configuration page
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Output Channel Number
Allows the user to select the Output to be configured.
Enable
Allows the output channel to be enabled or disabled.
Output Type
Select V or mA
Descriptor
Allows a descriptor of up to 20 characters to be entered for the output channel
name.
Range Low
The output which is to appear at the terminals when the source signal is at ‘Source
span low’.
Range High
The output which is to appear at the terminals when the source signal is at ‘Source
span high’.
Offset
Allows a fixed value to be entered to the value of the source signal before conversion
to the output range.
Source span low
Allows the value of the source signal which is to result in ‘Range Low’ appearing at
the output terminals to be set.
Source span high Allows the value of the source signal which is to result in ‘Range High’ appearing at
the output terminals to be set.
Data Source
This allows the user to select a point, or a constant to act as the source. If ‘Constant’
is selected, a further field (not shown in figure 4.3.17b) appears allowing the constant
value to be entered.
On Error
Drive Off: the output signal is switched off (0 Volts or 0 mA).
Drive High: the output signal is set to Range High + 15%.
Drive Low: the output signal is set to Range Low - 15%.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 173
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.18 Demand Writes
DEMAND WRITE CONFIGURATION
Demand writes allow slave values to be written from the master by operator action (from the configuration page), by job action, or (if the Screen Builder option is fitted - section 7) by operation of a suitably
configured Operator key. Figure 4.3.18a shows a typical configuration page. Modbus codes 6 and 16 can
be selected for this purpose - see section 8.2.1 for code definitions.
Figure 4.3.18a shows a typical configuration page for writing to a recorder. Figure 4.3.18b shows the Edit
Constant page. Figure 4.3.18c shows a configuration page for the case where the destination is defined
as a register location.
WRITING TO A KNOWN DEVICE
Figure 4.3.18a shows the configuration page for writing a value from the master unit to a ‘known’ slave
unit.
Write number 1) Write_1
Select the Write number to be configured
Enable
Demand Type Master Comms
Select 'Master
Comms' or 'Off'
Status OK
Demand Write
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder
Parameter Alarm setpoint 2
Point Type
Point Number
Descriptor
Source
Default
Allow Constant Edits
Channel
Select destination
slave
Select parameter
to be written-to
Select destination
1
Write 1
Constant
0
On Error Write Default
Disable Retries
Send On Power Up
Apply
Enter default value
Allows user to edit the constant prior
to write (if Source = 'constant')
If enabled, the default value is written, should
the selected source be in an 'Error' state.
If enabled, the write is attempted only once.
Write is triggered when the unit powers up.
Discard
Figure 4.3.18a Typical Demand write configuration page
User Guide
Page 174
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.18 DEMAND WRITES (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE ITEMS
Write number
Enable
Demand Type
Status
Allows the user to select the Demand Write number to be configured
Allows the user to enable/disable the write.
Select ‘Master Comms’ or ‘Off’
Shows the status of the transaction. The meaning of most status strings are self-evident, the remaining ones have the following definitions:
OK:
Transaction was carried out and a satisfactory response has been received
Idle:
Appears only before the first Write following a power cycle, or if the Write
has not previously been configured.
Pending:Appears if the Write is waiting to happen, or a response is being waited for.
Can appear, for example, if the Write is queued.
Timeout:Appears if the slave fails to respond within the timeout set in the Master
Comms configuration page.
Transaction Disabled:
Appears, for example, if the Write has been disabled, but a job is still trying
to trigger it.
Slave
Allows the user to select the Slave to be written-to, from a picklist containing all the
configured devices in the Master Comms configuration page.
Parameter
Select parameter to be written to (picklist varies according to slave type/model)
Point type/Loop Number/Group Number
Allows a point, loop or group number to be entered for the selected parameter.
Descriptor
Allows a descriptor to be entered for the Write.
Source
Allows the source of the Write to be chosen, from a picklist containing ‘Constant’
plus all points in the recorder.
Default
Allows a value to be entered for use as a default to be written to the destination
point. Appears if ‘Source’ = ‘Constant’, or for any other source, if the ‘On Error Write
Default’ checkbox (see below) is enabled.
Allow Constant edits If this is enabled, the user may change the default value before it is sent. Applies
only to user-triggered writes. See ‘Demand Write Button’, below.
On Error Write Default
Appears for all sources other than ‘Constant’. If this function is enabled, then the
default value is written, instead of the source value, should the source be in an Error
state. When enabled, the ‘Default’ entry box appears, if it was previously hidden.
Disable Retries
If enabled, this function causes the recorder to attempt the Write only once, instead of
retrying according to the number of retries set in the Master Comms Configuration Page.
Send On Power Up If enabled, this causes the default value to be Written at Power-Up.
DEMAND WRITE BUTTON
When operated, this pushbutton causes the Write to be initiated. If the source is ‘Constant’ and the ‘Allow Constant Edits’ item is enabled, an ‘Edit’ page appears (figure 4.3.18b) allowing the user to change
the constant value from its default value, before the Write is carried out. Otherwise, the Write is carried
out without any further action being required.
Write 1
Status OK
Constant 0
Write now
Close
Figure 4.3.18b Constant Edit page
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 175
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.18 DEMAND WRITES (Cont.)
WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER
When ‘User Defined’ is selected , or if the slave device is ‘Unknown’, then a register can be defined which
can be written-to directly. The register addresses must be found from the documentation supplied with
the slave device.
Write number 1) Write 1
Select the Write to
be configured
Enable
Demand Type Master Comms
Select 'Master
Comms' or 'Off'
Status Idle
Demand Write
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder
Parameter User Defined
Function Code
Register
Data Type
Descriptor
Source
Default
Allow Constant Edits
Select destination
slave
Preset Multiple reg (16)
248
Float (32 Bit)
Write 1
Constant
0
Disable Retries
Send On Power Up
Apply
Enter default value
Allows user to edit the constant prior
to write (if Source = 'constant')
If enabled, the write is attempted only once.
Write is triggered when the unit powers up.
Discard
Figure 4.3.18c Demand Writes to specific register
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
This contains details of parameters unique to Demand Writes to specific registers. Other parameters are
as described above.
Function Code
Register
Data Type
User Guide
Page 176
Allows the Modbus function code 6 or 16 to be selected. See the documentation
supplied with the slave for a list of supported Modbus codes (for this instrument see
section 8.2.1). Demand writes of a single 8 or 16-bit register can use either code, but
code 6 is more efficient. Writing two or more registers requires the use of code 16.
A decimal number representing the required parameter’s location in the slave’s
Modbus Register map. This information must be determined from the documentation supplied with the slave. For this instrument, section 8.4 contains listings for a
number of instrument, groups, and input channels. For details of maths, totalisers
etc., refer to the relevant option description.
Select a suitable data type for the selected parameter (again from the slave documentation). For this instrument, a list of relevant data types is given in section 8.4.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.18 DEMAND WRITES (Cont.)
WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Scaling
Whether Scaling appears or not is Model and Parameter dependent. If scaling is required, the choice may be ‘Decimal Places, or High/Low, again according to Model.
‘Decimal Places’ allows a dividing factor to be entered. An entry of 1, divides the
returned value by 10. An entry of 2, divides by 100 etc. for successful implementation, there must be a sufficient number of decimal places defined in the ‘Max Decimal Digits’ configuration field for the value to be displayed with the required precision.. ‘None’ leaves the returned value unchanged. ‘None’ leaves the returned value
unchanged.
For some slaves, scale zero (scale low) is returned as value 0 and full scale (scale high)
as value 65,535 (Hex FFFF) with intermediate values having proportionate values.
For example the value 15, would be represented as 32,767 (7FFF) for a channel scale
0 to 30, as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100, and a value of 45 for a
channel scaled 30 to 60. In order to convert this reading to an understandable value,
a scaling factor must be entered. If the low and high scale entries match the slave
channel’s scale, the master reading will be the same as the slave’s reading.
Selecting ‘High/Low’ allows Scale low and Scale high values to be entered for the
selected parameter. If ‘None’ is selected, the process value is displayed as a proportion of 65,535.
DEMAND WRITES WITH AUDIT TRAIL
Normal Audit Trail messages include both the new value and the previous value, for example
09/08/08 11:27:58 1) Temp1 Alarm Number 1 Enable Latched was Off
With Demand Writes, the recorder has no way of determining what the value, of the parameter being
written to, was prior to the Write. For this reason no ‘was’ value is included in the message. A typical
Demand Write audit trail message would be:
09/08/08 11:35:10 Write_1 wrote 255.75
Please see section 4.4.2 for more details of Audit Trail.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 177
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.19 E-mails
E-mails can be sent by the instrument to one or more recipients. The user can enter 10 recipient e-mail
addresses in each of five mailing lists, giving a maximum of 50 addresses, 10 of which can be sent to at
any one time. A Recipient can appear in as many lists as required.
Up to 24 e-mails can be configured, but which of these e-mails is sent, is defined during Job or Event Button configuration. Any function capable of triggering a job, can cause any of the available e-mails to be
sent.
As well as a ‘Subject’, and the body text, each e-mail can include one of the messages set up in ‘Message
Configuration’, and can thus include embedded values, alarm status, batch status etc., as described in
section 4.3.8.
E-MAIL CONFIGURATION
The figure below shows the e-mail configuration page (using fictitious names for email server/address
information).
Mail Server
Port Number
Sender
Errors To
Retry Time
Recipient List
Descriptor
Rcpt1
Rcpt2
Rcpt3
mail server name
25
IP Address of Recorder
e-mail address to which e-mail failure messages to be sent
60
Seconds
Select List Number
1) List1
List1
e-mail address of 1st Recipient on this list
e-mail address of 2nd Recipient on this list
etc.
Rcpt4
Rcpt5
Rcpt6
Rcpt7
Rcpt8
Rcpt9
Rcpt10
Email Number
Descriptor
Protocol
Subject
1) Email1
Email1
SMTP (Email)
Select SMTP,
SMS (Subject Only) or
SMS (Body only)
Cold store alarm
Cold store temp. sensor 1 too hot. Instrument name,
Instrument number, chan 1Alarm1
Text
Include Message
Message
3) {1},{2},{3},{4}
Apply
Select Message Number
Discard
Figure 4.3.19a E-mail configuration (SMTP Protocol)
User Guide
Page 178
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.19 EMAILS (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
This subsection contains details of the parameters that appear in the E-mail configuration page (figure
4.3.19a above). Figure 4.3.19b (below) may also be referred-to for further explanation.
Mail Server
Port Number
Sender
Errors To
Retry time
Recipient List
Descriptor
Rcpt1 to Rcpt10
Email Number
Descriptor
Protocol
Subject
Text
Include message
Enter the name (note 1) of the mail server or IP address here. This is the destination
to which e-mails are sent, for subsequent delivery.
This is the port number used for SMTP by the servers. Most servers use port 25 for
this function, and this value should be changed from the default only by experienced
personnel.
For DNS operation, this is a combination of the Local Host and Domain entries set up
in the ‘Network/Name’ area of configuration described in section 4.5 .
If Fixed I.P. Address is selected, the I.P. Address appears instead.
The unit accesses the ‘Sender’ information automatically, and it cannot be edited
here. The ‘Sender’ is placed in the ‘From:’ part of the e-mail header.
An e-mail address to which any error messages can be sent for display etc. The
instrument itself cannot receive e-mails and so is unable to display (for example ‘undeliverable’) messages itself. An entry in this field must be made. The same address
may be used for any number of instruments.
The product tries repeatedly (until successful) to dispatch the e-mail until the ‘Retry
time’ has expired. If the e-mail has not been sent within this period, it is deleted, and
a ‘General’ message is generated.
Allows a list to be chosen for entry of recipient e-mail addresses
Allows a name to be entered for the selected list.
These fields allow 10 recipients’ e-mail addresses to be entered for the selected list.
The first valid address appears in the ‘To:’ part of the e-mail header; subsequent valid
addresses appear in the ‘Cc:’ part of the e-mail header (note 2).
Allows an e-mail to be selected for configuration.
Allows a descriptor to be entered for the e-mail. This appears in the list of e-mails
when setting up a job, and also in the message log.
Choose one of ‘SMPT (Email)’, ‘SMS (Subject Only)’ and ‘SMS (Body Only)’. ‘Operation’ (below) gives some details of the application of the SMS protocol in this instrument.
SMPT (Email).
Selecting this protocol allows both a Subject and Body text to be entered.
SMS (Subject Only).
Selecting this protocol allows a subject to be entered, but the entry field for
the body text is not presented for use. Any text previously entered here, whilst
another protocol was selected, is lost.
SMS (Body Only)
Selecting this protocol allows Body text to be entered, but the Subject field is
not displayed. Any text previously entered as a Subject, whilst another protocol
was selected, is lost.
Allows the entry of up to 100 characters to appear in the ‘Subject:’ part of the e-mail
header. The field does not appear if ‘SMS Body Only’ is selected as the Protocol.
Allows the entry of up to 240 characters to appear as the body of the e-mail. The
field does not appear if ‘SMS Subject Only’ is selected as the Protocol. Also referred
to as ‘Body Text’.
If this checkbox in enabled, one of the messages in the ‘Message Configuration’ area
can be selected to appear below the body text in the e-mail.
Notes:
1. Domain Name Service (DNS) must be enabled in the recorder network configuration (section
4.5.2) if a mail server name is to be used.
2. A ‘general’ message is generated if there are any invalid recipients in any list (who would not
receive e-mails). Such messages may be viewed in ‘Message Log’ (section 3.1.4).
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 179
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.19 EMAILS (Cont.)
E-MAIL DETAILS
Figure 4.3.19b depicts an e-mail using fictitious entries.
Instrument's Local Host address
(or IP address, if fixed)
First valid recipient address
Header
Further valid recipients
'Subject' entry
'Text' entry
(body text)
Body
Message
(if 'Include message' checked)
Figure 4.3.19b E-mail appearance
The figure above shows that the e-mail is in two distinct parts, the header (grey area) and the body (white
area).
THE HEADER AREA
The header contains details of the sender, the recipient(s), the subject and the time and date.
Note: The time and date may be local to the generating instrument, or local to the recipient, depending on the recipient’s mail host configuration
The header is important in the prevention of ‘spamming’. The instrument adheres to the RFC2822 standard with respect to e-mail headers. Some servers are stricter than others, and it is not guaranteed that an
e-mail generated by the instrument will not be interpreted as a spam message by the receiving server.
From:
To:
CC:
Subject: User Guide
Page 180
This contains either the ‘Local Host’ name (as defined in Network/Name Setup) and
mailserver address, or the IP address if a fixed IP address is selected in Network/Address settings. See section 4.5 for details of the Network key.
The first valid recipient address in the selected list.
The remaining valid addresses in the recipient list
Contains the subject text entered during configuration. Empty if ‘SMS Body’ selected as Protocol
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.19 EMAILS (Cont.)
THE BODY AREA
This contains the body text, along with any appended messages. In the example above the message has
the embedded values of Instrument name, Instrument number, channel 1 alarm 1 status, as implied by
the body text.
OPERATION
1. E-mails are generated either by job or by operation of an Event Button from a User screen (if the
Screen builder option is fitted).
2. Every time the sending of an e-mail is requested, a ‘General’ note is generated and appears in the
message log for all groups. The format is: Date, Time Sent <e-mail descriptor> to List N, where <email descriptor> represents the descriptor entered in the configuration page for the e-mail, and ‘List
N’ is the recipient list to whom the e-mail was sent.
3. Access to e-mails is restricted to users with ‘Full Configuration’ permission.
4. Signing/Authorizing restrictions can be applied only to e-mails generated by Event button operation, as part of the Event button’s configuration (section 4.3.7).
5. The instrument implements the Simple Message Transfer Protocol (SMTP), incorporating Multipurpose Internet Mail extensions.
6. The instrument does not implement the Short Message Service (SMS) protocol, though it is able
to send SMS messages to a mobile phone via an appropriate server or gateway. As some servers/
gateways use the ‘subject’ as the SMS message, and others use the body text, these alternatives are
provided for in the Protocol pick list in the Configuration page described above.
7. A new event source ‘Email fail’ can be used to trigger a job list should an e-mail send failure occur.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 181
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.20 Reports configuration
This allows the user to configure up to 10 ‘reports’ for output to the chart or for printing by an ASCII
printer (option) as a result of job action. Figure 4.3.20a shows a typical configuration page, accessed
from the CONFIG button ‘Reports’ item.
Report 1) Report 1
Descriptor Report 1
Number of Fields 6
Field 1 Type Date & Time
Style Normal
Field 2 Type Text
Text
Style Bold
Field 3 Type Process Value
Point Channel 1
Style Emphasised
Field 4 Type Batch Field 1
Style Banner
Field 5 Type 1) Message
Style Normal
Field 6 Type Line Feed
Line Feed 1
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.3.20a Reports Configuration
REPORT
Allows the user to select the required report number for configuration.
DESCRIPTOR
A name for the Report can be entered here.
NUMBER OF FIELDS Select 0 to 10 for the number of items to be included in the report.
FIELD N TYPE
N = 1 to the number of fields selected in the previous item.
Date & Time
Causes the time and date of report generation to be included in the
report
Text
Allows the user to enter a text message of up to 60 characters.
Process value Allows a specified point’s process value (including descriptor and
units) to be included in the report
Batch Field 1
Batch field 1 can be included in the report. See section 4.3.10 for
Batch details.
Message
A message can be selected for inclusion in the report. See section
4.3.8 for details of message configuration.
Line Feed
Allows one or more blank lines to be left. This can be useful at the
end of a report.
User Guide
Page 182
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.20 REPORTS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Note: The Style, Point and Line feed settings described below apply only to printed outputs and
have no effect when presented on the ‘chart’ or in the message log.
STYLE
See figure 4.3.20b for examples of ‘Normal’, ‘Bold’, ‘Emphasised’ and ‘Banner’ print
styles. For all styles, if the text is too long to fit on one line it ‘wraps round’ as shown
(for normal style) in the figure.
Figure 4.3.20b Printer text style examples
POINT
LINE FEED
Allows a point to be chosen when ‘Process value’ has been selected as Field Type.
The point is selected from a pick-list containing all the input channels, derived channels, totalisers etc. in the instrument.
Appears only when ‘Line Feed’ has been chosen as Field Type. Allows the user to
enter the required number of blank lines (up to 10) which are to be inserted. Line
feeds appear only on printed outputs - not on the ‘chart’ or in the message log.
Note: See section 12 for printer configuration details
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 183
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.21 Ethernet/IP™ Option
Note: Full details of Ethernet/IP protocol are available from the ODVA web site http://www.odva.
org
EtherNet/IP (Ethernet/Industrial Protocol) is a ‘producer-consumer’ communication system used to allow
industrial devices to exchange time-critical control data. Such devices range from simple I/O devices
such as sensors/actuators, to complex control devices such as robots and PLCs. The producer-consumer
model allows the exchange of information between a single sending device (producer) and a large
number of receiving devices (consumers) without having to send data multiple times to multiple destinations.
EtherNet/IP makes use of the CIP (Control & Information Protocol), common network, transport and
application layers currently implemented by DeviceNet and ControlNet. Standard Ethernet and TCP/IP
technology is used to transport CIP communications packets. The result is a common, open application
layer on top of Ethernet and TCP/IP protocols.
In order to record and trend data that has been written by the client, the relevant channel or maths
channel must be configured with ‘Input Type’ set to ‘Ethernet/IP Comms Input’ and the channel must be
included in a Recording-enabled group. See sections, 4.3.2 (Group configuration), 4.3.3 (Channel configuration) and 4.3.11 (maths configuration) as necessary.
MESSAGING
Ethernet/IP uses two forms of messaging:
UNCONNECTED MESSAGING
This is used in the connection establishment process and for infrequent, low-priority messages. The
unconnected resources in a device are called the ‘Unconnected Message Manager’ (UCMM).
CONNECTED MESSAGING
This uses resources within each node that are dedicated, in advance, to a particular purpose, such as frequent explicit message transactions or real-time I/O data transfers. Connection resources are reserved
and configured using communications services available via the UCMM.
The process of opening a connection is called ‘Connection Origination’. The node that initiates the connection establishment request is called the ‘Connection Originator’ (or ‘Originator’) and the node that
responds to the establishment request is called a ‘Connection Target’ (or ‘Target’). Ethernet/IP has two
types of messaging connections:
EXPLICIT MESSAGING CONNECTIONS
These are point-to-point relationships that are established to facilitate request-response transaction
between two nodes. These connections are general purpose in nature and can be used to reach any
network-accessible items within a device. Explicit messaging connections use TCP/IP services to move
messages across Ethernet.
IMPLICIT (I/O DATA) CONNECTIONS
These are established to move application-specific I/O data at regular intervals. These connections are
typically set up as one-to-many relationships in order to take full advantage of the producer-consumer
multicast model. Implicit messaging uses UDP/IP resources to establish multicast data.
User Guide
Page 184
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.21 ETHERNET/IP OPTION (Cont.)
CONFIGURATION
Figure 4.3.21a shows the configuration page.
Import Table
eiptable
Export Table
eiptable
Status
I/O Table
Online
Inputs
Server - - > Client
Input 1
Channel.1.pv
Input 2
Channel.2.pv
Input 3
Channel.3.pv
Input 4
Channel.4.pv
Input 5
Channel.5.pv
Input 6
Ch
Input 200
Apply
Discard
Wizard
Default Table
Show Errors
Figure 4.3.21a Ethernet/IP option configuration (large frame unit)
Import Table
Touching this field opens the file window, allowing the user to select a .uht file for
import. This file may be a file previously exported using the ‘Export table’ field, in
which case it will be found in the \user\ folder, or it may be located on a USB stick or
other memory device, in which case it will appear in a separate folder.
Export Table
This allows the user to export the current table to the instrument’s flash memory or
to a memory stick or other memory device. Exported tables may be imported into
other suitable instruments, or into a pc to be used as a ‘template’ for creating other
tables.
Status
Initialising: Initial status at start-up. Switches to ‘Online’ when the Ethernet/IP configuration has been read successfully and the server has completed its
configuration.
Online:
All cyclic inputs and outputs are updated continuously
Offline:
The server ignores all transactions and tables are not updated.
I/O Table
Select ‘Inputs’ (Server -->Client) or ‘Outputs’ (Client --> Server) for the displayed
table.
Input (output) 1
Shows the first selected input (output) parameter which is to be read or written. Input
tables can be completed by importing a suitable previously configured table, by
entering individual parameters into each field, by using the Wizard key or by using
the Default table and editing it as necessary. See ‘Table entry’, ‘Wizard key’ and/or
‘Default table’, below for further details. Output tables cannot be edited
Input (output) 2 to 200
As for input (output) 1, above, but for the remaining table entries.
Apply key
Touch this to save the table configuration. An error message is generated if the
channel number is out of range, or if the syntax is incorrect. See ‘Table entry’, below.
Discard key
Touching this key causes all changes made since the previous ‘Apply’ to be discarded.
Wizard key
This provides a mechanism for the rapid entry of input and output table parameters.
See ‘WIZARD’ below for a fuller explanation.
Default Table key Fills the displayed input or output table with channel and math PV parameters. This
can then be edited either on an entry by entry basis, or by exporting the table so that
it may be edited in a pc. Described in more detail later.
Show Errors key
Shows any errors in the current configuration. For each parameter without error, the
parameter’s Modbus address is displayed instead.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 185
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.21 ETHERNET/IP OPTION (Cont.)
TABLE ENTRY
The normal text entry techniques can be used to enter parameters into the Input table. The following
syntax must be used, or an error message will be generated when ‘Apply’ is operated and the configuration will remain unchanged:
Notes:
1. The syntax is not case sensitive; for example, it may be ‘Channel’, or ‘channel’ or ‘CHANNEL’.
2. Channels 1 to 18 (small frame) and 1 to 48 (large frame), may be configured as measuring channels or as Ethernet/IP comms input channels. The remaining channels, up to 100, must be configured as Ethernet/IP Comms input channels. For channels 76 to 100, only ‘pv’ is supported.
Channel.n.pv
Channel.n.status
Channel.n.spanhi
Channel.n.spanlo
Channel.n.dp
Channel ‘n’ process value where ‘n’ = 1 to 100 - see note 2 above.
Channel ‘n’ status, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
The Span High value for channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
The Span Low value for channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
Number of decimal places for channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
Math.n.pv
Math.n.status
Math.n.spanhi
Math.n.spanlo
Math.n.dp
Maths channel ‘n’ process value where ‘n’ = 1 to 100.
Maths channel ‘n’ status, where ‘n’ = 1 to 100.
The Span High value for maths channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 100.
The Span Low value for maths channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 100.
Number of decimal places for maths channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 100.
ERROR MESSAGES
If an error is made during editing, a brief description of the error can be viewed by operating the ‘Show
Errors’ key:
?Out of Range
this means that the channel or maths number is greater than the maximum given in
the description above (e.g. channel 101)
?Syntax Error
There is an error in capitalisation, or commas have been used instead of full stops
(periods) or some other text error has been made.
?Unsupported DataA suffix implying a data type which is not supported by this implementation of EtherNet/IP has been appended. (Example: Channel.4.alm).
If the ‘Apply’ key is operated whilst there are uncorrected errors, a message appears showing the
number of first input in which a fault has been found. The user must correct the fault and operate ‘Apply’
again in order to save the configuration. If there are further errors, the message reappears showing in
which input the next error lies (Input two in the figure below).
Config
EtherNet/IP:Invalid Item (2)
Ok
Figure 4.3.21b Error message
Note: The ‘Show Errors’ key allows the user to view all current configuration errors at the same
time. In this display, each valid parameter displays its associated Modbus address, but any error
channels display an error message instead.
User Guide
Page 186
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.21 ETHERNET/IP OPTION (Cont.)
UHT FILE RULES
1. Table configuration files must have the extension ‘.uht’
2. The first line must be: HEADER,ETHERNET_IP_SERVER,1
3 Subsequent lines may be comments (preceded with a # character and terminated with a Carriage return)
or a configuration item in the <point type>.<point number>.<suffix> as described in ‘Table Entry’ above.
WIZARD
The wizard offers a quick and easy way of loading the Input Table by touching the required point parameters and then entering start and end values for the range of points to be included. For current software,
the Output table is not editable, so any changes made in the Wizard are ignored.
EtherNet/IP Input Table Wizard
Point Type Channel
Process Value
Point Status
Span High
Touch (tick) items to include
them in the Input Table
Span Low
Decimal Places
Start New table
From Point 1
To point 1
Configure
Tick (default) to replace current list.
to append items to existing list.
Enter point range
Cancel
Figure 4.3.21c Input table wizard
Point Type
Process Value
Point Status
Span High
Span Low
Decimal Places
Start New Table
From point
To point
Select ‘Channel’ or ‘Math’ for configuration. The ‘Configure’ key must be operated
before changing from ‘Channel’ to ‘Math’ or vice-versa, as only the configuration for
the currently displayed Point Type (i.e. Channel or Math) is saved to the Input table.
Select to include Process Value
Select to include Point Status (not supported for channels 76 to 100)
Select to include Span High (not supported for channels 76 to 100)
Select to include Span Low (not supported for channels 76 to 100)
Select to include the points’ decimal places values (not supported for channels. 76 to
100)
If ticked (default), the existing list is deleted and replaced by the Wizard items when
‘configure’ is operated. If not ticked, the selected items are appended to the existing
table, using any empty spaces. If there are no spaces, the new entries are ignored.
If there are insufficient spaces, the available spaces are filled using lowest channel
numbers first, and any overflow is lost.
Enter the number of the first point of the required point range. This value must be
lower than the ‘To point’ value.
Enter the number of the final point of the required point range This value must be
higher than the ‘From point’ value..
Notes:
1. The point range is the same for all parameters selected, and the points are contiguous. In
order to select non-contiguous points, or to enter different ranges for different point types, it
is necessary to configure each required range separately and operate the ‘Configure’ key after
each range, ensuring that the ‘Start New Table’ selection is not ticked.
2. If any parameter other than ‘Process Value’ is selected for any channel in the range 76 to 100,
the selection will be accepted, but the values returned will be meaningless.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 187
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.21 ETHERNET/IP OPTION (Cont.)
DEFAULT TABLE KEY
Clicking on this key causes the relevant table to be populated with a default set of parameters.
For input tables, these parameters are: Channel.1.pv to Channel.100.pv followed by Math.1.pv to
Math.100.pv.
The output table parameters are: Channel.1.pv to Channel.100.pv followed by Math.1.pv to Math.100.pv.
SHOW ERRORS KEY
Clicking on this key causes the parameter addresses to appear after the parameter names in the input
and output tables. If a syntax or other error has been made in loading the input table, a description of
the error type appears in this view (see ‘ERROR MESSAGES’, above).
OUTPUT TABLE PARAMETER MODBUS ADDRESSES
In all cases, the addresses for the output parameters can be viewed by operating the ‘Show errors’ key. The addresses for channels 1 to 75 and maths 1 to 100 can be found as described in Section 8.4.3 (Channel Runtime
data), and section 4.3.11 (Maths channel Run-time data). Addresses for channels 76 to 100, are given below:
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Channel.76.pv
Channel.77.pv
Channel.78.pv
Channel.79.pv
Channel.80.pv
Channel.81.pv
Channel.82.pv
Channel.83.pv
Channel.84.pv
Channel.85.pv
Channel.86.pv
Channel.87.pv
Channel.88.pv
Channel.89.pv
Channel.90.pv
Channel.91.pv
Channel.92.pv
Channel.93.pv
Channel.94.pv
Channel.95.pv
Channel.96.pv
Channel.97.pv
Channel.98.pv
Channel.99.pv
Channel.100.pv
FCBF (64703)
FCC2 (64706)
FCC5 (64709)
FCC8 (64712)
FCCB (64715)
FCCE (64718)
FCD1 (64721)
FCD4 (64724)
FCD7 (64727)
FCDA (64730)
FCDD (64733)
FCE0 (64736)
FCE3 (64739)
FCE6 (64742)
FCE9 (64745)
FCEC (64748)
FCEF (64751)
FCF2 (64754)
FCF5 (64757)
FCF8 (64760)
FCFB (64763)
FCFE (64766)
FD01 (64769)
FD04 (64772)
FD07 (64775)
Channel 76 process value
Channel 77 process value
Channel 78 process value
Channel 79 process value
Channel 80 process value
Channel 81 process value
Channel 82 process value
Channel 63 process value
Channel 64 process value
Channel 65 process value
Channel 66 process value
Channel 67 process value
Channel 68 process value
Channel 69 process value
Channel 70 process value
Channel 71 process value
Channel 72 process value
Channel 73 process value
Channel 74 process value
Channel 75 process value
Channel 76 process value
Channel 77 process value
Channel 78 process value
Channel 79 process value
Channel 80 process value
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Scaled
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Register
Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Table 4.3.21 Parameter addresses for channels 76 to 100
CONFIGURING A PLC
The following instructions describe how to configure a PLC to communicate with a Paperless graphic
recorder. Although a specific PLC was used in generating these instructions, the detail should be general
enough to allow any other PLC to be used.
User Guide
Page 188
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.21 ETHERNET/IP OPTION (Cont.)
INSTALLATION
1. Install the PLC software according to the instructions supplied with the PLC. For this particular PLC,
once installation is complete, the ‘RSLinx Classic’ and ‘RSLogix 5000’ software items (AMONGST
OTHERS) must be present. RSLinx classic is used to provide a link between the PLC network and
Windows, and RSLogix 5000 is configuration and programming software for the PLC.
2. Use a cross-over type serial cable to connect one of the pc ports to the serial port (typically a 9-way
D-Type connector) of the PLC
3. Connect an Ethernet cable between the Ethernet port on the PLC (typically an RJ45 socket) and
the recorder. If a direct connection is used, the cable must be a cross-over type; if connecting via a
switch, then non cross-over cable must be used.
4. Power up the PLC and the Recorder. Switch the PLC to ‘Programmer’ mode.
SETTING UP THE LINK BETWEEN WINDOWS AND THE PLC NETWORK
1. Click on Start/All Programs/Rockwell
software/RSLinx/RSLinx Classic. The
‘RSLinx Classic’ window opens.
2. Click on ‘Communications’ and
select ‘Configure Drivers’. When the
‘Configure Drivers’ window opens,
select ‘RS232 DF1 devices’ in the
‘Available Drive Types’ pull down
menu (figure 4.3.21d).
3. Click on ‘Add New’ and enter a
suitable Driver Name in the pop-up
window that then appears. Click on
‘OK’. The ‘Configure RS-232 DF1 devices’ window opens (figure 4.3.21e).
4. In the ‘Device:’ field pull-down menu,
select the relevant device name. Select the
PC COM port, and the relevant Baud Rate,
Parity etc. (normally the defaults are acceptable). Click on ‘Auto-Configure’.
Figure 4.3.21d Configure drivers.
5. When the Auto-Configure process is complete, click on ‘OK’, to close the ‘Configure
Drivers’ window, and then minimise the
‘RSLinx Classic window.
6. Start the RSLogix 5000 program (from
‘Start/All programs/... /RSLogix 5000).
When the ‘Quick Start’ window opens, close
it.
7.
At the top of the RSLogix 5000 window,
click on the ‘Who active’ icon
or click on
‘Who Active’ in the ‘Communications’ drop
down menu. The ‘Who Active’ window
opens.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Figure 4.3.21e Configure RS-232 DF1 Devices
User Guide
Page 189
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.21 ETHERNET/IP OPTION (Cont.)
UPDATING FIRMWARE
Caution
Power must be maintained during the Update process (which may take some tens of minutes).
Loss of power during update may render the PLC inoperative.
1. Select the relevant instrument (figure 4.3.21f) and
click on ‘Update Firmware’.
In the ‘Choose Firmware
Revision’ window, select
the latest version. Click on
‘Update’.
2. Click on ‘Yes’ or ‘OK’ as appropriate to accept all the
warnings and notes, and
wait for the process to complete and to be validated.
3. When the update process
is complete, close the ‘Who
Active’ window.
COMPLETING THE LINK
Figure 4.3.21f Who active window
. The ‘New Controller’ window
1. In the ‘File’ menu select ‘New’, or click on the ‘New Tool’ icon
opens (figure 4.3.21g).
2. Select the relevant PLC from the drop-down menu. Enter a name, if required and click on ‘OK’ After
some seconds, the selected controller’s window opens.
3. Open the ‘Who active’ window, and select the relevant instrument from the hierarchy. Click on
‘Download’.
4. When the download is complete, right click on the relevant Ethernet port in the left pane ‘tree’, and
select ‘Properties’ (figure 4.3.21h).
Figure 4.3.21g New Controller window
User Guide
Page 190
Figure 4.3.21h Ethernet port location
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.21 ETHERNET/IP OPTION (Cont.)
5. The Module Properties window opens. Select the ‘Port Configuration’ tab. For fixed IP Address applications, ‘uncheck’ the ‘Enable BootP’ check box, and enter an appropriate IP address and Subnet
mask for the PLC.
6. Click on ‘Set’, and click on ‘OK’ on the warnings and notes displays.
7. Click on ‘OK’ to close the Properties window.
8. Left click on the ‘Program’ icon (figure 4.3.21j) and select ‘Go OffLine’ from the menu which appears.
Figure 4.3.21i Module Properties
Figure 4.3.21j Click on ‘Program’ icon
9. Download, either from ‘Who Active’ or from the Program icon.
10. Connect the PLC to the Ethernet port (RJ45) of the PC.
11. Restore the RSLinx window. In the communications menu Configure Drivers window, select ‘EtherNet/IP Driver’. Click on ‘Add New’ and enter a name for the driver.
12. Select ‘Browse local subnet’ if this is not already selected.
13. Click on the relevant Network Card and Click on ‘OK’.
14. Minimise the RSLinx window.
Figure 4.3.21k Configure EtherNet/IP driver
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 191
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.21 ETHERNET/IP OPTION (Cont.)
CREATING A NETWORK SCANNER
1. In the left pane tree-view of the RSLogix 5000 window, right click on the EtherNet symbol and select
‘New Module...’ from the menu (figure 4.3.21l).
2. Expand the communications list (click on the + symbol) (figure 4.3.21m)
Figure 4.3.21l Right click on the EtherNet
symbol
Figure 4.3.21m The communications list
(unexpanded)
3. Using the scroll bar as necessary, click on the ‘Generic EtherNet Module’ item (figure 4.3.21n) and
click on ‘OK’ (or double click on the selected item).
4. In the Parameters page that appears (figure 4.3.21p), enter a name for the module, and set the following values:
Comm Format: Data - INT
Address/Host name: The IP address of the recorder (from Operator/Network/Address menu)
Input: 100; size: 200
Output: 112; size: 200
Configuration: 1; size 0
5. Tick (click on) the ‘Open Module Properties’ checkbox if it is not already ticked.
6. Click on ‘OK”
Figure 4.3.21n ‘Select Generic EtherNet Module’
User Guide
Page 192
Figure 4.3.21p Enter parameters
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.21 ETHERNET/IP OPTION (Cont.)
CREATING A NETWORK SCANNER (Cont.)
7.
In the Module properties page (Figure 4.3.21q), set RPI to 1000 and click ‘OK’.
Figure 4.3.21q Module properties page
RECORDER CONFIGURATION
1. At the recorder. log in (section 3.3.1).
2. In the Operator/Config menu, touch the ‘Options’ item (at the bottom of the list). Check that ‘EtherNet/IP’ is enabled. If not, the software needs to be upgraded as described in section 4.6.3 and an
‘Autoconfigure’ carried out.
3. In the Operator/Config/Channels area (section 4.3.3), configure the channels as appropriate. Those
channels which are to receive data from the PLC should have their ‘Input Type’’ set to ‘EtherNet/IP
Comms Input’. The System/Copy facility (section 4.6.8) can be used to speed up the process. Maths
channels are set up is a similar way (section 4.3.11).
4. Set scale, units etc. to appropriate values.
Note... For the EtherNet/IP application, the number of decimal places is set to zero by default.
Editing this value may lead to loss of resolution in the values displayed.
5. Configure the EtherNet/IP input table as required (described earlier in this section).
7. Ensure that the PLC is connected to the recorder either directly using a cross-over EtherNet cable or
via a switch using non cross-over cable.
RUN MODE
1. Set the PLC into either ‘Remote’ or ‘Run’ mode.
2. Set the PLC online
STATUS INDICATORS
The status indicators at the top left corner of the RSLogix 5000 Page (Figure 4.3.21s) show the status of
the link between the pc and the PLC.
Status indicators
PLC Mode indicator
Figure 4.3.21s Status displays
It is possible to check that the PLC is communicating with the recorder using the ‘Tags’ display to write
values to the recorder and to receive values from it. Once it is proved that the link is working, the pc may
be disconnected from the PLC if required.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 193
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.22 Options
���������� ���������
�������������������� ����������
��������������� ���
���������������� ���
����� ���
���������� ���
�������� ��
������ ���
����� ��������
���������������� ���������
������� ��������
�������������� �����
������������ �����
�������������������� ���
���������� ���������
������� ���������
����������� ��������
��� ��������
������������ ��
(currently 1)
����������������� ��
����������������� ��
(currently 0)
������������������ ��
���������������������� �
Apply
Discard
(currently 0)
Autoconfigure
Figure 4.3.22 Options menu layout
Touching this key calls a display showing the current recorder hardware/software setup, for example the
number of input channels fitted, the number of output relay boards fitted, and how many relays are fitted
per card. Subsequently, should further options be fitted (relay board two and Analogue output board 1 in
the above example), this page shows the difference between the hardware actually fitted and the hardware the recorder software is configured for (currently ...). Whenever there is a difference, the ‘Autoconfigure’ key can be pressed to alert the recorder to the fact that extra options have been added (or taken
away).
If no changes have occurred since last switch-on, then the ‘(currently ...)’ fields and the ‘Autoconfigure’ key
do not appear.
User Guide
Page 194
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.22 OPTIONS (Cont.)
TRIAL MODE
Enabling ‘Trial Mode’ allows the user to enable, temporarily, the various software options that are available. Once the user has made the required choices, the ‘Set Trial Options’ key at the bottom of the screen,
must be operated, followed by an ‘Autoconfigure’ procedure.
Initially, the trial mode is set to expire 30 days after enabling (whether the recorder is powered or not).
Any change in configuration results in a pop-up message stating how much of the 30 days period remains. Once Trial mode is disabled by the user, the remaining Trial Time Remaining’ value is retained
until Trial Mode is re-enabled.
Notes:
1. Trial mode enables/disables all options or features (except ‘Simulation’ and ‘History Maintenance’) which are not fitted or enabled in the recorder. The number and distribution of virtual
channels reverts to that configured before Trial mode was invoked.
2. When disabling Trial mode, all configuration for the trial features is lost. Should the user decide
to purchase a trial feature, then it is recommended that the trial configuration be saved (see
section 4.2) so that it may be restored once the purchased trial feature is fitted and enabled
(keycodes cannot be entered in Trial Mode).
3. Trial mode can be enabled only by users with ‘Perform upgrades’ permission (section 4.4.1).
VIRTUAL CHANNELS
Virtual channels are Maths channels, Totalisers and Counters. The total number of virtual channels is as
specified at time of order. The user can select whatever combination of maths channels, totalisers and
counters is required, so long as the total does not exceed the number of virtual channels available. If it
does, a warning is given when the ‘Apply’ button is operated, and the edit is ignored.
Note: If more than 100 maths channels are configured, then the Modbus register addresses of
totalisers and counters are affected. If for example there were 105 maths channels, then the value
of totaliser 1 would be found at the address normally associated with totaliser 6, and the value of
counter 1 would be found at the address normally associated with counter 6.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 195
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.3.22 OPTIONS (Cont.)
SIMULATION OPTION
This option consists of a number of additional jobs, as described below. This option is not enabled in
‘Trial mode’.
TREND FREEZE
When this ‘Trend’ category job (section 4.7.11) is initiated, the displays are held at their values at the time
of initiation. When the recorder is ‘unfrozen’ the displays switch to their current values, and the clock restarts from where it stopped. No blue line is drawn across the trace to indicate time discontinuity (Time
change records - section 3.4).
Note: If ‘SNTP client enable’ is enabled (Network Address area - section 4.5), then the recorder
time is synchronised at power-up only. I.E. the normal checks of recorder time compared with
server time are not carried out with the Simulator option enabled.
If ‘SNTP server enable’ is enabled, then the recorder will supply recorder time.
CLEAR
This ‘Trend’ category job (section 4.7.11) clears the display. Used in conjunction with ‘Erase all History
(below), this is known, in some applications, as Recall Mode.
ERASE ALL HISTORY
This ‘Recording’ category job (section 4.7.10) erases all the history files in the recorder. Used in conjunction with ‘Clear’ (above), this is known, in some applications, as Recall Mode.
Note: If the 21CFR11 option is enabled, Erase All History jobs can be triggered, but are ignored,
leaving the recording history unaffected.
SCREEN SAVER
This ‘Trend’ category job (section 4.7.11) switches the display brightness to the value set up in ‘Saver
Display’ (Instrument Configuration - section 4.3.1) for the duration of the job. The job overrides the ‘Save
after’ time value also set up in Instrument Configuration.
User Guide
Page 196
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4 SECURITY
Touching this key allows the operator to select ‘Login’ (described in section 3.3.1), ‘Access’, ‘Management’ or ‘Add/Remove User’ for configuration. Selecting ‘Access’ displays the current user level. Touching this area allows the user to select ‘Logged out’, ‘Operator’, ‘Engineer’ or any of the added users. The
user may also go directly to logged out mode by operating the ‘Logout’ key.
For users with Security Manager option enabled, ‘Change Password’ and ‘Clear Password Cache’ may
also appear in this menu depending on the user’s access level.
Archive
Save/Restore
Config
Security
Network
System
Login (Section 3.3.1)
Login
Access
Select the required access level and enter the
password if required
User Engineer
Password expires in 29
Days
Logout
Management
Add User
Remove User
Change Password
Clear Password Cache
Access
(Section 4.4.1)
Access when Engineer
Domain name
New Password ***
Section 4.4.5
Retype
Password ***
Section 4.4.6
Management option
Connect from remote
(Section 4.4.2)
Login Disabled
Record Logins
Edit Own Password
Login Timeout 1 Minutes
Change Alarm Setpoints
with unapplied changes Ignore timeout
Acknowledge Alarms
Password Retries 3 times
Edit Maths Constant
Passwords Expire 30 Days
Reset maths
Minimum Password Length 3
Preset Totalisers
Require Signing
Preset Counters
Require Authorization
Start/reset Timers
Enable Audit Trail
Set Clock
Password Change on Expiry
Adjust I/O
Centralised Security
Archiving Control
Remove User
Login By User List
(Section 4.4.4)
Save/Restore
Apply
Discard
Paste/Delete Files
User User Full Name
Full Configuration
Full Security
Remove
Batch Control
Can Sign
Apply
Discard
Can Authorize
Perform Upgrades
Event Permission 1
Add User (Section 4.4.3)
Event Permission 2
New User ID
Event Permission 3
New Full User Name
Event Permission 4
New Domain Name
Event Permission 5
New Password
Edit Output Channel Default
Retype Password
Action Demand Writes
Force Change Of Password
Based On Operator
Enter Batch Data
Add
Allow web server
Apply
Discard
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.4 Security configuration menus
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 197
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.1 Access levels
There are essentially three levels of security associated with the recorder viz: Engineer, Operator and
Logged out. (The fourth level - Service - is available only to service engineers). When logged-in at engineer level, the user can set access permissions for other levels, and can enter or edit passwords for Operator and Engineer levels. The default password for Engineer level access is ‘100’. The default password
for ‘Operator’ level access is ‘blank’ (i.e. no password is required), unless the Auditor 21CFR11 option is
fitted in which case the default is also 100.
Note: To allow free access to the recorder configuration, the password can be set to ‘blank’. This
allows subsequent access without a password having to be entered (not for recorders with either
Auditor option fitted).
Users with Full Security permission can Add (and Delete) users (sections 4.4.3, 4.4.4) and assign them
individual passwords and access permissions.
SETTING PERMISSIONS
Once logged in at Engineer level, operate the
Security key and select Access. A page similar
to that shown in figure 4.4.1 appears, allowing the permissions to be set for the various
access levels and for individual users. The list
of parameters is the same for all access levels
except for ‘Logged out’, for which the password parameters and ‘login disabled’ items do
not appear.
Note: If the Security management option is
fitted, and ‘Centralised Security’ is enabled
in the Security/Management system (section 4.4.2), permissions are ‘Read Only’ (i.e.,
not editable) at the recorder.
In such a case permissions can be changed
only by using the Security Management
software.
Access when
Domain
New Password
Retype Password
Connect from remote
Remote user name
Remote password
Retype remote password
Login Disabled
Edit own Password
Change Alarm Setpoints
Acknowledge Alarms
Edit Maths Constant
Reset Maths
Preset Totalisers
Preset Counters
Start/Reset Timers
Set Clock
Adjust I/O
Archiving Control
Save/Restore
Paste/Delete Files
Full Configuration
Full Security
Batch Control
Can Sign
Can Authorize
Perform Upgrades
Event Permission 1
Event Permission 2
Event Permission 3
Event Permission 4
Event Permission 5
Edit Output Channel Default
Action Demand Writes
Force Change of Password
Enter Batch Data
Allow web server
Apply
Frederick Bloggs
Security Manager option is fitted
**
Password functions do not appear
for 'Logged-out' level of access or
if Domain is not left blank.
**
Fred
Remote user fields appear
only if 'Connect from
remote' is enabled
Password functions do not
appear for 'Logged-out'
level of access.
These fields appear only if
the relevant options are
fitted
= Enabled
These fields appear only
if the Auditor 21CFR11
option is enabled.
Action Demand Writes appears
only if the Master Comms
option is fitted.
Discard
Figure 4.4.1 Access permissions menu
User Guide
Page 198
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.1 ACCESS LEVELS (Cont.)
ACCESS WHEN
Allows an access level or an individual Full User Name to be selected from a pick list.
DOMAIN NAME
For units fitted with Security Manager option only, this allows a security domain name of up to 60 characters to be entered, for the user selected in the ‘Access when’ field. If the default (blank) is not edited, then
the user can gain access using password setup in the ‘New password’ field described below. If a new
domain name is entered here, or if one already appears, the ‘New Password’ and ‘Retype Password’ fields
are not displayed, and the user must use his or her network login password, as allocated by the user’s IT
department or Network administrator.
Details of the Active Directory Server are entered in Network/Address configuration (section 4.5.1). Passwords can be edited as described in ‘Change Password’ (section 4.4.5)
If ‘Centralised security’ is enabled in the Security/Management menu (section 4.4.2) then the Domain
name can be configured only using Security Manager software.
Note: An IP address must not be used as the domain name because to do so will disable the
user’s ability to log in using Active Directory, even if there is a valid account on the server.
NEW PASSWORD/RETYPE PASSWORD
These fields do not appear if ‘Access when’ = ‘Logged Out’, or if the ‘Domain Name’ is anything other
than left blank.
These fields allow a new password to be entered for the selected access level or User. The password
must also be entered in the ‘Re-type Password’ field. If the two differ, a warning message (Passwords did
not match) appears when the APPLY key is operated, and password entry must be repeated. If the password does not comply with the minimum length requirements in Security Management (if fitted) (section
4.4.2), a warning message (Invalid Password) appears when the ‘Apply’ key is operated, and password
entry must be repeated.
CONNECT FROM REMOTE
Enabling this field, causes two further entry boxes: ‘Remote user name’ and ‘Remote password’ to appear. These items are used in establishing connection between a host computer and the recorder. The
Remote user name is, by default, the Access Level (e.g. ‘Engineer’) or the User ID.
To make use of the Web server facility (Annex C), ‘Allow web server’ (below) must also be enabled.
REMOTE USER NAME/REMOTE PASSWORD
These two entry boxes allow user name and password to be entered for use by the remote host operator.
The remote user will be able to access the recorder configuration according to the other access permissions enabled in this page. The password must be entered twice to ensure integrity.
To allow unrestricted view-only to the host, ‘Logged out’ permission level should be selected and then a
user name of ‘anonymous’ entered, and the password field left blank.
Notes:
1. Remote login will be refused if the user account is disabled for any reason.
2. For maximum security, it is recommended that the remote password and the ‘local’ password
are non-identical.
3. Attempts to establish a Bridge connection will fail if the relevant Remote User Name contains
characters with ASCII codes greater than 127 (such as é, è, a., ü etc.). Section B6 (Annex B)
shows codes 0 to 127.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 199
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.1 ACCESS LEVELS (Cont.)
LOGIN DISABLED
For all levels except Logged Out, This allows any one or more of the access levels to be removed from the
‘Access when’ picklist.
Note: This feature should be used with discretion, or the situation might arise in which the recorder cannot be logged onto, either at a particular access level or at all. It is recommended that at
least one user with Engineer-level access is retained with login enabled, or it may become necessary to return the recorder to the manufacturer, or to arrange for a service visit.
Auditor option notes:
1. If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted, and the number of Password Retries is exceeded then
the relevant login is disabled. A user with Engineer level access can re-enable the login.
2. If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted, and the Password Expire time has been exceeded, all
logins are disabled. In order to reconfigure the recorder, it is necessary to use the Service password - please contact the recorder supplier or the nearest service centre for advice.
EDIT OWN PASSWORD
Allows each user, with this permission enabled, to edit his/her password.
CHANGE ALARM SETPOINTS
Allows each user with this permission enabled, to edit alarm parameters under Configuration/Channel
ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS
Allows each user with this permission enabled to acknowledge alarms (section 3.1.4)
EDIT MATHS CONSTANT
For recorders fitted with the Maths option only. If one or more maths channels are configured with function ‘Constant’, then with this permission set, the user may edit the constant value(s).
RESET MATHS
Allows the user to reset applicable maths functions. See section 4.3.11 for further details of maths functions.
PRESET TOTALISERS
Allows the user to preset totaliser values (if the option is fitted). See section 4.3.12 for further details of
totalisers.
PRESET COUNTERS
Allows the user to preset counter values (if the option is fitted). See section 4.3.13 for further details of
Counters.
START/RESET TIMERS
Allows the user to start and reset the timer value. See section 4.3.14 for further details of timers.
SET CLOCK
Allows each user with this permission enabled, to set the recorder time and date functions under System/
Clock
ADJUST I/O
Allows the user to adjust recorder inputs and outputs as described in section 4.6.4, and section 9 below.
User Guide
Page 200
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.1 ACCESS LEVELS (Cont.)
ARCHIVING CONTROL
Allows each user with this permission enabled full access to archive control. For units fitted with the
lockable flap option, the flap may be unlocked only by users who have this Archiving Control permission
enabled.
SAVE/RESTORE
Allows each user with this permission enabled, full access to saving and restoring functions as described
in section 4.2, above. Without this permission, the SAVE/RESTORE key does not appear.
PASTE/DELETE FILES
Allows each user with this permission enabled, to Paste and Delete files as described in section 5.
FULL CONFIGURATION
Allows each user with this permission enabled, full access the recorder configuration.
FULL SECURITY
Allows each user with this permission enabled, full access to all recorder security functions.
BATCH CONTROL
This field appears only if the Batch Option (section 4.3.10) is fitted. Allows the user to enter batch data
and to start, stop and create new batches. If this access permission is set, ‘Enter Batch Data’ below, is
automatically enabled and cannot be disabled.
CAN SIGN
This appears only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted. If the field is enabled it allows the user to change
the configuration of the recorder (according to the other permissions set for the login), providing the security management system ‘Require Authorization’ is not enabled. If it is, changes can be made only if the
correct password for a user with ‘Can Authorize’ permission is entered. See section 4.4.2 for details
CAN AUTHORIZE
This appears only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted. If the field is enabled it allows the user to
change the configuration of the recorder according to the permissions set for the login. See section 4.4.2
for details of the Auditor options.
PERFORM UPGRADES
‘Upgrade’ appears in the system menu only for access levels in which this box is ticked. Section 4.6.3
contains further details. Trial mode (section 4.3.22 ) can be enabled/disabled only by users with Perform
Upgrades permission.
EVENT PERMISSION 1
If this is enabled, then this login will trigger an event source which remains active for as long as the login
is active. See section 4.3.6 (Event Sources: User Logged In) for further details.
EVENT PERMISSION 2 TO 5
As for Event permission 1, above.
EDIT OUTPUT CHANNEL DEFAULT
Appears only if the Master Comms and/or Analogue output option is fitted.
When enabled, this allows a user with this login to edit the default value of any output channel. Normally
the defaults are used only when the source channel is ‘In Error’.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 201
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.1 ACCESS LEVELS (Cont.)
ACTION DEMAND WRITES
Appears only if the Master Comms option is fitted. See section 4.3.16 and section 4.3.18 for further details.
When enabled, this allows a user with this login to write values manually over master comms either directly, by job action or (if the option is fitted), by using the User Screens ‘Operator’ key. Where Demand
Writes are initiated by Job action, the job will be carried out whether or not this login has permission to
action Demand Writes.
Note:
When Audit trail is enabled, only the newly written value appears in the audit trail messages.
This is because the instrument has no way of determining what the value of the parameter was
before the write occurred.
The messages are of the form:
23/08/05 10:14:30 Auto Mode wrote 19.37
23/08/05 10:14:29 Demand write Auto Mode, Signed Engineer, No Auth. Reqd., Note
where ‘Auto Mode’ is the descriptor associated with the demand write, and ‘19.37’ is the value written.
FORCE CHANGE OF PASSWORD
When this checkbox is enabled for a user, it means that the user will have to change password at his/her
next login. At next log in, a pop-up dialogue box requests that a new password be entered. If a new
password is not entered, login is denied.
Entering the new password clears the checkbox, so this is a ‘one-shot’ operation, until the checkbox is
enabled again by a user with ‘Engineer’ level access.
Change Password
New Password
Retype Password
Apply
Logout
ENTER BATCH DATA
If ‘Batch Control’ is enabled, then this field is automatically enabled, and is ‘greyed out’ so that it cannot
be edited.
If ‘Batch Control’ is not enabled, then enabling this item allows the user to enter batch data, but not to
start, stop or create new batches.
ALLOW WEB SERVER
Any user with this permission and ‘Connect from remote’ permission will be able to view the recorder
from a remote PC, using the Remote user name and Remote password described above.
Note: See Annex C for details of the Web server facility.
User Guide
Page 202
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.2 Management (option)
Note: Where users are controlled by a domain on the recorder, Security Manager will not manage
or reconcile disabled accounts, password changes or password expiry on these recorders.
This menu selection appears only if the Audit Trail option, 21CFR11 option and/or Security Management
option is fitted. Which configuration fields appear depends on the option(s) fitted. Figure 4.4.2a, below,
shows the configuration menus for the various combinations.
The 21CFR11 option allows the recorder to be set up so that all changes to configuration (with the exceptions listed below) are added to the history files and also allows certain constraints to be placed on
the recorder passwords. Once these items of configuration are set up, they apply to all groups. Figure
4.4.2a, below, shows the configuration menu.
This field appearsonly if Login
timeout is non-zero
This field appears only if
'Require Signing' is enabled
Record Logins
Login Timeout
with unapplied changes
Password Attempts
Passwords Expire
Minimum Password Length
Require Signing
Require Authorization
Enable Audit Trail
Password Change on Expiry
Centralised Security
Login By User List
Apply
Minutes
1
Ignore timeout
3 times
30
3
Days
This item appears only if the Securiy Management
option is fitted. If enabled, all other security fields can
be edited only via Security Management software.
This item appears only if one or more of Security
Management, Audit trail or 21CFR11 options is
fitted.
Discard
21CFR11 + Security Manager
Record Logins
Enable Audit Trail
Centralised Security
Login By user List
Apply
This item appears only if the
Security Management option
is fitted.
Centralised Security
Login By user List
Apply
Discard
Audit Trail + Security Manager
Discard
Security Manager only
Figure 4.4.2a Management menu structure
CHANGES NOT RECORDED
Changes to configuration made via MODBUS/TCP are not recorded. It is up to the user to write the identity, time/date, reason for change etc. as text messages, which when sent via MODBUS/TCP, become part
of the relevant history file.
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Notes:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, the following parameters appear only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted.
2. If Centralised Security is enabled, none of the other parameters in this menu can be edited at
the recorder. Changes can be made only using Security Management software.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 203
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.2 MANAGEMENT (Cont.)
Record logins
For either Auditor option, if this field is enabled, then each time a new login occurs a
message appears, giving the date, time and login name. E.G.
23/08/08 15:32:20 Login by Frederick Bloggs
Logouts are recorded in a similar way - e.g.
23/08/08 15:49:43 Logout by Frederick Bloggs
If the login or logout is via a ‘Bridge’ session (section 6), the IP address of that viewer
appears in the login/logout message - e.g.
23/08/05 15:58:03 Login by (149.121.130.126)Engineer
Login Timout
When set to zero, the login remains valid until changed. For any other value, the user
is logged out after the number of minutes entered here has elapsed since the last
time the screen was touched.
with unapplied changes
This field does not appear if the Login Timeout has been set to zero. For non-zero
time-out values, this allows the user to choose whether
a any unapplied changes are lost when the Login Timeout period has elapsed, or
b the login timeout is ignored if there are any unapplied configuration changes.
Password Attempts For Active Directory users, this parameter is configured at the Active Directory and
the value set at the instrument is ignored.
For other users, this allows the user to limit to three, the number of attempt that can
be made to enter a password. The choices are ‘3 times’ and ‘unlimited’. When set to
3 times, the user login is disabled after three incorrect attempts to enter the password have been made. A ‘System Message’ appears on the screen and is also sent
to the ‘chart’:
23/08/08 13:20:42 User Frederick Bloggs, login disabled, invalid password
In order to re-enable the login, a user with Engineer access level must deselect
‘Login Disabled’ in the ‘Access’ menu described in section 4.4.1, above.
Passwords expire
For Active Directory users, this parameter is configured at the Active Directory and
the value set at the instrument is ignored.
For other users, this field allows the user to set an expiry period of up to 999 days
which applies to all passwords. The number of days remaining to expiry is shown in
the login page. If set to zero, then the expiry period does not apply.
Note: All required passwords MUST be changed within this number of days or all logins will be
disabled In this situation, the configuration of the recorder will be available only to those with
Service Level access and in most cases, a call will have to be made to the recorder supplier or service agency. (But see ‘Password Change on Expiry’, below)
Minimum Password Length
For Active Directory users, this parameter is configured at the Active Directory and
the value set at the instrument is ignored.
For other users, this allows a minimum length of password to be entered (default =
0; minimum = 3). If an attempt is made to enter a new password with fewer characters than the minimum, a warning message appears on the screen (Invalid Password
Length) and the new password is ignored. For Active Directory users, the password
must comply with both the minimum length specified here and that specified in Active Directory.
Require Signing
If this field is enabled, then changes to the recorder operation, configuration (or any
other item included in the history file) can be made only by those users whose ‘Can
Sign’ permission is enabled in the ‘Access’ menu described in section 4.4.1 above.
When ‘Apply’ is attempted, a ‘signature’ page appears which requires the entry of
the correct password for the selected user, and of a note which would normally be
used to give the reason for the change.
User Guide
Page 204
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.2 MANAGEMENT (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Require Authorization
This field appears only if ‘Require Signing’ is enabled. If Require Authorization is
enabled, then changes to the recorder operation, configuration (or any other item
included in the history file) can be made only by those users whose ‘Can Authorize’
permission is enabled in the ‘Access’ menu described in section 4.4.1 above. When
‘Apply’ is attempted, a ‘signature’ page (figure 4.4.2b) appears which requires the
entry of the correct password for the selected user, and a note which would normally
be used to give the reason for the change.
Note: If neither ‘Require Signing’ nor ‘Require Authorization’ is enabled, then any user can make
changes to the recorder operation, configuration etc. and the ‘signature’ page does not appear.
Config
Authorised Engineer
Password
Appears only if 'Requires Authorising' enabled
***
Signed Frederick Bloggs
Password
******
Appears only if 'Requires Signing' enabled
Operator Note
Note cannot be empty.
Ok
Pop-up appears only if 'Ok' is
operated without an operator
note having been entered.
Ok Cancel
Figure 4.4.2b Signature page
Enable Audit trail
For either Auditor option, if this field is enabled, then all changes to configuration are
displayed on the ‘chart’ and become part of the history file for each enabled group.
The following is an example of how these changes would appear on the screen for
an imaginary set up for channel 8. ‘New T/C type chan 8’ is the note entered in the
Signature page, and ‘Kiln8 temp’ is the channel descriptor.
03/08/05 11:53:01 Configuration Revision 486,144 was 486,143
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1, Job Number 1 Drive Relay 1 on board 7
while Unacknowledged was No action
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1 Threshold 530.0 ˚C was 500
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1 Type Absolute Low was Absolute High
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Cold Junction Type Internal was External
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Scale High 1000.0˚C was 900.0
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Scale Low 450.0˚C was 300.0
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Lin Type Type K was Type J
03/08/05 11:52:57 Config,Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,New T/C type chan 8
(Please see notes below)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 205
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.2 MANAGEMENT (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Notes:
1. The Configuration Revision (and for changes in the Security menus - the Security Revision) are
incremented every time the recorder configuration (security configuration) is changed. The
current values can be viewed in the System/About menu (section 4.6.11).
2. All configuration and security changes must be made either at the recorder operator interface,
or from a host pc using Bridge ‘Full’ software. Use of the configuration editor is not permitted if
traceability is to be maintained.
3. If fitted, Event buttons (section 4.3.7) are not included in the Require Signing/Require Authorization regime described above. Instead, each individual button can be configured to require
signing or to require both signing and authorization.
4. If a large number of configuration changes are made with Audit trail enabled, then the number
of messages produced may result in the total amount of data generated exceeding the amount
that can be written to the internal FLASH memory in the time available, particularly if there are
a large number of points configured. The recorder responds by reducing the recording speed,
and a message ‘Recording failed - internal overflow. Slowing recording interval of fastest
group(s)’ appears, to draw the user’s attention to the situation.
5. If the TUS option is enabled, then enabling Audit trail can causes pre calibration and post
calibration values to be printed for each adjusted channel, before a batch initiation and/or after
a batch stop according to the configuration of the ‘Pre calibration’ and ‘Post calibration’ tick
boxes in the Batch Configuration menu.
Password Change on Expiry
If this check box is enabled, then the first time a user tries to login, after his or her
password has expired, a dialogue box appears asking the user to enter a new password. Only when this new password has been entered and confirmed, will the user
be able to access the recorder configuration.
Security Management Option. The new password is not written to the Security
Manager until the next ‘deploy’, after which the expiry period configured for the user
(within Security Management), is restored. The interim expiry period is set to 24
hours, and the ‘deploy’ must be carried out within this period, or password expiry
will recur.
Change Password
New Password
Retype Password
Apply
Logout
Centralised Security This checkbox occurs only if the Security Management option is fitted.
If this checkbox is enabled, none of the other parameters in the Management menu
can be edited at the recorder (i.e. they become ‘Read Only’). Changes can be made
only by means of Security Management software. At the recorder, the menu items
below also become ‘read only’, or do not appear as menu items or are not selectable,
even if the checkbox appears:
Access level permissions (section 4.1.1) (Read Only)
Add User/ Remove User (section 4.4.3/4) (Do not appear as menu items)
Restore configuration/Security data (section 4.2.2) (Not selectable)
New configuration/Security data (section 4.2.3) (Not selectable)
(Continued...)
User Guide
Page 206
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.2 MANAGEMENT (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Centralised security (cont.)
The Security Revision (previously Security Version) is initially set to -1 when Centralised Security is enabled. It will remain at this value until a successful download has
been performed via Security Manager Software. The Security Revision will then
take the downloaded value (e.g. 139). Any local security revision changes (e.g. max.
number of logins exceeded) cause the value to have a ‘local change count’, starting at 001 appended to it (e.g. 139.001, 139.002 and so on). The local change count
is reset to 000 (and no longer displayed) when the next download occurs (e.g. 140).
Downloads can occur automatically when the Security Manager detects that a local
change has occurred, or manually, as and when required.
If Centralised Security is enabled, the Domain name can be edited only using the Security Manager software.
Login by User List This checkbox appears if either of the Auditor options and/or the Security management option is fitted.
When enabled, the normal login window appears, with a pull down list of users.
Once a user has been selected the correct password for that user must be entered in
order to log in.
When disabled, the user must enter a user name and associated password in order
to log in.
Select the required access level and enter the
password if required
User ID Logged out
Logged out
Operator
Type in your user ID and a password if
required
User ID
Logout
Engineer
Service
‘Login by user list’ enabled
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
‘Login by user list’ not enabled
User Guide
Page 207
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.3 Add user
Figure 4.4.3 shows that the selecting of ‘Add User’ from the SECURITY picklist allows new user IDs to be
entered, together with passwords, and a chosen set of access permissions, which can subsequently be
edited under Security/Access. The ADD key and the APPLY key must both be used to write the change
to the recorder data base. The user must have Full Security access in order to add a new user. If either
Auditor option is fitted, the new user’s access permission list is printed on the chart.
Adding a new user clears the recorder’s password cache, as described in section 4.4.6, below.
New User ID
New Full User Name
New Domain Name
New Password
Retype Password
Based On Operator
Add
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.4.3 Add User display page
NEW USER ID
This field allows a User ID of up to 20 characters to be entered for a new user. This ID is used when logging in using ID/password entry technique (that is, when ‘Login by user list’ is disabled, as described in section 4.4.2 above).
NEW FULL USER NAME
This field allows a User name of up to 25 characters to be entered. This name appears in the ‘current access level’ pushbutton at the top left corner of the display screen, in operator notes and so on.
NEW DOMAIN NAME
For units fitted with Security Manager only, this allows the entry of a Security Domain name (up to 60
characters in length). If such an entry is made, the Password fields described below do not appear, and
the user must use a network login assigned by the IT department or by the network administrator. The
domain name appears in the ‘Access’ menu and can be edited there if required, once the ‘Add User’ procedure is complete.
If ‘Centralised Security’ (section 4.4.2) is enabled this Domain name can be edited only using Security
Manager software.
Note: An IP address must not be used as the domain name because to do so will disable the
user’s ability to log in using Active Directory, even if there is a valid account on the server.
NEW PASSWORD/RETYPE PASSWORD
For units fitted with the Security Manager option, if the New Domain Name (above) is anything other than
the default (left blank), these Password fields do not appear, as any user with a domain configured must
use the password allocated by the Network administrator.
For other users, these fields allow a password to be entered and confirmed. If the password does not comply with the minimum length requirements in Security Management (if fitted) (section 4.4.2), a warning message (Invalid Password) appears when the ‘Apply’ key is operated, and password entry must be repeated.
BASED ON
This picklist allows another user or access level to be used as a permissions template, to simplify the configuration if several operators are to have identical permissions.
User Guide
Page 208
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.4 Remove user
Selecting ‘Remove User’ from the SECURITY picklist allows users to be removed from the user list. The
‘Remove’ key and the ‘Apply’ key must both be used to write the change to the recorder data base. Figure
4.4.4 depicts the display page. The User Full Name appears in this page.
User Steven Eric Andrew Bass
Remove
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.4.4 Remove User display page
For Active Directory users:
1. Removing a user clears the recorder’s password cache, as described in section 4.4.6, below.
2. Removing a user from the Active Directory Domain does not automatically remove that user from the
recorder. A ‘Remove user’ procedure must also be carried out.
4.4.5 Change Password
For units fitted with the Security Manager option, this allows the entry of a new password for the currently
logged-in user, providing that the user has ‘Edit own password’ enabled in the ‘Access when’ list and is
Active Directory authenticated.
Notes:
1. This feature should be used with discretion, as it affects Network logins which would normally
be under the control of the user’s IT department or Network Administrator. Changing the password may cause conflicts within the network thus preventing its efficient operation.
2. If ‘Active Directory security’ is set to ‘None’ (section 4.5.1: Network/Address menu), any attempted changes to the password will be rejected. That is, only passwords on a Transport
Layer Security (TLS) secured connection are accepted.
3. The old password remains valid for up to an hour (default) after the change, and during this period, both passwords are valid. The default period can be edited by the Network administrator.
Change Password
Change Password
Old Password
New Password
Retype Password
Apply
Cancel
Figure 4.4.5 Change password
TROUBLE SHOOTING
If the change password procedure fails:
1. Check that the Active Directory server instrument alarm is inactive (section3.1.3)
2. Check that the connection with the Active Directory server has TLS security enabled (section 4.5.1)
3. Check that the new password’s length, complexity, history and minimum password age match the
criteria laid down in the Active Directory password policy configuration. Password length must also
comply with the minimum password length configured in the security menu (section 4.4.2)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 209
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.6 Clear Password Cache
This menu item appears only for units fitted with the Security Manager option and only for users with ‘Full
Security’ access (section 4.4.1).
USER PASSWORD AUTHENTICATION
If the user has a domain configured, then when an attempt is made to log in, the password entered by the
user is authenticated by the Active Directory server (see Network/Address menu description). In other
words, the recorder attempts to do an LDAP* bind with the configured Active Directory server, and if the
‘bind’ is successful, the user is logged in.
* Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
PASSWORD CACHE
Once a password has been authenticated, it is added to a list of up to 100 valid passwords (the Password
cache) held in the recorder. This means that if the Active Directory server is unavailable the next time the
user attempts to log in, then if the password is in the cache, the login will proceed without further authentication.
CLEAR PASSWORD CACHE
If necessary the password cache can be cleared by using the Clear Password Cache button (confirmation
required). The cache is also cleared:
1. whenever a new user is added to the user list (section 4.4.3),
2. the login for an existing user is removed (section 4.4.4).
3. if the ‘Password Cache expiry’ value has been exceeded (section 4.5.1).
4.4.7 Active Directory server setup
For users with Security Manager option only.
It is assumed that the person responsible for operating the Active Directory server is familiar with the basics of setting up a suitable server. The details given below explain the file structure necessary in order
that the Security Manager software may communicate with the server. Briefly, a ‘User’ must be a member
of a ‘Group’, which must be part of an ‘Organizational unit’ (figure 4.4.7a).
Organizational
Unit
Group 1
User 1-1
Group 2
Group r
User 2-1
User r-1
User 2-2
User r-2
User 2-n
User r-n
Figure 4.4.7a Structure overview
User Guide
Page 210
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.7 ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER SETUP (Cont.)
1. In the ‘Domain Controller (Active Directory)’ area of the ‘Manage your Server’ screen, click on ‘Manage users and computers in Active Directory’.
Figure 4.4.7b Manage users....
2. Right click on the relevant Domain name (symbol =
Enter a name for the Unit and click OK.
) and select ‘New’ then ‘Organizational Unit’.
Figure 4.4.7c Create new Organizational Unit
(Continued)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 211
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.7 ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER SETUP (Cont.)
3. Similarly, create a new Group, then a new User, entering the user name and login details (figure
4.4.7d). In the password page, ensure that the various tick boxes are enabled/disabled as required.
Figure 4.4.7d User details screens
4
Once the new user has been created, right click anywhere in the screen and select Properties (or double click on the user). When the Properties page opens, click on the ‘Member Of’ tab (figure 4.4.7e).
5. Click on the ‘Add’ key and enter the new group name Click OK.
6. The user is now part of the group, and should be able to log in using the login and password details
entered in step 3.
Figure 4.4.7e ‘Member of’ screen
User Guide
Page 212
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.5 NETWORK KEY
Note: This manual does not describe network setup in detail, as each network is different. In most
cases, the help of the network administrator or supervisor will be required, for example, in the allocation of valid addresses and passwords.
Touching the Network key calls a selection box to the display, allowing ‘Address’ or ‘Name’ to be selected
for configuration.
4.5.1 Address
Figure 4.5.1 shows the address menu fields.
Archive Save/Restore
Config
Instrument number
MAC address
Address
Name
IP address lookup
BootP timeout
IP address
Fig 4.5.2
Subnet mask
Default gateway
SNTP server enable
Security
Network
240
08:00:48:80:00:F0
Get from BootP Server
28 s
System
Select 'specify an IP address',
'Get from BootP Server' or
'Get from DHCP Server'
Appears only for 'Get from BootP Server'
192.168.111.222
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
SNTP client enable
SNTP server
149.121.128.179
EuroPRP server enable
Appear only if Security Manager
option enabled.
Active Directory server
123.456.234.1
Active Directory security TLS (port 636)
Password Cache expiry 0
Apply
Days
Discard
Figure 4.5.1 Network addressing
INSTRUMENT NUMBER/MAC ADDRESS
Unique numbers set up during manufacture to identify the recorder to a remote host, or to the recorder
manufacturer/distributor, in case of query.
IP ADDRESS LOOKUP
This field allows an address to be entered for the recorder. This can be done either by manually entering
an address (IP address field - below), or a network service BootP or DHCP can be used to assign an IP
address to the recorder.
BOOTP TIMEOUT
This 28 second period is the maximum time the recorder will wait, at power-up, for a response from the
BootP server. If no response is received within this time, the IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway are all set to, or remain at 0.0.0.0
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 213
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.5.1 NETWORK ADDRESS (Cont.)
IP ADDRESS
Allows manual entry of the recorder’s internet protocol (IP) address only if ‘Specify an IP address’ is selected in the ‘IP address lookup’ picklist above.
Notes:
1. DHCP attempts to connect to the network continuously, until successful. Only when successful
will the network settings be updated and appear at the address page. This can take up to 13
seconds after power up.
2. It takes 2 to 3 minutes for a DHCP failure to be reported, so an instrument alarm would not be
generated for 2 to 3 minutes after power up, should the connection fail to be established.
SUBNET MASK
This field is editable only if ‘Specify an IP address’ is selected in the ‘IP address lookup’ picklist above.
The subnet mask is the network address plus the bits in the host address reserved for sub-network identification. By convention, all the network address bits are set to 1. The subnet mask is used to identify the
subnet to which an IP address belongs by performing a bitwise AND on the mask and the IP address.
DEFAULT GATEWAY
To deliver traffic from one subnet to another, devices called ‘routers’ or ‘gateways’ are placed between
segments. The default gateway address informs each network device where to send data if the target
station does not reside on the same subnet as the source.
SNTP SERVER ENABLE
This tick box allows the recorder to act as an SNTP time server.
SNTP CLIENT ENABLE
This tickbox allows time synchronisation from a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server to be enabled and disabled. When enabled, the instrument time is updated every 15 minutes.
SNTP SERVER
If ‘Obtain from BootP server’ or ‘Obtain from DHCP server’ is selected as the IP address look-up (see
above), then this address appears automatically. Otherwise this area allows an IP address to be entered
for the SNTP server.
Notes:
1 SNTP is a protocol that allows clients on a TCP/IP network to set their times to that of a server
- port number 123. The recorder can act both as a client and as a server; when acting as a
server, the resolution is 1 msec.
2. SNTP time is based on elapsed seconds since 00:00 hrs on 1st January 1900. The time is not
affected by time zones or daylight saving adjustments.
3. If the instrument time differs from the SNTP time by less than 2 seconds, the instrument time is
updated gradually (1 msec 8 times a second) to prevent time change events being recorded. If
the difference is greater than 2 seconds, this is defined as a ‘time change event’, the results of
which are that the recorder time is immediately updated, and a green line is drawn across the
chart (vertical/horizontal trend modes only) to indicate the time change.
4. If more than 5 time change events occur within 24 hours, a ‘Time Synchronisation failure’ instrument alarm is set 24 hours after the first event. Once synchronisation is re-established, the
alarm self-clears within 24 hours.
5. An ‘SNTP server failure’ instrument alarm is flagged if the configured server cannot be accessed, or if the year received from the server is less than 2001 or more than 2035.
(Continued)
User Guide
Page 214
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.5.1 NETWORK ADDRESS (Cont.)
SNTP SERVER NOTES (Cont.)
6. When the instrument is acting as a server and a “Clock Failure’ instrument alarm is active, the
server time is set to 1/1/1900 which is ignored by clients.
7. Servers such as Microsoft ‘TimeServ’ cannot be used with this series of instruments because
they are not SNTP servers.
8. If the Simulation option is enabled and ‘SNTP client enable’ is enabled, then the recorder synchronises only on power up. If ‘SNTP server enable’ is enabled, the server output will follow the
recorder time.
EUROPRP SERVER ENABLE
Enabling this item causes the instrument to ‘declare itself’ (i.e. to become visible to a network scanning
tool running on a PC), thus allowing the pc user to identify all such instruments on a network.
ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER
This item appears only if the Security Manager option is enabled. It allows an Active Directory server IP
address to be entered for use with this application. The IP address would normally be obtained from the
user’s IT department or Network administrator. Once entered, assuming the recorder is connected to
the same network as the server, users with a domain configured will be able to login using their normal
network login password.
If ‘Domain name Service’ is enabled (section 4.5.2), then a domain name may be entered here instead of
an IP address,
ACTIVE DIRECTORY SECURITY
This item appears only if the Security Manager option is enabled. If set to None (default), then any attempt to change a password will be rejected because it has not been encrypted. One of the alternative
TLS ports must be used if passwords are to be changed at the recorder.
When TLS (port 636) is selected all access to the server is secured using TLS on port 636 using the LDAP_
SERVER_START_TLS_OID method. TLS (port 389) is similar but uses TLS on port 389.
PASSWORD CACHE EXPIRY
This applies only if the Active Directory is not available.
Starting from when the server becomes unavailable, once the configured number of days has expired
since the last successful log in (by any user), the Password cache is cleared the next time any user attempts to log in. The user’s password is ‘Invalid’ and a pop-up message (Active Directory Password
Cache has expired) appears. This means that no Domain users can log in until the Active Directory server
becomes available again.
Values of 0 (default) to 30 days can be entered, where a value of 0 disables Cache expiry (i.e. it never
expires).
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 215
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.5.2 Name
Figure 4.5.2 shows the ‘Name’ fields
Archive Save/Restore Config
Address
Name
Security
Network System
Local Host Andy136-4
Domain FishesRus.co.uk
Domain Name Service
Primary DNS Server 149.121.164.11
Secondary DNS Server 149.121.165.14
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.5.2 network name fields
LOCAL HOST
English language name for the recorder. Non-editable - assigned to the IP Address
DOMAIN
The name of the Group or area of networked units which contains the recorder. Non editable.
DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS)
Enables the mapping of host names to IP addresses and vice-versa.
PRIMARY/SECONDARY DNS SERVER
IP addresses supplied by IT department or the Domain manager or Supervisor.
Notes:
1. Any one or more of the above items may be overwritten if ‘IP address lookup’ is set to ‘Obtain
from BootP Server’ or ‘Obtain from DHCP server’ as described under ‘Address’ above.
2. If Domain Name Server is enabled, but either no DNS server is connected to the network or
neither the DNS Primary nor secondary server can be ‘found’, it can take up to four minutes for
the system to timeout. During this period, the recorder’s user interface (touchscreen) will not
respond.
User Guide
Page 216
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
United Kingdom
Add new options
Section 4.6.3
Upgrade
Discard
Apply
Upgrade
See figure 4.6b for
further items
Ethernet Diagnostics
Master Comms Diagnostics
EtherNet/IP Clients:
Remote Modbus Client 4 192.168.189.89
Remote Modbus Client 3 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 2 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 1 149.121.130.242
Local Modbus Client 2 Offline
Local Modbus Client 1 127.0.0.1
Ping Now
Ping Status Host Reachable
Host 149.121.131.78
Section 4.6.7
Ethernet Diagnostics
See Section 4.3.16
Output Adjust
Input Adjust
Upgrade
Locale
Clock
System
Explicit Messaging (TCP 4) Offline
Explicit Messaging (TCP 3) Offline
Explicit Messaging (TCP 2) Offline
Explicit Messaging (TCP 1) 149.121.129.141
Implicit I/O Messaging Offline
Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM) Offline
29/07/08 12:11:55
29/07/08 12:11:55
29/07/08 12:11:55
29/07/08 12:11:55
Unadjusted
Remove previous adjustments
Network
See Section 9
Security
Figure 4.6a System configuration menu layout (sheet 1)
Discard
Source Files From Remote FTP Site
Upgrade
software
4) Channel 4
6) Channel 6 4.998
5.0001
2) Channel 2 5.0001
3) Channel 3 5.0001
Fast Settle
Remove Adjust
1) Channel 1 5.0001
Instrument Number 8203
Key Code WC8N-9F5E-1D41
Key Code File
Apply
in October
Long Date Format
Sunday
in March
End at 01:00:00
on the Last
Initiate adjustment procedure
Select final channel for adjust
Adjust Channels
on the Last
Config
Select first channel for adjust
Sunday
Last Channel 6
First Channel 1
Section 4.6.4
Input adjust
Select Channels
Section 4.6.1
Archive Save/Restore
01:00:00
GMT
English
Section 4.6.2
Locale
Discard
Language
Country
Time Zone
Use Summertime (DST)
Start at
Apply
Current date DD/MM/YYYY
Current time HH:MM:SS
Clock
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6 SYSTEM
User Guide
Page 217
User Guide
Page 218
Include job data
Include alarm data
Copy Now
– 5) Channel 5
Copy To 2) Channel 2
Job Search
Discard
Support File
History:
SRAM:
DRAM:
Bridge Version:
Product Software Version:
History File Version:
BootRom Version:
Board Version
6100A
310908
06 October 2010 15:52:56
5.1
6100A
178008
Comprising
5.1
5.1
2.0
1.7
3
Fitted Memory
96MB
256kB
64MB
Section 4.6.11
See figure 4.6a for other items
About
Customise
Job Search
Copy
System
About
Network
Instrument Variant:
Config Revision:
Last Updated:
At Version:
Created On:
Security Revision:
Security
Figure 4.6b System configuration menu layout (sheet 2)
Apply
Default
Font set Auto
54
55
27
47
6
49
41
48
55
52
48
Section 4.6.10
Customise
Search Now
Job Action Preset
Job Category Totaliser
Config
Section 4.6.9
Archive Save/Restore
Section All Sections
Desktop
Data Entry Background
Selection
Fixed Text
Active Text
Disabled Text
Title Bar Background
Trend Foreground
Trend Background
History Foreground
History Background
Copy From 1) Furnace Temp 1
Source Type Channel
Section 4.6.8
Copy
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6 SYSTEM (Cont.)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6 SYSTEM (Cont.)
Touching the System key calls the pick list: Clock, Locale, Upgrade, Input adjust, Master Comms Diagnostics (if option fitted), Ethernet diagnostics, Copy, Job search, About.
Figures 4.6a and 4.6b above, give an overview of the System Menus.
4.6.1 Clock
Selecting ‘clock’ causes the recorder’s date and time to be displayed. To edit the date, touch the current
date area, to call the keyboard and enter the new numbers. The date is edited in a similar way. The settings apply as soon as the ‘Apply settings’ button is touched. See also SNTP details in section 4.5.1.
4.6.2 Locale
This allows the setting of the following items:
Language
Choose the required language from the picklist
Country
Displays a pick list of countries associated with the selected language
Time zone*
Select required time zone from picklist.
Use Summertime (DST)*
Select box if daylight saving is to be used, If ‘Use Summertime (DST)’ is selected, the
times and dates for the start and end of summertime can be entered using picklists see figure 4.6a.
Notes
1 Date format DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY is defined by the language and country selected. Time
format (e.g. 12/24 hr. clock) is defined by the country selected.
2. When using Bridge software, the host PC’s locale information and the recorder locale information should match, or the displayed time will not be correct.
*Note: For more information, see B7 Annex B and/or http://www.timeanddate.com
LONG DATE FORMAT
Table 4.6.2 shows some examples of the Standard and Long Format date layouts which are available according to Language and Country selections.
Country
(Language)
Argentina
Australia
Bolivia
Canada (Eng)
Canada (Fra)
France
Germany
Holland
Italy
Portugal
South Africa
Spain
Switzerland (Fra)
Switzerland (Ger)
Switzerland (Ita)
United Kingdom
United States
Uruguay
Date display
Standard
Long Format
01/05/06
1/05/06
01-05-06
01/05/06
06-05-01
01/05/06
01.05.06
1-5-06
01/05/06
01-05-2006
06/05/01
1/05/06
01.05.06
01.05.06
01.05.06
01/05/06
5/1/06
01/05/06
01/05/2006
1/05/2006
01-05-2006
1-May-06
06-05-01
1 mai 06
01.05.2006
1-mei-06
1-Mag-06
1/Mai/06
2006/05/01
01-may-06
1 mai 06
01.05.2006
1-mag-06
01-May-06
01-May-06
01/05/2006
Table 4.6.2 Date format examples
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 219
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6.3 Upgrade
This allows
1. New options to be enabled (by the entering of a ‘Key Code’) and/or
2. The recorder operating software to be upgraded by reading a file from Compact Flash, SD card or
other local or remote source.
Add new options
Instrument Number 8203
Key Code WC8N-9F5E-1D41
Key Code File
Source Files From Remote FTP Site
Upgrade
software
Upgrade
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.6.3a Upgrade menu
Instrument NumberThis number must be quoted when ordering upgrades. It is unique to the instrument
and is not user editable.
Key Code
If the relevant key code is known, it can be entered manually using this field
Key Code File
If Key Code File is selected, the first line of the file must be the Key Code. To select
the file for reading, the Key Code File field is touched, to display the file list - if necessary, refer to section 5, below, for more details.
Source Files From Allows the user to select ‘Remote FTP site’ or ‘Local Media’.
Upgrade
Initiates upgrade once the upgrade source has been defined (see figures below).
Host Address/Name
FTP Username
Pccard
FTP Password
Source
Path name to upgrade file
Ok
Cancel
Figure 4.6.3b Remote upgrade details
Source
Ok
Cancel
Figure 4.6.3c Local upgrade details
Caution
Power to the recorder must be maintained during the upgrade process or the recorder might not power
up. If such a situation arises, the manufacturer’s local service centre should be contacted for advice.
Notes:
1. Recording is suspended and the user interface (touchscreen) is disabled whilst the upgrade is
in progress. During the subsequent, automatic power cycle, any alarm relays will go into their
alarm states until the recorder has re-initialised.
2. When upgrading from another instrument, using ‘Remote Upgrade’, the I.P. address (or network name) of the source instrument should be typed into the Host Address/Name field, and
‘media­card’ (or usbfront etc. as appropriate) should be entered in the ‘Source’ field.
3. If ‘Audit trail’ is enabled (see ‘Management’ - section 4.4.2), then system messages are generated, containing date, time, source and status details of the upgrade.
4. ‘Upgrade’ appears in the System menu only for access levels which have ‘Perform Upgrades’
enabled in Security/Access configuration (section 4.4.1).
5. ‘Signing/Authorizing’ apply to upgrades, if the relevant boxes are ticked in Security/Management configuration. See ‘Management’ - section 4.4.2 for further details.
User Guide
Page 220
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6.4 Input adjust
Notes
1. Input adjust cannot be applied to input channels with input type of ‘Digital’, ‘Test’ or ‘comms’.
2. Input adjustments can be carried out only by users with ‘Adjust I/O’ permission (see section 4.4.1).
3. The instrument must be powered for a sufficient time (e.g. 30 mins) for it to reach thermal equilibrium before an input adjust is performed.
This facility allows the user to compensate for tolerance errors etc. The technique used is to select those
channels to which adjust is to be applied, then for each channel to:
a
apply a known low level signal (at or close to the low input range value) to the relevant input. When
the recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
b. apply a known high level signal (at, or close to, the high input range value) to the relevant input.
When the recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
Figure 4.6.4a shows the initial display which appears when ‘Input adjust’ is first selected from the SYSTEM
menu. Channels 1 to 6 are selected by default.
First Channel 1
Select first channel for adjust
Last Channel 6
Select final channel for adjust
Channels to be included
1) Channel 1
Select Channels
Adjust Channels
Initiate adjustment procedure
Remove Adjust
Remove previous adjustments
Fast Settle
1) Channel 1 5.0001
2) Channel 2
3) Channel 3 5.0001
5.0001
4) Channel 4 5.0001
6) Channel 6 4.998
2) Channel 2
Channel 3
Add/Remove
individual
3)
channels from
adjustment list4)
Channel 4
5) Channel 5
6) Channel 6
29/07/08 12:11:55
29/07/08 12:11:55
29/07/08 12:11:55
29/07/08 12:11:55
Unadjusted
Figure 4.6.4a Input adjust status page
First channel
Last channel
Select Channels
Adjust channels
Remove Adjust
Fast Settle
1) Channel 1 etc.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Allows the user to select the lowest channel number of all the channels to be adjusted.
Allows the user to select the highest channel number of all the channels to be adjusted.
Presents a list of all the channels from the First channel to the Last channel inclusive,
each of which can be removed from the adjustment list by ‘unticking’ its check box.
The channels displayed in the status page reflect this selection.
Initiates the adjustment procedure to all the channels from the First channel to the
Last channel inclusive, unless the effectivity is modified using the Select Channels
key.
Returns the selected channels to factory calibration
Switches off the input filter for 1 second,to allow quicker response. Adjust Channels’
values displayed as ‘RANGING’ for the 1 second duration.
A list of channels required to be susceptible to the adjustment procedure, together
with their current values and their adjustment status (i.e. Unadjusted or, the time/date
of the previous adjustment (if any)).
User Guide
Page 221
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6.4 INPUT ADJUST (Cont.)
ADJUST PROCEDURE
Operation of the Adjust Channels key calls the low-end adjust page, as shown in figure 4.6.4b.
Fast settle
Specify the sensor low point and connect the
corresponding input.
Low Point 0
When the values below have settled select
Apply.
Unadjusted
Unadjusted
Unadjusted
Unadjusted
Unadjusted
1) Channel 1 -0.0026
2) Channel 2 -0.0001
3) Channel 3 -0.0002
4) Channel 4 -0.0002
6) Channel 6 0.0000
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.6.4b Typical low-end input adjust page
Fast Settle
Low Point
Reduces the time taken for the readings to stabilise.
Usually 0, but a different value can be entered here, if required.
Apply the Low point value to the relevant input channels, and wait for the recorder readings to become
stable. When the readings are stable, press the Apply key, to call the High-end page depicted in figure
4.6.4c, below.
Fast settle
Specify the sensor high point and connect the
corresponding input.
High Point 5
When the values below have settled select
Apply.
1) Channel 1 4.9993
2) Channel 2 4.9972
3) Channel 3 5.0010
4) Channel 4 4.9994
6) Channel 6 5.0110
Apply
Unadjusted
Unadjusted
Unadjusted
Unadjusted
Unadjusted
Discard
Figure 4.6.4c Typical high-end input adjust page
Fast Settle
High Point
Reduces the time taken for the readings to stabilise.
Default value displayed, but a different value can be entered here, if required.
Apply the High point value to the relevant input channels, and wait some minutes for the recorder readings to become stable. When the readings are stable, press the Apply key, to return to the status page.
Note: Adjusting a channel invalidates the accuracy values given in the specification in Annex A for
that channel.
User Guide
Page 222
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6.5 Output Adjust
Applies only to units with Analogue output option boards fitted. See section 9 for details.
4.6.6 Master Comms Diagnostics
This menu item is concerned only with Master comms diagnostics, and is fully described in Section 4.3.16.
4.6.7 Ethernet Diagnostics
This screen (figure 4.6.7) allows the user to test the status of the connection with a host computer, and if
the relevant option is enabled, the connections with local and remote Modbus or EtherNet/IP slaves. The
page is available to any access level with ‘Full Configuration’ enabled in Security/Access configuration
(section 4.4.1).
Host 149.121.131.78
Ping Status Host Reachable
Ping Now
Local Modbus Client 1 127.0.0.1
Local Modbus Client 2 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 1 149.121.130.242
Remote Modbus Client 2 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 3 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 4 192.168.189.89
EtherNet/IP Clients:
Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM) Offline
Implicit I/O Messaging Offline
Explicit Messaging (TCP 1) 149.121.129.141
Explicit Messaging (TCP 2) Offline
Appear only if Master
comms option enabled
IP address remains for five
seconds after message
activity ceases, after which
appears instead.
Appear only if EtherNet/IP
comms option enabled
Explicit Messaging (TCP 3) Offline
Explicit Messaging (TCP 4) Offline
Figure 4.6.7 Ethernet Diagnostics display
Host
Ping Status
Allows the IP address, or DNS Name of the host to be ‘Pinged’.
Indicates the latest status returned - see table 4.6.7, below, for details.
Displayed Status
Waiting
In Progress
Host Reachable
Ping (Error in value)
Request Timed Out
Host Unreachable
Unknown error
Interpretation
The default status displayed on power up.
Displayed whilst waiting for a response from the host
A device was found at the specified address.
Host refused to allow socket connection on the defined Ping Port.
Unable to reach a host at the specified network address.
Unable to reach a host at the specified network address.
An unknown internal error has occurred.
Table 4.6.7 Ping Status
Ping Now
Operating this button causes an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) command
to be sent to the host. If the host receives the message, it returns a message to the
sender within a few seconds.
Local Modbus ClientAppears only if the Master Comms option is enabled. Indicates that the local Modbus Master is connected.
Remote Modbus Client
Appears only if the Master Comms option is enabled. Displays the IP address of connected Modbus TCP/IP clients. Otherwise ‘Offline’ is displayed.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 223
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6.7 ETHERNET DIAGNOSTICS (Cont.)
EtherNet/IP Clients Appears only if the EtherNet/IP comms option is enabled.
Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM)
Displays the IP address of any client requesting an ‘unconnected’ message (see section 4.3.21).
Implicit I/O Messaging
Displays the IP address of the client currently carrying out implicit messaging. Once
activity ceases, the address remains on display for five seconds, after which ‘Offline’
appears instead.
Explicit Messaging (TCPn)
Displays the IP address of each client currently carrying out explicit messaging.
Once activity ceases, the address remains on display for five seconds, after which
‘Offline’ appears instead.
4.6.8 Copy
This facility allows the user to copy a point or group configuration from one point, group etc. to one or
more others. The user may choose whether or not to include alarm and (if applicable) job data when
copying point configurations. Descriptors and colour selections are not copied.
Figure 4.6.8 shows a typical configuration page for copying the configuration of channel 1 (Furnace
Temp1) to channels 2 to 5 inclusive.
Source Type Channel
Copy From 1) Furnace Temp 1
Copy To 2) Channel 2
– 5) Channel 5
Include alarm data
Include job data
Copy Now
Figure 4.6.8 Copy configuration page (typical)
When ‘Copy Now’ is operated, a confirmatory dialogue box opens, to allow the user to check the source
and destination entries.
Copying
From: 1) Furnace Temp 1
To: 2) Channel 2
– 5) Channel 5
OK
User Guide
Page 224
Cancel
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6.8 COPY (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Source Type
Picklist allows selection of Group, Channel, Event, Message, Maths Channel, Totaliser, Counter, Timer, Output or Demand Write, as the type of source to be copied.
Copy From
Allows the user to select a specific point, group etc. to be copied
Copy To
Allows the first destination point to be selected, for the source to be copied to.
–
Allows the final destination point to be selected for the source to be copied to.
Include alarm data This field appears only for source types which support alarms. If this box is ‘selected’,
then alarm data is included in the copy process.
Include job data
This field appears only for source types which support jobs. If this box is ‘selected’,
then jobs data is included in the copy. For source types that support both alarms and
jobs, it is not possible to include job data, without including alarm data as well.
Once the copy is complete, the user should enter the configuration area of the items that have been copied, and edit/apply the changes etc.
COPY RULES
1. The first channel on any input card may not be a digital input type.
2. If a destination channel was a digital input, AND the source channel is an analogue input AND ‘include alarm data’ is not selected, the destination channel alarm settings will be set as:
Enable = Off; Type = Absolute high; Threshold = 0.0; Dwell = 0.0.
3. If a destination channel was an analogue input, AND the source channel is a digital input AND ‘include alarm data’ is not selected, the destination channel alarm settings will be set as:
Enable = Off; Type = Digital; Threshold = Closed; Dwell = 0.0.
4. Descriptors and Colours are never copied.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 225
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6.9 Job search
With multiple job sources, it can sometimes be difficult to discover what the trigger for a particular job is,
particularly if the recorder has been configured by more than one operator. The ‘Job Search’ facility allows the user to define a job type, and the recorder then produces a list of relevant triggers. Figure 4.6.9
shows a typical search page, which will produce a list of all triggers for Preset Totaliser jobs.
Section All Sections
Job Category Totaliser
Job Action Preset
Search Now
Figure 4.6.9a Job search
Section
Job Category
Job Action
Search Now
Allows the user to select a point type for the search. For example, selecting ‘Maths’,
causes the search to be restricted to Maths channels. ‘All Sections’ causes all enabled point types to be included in the search.
Allows a job category (e.g. ‘Totaliser’) to be selected for the search.
This depends on the job category. For example, for ‘Totalisers’, ‘Preset’, ‘Disable’,
Preset Group’ or ‘Disable Group’ to be selected. Section 4.7 gives details of all job
types and their associated actions.
Operation of this button initiates the search, after confirmation.
SEARCH RESULTS
The search results in one of two displays, one ‘No Match was found’ if no jobs are found which match the
search criteria, or a list of triggers is produced. A typical example is given in figure 4.6.9b.
Search Results
Channels (1), Alarm
Channels (3), Alarm
Channels (6), Alarm
Maths (1), Alarm (2),
(1),
(3),
(4),
Job
Job (3)
Job (1)
Job (1)
(3)
Ok
Figure 4.6.9b Search results (typical)
User Guide
Page 226
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6.10 Customise
‘Customise’ allows:
1. the background and foreground colours for various screen items to be selected
2. the size of the text font to be varied.
Figure 4.6.10a shows the display page with the settings used for most of the screen drawings in this
manual.
Desktop
Data Entry Background
Selection
Fixed Text
Active Text
Disabled Text
Title Bar Background
Trend Foreground
Trend Background
History Foreground
History Background
54
55
27
47
6
49
41
48
55
52
48
Font set Auto
Default
Apply
Discard
Figure 4.6.10a Customise menu
Desktop
This defines the background colour for the display screens, including keytops.
Data Entry Background
This is the background colour for drop-down menus and text entry areas.
Selection
The colour that keytops and menu items adopt when selected.
Fixed Text
This defines the colour of all fixed text items including key top text, menu text, scale
data, title bar legends etc.
Active Text
The colour of all non-fixed text, such as selectable menu items.
Disabled Text
This allows the user to choose a colour for the text associated with disabled items.
For example: key top legends on the Goto Group menu, for groups that are not display enabled.
Title Bar backgroundThe colour of the title bar block at the top of the display screen. Note that the text
colour for the title block is that defined in ‘Fixed Text’, above.
Trend Foreground The colour of the grid lines, timestamps and messages on the real-time trend display.
Trend Background The colour of the ‘chart’ in the real-time trend display.
History ForegroundThe colour of the grid lines, timestamps and messages on the trend history display.
History BackgroundThe colour of the ‘chart’ in the trend history display.
Font set
Allows the user to select a size for the display font. This affects the size of the ‘containing item’ i.e. push button keys etc. also change size. See ‘FONT SIZE EXAMPLES’, below.
Default
Allows the user to return to the factory default settings.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 227
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6.10 CUSTOMISE (Cont.)
FONT SIZE EXAMPLES
The following figures give examples, drawn to the same scale, for all of the different font sizes available,
except ‘Auto’ which picks a font size considered appropriate for the size of screen.
Archive Save/Restore Config
Security Network System
Archive Save/Restore Config
Very small
Security Network System Small
Archive Save/Restore Config
Archive Save/Restore
Security
Network
Config
System Large
Security
Network
System
Very Large
Figure 4.6.10b Font sizes
User Guide
Page 228
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6.11 About
Selecting ‘About’ from the System key menu gives details of the version numbers of different aspects of
the recorder, and details of the amount of memory fitted. Figure 4.6.11 shows a typical ‘About’ display
page.
��������������������
�����������������
��������������
������������
������������
Appears only when
�������������������
viewing via
�
Bridge software
����������������
��������������������������
����������������������
�����������������
��������������
�
���������
������
������
�����
������
�������
�������������������������
����
������
�������
�����������
����
����
����
����
��
��������������
�����
������
�����
����
������������
Figure 4.6.11 About display (typical).
INSTRUMENT VARIANT
Displays the instrument type.
CONFIG REVISION
Whenever a change to the Configuration of the recorder is applied the ‘Config Revision’ is incremented.
For these purposes, Configuration is defined as including all items within the menu structures of the
Config and Network keys, and includes User Screens. It does not include those items associated with the
Security key. Config Revision is printed on the ‘chart’ at power up, and if either Auditor option or if the
Batch option is fitted, Config Revision is included in the messages associated with these options.
Notes:
1. Config Revision can be used as an input to one or more maths channels. If such a maths channel is included in one or more groups, the revision number can be determined for any time/
date, when Trend History mode is invoked for the group(s) in question. See section 4.3.11 for
maths function details.
2. Config Revision can be embedded in one or more messages, as described in section 4.3.8.
LAST UPDATED
The time and date at which the configuration was last edited.
AT VERSION
The version number at the time of the last configuration update.
CREATED ON
Shows the type of instrument that the configuration was created on. Normally, this will be the same as
‘Instrument Variant’, and will be different only if the configuration has been downloaded from a different
instrument model.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 229
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.6.11 ABOUT (Cont.)
SECURITY REVISION
Whenever a change is made to an item within the Security menus, the Security revision is incremented.
Security Revision is printed on the ‘chart’ at power up, and if either of the Auditor options or if the Batch
option is fitted, Security Revision is included in the messages associated with these options. See notes 1
and 2, below.
Notes:
1 Security Revision can be used as an input to one or more maths channels. If such a maths channel is included in one or more groups, the revision number can be determined for any time/
date, when Trend History mode is invoked for the group(s) in question. See section 4.3.11 for
maths option details.
2. If ‘Centralised Security’ is enabled, the Security Revision is in a different format (e.g. 15.001) see
section 4.4.2.
SUPPORT FILE
If the unit is not performing as it should (e.g. it resets itself unexpectedly), the Support File key allows the
user to save ‘critical system files’ into a single file (SupportInfo.uhq*), for despatch to the manufacturer
for analysis. This file may be saved to the instrument’s Compact Flash or SD card or, using Bridge ‘Full’
software, to a remote PC. For security reasons, this file cannot be viewed by anyone other than the manufacturer or his agents.
Once the save operation is complete, a ‘Support’ message appears on the screen giving details of where
to send the file. More information is held in the file ‘SupportInfo.txt’ which is also saved to the disk. This
file can be opened, and the information within it read, by inserting the disk into a PC, clicking on the
floppy disk icon (A drive) in ‘My Computer’ and then double clicking on the file icon when it appears.
* ‘SupportInfo’ is the default name. This name may be edited by the user before saving to disk or pc. The
.uhq suffix is automatically appended to the new name.
User Guide
Page 230
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.7 JOBS
A number of sources (e.g. channel, event, totaliser) can be set up to trigger one or more jobs. The following description includes all possible job categories, but which jobs are available on any particular recorder depends on the options fitted to that recorder. Many job categories require the relevant access level
permission to be set, as described in section 4.4.1, above.
The type of action (continuous or ‘single-shot’), available for selection, depends on the type of trigger
source. Continuous actions are selected from: While active, While inactive or While unacknowledged.
The available single-shot actions are: On becoming active, On becoming inactive, On acknowledgement.
4.7.1 No Action
This means that no job action is configured for the trigger source.
4.7.2 Drive relay category
Allows a specific relay to be set up to change state whilst the trigger source is active, inactive or whilst it
remains unacknowledged. Relays are normally energised i.e. ‘common’ (c) is shorted to ‘normally open’
(no). When in alarm, the relay is de-energised i.e. ‘common’ (c) is shorted to ‘normally closed’ (nc). Thus,
if power is removed from the recorder, all relays automatically ‘fail safe’ to their alarm conditions. See
section 2.2.1 for details of relay output board connector location(s) and pinout.
Job Number
Category
Relay Board
Relay Number
While
1
Drive Relay
1
1
Select Relay
Active
Select 'Active', 'Inactive'
or 'Unacknowledged'
Figure 4.7.2 Relay job menu layout
4.7.3 Totaliser category
If the Totaliser option is fitted (section 4.3.12), the following jobs become available:
Preset
Preset Group
Disable
Disable Group
Loads the selected totaliser with the value set up in ‘Preset’ in the totaliser’s configuration menu.
Loads all the totalisers in the specified group with their ‘Preset’ values.
Stops the specified totaliser accumulating.
Stops all totalisers in the specified group.
Note: If more than one job is set up to disable a particular totaliser, then any of these jobs going
active will disable the totaliser.
Job Number
Category
Action
Group
On
1
Totaliser
Preset Group
1) Group 1
Acknowledgement
Select 'Preset', 'Disable',
'Preset Group' or 'Disable Group'
Select Required Group
Select 'Active', 'Inactive'
or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.3 Totaliser job menu layout (group action)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 231
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.7.4 Message category
One or more messages (section 4.3.8) can be directed to the display, to ‘All groups’ or to a ‘Specified
Group’. The messages must be contiguous - e.g. messages 2, 3 and 4 may be sent, but messages 1, 3
and 4 cannot be sent, without message 2 as well.
Job Number
Category
Send Message(s) to
Group
First Message
Last Message
On
1
Message
Specified Group
1) Group 1
1) Message 1
1) Message 1
Active
Select 'Display', 'All Groups', or 'Specified Group'
Select Required Group
(only if 'Specified Group' previously selected)
Select range of messages to be output.
Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.4 Message job menu layout
4.7.5 Maths category
If Maths channels (section 4.3.11) are enabled, the following jobs become available to applicable functions:
Reset
Disable
Switch to B
Trigger
Sets the selected maths channel value to zero.
Stops historical functions such as Fvalue, Stopwatch and Rolling Average from accumulating further values. When the function is subsequently re-enabled, the function
re-starts from its pre-disabled value. ‘Disable’ has no effect on other functions.
Causes the relevant maths channel to copy source B instead of its normal source A see section 4.3.11 for further details.
Used to initiate a ‘Sample and hold’ function - see section 4.3.11 for further details.
Job Number
Category
Action
Math
On
1
Math
Reset
Math 1
Active
Select 'Reset', 'Disable'
'Switch to B' or 'Trigger'
Select Required Maths channel
Select 'Active', 'Inactive',
or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.5 Maths job menu layout
User Guide
Page 232
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.7.6 Clock category
This job causes the System Clock to be Preset to the value entered in Instrument Configuration (Preset
Hour, Preset Minute) (Section 4.3.1). This job can be used to synchronise a number of recorders as follows:
a.
b.
c.
For each recorder, set up one input channel as
Input Type
Digital
Closed String
Synch (for example)
Enable
Trigger
Active when
Synch
Job 1 category
Clock
Job 1 action Preset
Job 1 On
Active
For each recorder, set the same preset hour and minute in Instrument Configuration.
For each recorder provide a simultaneous pulse or contact closure to the digital input previously set up.
The recorders will all be automatically set to the preset time on receipt of the input.
An alternative way of synchronising recorders is via an SNTP time server as described in section 4.5.1.
Job Number
Category
Action
On
1
Clock
Preset
Active
Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or
'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.6 Clock job menu layout
Notes
1 Whenever a time change occurs, a green line is drawn across the chart in vertical trend mode.
2 The clock presets to the ‘Preset Hour’ value set in Config/Instrument menu. If, however, ‘Use
Summertime (DST)’ is enabled in System/Locale configuration, then an hour is added whilst
daylight saving time is in operation.
4.7.7 Counter category
If Counters (section 4.3.13) are enabled, the following jobs become available:
Preset counter
Disable counter
Increment
Decrement
Preset group
Disable group
Loads the selected counter with the preset value set in the configuration for that counter.
Stops the selected counter.
Adds 1 to the selected counter’s value.
Subtracts 1 from the selected counter’s value.
Loads all the counters in the specified group with their ‘Preset’ values. Stops all counters in the specified group.
Job Number
Category
Action
Group
On
1
Counter
Preset Group
1) Group 1
Acknowledgement
Select 'Preset', 'Disable', 'Increment',
'Decrement','Preset group', 'Disable Group'.
Select Required Group
Select 'Active', 'Inactive'
or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.7 Counter job menu layout (group action)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 233
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.7.8 Timer category
The following jobs are available:
1. Reset timer - sets the timer to zero
2. Start timer - causes the timer to start.
3. Disable timer - stops the timer.
Job Number
Category
Action
Timer
On
1
Timer
Reset
Timer 1
Active
Select 'Reset', 'Start' or 'Disable'
Select Required Timer
Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.8 Timer job menu layout
4.7.9 Batch category
If the Batch option (section 4.3.10) is fitted, a previously ‘Stored’ batch can be started by job action or by
a Batch Start command sent via MODBUS/TCP (section 8). If a batch is already running, it will be restarted. In Batch configuration, if Scope = Group, then a specific group can be selected for the batch job to
act on; if Scope = Instrument, the Group selection field does not appear.
Job Number
Category
Action
Group
On
1
Batch
Start
1) Group 1
Active
Select 'Start' or 'Stop'
Select Required Group
(only if Scope = Group in Batch Configuration)
Select 'Active', 'Inactive'
or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.9 Batch job menu layout
User Guide
Page 234
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.7.10 Recording category
The following ‘Recording jobs’ are available:
Enable
Speed/Interval B
Erase all History
This enables recording to the group’s history file, ‘while active’, ‘while inactive’ or
‘while unacknowledged’. This allows, for example, recording to be enabled (job 2)
only whilst a Trend Freeze job (job 1) is inactive (i.e recording is disabled for the duration of a Trend Freeze job). Trend freeze is described in section 4.7.11, below.
Recording speed/interval B is selected for use, for the duration of the job. See
‘Group configuration for A/B switching details.
All recorder history is erased (only if Simulation option - section 4.3.22 - is enabled),
but see also note 4.
Notes:
1 The group in question will be recorded only if Recording Enable selected in group Configuration (section 4.3.2) and the job is active.
2. If Audit Trail (section 4.4.2) is enabled, then in order to preserve the audit trail, messages will be
saved in the group’s history files even when recording is not enabled by job.
3. A blue line is drawn across the ‘chart’ whenever a recording job is used to disable/enable recording.
4. If the 21CFR11 option is enabled, ‘Erase All History’ jobs can be triggered, but are ignored,
leaving the recording history unaffected.
Job Number 1
Category Recording
Recording Enable
Group 1) Group 1
While Active
Select required action
Select required Group if appropriate
Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Unacknowledged'
Figure 4.7.10 Recording job menu layout
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 235
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.7.11 Trend category
Trend jobs allow the following actions to occur:
Span B
Span B Group
Colour B
Colour B Group
Speed/Interval B
Switches the point being configured to span B and zone B, for as long as the job is
active.
Switches all the points in the selected group to their individual spans and zones B, for
as long as the job is active.
Switches the point being configured to colour B, for as long as the job is active.
Switches all the points in the selected group to their individual colours B, for as long
as the job is active.
Switches Trend Speed/Interval for the selected group to Speed/Interval B, for as
long as the job is active.
Note: If a ‘B’ value has not been set, the default ‘A’ value will be used instead
If the Simulation option (section 4.3.22) is enabled the following additional Trend jobs become available:
Freeze
Clear
Saver Display
Freezes process variables and trend displays, stops the recorder clock and stops
data further writing of history files (but see note). When the job deactivates, process
values/trends are updated to their current values, the clock restarts from its frozen
value and writing to history files is resumed. No blue line is drawn across the chart.
Clears the trend displays from the screen.
Sets the recorder display brightness to the value set up in ‘Saver display’ in Instrument configuration (section 4.3.1) . Overrides the ‘Save after’ value.
Job Number
Category
Action
Group
While
1
Trend
Speed/Interval B
1) Group 1
Active
Select required action
Select Required Group or Point (according to action)
Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Unacknowledged'
Figure 4.7.11 Trend job menu layout
Note: in order to ensure that no further data is written to the recorder’s history files, recording
must be disabled by setting a second, ‘Recording’, job to be initiated by the same trigger as initiates the Freeze job. This Recording job should be set to ‘Enable’, ‘while Inactive’. Recording jobs
are described in section 4.7.10, above.
User Guide
Page 236
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.7.12 Output category
Applies only to recorders with Modbus master comms option fitted. As described in section 4.3.16, when
Modbus Master is enabled, a number of ‘Output channels’ become available for configuration. This feature allows any specified recorder point to be copied to a destination instrument’s input channel, if this is
set to Input Type = Slave comms.
An output job allows a specific output channel write to be disabled when the recorder is acting as a modbus master.
Job Number
Category
Action
Output
On
1
Output
Disable Write
1) Output 1
Active
Select required output
Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.12 Output Job menu layout
4.7.13 Demand Writes category
Applies only to recorders with Modbus master comms option fitted.
Demand Writes jobs allow the user to set up the recorder so that, when the job is triggered, it initiates the
selected Demand Write. The write action is performed to the remote device as defined in Demand Write
Configuration described in section 4.3.18.
Job Number
Category
Action
Acyclic
On
1
Demand writes
Write
1) Write 1
Active
Select Required Write number
Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.13 Demand write jobs menu layout
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 237
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.7.14 Alarm category
This allows the user to set up a job to acknowledge or disable point alarms as follows:
Acknowledge All Alarms
Acknowledges all alarms
Acknowledge Alarms on Group
Acknowledges all alarms
in the specified group
Acknowledge Alarms on PointAcknowledges all alarms associated with the specified point
Acknowledge Alarm
Acknowledges specific alarm
Disable All Alarms
Disables all alarms
Disable Alarms on Group
Disables all alarms in the specified group
Disable Alarms on Point
Disables all alarms associated with the specified point
Disable Alarm
Disables a specific alarm
Further selection boxes allow a group or point, respectively, to be defined.
Job Number
Category
Action
Group
On
1
Select required Acknowledge
or Disable function
Alarm
Acknowledge Alarms on Group
1) Group
1
Acknowledgement
Select Required Group (or point)
Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.14 Alarm job menu layout
4.7.15 Archive category
Archive jobs allow a job to be used to trigger an archive to the instrument’s mass storage medium or to a
host computer using FTP transfer. The following jobs are available:
Archive Last Hour, Last Day, Last 7 Days or Last 31 days to FTP
Bring FTP archive up to date
Cancel Archive to FTP
Archive Last Hour, Last Day, Last 7 Days or Last 31 days to Local device
Bring Media Archive up to date
Suspend Archive to Media
Cancel Archive to Media
These jobs copy the archiving functions available from the ‘Archive’ key described in section 4.1 of this
document. For ‘FTP’ items see ‘Remote archiving’; for ‘Media’ see ‘Local Archive’.
Job Number 1
Category Archive
Action Bring Media Archive Up to Date
On Acknowledgement
Select required Archive function
Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.15 Archive jobs menu layout
User Guide
Page 238
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.7.16 Email category
Allows the user to send a specified e-mail to the recipients set up in e-mail configuration (see section
4.3.19). A system message is generated, and displayed in all recording groups whenever an e-mail is
sent.
4.7.17 Report category
Category Report
Send Report to Group
Select 'Group' or printer (if fitted)
Group 3) Furnace 3
Report 2) Current temps
On Active
If destination = 'Group',
select destination group.
Select the report to be sent
Select 'Active', Inactive or
'Acknowledgement'.
Figure 4.7.17 Report category job menu
SEND REPORT TO
Allows the user to select ‘Group’ or an ASCII printer (if fitted - requires Serial Comms. option) as the
report destination. If ‘Group’ is selected (as in the figure above), a further field appears allowing the user
to specify the group to which the report is to be sent (Group 3 in the figure above). If a printer is selected,
the report is sent to the printer.
GROUP
This field appears only if ‘Group’ has been selected as the report destination, and allows the destination
group to be defined. If a group descriptor has been entered (‘Furnace 3’ in the figure above), then this
descriptor appears in the field.
REPORT
This defines which of the reports is to be sent when the job is triggered. If a Report descriptor has been
entered, then this appears in the field (‘Current temps’ in the figure above).
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 239
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
5 FILE
Figure 5, below, gives an overview of the File Menus. The area is entered by touching the ‘File’ key of the
root menu, and can be used to display the contents of directories stored both in the user area of flash
memory and on any bulk storage device inserted or connected.
The first display page shows the ‘volume’ or ‘device’ names associated with the various areas of memory
available to the user. If one of these volume names is selected (touched), and the ‘open-folder’ key* operated, the contents of the selected volume is displayed. This would typically consist of a list of folders.
Similarly, if a folder name is selected and the ‘open folder’ key* is touched, the contents of the folder is
displayed and so on.
To return to higher levels, the ‘close-folder’ key* is used.
The path name of the current window is shown at the top of the window.
*Note: The open-folder and close-folder key functions are the same as the down arrow and up arrow key
functions respectively.
5.1 FILER OPTION MENU KEYS
These keys appear in a pop-up menu when the option key is pressed. This menu appears only when an
actual file has been selected (i.e. it does not appear if a directory (folder) or volume is selected.) Cut and
paste functions are available only to users with the relevant access permissions (section 4.4).
Cut
Copy
Delete
New
Paste
Refresh
Removes a file from the list, ready for ‘pasting’ to another destination.
Copies a file from the list, ready for ‘pasting’ to another destination.
Removes a file from the memory.
Allows a new directory (folder) to be created
Places a ‘cut’ or ‘copy’ file into the new destination.
Refreshes the display.
A key’s legend is hidden* if at any time its function is not applicable.
* i.e. displayed in the colour selected for ‘Disabled Text’ in the System key ’Customise’ menu.
5.2 THE HIDE KEY
The Hide key at the top right corner of the display screen is used to hide (show) Type, Date and Bytes
information, allowing the full filename text string to appear.
User Guide
Page 240
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
5 FILE (Cont.)
Root
Key
Engineer
Root Menu
Home
Operator
File
Remove Media
Goto View
Goto Group
Open
Folder
2
13:35:29
06/10/05
No batch In Progress
Hide
\
1
Select volume
Name
Type
\mediacard\
Remov.. 125894656
124715008
\user\
Flash
1361920
Engineer
Size (Bytes)
Free (Bytes)
1390592
13:35:49
06/10/05
4
No batch In Progress
Hide
\mediacard\
3
Select folder
Name
Type
Date
history\
Folder
07/09/05 09:25:46
Engineer
Bytes
13:35:59
06/10/05
6
No batch In Progress
Hide
\mediacard\history
5
Select folder
Name
Type
Date
group1\
Folder
12/09/05 11:40:56
Engineer
Bytes
13:36:09
06/10/05
8
No batch In Progress
Hide
\mediacard\history\group1\
7
Select folder
Name
Type
Date
002088260000..
Folder
28/09/05 15:39:18
002088260000..
Folder
07/09/05 09:26:32
002088260000..
Engineer
Folder
Bytes
12/09/05 11:40:54
13:36:49
06/10/05
No Batch In Progress
Hide
\mediacard\history\group1\000
9
Select file
Name
Type
Date
Group-1-20050..
History
28/09/05 15:39:10 3931
Bytes
Group-1-20050..
History
Group-1-20050..
History
20/09/05 17:17:30 351401
12/09/05 11:40:50 1555
10
Note:
The down arrow navigation key
can be used as an alternative
to the 'Open Folder' key.
Operate
Options key
Filer Options
New
Delete
Cut
Copy
Paste
Refresh
Figure 5 File system overview
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 241
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
5.3 FILE STRUCTURE
The file structure on the archive medium, is as depicted below in figure 5.3 for a six-group instrument.
Each subdirectory contains a maximum of 32 files, there being sufficient subdirectories created, to contain all the group’s history files.
The subfolder names are the numerical part of the first history file that they contain.
For example if the first file name is Furnace1 Temp~20080912 80155F2601000120.uhh, then the subdirectory name will be 20080912 80155F2601000120.
If there are more than 32 files, the next subdirectory name is 20080912 80155F2601000140 (assuming the
file names are contiguous).
SD or
Flash card
history\
group 6
group 5
group 4
Only group 1 structure
shown, for clarity.
Each group contains
subdirectories, each
containing up to 32 files.
group 3
group 2
group 1
subdirectory n
subdirectory 2
subdirectory 1
Remaining
group 1
history
files
(max = 32)
Second 32
group 1
history
files
First 32
group 1
history
files
Figure 5.3 File structure (archive)
User Guide
Page 242
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
6 BRIDGE (REMOTE VIEWER)
6.1 INTRODUCTION
This feature comes in two levels, called ‘Full’ (option) and ‘Lite’ (supplied as standard).
The ‘Full’ option allows full operation and configuration of the recorder, simultaneously, from up to ten
PCs which meet or exceed the minimum requirements listed below. When a change is being made to the
configuration of the recorder by one Bridge user (‘client’), the message:
Feature Locked
Another client (IP ADDRESS) has locked this feature.
Wait for lock to be released and try again
appears on the screen of any other user who attempts to change the configuration. When changes are
complete, the message:
Feature changed
Synchronising data
appears on the screens of all clients (except that of the one making the change).
Bridge ‘Lite’ allows the user to view recorder standard screens, dynamically, on-line, from up to 10 PCs
which meet or exceed the minimum requirements listed below.
The software is supplied on a CD ROM, which also includes PC Review, PC Configuration and Acrobat
reader software and various manuals relevant to the recorder.
The Bridge software is suitable for any physical hardware configurations, some common examples being:
1. A single PC connected directly to a recorder.
2. Multiple PCs connected via a network to one or more recorders. (Each recorder can be accessed, simultaneously, by a maximum of 10 PCs, but one PC can look at only ‘N’ recorders where ‘N’ depends
on how much memory is available at the PC. For example, a minimum specification computer (section 6.1.1) running Windows NT can ‘look at’ up to three recorders simultaneously.
3. A single PC connected via a telephone line to a remote recorder.
This manual does not describe network setup in detail, as each network is different. In most cases, the
help of the network administrator or supervisor will be required, for example, in the allocation of valid
addresses and passwords.
Notes:
1 When logging in via ‘Bridge’, only users with ‘Connect from Remote’ enabled appear in the user
list. See section 4.4.1 for details.
2 Full Bridge requires some small amount of space on the PC disk. The message ‘There appears
to be no free disk space on the client. Create some space and run again.’ appears if there is
insufficient space.
3. If an attempt is made to establish more than one Full Bridge connection between a PC and an
instrument, the message “You are already running a Full Bridge session with this instrument.
The new session will run as Bridge Lite.” appears.
4. If an attempt is made to establish a Full Bridge connection using the ‘anonymous’ user name,
the following message appears:
‘You are authenticating Full Bridge using the “anonymous” user name. This provides guest read
only access. To establish Full Bridge connection you must use a different user name. Please
change and try again.’
5. The maximum number of Bridge sessions that can be run simultaneously on one recorder is 10.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 243
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
6.1.1 Minimum PC requirements
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
P90 running Windows NT/2000/XP Home/XP Pro/Server 2003.
32MB RAM
50MB free hard disk space
Graphics drive capable of displaying > 256 colours (recommended)
Sound card required for audible alarms feature (section 6.5)
SUPPORTED PDA CONFIGURATION
PDA not supported this issue of software
User Guide
Page 244
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
6.2 CONNECTION DETAILS
The connection to the recorder is terminated at the RJ45 connector located as shown in figures 2.2.1a,
2.2.1b). The other end of the cable may be terminated, for example, at a hub, a dial-up router or a PC,
and it is up to the user to obtain a suitable cable (normally available from a computer supplier or electronic component distributor.)
Note: For direct connection between a PC and the recorder, a crossover cable is required. For all
other connections, a ‘straight-through’ connection is required.
6.2.1 Direct PC connection
The RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder is connected via a crossover cable to the PC network card
connector.
6.2.2 PC To remote recorder
As shown in figure 6.2.2, one or more recorders’ Ethernet connector can be connected to a Dial Up
Router, plugged into a telephone socket The PC must similarly be connected to a telephone socket via a
modem (shown externally in the figure, but often built-in with modern computers.)
The dial-up router (available from computer suppliers etc.) has an associated telephone number, and can
also have a security password system. Both the telephone number and any password(s) must be known
to the PC user before any attempt at communication is made.
The PC can be set up to dial the number automatically, or the number may be dialled manually. Reference
should be made to the computer documentation or help pages if necessary.
Once communication has been established, the software can be run.
Recorder
Recorder
Host
computer
Dial-up
router
Modem
'phone
socket
'phone
socket
Figure 6.2.2 Remote connection example
6.2.3 Networked systems
For PCs and recorders connected into an internal network, it is necessary only to obtain an IP address
(or name) and the required passwords in order to establish connections between the PC(s) and the
recorder(s).
For PCs remote from a networked system which is permanently connected to the internet, it is necessary
to obtain an IP address (or name) and the required passwords in order to establish connections between
the PC and the recorder(s). In many cases it is also necessary that the internal network and ‘firewall’ (if
such exists) be configured to allow access.
For PCs remote from a networked system which is not connected to the internet, a system similar to that
shown in figure 6.2.2 is needed.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 245
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
6.3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
Please refer to the CD box insert for details of software installation.
6.4 RECORDER CONFIGURATION
The recorder configuration is in three areas: Network, Options and Access,
6.4.1 Network
The Network key fields are fully described in Section 4.5.
6.4.2 Options
In order to make the ‘Full’ option accessible, it must first be correctly entered in the Options Menu. If the
Bridge level displayed does not match the ‘currently’ value (if displayed), operation of the ‘Autoconfigure’
key will add the option to the database.
If all options are correctly entered, the ‘Currently’ fields and the Autoconfigure key do not appear.
���������� ���������
�������������������� ����������
��������������� ���
���������������� ���
����� ���
���������� ���
�������� ��
������ ���
����� ��������
���������������� ���������
������� ��������
�������������� �����
������������ �����
�������������������� ���
���������� ��������
������� ���������
����������� ��������
�����������������������
�������������������
��� ��������
������������ ��
(currently 1)
����������������� ��
����������������� ��
(currently 0)
������������������ ��
���������������������� �
Apply
Discard
(currently 0)
Autoconfigure
Figure 6.4.2 Options menu
User Guide
Page 246
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
6.4.3 Access
Each of the access levels and user IDs can have ‘Connect from Remote’ access enabled. When this box
is checked, password entry fields appear as shown in figure 6.4.3. Initially, the Remote User Name is the
same as the login name or access level. Enter the required User name and password, then re-type the
password to ensure it was entered correctly. This name and password are required when establishing
connection with the host computer.
Notes:
1. If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted, the minimum password length is that set in the Security/Management menu described in section 4.4.2. For all recorders, the maximum password
length is 20 characters.
2. For maximum security, it is recommended that the remote password and the local password be
non-identical.
Access when
New Password
Retype Password
Connect from remote
Remote user name
Remote password
Fred
**
**
Fred
Retype remote password
Login Disabled
Edit own Password
Change Alarm Setpoints
Figure 6.4.3 Remote user access fields
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 247
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
6.5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM
Initiate the program using the START button in the normal way.
Once the program starts, a Host name and User name will be requested as depicted in figure 6.5a.
Enter the Local host name (e.g. Andy136-4) found in the recorder Network/Name area, followed by a dot
(full stop, period) followed by the domain name (e.g. FishesRus.co.uk) (also in the Network/Name area).
These examples would result in an entry of Andy136-4.FishesRus.co.uk
Notes
1 If frequent use is to be made of this option, it is recommended that a ‘short-cut’ be created, and
placed on the computer desktop. To create a new Bridge link: right click on the desktop, left
click ‘New’ in the pop up menu which appears, then left click on the Bridge icon. When naming
Bridge files, the extension .uhv must be used.
2 If there is no DNS server associated with the system, the IP address (found in the recorder Network/Address area) should be used instead.
3. The PC locale setting (e.g. Daylight Saving Time) must match that set in the recorder (System/
Locale) or the displayed time will be incorrect.
4. If an attempt is made to start the program whilst another user is configuring the recorder, a
‘Feature Locked’ message appears: ‘Another client (instrument) has locked this feature. Retrying until successful’ appears. As soon as the other client ‘Saves’ the new recorder configuration, this message disappears and the program continues its startup.
Enter the user name as entered in the recorder’s Security/Access/Remote user name field (section 6.4.3).
If password entry is not required, disable the tick box (goes blank), then press ‘Start’ to start running the
program
If a password entry is required, ensure that the password required tick box is enabled (tick visible). Press
‘Start’, then enter the password (as entered in the Security/Access/Remote User Name/Remote password
field), followed by carriage return to start running the program.
Clicking ‘Start as Lite’, allows the user to select the ‘View only’ version of Bridge. This has the advantage
of faster operation.
Bridge Configuration
Host name
149.121.130.232
User name
Engineer
Password required
Start as Lite
Channel Alarm Sound
Car Alarm
None
Police Siren
START
Figure 6.5a Profile (uhv file)
Filename.uhv
Figure 6.5b Bridge icon (approximation)
User Guide
Page 248
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
6.5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM (Cont.)
CHANNEL ALARM SOUND
If the host PC is fitted with a sound card (enabled), bridge can cause sounds to be played on point alarm
(not system alarms). The sound is selected on a connection-by-connection basis via the profile (uhv) file
(see figure 6.5a). This allows each user to choose a sound (including none) suited to the local environment.
The sound runs for as long as any point alarm is active and unacknowledged.
Bridge software supplies a range of sounds as listed below. In addition, eight-bit, mono, µLaw-format
.AU sound files can be imported to “<install location>\Series6000\startup\sounds”. Once a sound has
been imported, create or edit the profile (UHV) file. The new file should appear in the list. Select it and
start.
The default sounds are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Buzzer
Car Alarm
None
Police Siren
Siren, Fast
Siren, Slow
Something wrong
Train bell
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 249
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
6.6 OPERATION
6.6.1 Display Modes
When the program starts, the Home page, as set up in Configuration\Views (section 4.3.4) is displayed on
the computer screen. By click-dragging on the bottom right hand corner of the display, the page size can
be edited as required. It is thus possible for the computer to log on to, say four, different recorders and
to display their values simultaneously in different parts of the screen.
The up/down arrow keys allow the enabled display modes to be cycled through and the root menu ‘Goto
View’ menu allows a specific display mode to be chosen for the current group. The Home display page
can be returned-to at any time, by operating the Root Menu key followed by the Home key.
Note: Any changes to the recorder’s group configuration are reflected immediately at the
Host PC’s screen.
6.6.2 Alarm acknowledgement
The alarm acknowledgement/read messages functions are as described in section 3.1.4.
6.6.3 Status line
The status line at the top of the screen reflects the status of the instrument to which the recorder is connected - e.g. system messages, global alarm, FTP, clock etc.
User Guide
Page 250
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
6.6.4 Error messages
A number of error conditions may occur to prevent Bridge from ‘viewing’ the recorder. Such conditions
result in the appearance of one of the pop-up messages listed below:
NETWORK CONNECTION HAS TIMED OUT
This message appears when no connection can be established between the host pc and the instrument.
This might be caused by, for example, cable failure, the instrument’s not being powered, network hardware failure etc.
UNABLE TO CONNECT TO HOST ...
Similar to the timeout message above, but with the additional cause: incorrect host address.
UNABLE TO RESOLVE HOSTNAME
Caused by an incorrect host address, or network failure.
FAILED TO AUTHENTICATE THE USER NAME ...
Caused by incorrect user name or password.
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BRIDGE SESSIONS ALREADY RUNNING ON ...
An attempt is being made to establish more than the maximum number of Bridge sessions to the specified instrument.
THERE APPEARS TO BE NO FREE DISK SPACE ON ...
Appears if there is insufficient space on the PC hard disk.
YOU ARE ALREADY RUNNING A FULL BRIDGE SESSION ...
Appears if the pc is already connected to the recorder and running a Full Bridge session.
YOU ARE AUTHENTICATING FULL BRIDGE ...
Only Bridge ‘Lite’ is accessible to users using ‘Anonymous’.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 251
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7 SCREEN BUILDER
7.1 INTRODUCTION
This option allows the user to create screen layouts using recorder data, simple drawing tools, text and/
or imported image files.
24 user screens are editable directly from the operator interface. A further 100 extra screens (25 to 124)
which can be created/edited etc. only via Bridge software are also available. Once created, such screens
can be copied or moved to one or more of screens 1 to 24, thus becoming accessible at the instrument’s
operator interface.
Each enabled user screen appears as a selection key in the ‘Goto View’ menu. It is therefore recommended that the number of ‘Bridge Screens’ is set to the number actually needed, in order to reduce the
number of ‘More...’ operations.
Notes:
1. User screens are not supported from a PDA.
2. As a result of the way in which the screen is refreshed, unexpected results may be obtained if
any component is superimposed upon an active component, such as a bargraph or trend display.
3. The hash (#) key may not be used in text strings.
User Guide
Page 252
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.1.1 Display Access
As shown in figure 7.1.1, the user screens can be included in the display modes, described in section 3.4,
and a User screen can be selected as the ‘Home page’.
Note: Circular Trend option displays are not supported in User screens with this release of software.
Home Time-out 0 Minutes
Home Group 1) Group 1
Select group for
Home display
Select Instrument or Group
Select group for
display mode enable
Scope Group
Group 1) Group 1
Display Enable
Select Home
Home Page Circular Trend
display mode for
Vertical Trend
instrument or for
selected group
Horizontal Trend
Circular Trend
= Enabled
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric Page
Bridge User Screens are accessible only from
User Screen 1
a remote PC which has Bridge software
installed and running.
User Screen 2
User Screen 3
User Screen 4
User Screen 23
User Screen 24
Bridge User Screens 0
These fields appear
only if Scope = 'Group'
Apply
Discard
Figure 7.1 .1 Views configuration menu
7.1.2 Importing/Exporting screens
The Save/Restore screen (figure 7.1.2) includes the categories ‘Import screen’ and ‘Export screen’.
Archive
Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Save
See section 4.2 for
descriptions of other
Save/Restore functions.
Restore
New
Text
Import Screen
Export Screen
Import User Linearisation
Export User Linearisation
User Screen User Screen 1
File Name screen
Import
Import Printer Driver
Figure 7.1.2 Save/Restore menu (Import screen)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 253
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.1.2 IMPORTING/EXPORTING SCREENS (Cont.)
IMPORTING SCREENS
Touching the filename area, allows a previously created user screen to be selected either from the Flash
memory or from disk to be imported. The User Screen picklist allows the user to define which User
screen is to be ‘replaced’ by the imported file.
EXPORTING SCREENS
Allows user screens to be exported to Flash memory, or disk, The operator can assign a suitable filename before exporting.
7.2 DISPLAY CREATION
The following description is an attempt to show how to create a simple screen layout. The technique
used is to define an object, then to specify its size, and where its top left corner is to be located on the
screen.
The option offers two levels of sophistication - basic and advanced. The basic system defines size, position, fill colour etc. for components (section 7.3.1). Advanced parameters allow a more sophisticated finetuning of the appearance of the components
Note: X is horizontal, increasing rightwards. Y is vertical, increasing downwards. (Top left corner is
0,0)
As implied in figure 7.2.3a, screen component position and dimensions can be specified as percentage,
absolute pixels or relative pixels. Percentage is ‘percentage of screen size’. Absolute pixels allow position and/or dimensions to be defined as an absolute number of pixels. Relative pixels are the same as
absolute pixels, except that if the display is rescaled on, say, a pc screen, the absolute pixel object will
remain unchanged, whereas the relative pixel object will scale appropriately. Similarly, for transfer from
an XGA screen recorder to a 1/4VGA recorder or vice-versa.
7.2.1 Before starting
Before starting to lay the screen out:
1. The user must have ‘full configuration’ access permission.
2. One or more user screens must be enabled in Views Configuration (section 7.1.1)
3. A layout plan is produced, with all the required screen’s components listed with their top left corner
co-ordinates, their widths and heights, and where appropriate background and foreground colours.
User Guide
Page 254
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.2.2 Screen components
Table 7.2.2 shows the selectable screen components, their default top-left corner positions, widths/
heights and draw order. All these components are described in section 7.4 below.
Component
X
Y
Width
Height
Arc
Channel data
Channel horizontal bargraph
Channel numeric
Channel vertical bargraph
Dialogue action
Event Button
Group horizontal bargraph
Group horizontal trend
Group numeric
Group vertical bargraph
Group vertical trend
Image
Line
Main
Navigation action
Operator Button
Oval
Polygon
Polyline
Rectangle
Round rectangle
Text
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
10
50
50
10
10
10
50
50
50
50
50
10
10
100
10
10
10
N/A
N/A
10
10
0
10
10
30
20
40
10
10
50
50
50
50
50
10
10
100
10
10
10
N/A
N/A
10
10
0
Draw
Order
10
20
20
20
20
10
10
30
30
30
30
30
10
10
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
Table 7.2.2 User screen selectable item default values
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 255
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.2.3 The properties page
1. Ensure that one or more user screens is enabled in views Configuration (section 7.1.1). If necessary,
call the required User screen to the display using the Root menu ‘Goto View’ menu.
2. Press the Option key to call the Option Menu.
3. Press ‘Edit Screen’ to call the ‘Component Property Editor’ page to the display. This display contains
the basic properties of the ‘Main’ (background) screen onto which the required components are to
be overlaid.
Note: This may take some seconds, according to the complexity of the configuration
4. A further press of the Option key calls the user screen Options display page.
5 Use the Option key again to return to the Component Properties display
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Edit Screen
Component Property Editor - Screen 1
Add
Del
Copy
Paste
Component picklist field
main_1.1
Identifier main_1.1
Component Add/Delete etc.
keys
Last Error
Page Title
Component properties
(Fields vary according to
component type)
X Position 0
%
Y Position 0
%
Width 100
%
Height 100
%
Background Colour -1
Dimension picklist.
Select %, absolute pixels,
or relative pixels.
Draw Order -1
Component Type Main
Goto Canvas
Save
Close
More...
Usr Screen Options
Edit level Basic
Component info on screen
Quick entry to edit
Use Last Properties
Positioning Grid
Positioning Tip
Figure 7.2.3a Component properties and User screen options pages
KEY DESCRIPTIONS (UPPER KEYS)
Add Calls the Component selection list
Del
Deletes (after confirmation) the component in the Identifier field (except the Main pane which cannot be deleted).
Copy Used to copy the current component to the pasteboard. ‘Greyed’ for ‘Main’ as this cannot be Copied.
Paste Used to ‘paste’ the copied component to the screen. The copied item is placed 1% to the right of,
and 1% below, the source component. ‘Greyed’ until a component Copy action has taken place.
User Guide
Page 256
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.2.3 THE PROPERTIES PAGE (Cont.)
KEY DESCRIPTIONS (LOWER KEYS)
Which keys appear at the bottom of the properties page depends on whether the user screen is being
viewed at the recorder’s user interface, or via Bridge software. Figure 7.2.3b show the recorder key arrangement; figure 7.2.3c the Bridge keys. The key descriptions below are in alphabetical order, rather
than in left-right appearance order.
Goto Canvas
Save
Close
More...
Revert
Discard
New
Copy Screen
More...
Move Screen
More...
Figure 7.2.3b Recorder key arrangement
Goto Canvas
New
Dispose
Save
Deploy
Copy Screen
Revert
Discard
Move Screen
Close
Import
More...
Export
More...
Figure 7.2.3c Key arrangement via Bridge
Close
Copy Screen
Discard
Dispose
Deploy
Export
Goto Canvas
Import
More...
Move Screen
New
Revert
Save
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Causes the screen to quit edit mode. If there are unsaved changes the user is asked for confirmation.
Copies the contents of the current screen to another specified screen, leaving the current
screen unchanged. If the destination screen is already in use, confirmation is required before
the screen is overwritten.
Causes all changes made since the last ‘Save’ to be ‘undone’
This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. When operated,
it deletes the local version of the screen, so that the display reverts to the deployed version.
This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. It causes the
screen to be saved to the PC database, and sent to the recorder.
This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. Calls a browser
screen, allowing the user to select a path name to which to Export the current screen.
The Component Property Editor page disappears, and the screen is shown with the current component highlighted. Click and Drag techniques on the highlight ‘handles’ allow the
component to be re-sized and its aspect ratio to be edited. Clicking and dragging within the
highlighted area allows the component to be moved to any position on the screen.
Selecting a component and touching the option key ‘Goto Editor’ key returns the user to the
Component Property Editor with the selected component as the current component. (Using
the Goto editor key without first highlighting a component re-opens the Component Property Editor with ‘Main’ as the current component.)
When editing via Bridge, double clicking on a component returns to the Component Property Editor with that component as the current component.
This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. Calls a browser
screen, allowing the user to select a User Screen for import.
Calls next keyset.
Moves the contents of the current screen to another specified screen, leaving the current
screen empty. If the destination screen is already in use, confirmation is required before the
screen is overwritten.
Allows the creation of a new (blank) screen. Current screen components are deleted (after
confirmation) leaving a blank screen. Items can be retrieved using the Revert key (above)
prior to the next ‘Save’, ‘Deploy’ or ‘Goto canvas’.
Causes all changes made since the last ‘Goto canvas’ operation to be ‘undone’.
Causes the current screen to be saved to flash or, for Bridge operation, to the PC database.
User Guide
Page 257
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.2.3 THE PROPERTIES PAGE (Cont.)
OPTIONS PAGE ITEMS
Edit level
Allows Basic or Advanced edit level to be selected for further use.
Component info on screen
Enabling this box causes a component description to appear at the top left corner
of each component. This description is in the form: Identifier(X,Y)+[∂X,∂Y], where X
and Y defines the top left corner position in pixels, and ∂X and ∂Y are the width and
height of the component in pixels. The identifier is the component name as appears
in the Identifier field of the Component Property Editor page.
Quick entry to edit If selected, this function allows direct entry from the user screen being edited to the
Component Property editor page, without the options menu first appearing offering
the choice of ‘Batch’ or ‘Edit Screen’.
If Quick entry is selected, the option menu does not appear when the option key is
touched. The Batch status page can be called by touching the ‘Page Name’ area at
the top of the screen, as an alternative to the option menu. Quick entry has no effect
on screens other than user screens.
Use Last properties If selected, then all the common attributes (e.g. position, size, colours etc.) of the
most recently edited object are applied to the next component to be added.
Positioning Grid
Causes a grid to appear on the ‘Goto canvas’ screen to help in component layout
Positioning tip
If enabled, then hovering over the highlighted item in a ‘goto Canvas’ screen causes
the coordinates of the top left corner of the component to appear, in whatever units
(%, pixels etc.) are selected for the component. The first number gives the ‘X’ (leftright) co-ordinate; the second gives the ‘Y’ (up-down) position.
Clicking the left mouse key within a component causes the coordinates of the top left
corner of the component to appear, in whatever units (%, pixels etc.) are selected for
the component.
Clicking the left mouse key outside a component, shows the co-ordinates of the
mouse cursor tip. To see these co-ordinates within a component, the mouse must be
click-dragged from outside the component.
User Guide
Page 258
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.2.4 Screen creation example
To produce a new display screen with channels one to four inclusive each displayed as an independent bar graph across the width of the screen, with Group 1 vertical trend display below. To achieve the
above, the following items will be required:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bar1: Horizontal bargraph with X = 0, Y = 0, Width = 100, Height = 10, channel = Channel 1
Bar2: Horizontal bargraph with X = 0, Y = 12, Width = 100, Height = 10, channel = Channel 2
Bar3: Horizontal bargraph with X = 0, Y = 24, Width = 100, Height = 10, channel = Channel 3
Bar4: Horizontal bargraph with X = 0, Y = 36, Width = 100, Height = 10, channel = Channel 4
Group 1: Vertical trend group with X = 25, Y = 48, Width = 50, Height = 50. Group name to appear
above display.
PROCEDURE
1. Operate the ‘Add’ key to call the Component selection list.
List of component types
Group Vertical Trend (gr_vtrend)
Group Horizontal Trend (gr_htrend)
Group Vertical Bargraph (gr_ver_bar)
Group Horizontal Bargraph (gr_hor_bar)
Group Numeric (gr_num)
2. Touch Channel Horizontal Bargraph to highlight it, then press ‘Add’.
Channel Vertical Bargraph (ch_ver_bar)
Channel Horizontal Bargraph (ch_hor_bar)
Channel Numeric (ch_num)
Channel Data (ch_data)
3. Repeat step 2 three times then
4. Touch ‘Group Vertical Trend’, then ‘Add’,
then ‘Close’
5. The Component property editor page reappears with the default values for the most
recently added component displayed.
Dialog Action
Navigation Action
Operator Button
Add Close
Component Property Editor - Screen 1
Add
Del
Copy
Paste
gr_vtrend_6.1
Identifier gr_vtrend_6.1
Last Error
Group Number 0) Current display group
Show Title Bar Yes
X Position 0
%
Y Position 0
%
Width 50
%
Height 50
%
Background Colour -1
Draw Order 30
Component Type Group Vertical Trend (gr_vtrend)
6. Touch the Identifier field, then enter the
name ‘Group 1’ ‘Ok’ using the pop-up keyboard which appears.
7.
In Group Number, select: 1) Group 1
8. Title bar is selected on (yes), as required
9
Enter the X (25%) and Y (48%) co-ordinates,
using the same technique as was used for
the Identifier field in step 6. The default
dimensions (50 x 50%) are as required.
Goto Canvas
Save
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
More...
Component Property Editor - Screen 1
Add
Del
Copy
Paste
gr_vtrend_6.1
Identifier Group 1
Last Error
Group Number 1) Group 1
Show Title Bar Yes
X Position 0
%
Y Position 0
%
Width 50
%
Height 50
%
Background Colour -1
10 The Draw order is as required.
11. Press ‘Save’
Close
Draw order 30
Component Type Group Vertical Trend (gr_vtrend)
Goto Canvas
Save
Close
More...
User Guide
Page 259
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.2.4 SCREEN CREATION EXAMPLE (Cont.)
Component Property Editor - Screen 1
12 Touch the component picklist field, and
highlight the topmost ch_hor_bar... field.
Add
Del Copy Paste ch_hor_bar_2.2
13. In the Identifier field, enter the name ‘Bar
Identifier Bar 1
Last Error
1’ using the pop-up keyboard. (To enter
Channel 1) Channel 1
numbers, touch the ‘Numeric’ tab under the
X Position 0
%
keyboard, then touch the required number.)
Y Position 0
%
14. The channel number is as required
Width 100
%
Figure
7.2.3d
15. Touch the width field and enter
a value
of Complete user screen
Height 10
%
100.
Background Colour -1
Foreground Colour -1
16. Touch the height field and enter ‘10’
Draw Order 20
Component Type Channel Horizontal Bargraph (ch_hor_bar)
17. Press ‘Save’
Goto Canvas
18. Touch the component picklist field and select another bargraph.
19. In a similar way to that described for Bar 1
a) enter the identifier ‘Bar 2’
b) select Channel 2 from the picklist
c) enter a Y value of 12
d) enter width = 100%; height = 10%.
Add
Del
Copy
Paste
More...
ch_hor_bar_4.2
Identifier Bar 2
Last Error
Channel 2) Channel 2
X Position 0
%
Y Position 12
%
Width 100
Height 10
%
%
Background Colour -1
Forground Colour -1
Draw Order -1
Component Type Channel Horizontal Bargraph (ch_hor_bar)
21 Finally, press ‘Save’, then ‘Close’, to reveal
the display page.
Channel 1
Close
Component Property Editor - Screen 1
20. Similarly configure Bar 3 and Bar 4, using
the appropriate Y values (24 and 36) and
Channel selection (3 and 4).
Engineer
Save
Goto Canvas
Group 1 . User Screen 1
Batch Number:050822.010
Save
Close
0.4187 ˚C
0.0000
More...
14:01:24
22/08/05
1.0000
Channel 2
0.3316 ˚C
0.0000
1.0000
Channel 3
0.1427 ˚C
0.0000
1.0000
Channel 4
0.6293 ˚C
0.0000
1.0000
Group 1
Channel 1
0.0000
0.2000
0.4000
0.6000
0.4187˚C
0.8000
1.0000
13:59:02
22/08/05
User Guide
Page 260
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.2.4 SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE (Cont.)
In order to provide a degree of contrast, the background colour of the ‘Main’ page can be changed to
a darker colour as shown for colour 22 in figure 7.2.3e, below. Figure 7.2.3f on the next page, shows the
relevant component property pages.
Engineer
Channel 1
Group 1 . User Screen 1
Batch Number:050822.010
0.4187 ˚C
0.0000
14:01:25
22/08/05
1.0000
Channel 2
0.3316 ˚C
0.0000
1.0000
Channel 3
0.1427 ˚C
0.0000
1.0000
Channel 4
0.6293 ˚C
0.0000
1.0000
Group 1
Channel 1
0.0000
0.2000
0.4000
0.6000
0.4187˚C
0.8000
1.0000
13:59:02
22/08/05
Figure 7.2.3e User screen example with coloured background
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 261
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.2.4 SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE (Cont.)
Component Property Editor - Screen 1
Add
Del
Copy
Paste
main_1.2
Identifier main_1.2
Last Error
Page Title
X Position 0
%
Y Position 0
%
Width 100
%
Height 100
%
Background Colour -1
Touch background
colour field
Draw Order 1
Component Type Main
Goto Canvas
Save
Close
More...
22
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Colour list
Shift
Caps
BSpc
Ovr
Ok
Cancel
Figure 7.2.3f background colour selection pages
User Guide
Page 262
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.3 PARAMETER DEFINITIONS
The following parameters are associated with the components listed in table 7.2.2, above. The list is
divided into basic and advanced.
7.3.1 Basic parameters
Notes:
1 Not all components have all the following parameters associated with them. The component
definitions in section 7.4 define each component’s parameters.
2 The generic term ‘solid objects’ as used in this description includes rectangles, lines, arcs,
rounded rectangles, ovals, polygons and polylines. Lines and arcs do not have a background
colour as they cannot be filled.
3. Default parameter units are in ‘percentage of screen width/height’. The picklist next to each
dimension field allows pixels to be used instead.
Parameter
Description
Arc Angle
For Arcs only, the number of degrees of arc drawn anti-clockwise (counter-clockwise) from
the Start Angle. Negative angles draw clockwise. See figure7.4.20a for definitions.
Arc Height
For Rounded Rectangles only, this is double the vertical distance from the corner of the
(unrounded) rectangle at which the curve is to start. To draw ‘circular’ corners, this value
must be 3/2 times the Arc Width. The Arc height value must be less than half the Rectangle height. Percent units are relative to the rectangle height, not the screen height.
Arc Width
For Rounded Rectangles only, this is double the horizontal distance from the corner of the
(unrounded) rectangle at which the curve is to start. To draw ‘circular’ corners, this value
must be 2/3 the Arc Height. The Arc width value must be less than half the Rectangle
width. Percent units are relative to the rectangle width, not the screen width.
Background colourThe fill colour of solid objects; the background colour for the main page, trend charts, text
messages etc. For Bargraphs, the colour ‘behind’ the bar.
Button Text
For operator buttons, Dialogue Action and Navigation Action. Allows button text to be
entered. Event button text is defined in Event Button Configuration, described in section
4.3.7.
Channel
Allows a channel to be selected for bargraph, numeric, value etc. display.
Draw edge
If set to ‘Yes’, this causes the outline shape of a solid object to be drawn in the foreground
colour. If set to ‘No’, the object’s outline is not drawn.
Draw Order
Allows a layer scheme to be introduced. Items with higher draw order values are overlaid
on components with lower draw order values. The Draw Order feature is included specifically to allow a dynamic element (such as a bargraph) to be placed ‘on top of’ a background, static image. A dynamic element is always drawn on top all other elements at
update time. When one or more dynamic elements are placed on top of one another, the
results are unpredictable.
Edit Parameter
For operator buttons, allows the user to select the parameter type (e.g Channel N Alarm 1)
to be edited when the button is operated. The parameter number (N) is entered in the ‘N
value’ field.
Event Button
For Event buttons, this allows the user to assign an Event button to the User Screen Button
to be displayed.
Feature
For ‘Channel data’ only, allows the type of data to be displayed (e.g. Current value), to be
selected from a pick-list.
Fill Area
If set to ‘Yes’, this causes a solid object to be filled with the background colour. If set to
‘No’, the inside of the object is transparent. If ‘draw edge’ is also set to ‘No’, the object is
invisible.
Table 7.3.1 Basic level parameters (sheet 1 of 2)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 263
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.3.1 BASIC PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Parameter
Description
Foreground Colour The line colour of solid objects. The bar colour of bargraphs (default = normal point colour). The colour of Text and of numeric values. Where applicable, this overrides channel
colour.
Group number
Allows a group to be selected for group trend, bargraph and numeric displays, and for
Dialogue action buttons. Select specific group, or ‘0’ to follow current display group.
Height
Height of a component, measured downwards from the component’s ‘Y position’. Negative values measure upwards.
Identifier
Component name. Initially as in the Add Component list, but editable by the user.
Image File
Allows a file name to be entered when importing GIF or JPG images.
Last error
A text message describing the last error to occur for this component. The component
must be re-edited in order to clear the problem.
N Value
See ‘Edit parameter’ above.
Page Title
Allows a name for the current user screen to be entered in ‘Main’. This name appears at the
top of the screen, and in the Screen number picklist for navigation action buttons.
Screen Number
For navigation action buttons, allows a screen to be selected. When the button is operated, the instrument will switch to the selected display screen.
Show Title Bar
When set to ‘Yes’, group displays (e.g. Group Vertical Trend) display a title bar across the
top of the component, giving the selected group’s descriptor. Selecting ‘Show Title Bar’ to
‘No’, removes the title bar from the display
Start Angle
For Arcs only, defines a start point for ‘Arc Angle’ above. See figure2.4.20a for definitions.
Text
Allows a text string to be entered for display at the screen. The hash (#) key may not be
used in text messages.
Width
The width of a component measured rightwards from the component’s “X position’. Negative values measure leftwards.
X points
Defines the X co-ordinates for polylines and polygons. Must match the number of Y-points
for correct interpretation
X position
Distance between the left edge of the screen and the left edge of the component.
Y points
Defines the Y co-ordinates for polylines and polygons. Must match the number of X-points
for correct interpretation
Y position
Distance between the top edge of the screen and the top edge of the component.
Table 7.3.1 Basic level parameters (sheet 2 of 2)
User Guide
Page 264
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.3.2 Advanced parameters
The selection of the Advanced properties set, is carried out from the Properties Options page as described in section 7.2.3, above. Advanced properties are in addition to the basic properties described
above, not a replacement for them.
Parameter
Pick list content
3D effect
Enable/Disable
Description
For Channel numeric display only, adds an embossed boxed surround to the display. Applies only if ‘Custom’ selected as Faceplate style.
Alarm marks colour None
Allows a colour to be selected for alarm marks on trend scales.
Default is colour 0 (red).
Bargraph style
Single Line...
For horizontal bargraphs only. ‘Plain’ produces a bargraph with
descriptor to the left of the bar, digital value to the right of the bar,
and alarm indication to the right of the decimal value. ‘With units’
adds units after the digital value. ‘3D’ adds an embossed boxed
surround. ‘Scale’ adds a scale below the bar, with end-point values
and tick points. Scale style (described below) may be used to
modify the appearance of the scale.
Faceplate below bar Produces coloured bar above channel descriptor, digital value and
alarm indication. No scale is printed
Just bar
Produces a colour bar with no textual information, or just the low
and high scale values, according to component.
Bar and scale
Produces a colour bar with a scale, but no digital value or alarm
indication
Default
Produces a colour bar with scale, with descriptor, digital value and
alarm indication above.
Default Vertical BargraphProduces a colour bar with a scale
System Vertical BargraphProduces a colour bar with a scale
Horizontal Bargraph Produces a colour bar with scale, with descriptor, digital value and
alarm indication above.
Best Fit Font
Enabled/Disabled
For Channel numeric only. Applies only if ‘Custom’ selected as
Faceplate style. If enabled, the display fonts for descriptor, value
and units are selected by the instrument to suit the screen scale.
The fonts will thus vary in size according to the size of the Channel Numeric display. Overridden by any settings for Value Font,
Descriptor Font or Units Font other than ‘Default’.
Channel cycle time 10
For group trend displays, allows a time period, in seconds, to be
entered for channel scroll rate. 0 = no scroll.
Colour Alarms
None
Used only when Colour style = ‘Channel alarms’. A semicolonseparated list of (Colour channel) alarms, used to change the
colour of the component being configured according to alarm
status. Colours are defined in ‘Colour Backgrounds’ and ‘Colour
Foregrounds’, described below.
Colour Backgrounds None
Used only if Colour style = ‘Channel Alarms’ or ‘Channel thresholds’. A semicolon-separated list of background colours for the
component being configured. The number of colours entered
must match the number of alarms or threshold values as appropriate. Overrides any entry in ‘Background Colour’. Colours are
entered by touching each required selection in turn. The semicolon separators are entered automatically, in front of each selection
(apart from the first).
Table 7.3.2 Advanced edit level parameters (sheet 1 of 6)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 265
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.3.2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Parameter
Pick list content
Description
Colour channel
All channels
Allows a channel to be defined to be used in percentile or quartile
filling or as a source of channel thresholds or channel alarms, as
selected in ‘Colour style’, below.
Colour foregrounds None
Used only if Colour style = ‘Channel Alarms’ or ‘Channel thresholds’. A semicolon-separated list of foreground colours for the
component being configured. The number of colours entered
must match the number of alarms or threshold values as appropriate. Overrides any entry in ‘Foreground Colour’. Colours are
entered by touching each required selection in turn. The semicolon separators are entered automatically, in front of each selection
(apart from the first). Colour style
Channel thresholds
Channel Alarms
Background quartile
Foreground quartile
Background decimal
Foreground decimal
Allows a number of semicolon-separated values to be entered,
to act as colour change triggers for the component being configured. The values are those of the source channel selected
in ‘Colour Channel’ described above. The number of threshold
values entered must match the number of colour values entered in
Colour Foregrounds and Colour Backgrounds.
Allows a number of semicolon-separated values (1 to 4) to be
entered, to act as colour change triggers for the component
being configured. These values represent alarms 1 to 4 of the
source channel selected in ‘Colour Channel’ described above.
The number of alarms entered must match the number of colour
values entered in Colour Foregrounds and Colour Backgrounds.
Point is displayed in the colour of the latest active alarm. For
example: Alarms configured 1,2. Foreground colours configured
3;0 (amber and red). When alarm 1 goes active, the component
goes amber. When alarm 2 goes active the component goes red.
When alarm two clears, component reverts to Amber and so on.
Background colour represents the value of the colour channel.
Colour 0 appears for values below 25%, colour 1 for values between 25 and 50 %, colour 3 for values between 50 and 75% and
colour 4 for values above 75 %. Foreground colour is default (-1).
As background quartile but for the foreground colour. Background colour is default (-1).
Background colour represents the value of the colour channel.
Colour 0 appears for values below 10%, colour 1 for values between 10 and 20 %, colour 2 for values between 20 and 30% and
so on up to colour 9. Foreground colour is default (-1).
As background decimal but for the foreground colour. Background colour is default (-1).
Colour Thresholds None
Used only when Colour style = ‘Channel thresholds’. A semicolonseparated list of (Colour channel) values, used to change the colour of the component being configured according to the process
value of the point selected in ‘Colour Channel’ described above.
The number of threshold values entered must match the number
of colours defined in ‘Colour Backgrounds’ and ‘Colour Foregrounds’, described above.
Decimal places
Number of decimal places in Channel data display.
Default
Table 7.3.2 Advanced edit level parameters (sheet 2 of 6)
User Guide
Page 266
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.3.2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Parameter
Pick list content
Description
Descriptor Font
Default
For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Custom’, then Descriptor Font allows the Channel Descriptor font to
be selected from a picklist.
Display Alarms
Enable/Disable
For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Custom’, this selection determines whether or not alarm symbols are
displayed in the top right hand corner of the display.
Display Bargraph
None
If selected, a vertical bargraph is drawn at the right hand edge of
Horizontal Trend displays.
Display Descriptor
Enable/Disable
For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to
‘Custom’, this selection determines whether or not the channel
descriptor appears at the top of the display.
Display messages
Enable/Disable
If selected, displays a message bar for Horizontal Trend displays.
Display Pens
Enable/Disable
If selected, pen representations appear at the top or right edge of
a trend chart.
Display Units
Enable/Disable
For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Custom’, this selection determines whether or not the channel’s units
appear at the right edge of the display.
Faceplate Style
Default
Produces a channel display with the descriptor and alarm indicators on the top line and with the digital value, and units on the bottom line.
Just value
Shows only the channel value
No alarms
As default, but without alarm display
Value and Units
Produces a larger digital display of the channel value, with units.
Single line Faceplate As default, but all on a single line.
Custom
The ‘Display Descriptor’, ‘Display units’ and ‘Display Alarms’
checkbox settings, and the font selections for Value, Units and
Descriptor become active only if ‘Custom’ is selected as Faceplate
style.
Faceplates Location Dynamic, N, S, E, W
(Not available for group horizontal bargraph displays.) Allows the
position of the faceplates to be ‘dynamic’ (appears at best position
for the number of channels), or to be located above (North), below
(South), to the right (East) or to the left (West) of the bargraphs.
Also allows faceplates to be turned off altogether. For group
trend displays, these faceplates are in addition to the currentchannel faceplate, which always appears above the ‘chart’ across
the full width of the display, unless turned off using Horizontal
Faceplate disable.
Font style
List of fonts
Picklist holds a number of sizes, plain, bold and underlined bold.
Grid Line colour Default
Allows a colour to be selected for trend chart gridlines
Horizontal Alignment Left/centred/right
Allows text to be justified relative to its width setting
Horizontal Faceplate Enable/Disable
For vertical trend displays, allows the current-channel faceplate to
be selected on or off.
Horizontal Grid total Default
Number of vertical divisions of a trend chart. If left at default uses
the value entered in Group Configuration (section 4.3.2). Any
other setting overrides Group Configuration entry.
Table 7.3.2 Advanced edit level parameters (sheet 3 of 6)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 267
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.3.2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Parameter
Pick list content
Description
Horizontal Minor Divs Default
Allows the user to enter a number of minor grid divisions. If left
at default uses the value entered in Group Configuration (section
4.3.2). Any other setting overrides Group Configuration entry
Line thickness
1
Allows a pixel value to be entered for the line thickness of some
components. It should be noted that the nature of the screen
and of the drawing method means that curved lines of multi-pixel
thickness can suffer from Moiré fringe, or interference effects.
Message Colour
Default
Allows a colour to be selected for messages on a trend chart
Minimum Height
Default
For individual channels within a group horizontal bargraph display
Minimum Width
Default
For individual channels within a group vertical bargraph display
Minor grid line colour Default
Allows a colour to be selected for trend chart minor gridlines
Nominal height
None
653 (503) = height of large frame (small frame) display area in pixels
Nominal width
None
1024 (934) = width of large frame (small frame) display area in pixels
Notes
None
Allows a note to be entered for the users convenience.
Number of Columns None
Lays out group displays (other than trend) in the specified number
of columns.
Number of Rows
None
Lays out group displays in the specified number of rows.
Numeric width
None
Number of characters in channel data display including decimal
point.
On visibility change Paint Background
Paint All PV Error Colour Background
Default
PV Error Colour Foreground
Default
Repaint the area of the component, including any text, in its background colour. If no background colour has been defined, the
default (silver/grey)colour is used.
Repaints the component area in the screen background colour
thus rendering the component invisible.
Allows a colour to be selected for background use when the relevant PV is in an error state. Overrides other selections.
Allows a colour to be selected for foreground use when the relevant PV is in an error state. Overrides other selections
Reversed colour
None
Allows text to be displayed in the background colour against a
background of foreground colour.
Scale Digits
None
For Horizontal trend displays. Allows the chart area to be maximised, by reducing the width of the vertical bar to the right of the
chart. Scales will be presented in scientific format, or in ‘N.?’, ‘N?’
format etc. depending on the number of digits specified. The
number of digits is in addition to the decimal point.
Scale Divisions - Major None
For channel bargraphs, allows the number of major scale divisions
to be specified for the channel. Overwrites the Scale DivisionsMajor setting in the Channel’s configuration.
Table 7.3.2 Advanced edit level parameters (sheet 4 of 6)
User Guide
Page 268
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.3.2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Parameter
Pick list content
Description
Scale Divisions - Minor None
Scale style
For channel bargraphs, allows the number of minor scale divisions
to be specified for the channel. Overwrites the Scale DivisionsMinor setting in the Channel’s configuration.
Scale on bar.---
See the figure below for clarification. For vertical bargraphs only.
No Text
Produces scale tick marks, but without values
Decimal scale
For bargraphs, produces scale with 9 divisions (0, 10, 20, 30, 40,
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100% of scale width). Zero and full scale values
printed. For Horizontal bargraphs, each scale division has 4 minor
divisions (0, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 % of major division).
Default
Uses scale information from each point’s scale configuration
Horizontal Bargraph As default for horizontal bargraphs
Horizontal Faceplate Produces faceplate display with scale end points, descriptor, digital value and alarm indicator
Vertical bargraph
As default for vertical bargraphs.
The examples below are alternatives - only one style can be chosen for each group bargraph display.
800.00
760.00
720.00
680.00
640.00
600.00
560.00
520.00
480.00
440.00
400.00
Scale on bar
Value 10
Show Alarm Marks
800.00
767.00
733.00
700.00
667.00
633.00
600.00
567.00
533.00
500.00
467.00
433.00
400.00
Scale on bar
Value 12
100
100
90
90
90
80
80
80
70
70
70
60
60
60
50
50
50
30
30
30
20
20
20
40
40
10
0
100
10
Left
0
Centre
Right
Scale on bar Percent
800.00
800.00
40
10
0
400.00
Decimal scale
400.00
Vertical
Bargraph
Yes/No
Allows channel scale alarm marks to be displayed (yes) or not (no).
Alarm Marks Colour, described above, allows the user to select a
colour for the alarm marks.
Time Marker colour Default
Allows a colour to be selected for time/date printing on a trend
chart
Time Marker interval Default
Number of horizontal grid lines between successive time markers.
Trend Padding
Default
For group trend only. Normal trends are 1 pixel wide. Setting a
padding value of N, adds N pixels on each side of the central pixel.
For example, a padding value of 2 would produce traces 5 pixels
wide. Applies to all channels in the group.
Units Font
List of fonts
For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Custom’, then Units Font allows the Channel Units font to be selected
from a picklist.
Action is taken when the value associated with the component changes
Update when
Value changes
Always
The component is redrawn, continuously, at the display update rate.
Vertical alignment Centred/bottom/top Allows text to be positioned relative to its height setting
Value Font
List of fonts
For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Custom’, then Value Font allows the Channel Value font to be selected
from a picklist.
Table 7.3.2 Advanced edit level parameters (sheet 5 of 6)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 269
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.3.2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Parameter
Pick list content
Description
Vertical Grid Total
Default
Number of vertical divisions for trend chart. If left at default uses
the value entered in Group Configuration (section 4.3.2). Any
other setting overrides Group Configuration entry
Vertical Minor Divs Default
Allows the user to enter a number of minor grid divisions. If left at
default, the value entered in Group Configuration (section 4.3.2) is
used. Any other setting overrides Group Configuration entry
Visible Alarm
Default
For ‘When Visible’ (below) is selected as ‘In alarm or error’ or ‘not
in alarm or error’. ‘Visible Alarm’ allows an alarm number to be
entered, for use in determining whether a component be visibile
or invisible.
Visible Channel
All points
For use ‘When Visible’ (below) is selected as ‘Channel Value’, ‘In
alarm or error’ or ‘not in alarm or error’. ‘Visible Channel’ allows
a point number to be selected from a pick list. See also Visible
Operator, and Visible Value, below.
Visible Operator
List of operators
For ‘When Visible’ (below) is selected as ‘Channel Value’. ‘Visible
Operator’ allows a comparison operator to be selected from a
picklist. The picklist contains the following items:
Greater than, Less than, Greater than or equal to, Less than or
equal to, Equal to, Not equal to. The comparison is made between the instantaneous value of the point selected in ‘Visible
Channel’ and the value entered in ‘Visible Value’ (below). For
example, when using the ‘Greater than’ operator, the component
is visible whenever the Visible Channel’s value is greater than the
Visible Value.
Visible Value
Default
For ‘When Visible’ (below) is selected as ‘Channel Value’. ‘Visible
Value’ allows a value to be entered to be used in the ‘Visible Operator’ comparison described above.
When visible
Always
Never
Channel value
Component is always visible
Component is never visible
Component is visible or not, depending on the relationship
between the current value of a selected channel and a specified
constant value. See ‘Visible channel’, above, for details.
In alarm or error
Component is visible if a specified alarm on a specified point is active, or if the point is in an ‘Error’ state. See ‘Visible Alarm’, above,
for details.
Not in alarm or error Component is visible if a specified alarm on a specified point is
not active, or the point is not in an ‘Error’ state. See ‘Visible Alarm’,
above, for details.
Table 7.3.2 Advanced edit level parameters (sheet 6 of 6)
User Guide
Page 270
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.4 COMPONENT DEFINITIONS
This section defines all the available components listed in table 7.2.2 in terms of their parameters. The
components occur in the order in which they appear in the list.
7.4.1 Group Vertical/Horizontal Trend
This produces a display which mimics a recorder chart, for a selected group. All the functions (e.g. trend
history) described in, section 3.4. The following unique parameters (fully described in table 7.3.2) are
available for configuration:
Background colour Allows the ‘chart’ to be drawn in the selected colour.
Message Colour
The colour of messages printed on the ‘Chart’.
Time Marker ColourThe colour of time/date printed on the ‘Chart’.
Grid Line Colour The colour of the ‘Chart’ grid lines.
Faceplates location Allows ‘group’ faceplates to be enabled/disabled, and when enabled allows the position of the faceplates to be defined. These ‘group’ faceplates are additional to the
current-channel faceplate which always appears above the chart, unless it has been
disabled under ‘Horizontal faceplate’ (below).
Time Marker Interval Selects the number of horizontal chart lines between successive time markers
Vertical Grid Total Total number of vertical chart divisions.
Horizontal Grid TotalTotal number of horizontal chart divisions.
Trend Padding
Sets thickness of traces.
Channel cycle time Allows a number to be entered for the scrolling period between channels. 0 = Channel hold.
Display Messages Allows message printing to be enabled/disabled.
Display Bargraph For Horizontal trending only, allows the vertical bargraph display to be switched on
and off.
Display Pens
Allows the pen icons at the edge of the chart to be switched on and off.
Horizontal FaceplateAllows the current-channel faceplate to be switched on and off.
7.4.2 Group vertical bargraph
Produces a vertical bargraph for a selected group in a format defined by ‘Bargraph Style’ and ‘Scale
style’ described in table 7.3.2. The number of rows of bars can also be defined by the user, according to
the overall size of the display, number of channels etc. The default value of zero means that the recorder
will display what it ‘believes’ to be the most ergonomic number of rows.
The recorder attempts to fit as many channel bars as possible into the width of the display. The default
minimum width of a column is 6 mm. If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display, a
scroll bar device appears at the bottom edge to allow ‘hidden’ bars to be accessed.
The recorder attempts to fit as many faceplates as possible into the height of the display. If there are
more faceplates than can be fitted into the display, a scroll bar device appears to allow ‘hidden’ faceplates to be accessed.
7.4.3 Group horizontal bargraph
Produces a group horizontal bargraph, for a selected group, in a format defined by ‘Bargraph Style’ and
‘Scale style’ described in table 7.3.2. The number of columns can also be defined by the user, according
to the overall size of the display, minimum width, number of channels etc.
The recorder attempts to fit as many channels as possible into the height of the display, according to the
specified minimum height (default = 12mm). If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display,
a scroll bar appears at the right edge to allow ‘hidden’ channels to be accessed.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 271
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.4.4 Group numeric display
This produces a display of a selected group’s numeric values, in one of a number of formats, as described in ‘Faceplate Style’ in table 7.3.2 above. The number of columns can also be defined by the user,
according to the overall size of the display, number of channels etc. The default value of zero means that
the recorder will display what it ‘believes’ to be the most ergonomic number of columns.
The recorder attempts to fit as many channels as possible into the height of the display, according to the
specified minimum height (default = 12mm.). If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display, a scroll bar appears at the right edge to allow ‘hidden’ channels to be accessed.
7.4.5 Channel vertical/horizontal bargraph
For a specified channel, this produces a dynamic horizontal or vertical bargraph display of channel value,
in a format defined by ‘Bargraph Style’ and ‘Scale style’ described in table 7.3.2
7.4.6 Channel Numeric
For a specified channel, allows the channel faceplate to be displayed in one of a number of formats, as
described in ‘Faceplate Style’ in table 7.3.2 above.
7.4.7 Channel data
For a specified channel, allows one of : Current value, Descriptor, Units, Span low or Span high to be
selected for display.
7.4.8 Dialogue Action
This displays a pushbutton which can have one of three actions assigned to it:
1. Call the Login page.
2. Call the Batch Status page
3. Call the Operator Note dialogue box.
For Batch and Operator Note use, a Group number can be selected.
7.4.9 Navigation Action
This displays a pushbutton, the purpose of which is to call a different display screen. A Group and a
screen can both be specified, so this button provides a shortcut version of the ‘Goto group’ and ‘Goto
View’ keys of the root menu.
User Guide
Page 272
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.4.10 Operator button
This displays a user pushbutton. The legend on the pushbutton, and the task it is to carry out, are defined in the button configuration. If the text is too long for the width of the button, the text is truncated
(e.g. Reset Ave...). Possible tasks are as follows (assuming that the relevant options are fitted):
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Edit the threshold (setpoint) setting for alarms 1 to 4 for point N
Reset Maths channel N
Edit Maths constant N
Preset Totaliser N
Preset Counter N
Start/Stop Timer N
Initiate Demand Write N
Set output channel N to default values.
Reset Average
Figure 7.4.10
Typical operator button
In all the above, N represents any number between 1 and the maximum number available for the relevant
type of point. (Point is an umbrella term for an input channel, a maths channel, a totaliser, etc.)
When the button is operated a ‘confirmation’ page appears allowing, for example, the value of a constant to be edited before operating the ‘Apply’ button.
Notes:
1 If the point being accessed is not suitably configured, the ‘confirmation’ page is blank. For
example, if the Operator button is configured to change, say, the threshold (SP) of Alarm 2 on
Channel 6, and either Channel 6 is Configured ‘Off’, or alarm 2 is ‘Off’, then the Confirmation
page will not have a configurable area allowing the user to enter the required new value.
2. Any signing or authorizing that normally applies to the item being edited, also applies when
changes are being made by means of the Operator button.
7.4.11 Event Button
This displays a pushbutton, to be used as a source for an event. The button name, its action (latching or
unlatching), and whether or not the operation of the button needs signing or authorizing are set up in
Event Button configuration, described in section 4.3.7. The actions taken when the button is operated
are set up in Event configuration, described in section 4.3.6. Signing and Authorizing are as described in
section 4.4.2 (Management).
Ack Alarms
Figure 7.4.11 Typical Event Button
7.4.12 Image
This allows a GIF (Gif87a format only) or JPG image file to be loaded from (e.g.) an SD or Flash card. Once
this has been done, bargraphs, text messages etc. can be superimposed on the image.
Notes:
1 Only user screens 1 to 6, may have images embedded in them, and the size of each image may
not exceed 250kB (see also note 3). Does not apply to Bridge-only screens (25 to 124).
2. It is recommended that ‘abs_pxl’ be selected as width and height units, before an image is
loaded. The use of any other units significantly increases the time taken for the loading process
to complete.
3. For user screens 1 to 6, the physical size of the image may not exceed 1024 pixels wide or 768
high. Any attempt to load am image larger than this results in a ‘User Screen Image Error’ message asking that the image size be reduced. The size constraint does not apply to Bridge-only
screens (25 to 124).
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 273
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.4.13 Text
If width and height are left with the default values of zero, the text will start at the specified start point
and fit in the space between there and the right edge of the screen, in a single line (left justified (ranged)
as a default). If the text string is too long, it is truncated. The text appears in the specified foreground
colour, superimposed on a ‘box’ of background colour which is the same width of the text string.
If width and height are defined, then the text will fill the defined width and any remaining text is truncated. The text appears in the foreground colour (default black), over a field of background colour (default
grey).
Advanced properties allow the text to be set to range left, range right or be centred, at the top, bottom
or centre of the field, and for the foreground and background colours to be swapped.
7.4.14 Round rectangle
Similar to a rectangle described in section 7.4.15, but offers the user the opportunity to draw rectangles
with curved corners. The horizontal and vertical curve angles are specified separately, and the aspect
ratio of the screen should be taken into account when working in percentage units.
Note: The rounded rectangle will draw incorrectly if either of the arc height/width settings are
greater than half the rectangle height/width settings.
X Position
1/2 Arc width
Y Position
1/2 Arc
height
Height
Width
Figure 7.4.14 Round rectangle definitions
7.4.15 Rectangle
This draws a rectangle on the display page. If the height and width of the rectangle are defined in the
default ‘percentage units’, then entering equal values for height and width will result in a rectangle with
the same aspect ratio as that of the screen, not a square as might be expected. Because the screen
height is approximately 2/3 the width, the rectangle height should be 3/2 the rectangle width to produce a square. (The actual height/width ratio is 535/800 = 0.669 for large frame units or 214/320 = 0.669
for small frame units).
Using pixels as the measuring units obviates this problem as pixels are square.
User Guide
Page 274
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.4.16 Polyline- series of points
Similar to closed polygons, described in section 7.4.17 below, but the first and last points are not automatically joined, and the drawn item cannot be filled and the line width cannot be specified - it is always
one pixel.
Note: When working in percentage units, it should be remembered that vertical percentage units are only
2/3 the size of horizontal percentage units - this affecting the appearance of the drawn item.
Example: To draw an (old fashioned) electronic resistor icon (Units = Absolute pixels)
X position = 400, Y position = 236,
Foreground colour = 0
X points = 0,10,15,25,35,45,55,65,75,85,90,100
Y points = 0,0,-10,10,-10,10,-10,10,-10,10,0,0
Press ‘Apply’, then ‘Close’ to produce a red ‘sawtooth’ outline, as depicted in figure 7.4.16 below.
Engineer
Group 1 • User Screen 1
Batch Number:050822.010
14:20:50
22/08/05
Point1
X=0; y=0
Point 12
X=100; y=0
Figure 7.4.16 Polyline example
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 275
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.4.17 Polygon - closed area
This allows a number of pairs of points to be entered, which, if valid, will then be joined by straight lines.
The first and last points are automatically joined, by the recorder. The shape, drawn in the specified foreground colour, with the specified line width, can be filled with the specified background colour.
Note: When working in percentage units, it should be remembered that vertical percentage units
are only 2/3 the size of horizontal percentage units - this affecting the appearance of the drawn item
Example: To draw a left pointing solid arrow, positioned with its point at the centre of the screen.
Access the component page as described in section 7.2.3, select ‘polygon - closed area’ and press Ok. In
the properties page, carry out the following configuration (units = %):
X position = 50, Y position = 50,
Background colour = 22, Foreground colour = 30
Draw edge = Yes, Fill area = Yes
X points = 0,10,10,30,30,10,10
Y points = 0, -15, -5, -5, 5, 5, 15
Press Apply, then Close to produce a dark green arrow, with pale green outline, as depicted in figure
7.4.17 below.
Engineer
Group 1 • User Screen 1
Batch Number:050822.010
14:22:15
22/08/05
Point 2
X=10; y=-15
Point 3
X=10; y=-5
Point 1
X= 0; y= 0
Point 6
X=10; y= 5
Point 4
X=30; y=-5
Point 5
X=30; y= 5
Point 7
X=10; y= 15
Figure 7.4.17 Polygon example
User Guide
Page 276
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.4.18 Oval
Similar to an arc (section 7.4.20) with an arc angle of 360 degrees, but arcs cannot be filled,
If the height and width of the oval are defined in the default ‘percentage units’, then entering equal values
for height and width will result in an oval with the same aspect ratio as that of the screen, not a circle as
might be expected. Because the screen height is approximately 2/3 the width, the oval height should
be 3/2 its width to produce a circle. (The actual height/width ratio = 0.669).
7.4.19 Line
This causes a straight line of user-definable thickness to be drawn between the points (X position; Y position) and (X position + width; Y position + height)
Notes:
1 Y increases downwards; X increases rightwards
2 Height = 2/3 width if measuring in percent
X position;
Y position
Height
Width
X position + width;
Y position + height
Figure 7.4.19a Line definitions
EXAMPLE
To draw an approximation to a St.Andrew’s cross (saltire):
Access the component property editor page as described in section 7.2.3:
Select Advanced Edit level, then in the component property editor page
1. touch the ‘Add’ key at the top of the screen. In the ‘List of Component types’ page, press ‘Line’, ‘Add’,
‘Line’, ‘Add’, then ‘Close’
2. In ‘main_1.2’ - set background colour to 6
4. In ‘line_2.3’ Set Width to 100, Height to 100. Set Foreground colour to 55 and Line thickness to 35
5. In ‘line_3.4’ - Set X position to 100, Width to -100, Height to 100. Set Foreground colour to 55 and
Line thickness to 35
6. Press ‘Save’, then ‘Close’.
Note: because of the thickness of the lines takes the corners beyond the display area, an error
message may appear in the ‘Last error’ field for the lines : position maybe out of bounds. This
should not prevent the screen being drawn correctly.
Figure 7.4.19b Example
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 277
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.4.20 Arc
This causes a curved line of user-definable thickness to be drawn anti-clockwise between start angle
and (start angle + arc angle). The origin (‘centre’) of the arc is (X position + 1/2 Width) ; (Y position + 1/2
Height). Arcs cannot be filled.
Notes:
1 Angle increases anticlockwise
2 Height = 2/3 width if measuring in percent
3 Arcs cannot be filled - the shading in the figure is included for clarity only
X/Y Position
Arc end point
1/2 Height
Arc Start point
1/2 Width
= Start angle
= Arc angle
Figure 7.4.20a Arc dimension definitions
EXAMPLE
An arc definition of:
X position = 50%, Y position = 50%, Width = 50%, Height = 50%, Start angle = 0; Arc angle 270 would
produce the curve depicted in figure 7.4.20b, below.
Engineer
Group 1 • User Screen 1
Batch Number:050822.010
14:24:31
22/08/05
X position;
y position
Width
Height
Start of arc
End of arc
Figure 7.4.20b Sample arc
User Guide
Page 278
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
7.5 MEASURING UNIT COMPARISONS
Note: All the following figures are approximate.
7.5.1 XGA screen
The physical display screen area available for user screens is approximately 245 mm across and 164 mm
high. This area can be divided into a 100 x 100 array for percentage measurement or into a pixel array,
1024 across by 700 vertically.
Thus, horizontally,
10 mm = 4%
= 42 pixels
or
1% = 2.45 mm= 10.24 pixels
or 10 pixels = 2.45 mm
and Vertically,
10 mm = 6%
= 43 pixels
or
1% = 1.64 mm= 7 pixels
or 10 pixels = 2.3 mm
Centre of screen is given by X = 50%; Y = 50% or by X = 512 pixels; Y = 350 pixels
7.5.2 QVGA screen
The physical display screen area available for user screens is approximately 100 mm across and 72 mm
high. This area can be divided into a 100 x 100 array for percentage measurement or into a pixel array,
320 across by 210 vertically.
Thus, horizontally,
10 mm
or
1%
or 10 pixels
and Vertically,
10 mm
or
1%
or 10 pixels
= 10% = 32 pixels
= 1 mm = 3.2 pixels
= 3.2 mm
= 13%
= 29 pixels
= 0.72 mm= 2.4 pixels
= 3.4 mm
Centre of screen is given by X = 50%; Y = 50% or by X = 160 pixels; Y = 105 pixels
7.6 ERROR CODES
Error codes 1 to F may appear at the top left corner of the screen. The following codes are currently
implemented, and if more than one occurs at the same time, the code numbers are added. For example,
Error code 6 would mean that codes 4 and 2 had both occurred.
1
2
4
8
Component error e.g. image does not exist.
Error loading the Property.uhr file
Error loading the Style.uhr file
Error loading the usrscrn.uhu file
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 279
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS
8.1 INSTALLATION
The installation of the Modbus link consists of connecting a standard Ethernet cable between the RJ45
connector at the rear of the recorder either:
1. Directly to a host computer, using a crossover cable
2. To a host computer via a network, using a ‘straight through’ cable.
8.2 INTRODUCTION
MODBUS TCP allows one or more recorders to act as ‘slave’ devices to one or more host computers connected via the RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder. Each recorder must have a unique Internet
Protocol (IP) address, set up as described in Section 4.5.
MODBUS TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is a variant of the MODBUS family of communications
protocols intended for supervision and control of automated equipment specifically covering the use of
MODBUS messaging in an intranet or internet environment, using TCP/IP protocols. Much of the MODBUS detail in this manual is derived from the document openmbus.doc, available at http://www.modbus.
org/default.htm The above mentioned document also includes implementation guidelines for users.
Note: The Modbus protocol allows a maximum of 255 data bytes to be read from or written to in
one transaction. For this reason, the maximum number of standard (16 bit) registers that can be
accessed in one transaction is 255/2 = 127 and the maximum number of IEEE (32-bit) registers is
127/2 = 63.
8.2.1 Function Codes
MODBUS function codes 3, 4, 6, 8 and 16, defined in table 8.2.1a below, are supported and are fully described in section 8.5, below.
Code
MODBUS definition
Description
03
Read holding registers
Reads the binary contents of holding registers.
In this implementation, code 03 is identical with code 04.
04
Read input registers
Reads the binary contents of input registers. In this
implementation, code 04 is identical with code 03.
06
Pre-set single register
Writes a single value to a single register.
08
Diagnostics
Obtains communications diagnostics information
16
Pre-set multiple Registers
Writes values to multiple holding registers
Table 8.2.1a MODBUS Function code definition
DIAGNOSTIC CODES
Function code 08, subfunction 00 (Return query data) echoes the query (Loop back).
User Guide
Page 280
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.2.1 FUNCTION CODES (Cont.)
EXCEPTION CODES
MODBUS TCP provides reserved codes used for exceptions. These codes provide error information
relating to failed requests. Exceptions are signalled by hex 80 being added to the function code of the
request, followed by one of the codes listed in table 8.2.1b, below.
Code
Dec Hex MODBUS definition
Description (see Modbus specification for full details)
01
01
Illegal Function
An invalid function code was received
02
02
Illegal Data Address
An invalid data address was received
03
03
Illegal Data Value
An invalid data value was received
04
04
Slave Device Failure
An unrecoverable error occurred in the recorder
09
09
Illegal Sub Function
An invalid sub function was received.
10
0A
Gateway path unavailable
Gateway misconfigured or overloaded.
0B
Gateway target device
failed to respond
Device not present on the network
11
Table 8.2.1b Exception codes
8.2.2 Data types
The following data types are supported:
1 2’s complement signed 16-bit analogue values with implied decimal point. The decimal point position must be configured in both the recorder and the host computer.
2 2’s complement, 16, 32 and 64 bit signed integers.
3 16-bit unsigned integer values.
4 32 bit IEEE Floating point values.
5 Strings of limited size, can be transferred across Modbus TCP in ASCII format using a single non-multiplexed set of consecutive registers.
DATA ENCODING
MODBUS uses what is called a ‘Big endian’ representation for addresses and data items. This means that when
a numerical quantity larger than a single byte is transmitted, the most significant byte is sent first. For example
a 32-bit hex value of 12345678 would be transmitted as 12, followed by 34, followed by 56 and finally 78.
8.2.3 Invalid multiple register writes
When a recorder receives a multi-register write request, it is possible that one or more requests will be rejected. Under such a circumstance, the recorder will accept all valid write requests and ignore any invalid
writes. No error response is produced.
8.2.4 Security
The recorder has a local file in which are stored all users’ login information, as set up in Security/Access
configuration (section 4.4) it must then supply the correct Username and Password. Should a host fail to
login after three attempts, the recorder will terminate the connection.
This MODBUS security function can be enabled/disabled in the Operator/Config/Instrument menu (section 4.3.1).
Note: Modbus Security must be disabled in order for Modbus communications to be established.
Once the Master is communicating with the Slave, Modbus security can be re-enabled, providing
that the master has the correct remote user name and password data for the relevant slave. If this
information is missing, all read/write requests will be ignored by the slave.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 281
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.2.4 SECURITY (Cont.)
The following C++ code is intended for use in creating a suitable 16-bit encrypted register using an IP address and password:
/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
FUNCTION : MB_Driver::encrypt
DESCRIPTION : Create an encrypted value from a password string
ARGUMENTS : pswd : Pointer to password from network file
eKey : Pointer to eKey, usually I.P. address (must be 4 bytes)
RETURN : result : A 16 bit value representing the encryption result
NOTES : None
---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
Ushort MB_Driver::encrypt(cchar *pswd, cchar *ipAddr)
{
Uchar key1;
Uchar key2;
Ushort dataLen;
Uchar ibyte;
Ushort byteResult = 0;
Uchar *encryptedData = NULL;
Uchar eKeys[4];
Ulong ipAddress;
/* Convert ip address to an unsigned long value so that we can manipulate
each of the 4 bytes, to be used as our private keys */
ipAddress = inet_addr(ipAddr);
// Now split the bytes up by copying the IP address into a byte array
memcpy(eKeys, &ipAddress, sizeof(Ulong));
// From the 4 bytes of the IP address create two exclusive keys
key1 = eKeys[0] ^ eKeys[3];
key2 = eKeys[1] ^ eKeys[2];
// Calculate the length of the string to be encrypted
dataLen = strlen(pswd);
// Create some memory to store the new encrypted password
encryptedData = (Uchar*) malloc(sizeof(Uchar)*dataLen);
/* Copy the unencrypted password into a byte array, so we can use the
character code as each byte value */
memcpy(encryptedData, pswd, dataLen);
/* Perform EXOR comparison between keys and raw data.
Perform the operation on each byte using alternate key values
starting at byte 1 with key 1 */
for(ibyte=0; ibyte < dataLen;)
{
// EXOR with the key1
encryptedData[ibyte++] ^= key1;
(Continued)
User Guide
Page 282
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.2.4 SECURITY (Cont.)
// Compare the next byte with key2
if(ibyte < dataLen)
{
encryptedData[ibyte++] ^= key2;
}
}
/* Now EXOR each byte to the next byte until no more are available
if all goes well the last byte in the array should never change */
for(ibyte=0; ibyte < (dataLen-1); ibyte++)
{
encryptedData[ibyte] = (encryptedData[ibyte] ^ encryptedData[ibyte+1]);
}
// Now add all the bytes together to get a 16 bit value result
for(ibyte=0; ibyte < dataLen; ibyte++)
{
byteResult += encryptedData[ibyte];
}
// Return the encrypted string as a 16 bit value
return(byteResult);
}
Notes:
1. If login is accepted, a standard response is sent to the master
2 If three invalid logins are sent, by the master, then an ‘illegal address’ exception code (2) is sent
to the master.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 283
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.2.4 SECURITY (Cont.)
TO SEND A LOGIN REQUEST
Request
Figure 8.2.4a shows data transmission sequence for sending a login request to a recorder with Modbus
address 1, using the Ethernet network connection. Figure 8.2.4b is the same message for use with serial
communications.
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
00
00
00
00
00
Byte 12
0C
Byte count
Transaction Transaction
identifier
identifier
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
13
01
10
Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS
bytes folModbus
function
lowing (hex) address code (hex)
Byte 8
Byte 9
Byte 10
Byte 11
CC
30
00
06
Byte 23
Start
address
high
Start
No. of regis- No. of regaddress low ters high isters low
Protocol
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Byte 13
Byte 14
Byte 15
Byte 16
Byte 17
Byte 18
Byte 20
Byte 21
Byte 22
45
6E
67
69
6E
65
65
72
00
HH
HH
ASCII
E (Hex)
ASCII
n (Hex)
ASCII
g (Hex)
ASCII
i (Hex)
ASCII
n (Hex)
ASCII
e (Hex)
ASCII
e (Hex)
ASCII
r (Hex)
Null
Password
High
Byte
Password
Low
Byte
Byte 19
User name (as configured in instrument. Must be followed by null character (Hex 00)
Byte 24
Null character inserted only, if
otherwise, the Byte count in
Byte 12 would be Odd.
00
Null
Figure 8.2.4a Login request via Ethernet (Modbus TCP)
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Byte 9
Byte 10
00
10
CC
30
00
06
0C
45
6E
67
69
6E
ASCII
E (Hex)
ASCII
n (Hex)
ASCII
g (Hex)
ASCII
i (Hex)
ASCII
n (Hex)
Byte 20
Slave
identifier
MODBUS
function
code (hex)
Start
address
high
Start
No. of regis- No. of reg- Byte count
address low ters high isters low (excluding
CRC)
Byte 12
Byte 13
Byte 14
Byte 15
Byte 16
Byte 18
Byte 19
65
65
72
00
HH
HH
00
HH
HH
ASCII
e (Hex)
ASCII
e (Hex)
ASCII
r (Hex)
Null
Password
High
Byte
Password
Low
Byte
Null
CRC low
Byte
CRC high
Byte
Byte 17
Byte 11
Null character inserted only if
without it, the Byte count in
Byte 6 would be Odd.
Figure 8.2.4b Login Request using a serial transmission line.
Notes:
1 The high and low password bytes are entered using the result of the encryption program
above. If the password is blank, both High and Low Bytes must be 00 (null).
2 For successful login, the ‘Connect from remote’ item must be enabled (ref. ‘Access levels in section 4.4.1).
User Guide
Page 284
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.2.4 SECURITY (Cont.)
TO SEND A LOGIN REQUEST (Cont.)
Response
Figures 8.2.4c and 8.2.4d show response messages for successful and non-successful login attempts.
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
00
00
00
00
00
Transaction Transaction
identifier
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
06
01
10
Always 00 Number of Recorder
Modbus
bytes folModbus
function
lowing (hex) address code (hex)
Byte 8
Byte 9
Byte 10
Byte 11
CC
30
00
05
Start
Address
high
Start
No. of regis-No. of regisAddress
ters high
ters low
low
Figure 8.2.4c Response to a successful login attempt
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
00
00
00
00
00
Transaction Transaction
identifier
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
04
01
90
02
Exception
Always 00 Number of Recorder
Modbus
code
bytes folModbus
function
lowing (hex) address code+ MSB
set (hex)
Figure 8.2.4d Response after an unsuccessful login attempt
Note: MSB = Most Significant Bit
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 285
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.2.5 Text messages
In order to increase efficiency, it is possible to set the system to transmit screen messages (e.g. alarm on/
off) only when a new message occurs. This is done by continuously polling the ‘Text Length’ parameter
(in group data - section 8.4.4) to see if its value is non-zero. (This parameter contains the character count
of the latest message to occur since the last poll.)
If ‘text length’ is non-zero, the host must access the parameter ‘Read Text’ (also in group data) to read the
message, and it must also reset the ‘Text Length’ parameter to zero. This causes the recorder to look for
any further messages in the queue, and if there are, it will load the latest message into the area accessed
by ‘Read Data’, and then set ‘Text Length’ to the length of the new message. If the host fails to set Text
Length to zero after reading a message, no new messages will be read.
If ‘Text Length’ is zero, no new messages have been generated since the last poll.
LONG MESSAGES
All messages are terminated with a null character.
Messages of up to 60 characters (including the time and date and the terminating ‘null’) can be read by
the master device in a single transaction.
If the message contains more than 60 characters, one or more continuation messages of up to 60 characters each are placed in ‘Read Text’, as soon as the previous message has been confirmed as ‘read’. The
master can continue to read all these messages, until it detects a ‘null’ character. Intelligent masters can
then re-assemble the characters into a single message. Non-intelligent masters can treat the continuation messages as separate messages sent at the same time as the first message.
Notes:
1. If any of the messages is of less than 60 characters, the unused part of message is filled with
‘null’ characters (example 1). Thus, by reading character 60, the master can determine either
that this is the last message (character 60 = ‘null’), or that there is at least one message to follow
(character 60 is not ‘null’).
2. Continuation messages cannot contain only null characters. For this reason, if the message itself (i.e. excluding final ‘null’ characters) is exactly 60 characters long (or a multiple of 60 characters long) then the final extension message contains a space, followed by 59 ‘nulls’ (Example 2).
3. Time and date appear only in the main message, not the continuation message(s).
Example 1
Message of less than 60 characters
Character no.
English message
ASCII (Hex)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
04/04/02
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
16:31:05
Batch
stopp ed
because
of
belt
failure
30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 3A 33 31 3A 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 6F 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 6F 66 20 62 65 6C 74 20 66 61 69 6C 75 72 65 00 00 00 00 00
Example 2
Message of exactly 60 characters
1
Message
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
04/04/02
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
16:31:05
Batch
stopp ed
because
of
belt
failure
BT01
30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 3A 33 31 3A 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 6F 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 6F 66 20 62 65 6C 74 20 66 61 69 6C 75 72 65 20 42 54 30 31
Space = hex 20; Null = 00
Extension
message
(Space + 59 null
characters)
User Guide
Page 286
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.2.5 TEXT MESSAGES (Cont.)
Example 3
Message of more than 60 but less than 120 characters
1
Message
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
04/04/02
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
16:31:05
Batch
stopp ed
because
of
belt
failure
on
l
30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 3A 33 31 3A 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 6F 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 6F 66 20 62 65 6C 74 20 66 61 69 6C 75 72 65 20 6F 6E 20 6C
Space = hex 20; Null = 00
1
Extension
message
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
2
3
ine
4
5
3
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
se ct i on
17
69 6E 65 20 33 20 73 65 63 74 69 6F 6E 20 31 37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
User Guide
Page 287
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.3 ADDRESS MAP
Figure 8.3 shows the range of addresses allocated to various recorder functions. Each of these functions
is described in detail in later sections.
FFFF
FFF5
FFF4
FFF0
FFEF
FD08
FD07
FCBF
FCBE
F8C3
F8C2
Addresses FFF5 to FFFF: Not used
Addresses FFF0 to FFF4: Permanent ID table
Addresses FD08 to FFEF: Spare
Addresses FCBF to FD07: EtherNet/IP
Addresses F8C3 to FCBE: Run-time data
IEEE Region (32-bit data access area)
/ IP
et
rN io n
e
h t
Et Op
32-bit
run-time
data
Addresses FCBF to FD07:
EtherNet/IP
Input channels 76 to 100
run-time data
Addresses FC47 to FCBE: Counters
Addresses FB7F to FC46: Totalisers
Addresses F9EF to FB7E: Maths
Addresses F8C3 to F9EE:
Input channels
Addresses D4E7 to F8C2: Point configuration data
IEEE Region (32-bit data access area)
D4E7
D4E6
D0E6
D0E5
CCE5
CCE4
CC26
CC25
Addresses D0E6 to D4E6: R/W Indirection table
Addresses CCE5 to D0E5: R/O Indirection table
Addresses CC26 to CCE4: Feature ID table
Addresses F48B to F8C2: Counters
32-bit
config.
data
Addresses ED83 to F48A: Totalisers
Addresses DF73 to ED82: Maths
Addresses A4D6 to CC25:
Group data
A4D6
A4D5
A1D9
A1D8
Addresses D4E7 to DF72:
Input channels
Addresses A1D9 to A4D5: Point run-time data
Addresses A47C to A4D5: Counters
Point
run-time
data
Addresses A3E6 to A47B: Totalisers
Addresses A2BA to A3E5: Maths
Addresses A1D9 to A2B9:
Input channels
Addresses 007B to A1D8: Point configuration data
Input channels = points 1 to 75
Math channels = points 76 to 175
Totalisers = points 176 to 225
Counters = points 226 to 255
Addresses 8EDD to A1D8: Counters
Point
config.
data
Addresses 6F39 to 8EDC: Totalisers
Addresses 2FF1 to 6F38: Maths
007B
007A
0001
0000
Addresses 0001 to 007A: Instrument data
Address 0000: Not used
Addresses 007B to 2FF0:
Input channels
Figure 8.3 Address map representation
Notes:
1 All addresses in hexadecimal
2 Areas represent relative sizes, but are not to scale
User Guide
Page 288
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.3 ADDRESS MAP (Cont.)
The contents of each group can be determined by reading the relevant register number, as shown in section 8.4.4, below. The table below is a decoder for the results.
For example, if a group has channels 1 to 6, maths channel 1 and totaliser three fitted, the results would be:
Register Number
6
7
8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
33
65
M6
34
66
M7
35
67
M8
36
68
37
69
6
38
70
7
39
71
8
40
72
32768
5
5
16384
256
4
4
8192
128
3
3
4096
64
2
2
2048
32
1
1
1024
16
0
512
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4
Bit number
2
Value if
bit set
1
Register 1 = 63 (32 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1) (channels 1 to 6)
Register 5 = 2048 (maths channel 1)
Register 12 = 2 (Totaliser 1)
All other register values = 0
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
9
10
41
42
73
58
74
11
43
59
75
12
44
60
M1
13
45
61
M2
14
46
62
M3
15
47
63
M4
16
48
64
M5
M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21
M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37
M38 M39 M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48 M49 M50 M51 M52 M53
M54 M55 M56 M57 M58 M59 M60 M61 M62 M63 M64 M65 M66 M67 M68 M69
M70 M71 M72 M73 M74 M75 M76 M77 M78 M79 M80 M81 M82 M83 M84 M85
M86 M87 M88 M89 M90 M91 M92 M93 M94 M95 M96 M97 M98 M99 M100 T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 T17
T18 T19 T20 T21 T22 T23 T24 T25 T26 T27 T28 T29 T30 T31 T32 T33
T34 T35 T36 T37 T38 T39 T40 T41 T42 T43 T44 T45 T46 T47 T48 T49
T50
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15
C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30
Table 8.3 ‘Channels in group’ interpretation
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 289
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4 ADDRESS ALLOCATION
This section consists of a number of tables showing how the address space within the memory map is allocated. For full details of configuration parameters, refer to section 4. For convenience, the word ‘channel’ is
used as an umbrella term for measuring points in general (i.e. input channels, maths channels, totalisers etc.).
The following ‘types’ are used in the tables.
1
2
3
4
Uint16
Uint32
Uint64
Scaled
16 bit unsigned integer.
32 bit unsigned integer.
64 bit unsigned integer.
Double precision floating point value scaled to represent single precision 16-bit integer
between – 32,767 and + 32,767.
5 Boolean Represented as a single 16 bit integer.
6 Enum
Enumeration value - represented by a single 16 bit character.
7
16, 32 and 64-bit 2’s complement signed integers.
Note: When reading a Process Variable (PV) values, as ‘scaled’ integers the position of the decimal
point is set by the ‘Max. Decimal Digits’ parameter in the relevant Channel’s Configuration. Only if
the resulting value can be represented within 16 bit resolution (±32767), will the value be transmitted accurately. For example, a value of 12.3456 needs more than 16-bit resolution, and the transmitted value would be the maximum value of 32767 (over range). Reducing the number of decimal
places to three, for example (12.345) allows the value to be encoded as a 16-bit value which can be
transmitted accurately.
8.4.1 Instrument data
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Instrument type
Instrument type number
Instrument descriptor
Instrument descriptor (up to 20 characters)
Uint16
Reserved
Not used
Instrument status
Bit 0:
Bit 1:
Bit 2:
Bit 3:
Bit 4:
Bit 5:
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8:
Bit 9:
Bits 10 to 15:
Config counter
Counts configuration changes. Powers up at zero, and is reset to zero at brown-out
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Read only
0001 (1)
1
String_20
Read only
0002 (2)
10
000C (12)
10
0016 (22)
1
0017 (23)
1
4
Uint16
Not used (value always 0)
Not used (value always 0)
Not used (value always 0)
0 = SD/Flash card inserted, 1 = Missing
0 = SD/Flash card not full, 1 = Full
Not used (value always 0)
Not used (value always 0)
Not used (value always 0)
Not used (value always 0)
0 = No channel failures, 1 = channel failure
Not used (value always 0)
Uint16
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Time
Current instrument time (UTC format)
Double
Read only
0018 (24)
Date
Current instrument date
Read only
001C (28)
4
Uint16
Write only 0020 (32)
Double
Global alarm acknowledge ‘1’ acknowledges all alarms. Other values: no effect
Register
Length
1
Spare
Not used
0021 (33)
74
006B (107)
1
Product version
Product version. Returns value HHHH (CNOMO*)
(HHHH = version number in hex. E.G. 0401 = version 4.01)
Serial number
Returns ‘Instrument Number’ (see Section 4.5) in decimal.
Uint 16
Read only
Uint32
Read only
Not used
006C (108)
2
006E (110)
11
Company ID
Company ID. Returns value hex 0500 (CNOMO*) Uint 16
Read only
0079 (121)
1
Product ID
Product ID. Returns model number in hex (CNOMO*)
Uint 16
Read only
007A (122)
1
* CNOMO = Comité de normalisation des moyens de production.
User Guide
Page 290
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 Channel configuration data
The following tables give hex addresses for channels 1 to 12, inclusive.
Note: A/B Switching:
B values are not accessible via modbus
for this software version. Span, Zone,
Colour etc. are therefore all setting A
Generally: channel N parameter address = channel 1 parameter address + 162 (N-1) (decimal).
CHANNEL 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch1 Span high
Ch1 Span low
Ch1 Zone high
Ch1 Zone low
Ch1 PV type
007B (123)
007C (124)
007D (125)
007E (126)
007F (127)
1
1
1
1
1
0080 (128)
1
0081 (129)
0082 (130)
0085 (133)
0087 (135)
008B (139)
008F (143)
0093 (147)
0097 (151)
00A1 (161)
00AB (171)
00AC (172)
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
00AD (173)
00E9 (233)
60
1
00EA (234)
1
00EB (235)
00EC (236)
00F6 (246)
00F7 (247)
00F8 (248)
00F9 (249)
0103 (259)
0104 (260)
0105 (261)
0106 (262)
0110 (272)
0111 (273)
0112 (274)
0113 (275)
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
Input type
Enum
Read only
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch1 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch1 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only
Ch1 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only
Spare
Ch1 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Ch1 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Ch1 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only
Spare
Ch1 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel
Uint16
Read only
Ch1 PV format
Enum
Read only
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
Ch1 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch1 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only
0 = Absolute low
1 = Absolute high
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch1 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch1 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch1 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Register
Length
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 291
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 2
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch2 Span high
Ch2 Span low
Ch2 Zone high
Ch2 Zone low
Ch2 PV type
011D (285)
011E (286)
011F (287)
0120 (288)
0121 (289)
1
1
1
1
1
0122 (290)
1
0123 (291)
0124 (292)
0127 (295)
0129 (297)
012D (301)
0131 (305)
0135 (309)
0139 (313)
0143 (323)
014D (333)
014E (334)
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
014F (335)
018B (395)
60
1
018C (396)
1
018D (397)
018E (398)
0198 (408)
0199 (409)
019A (410)
019B (411)
01A5 (421)
01A6 (422)
01A7 (423)
01A8 (424)
01B2 (434)
01B3 (435)
01B4 (436)
01B5 (437)
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
Input type
Enum
Read only
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch2 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch2 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only
Ch2 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only
Spare
Ch2 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Ch2 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Ch2 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only
Spare
Ch2 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2)
Uint16
Read only
Ch2 PV format
Enum
Read only
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
Ch2 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch2 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only
0 = Absolute low
1 = Absolute high
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch2 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch2 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above)
Enum
Read only
Ch2 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above)
Enum
Read only
Ch2 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch2 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Ch2 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Ch2 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch2 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Ch2 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Ch2 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Register
Length
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
User Guide
Page 292
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 3
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch3 Span high
Ch3 Span low
Ch3 Zone high
Ch3 Zone low
Ch3 PV type
01BF (447)
01C0 (448)
01C1 (449)
01C2 (450)
01C3 (451)
1
1
1
1
1
01C4 (452)
1
01C5 (453)
01C6 (454)
01C9 (457)
01CB (459)
01CF (463)
01D3 (467)
01D7 (471)
01DB (475)
01E5 (485)
01EF (495)
01F0 (496)
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
01F1 (497)
022D (557)
60
1
022E (558)
1
022F (559)
0230 (560)
023A (570)
023B (571)
023C (572)
023D (573)
0247 (583)
0248 (584)
0249 (585)
024A (586)
0254 (596)
0255 (597)
0256 (598)
0257 (599)
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only
Input type
Enum
Read only
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch3 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch3 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only
Ch3 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only
Spare
Ch3 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Ch3 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only
Spare
Ch3 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only
Spare
Ch3 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2)
Uint16
Read only
Ch3 PV format
Enum
Read only
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
Ch3 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch3 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only
0 = Absolute low
1 = Absolute high
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch3 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch3 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above)
Enum
Read only
Ch3 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above)
Enum
Read only
Ch3 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch3 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Ch3 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Ch3 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Ch3 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only
Ch3 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only
Ch3 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write
Spare
Register
Length
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 293
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 4
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch4 Span high
Ch4 Span low
Ch4 Zone high
Ch4 Zone low
Ch4 PV type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only 0261 (609)
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only 0262 (610)
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 0263 (611)
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 0264 (612)
Input type
Enum
Read only 0265 (613)
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch4 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only 0266 (614)
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch4 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only 0267 (615)
Ch4 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only 0268 (616)
Spare
026B (619)
Ch4 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 026D (621)
Spare
0271 (625)
Ch4 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 0275 (629)
Spare
0279 (633)
Ch4 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only 027D (637)
Spare
0287 (647)
Ch4 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2)
Uint16
Read only 0291 (657)
Ch4 PV format
Enum
Read only 0292 (658)
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
0293 (659)
Ch4 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only 02CF (719)
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch4 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only 02DO (720)
1 = Absolute high
0 = Absolute low
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch4 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 02D1 (721)
Spare
02D2 (722)
Ch4 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above)
Enum
Read only 02DC (732)
Ch4 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above)
Enum
Read only 02DD (733)
Ch4 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 02DE (734)
Spare
02DF (735)
Ch4 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 02E9 (745)
Ch4 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 02EA (746)
Ch4 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 02EB (747)
Spare
02EC (748)
Ch4 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 02F6 (758)
Ch4 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 02F7 (759)
Ch4 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 02F8 (760)
Spare
02F9 (761)
Register
Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
60
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
User Guide
Page 294
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 5
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch5 Span high
Ch5 Span low
Ch5 Zone high
Ch5 Zone low
Ch5 PV type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only 0303 (771)
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only 0304 (772)
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 0305 (773)
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 0306 (774)
Input type
Enum
Read only 0307 (775)
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch5 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only 0308 (776)
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch5 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only 0309 (777)
Ch5 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only 030A (778)
Spare
030D (781)
Ch5 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 030F (783)
Spare
0313 (787)
Ch5 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 0317 (791)
Spare
031B (795)
Ch5 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only 031F (799)
Spare
0329 (809)
Ch5 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2)
Uint16
Read only 0333 (819)
Ch5 PV format
Enum
Read only 0334 (820)
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
0335 (821)
Ch5 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only 0371 (881)
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch5 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only 0372 (882)
0 = Absolute low
1 = Absolute high
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch5 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0373 (883)
Spare
0374 (884)
Ch5 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above)
Enum
Read only 037E (894)
Ch5 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above)
Enum
Read only 037F (895)
Ch5 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0380 (896)
Spare
0381 (897)
Ch5 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 02E9 (907)
Ch5 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 02EA (908)
Ch5 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 02EB (909)
Spare
02EC (910)
Ch5 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 02F6 (920)
Ch5 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 02F7 (921)
Ch5 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 02F8 (922)
Spare
02F9 (923)
Register
Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
60
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 295
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 6
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch6 Span high
Ch6 Span low
Ch6 Zone high
Ch6 Zone low
Ch6 PV type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only 03A5 (933)
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only 03A6 (934)
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 03A7 (935)
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 03A8 (936)
Input type
Enum
Read only 03A9 (937)
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch6 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only 03AA (938)
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch6 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only 03AB (939)
Ch6 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only 03AC (940)
Spare
03AF (943)
Ch6 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 03B1 (945)
Spare
03B5 (949)
Ch6 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 03B9 (953)
Spare
03BD (957)
Ch6 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only 03C1 (961)
Spare
03CB (971)
Ch6 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2)
Uint16
Read only 03D5 (981)
Ch6 PV format
Enum
Read only 03D6 (982)
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
03D7 (983)
Ch6 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only 0413 (1043)
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch6 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only 0414 (1044)
1 = Absolute high
0 = Absolute low
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch6 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0415 (1045)
Spare
0416 (1046)
Ch6 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above)
Enum
Read only 0420 (1056)
Ch6 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above)
Enum
Read only 0421 (1057)
Ch6 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0422 (1058)
Spare
0423 (1059)
Ch6 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 042D (1069)
Ch6 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 042E (1070)
Ch6 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 042F (1071)
Spare
0430 (1072)
Ch6 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 043A (1082)
Ch6 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 043B (1083)
Ch6 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 043C (1084)
Spare
043D (1085)
Register
Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
60
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
User Guide
Page 296
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 7
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch7 Span high
Ch7 Span low
Ch7 Zone high
Ch7 Zone low
Ch7 PV type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only 0447 (1095)
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only 0448 (1096)
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 0449 (1097)
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 044A (1098)
Input type
Enum
Read only 044B (1099)
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch7 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only 044C (1100)
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch7 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only 044D (1101)
Ch7 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only 044E (1102)
Spare
0451 (1105)
Ch7 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 0453 (1107)
Spare
0457 (1111)
Ch7 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 045B (1115)
Spare
045F (1119)
Ch7 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only 0463 (1123)
Spare
046D (1133)
Ch7 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2)
Uint16
Read only 0477 (1143)
Ch7 PV format
Enum
Read only 0478 (1144)
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
0479 (1145)
Ch7 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only 04B5 (1205)
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch7 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only 04B6 (1206)
1 = Absolute high
0 = Absolute low
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch7 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 04B7 (1207)
Spare
04B8 (1208)
Ch7 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above)
Enum
Read only 04C2 (1218)
Ch7 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above)
Enum
Read only 04C3 (1219)
Ch7 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 04C4 (1220)
Spare
04C5 (1221)
Ch7 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 04CF (1231)
Ch7 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 04D0 (1232)
Ch7 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 04D1 (1233)
Spare
04D2 (1234)
Ch7 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 04DC (1244)
Ch7 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 04DD (1245)
Ch7 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 04DE (1246)
Spare
04DF (1247)
Register
Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
60
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 297
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 8
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch8 Span high
Ch8 Span low
Ch8 Zone high
Ch8 Zone low
Ch8 PV type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only 04E9 (1257)
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only 04EA (1258)
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 04EB (1259)
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 04EC (1260)
Input type
Enum
Read only 04ED (1261)
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch8 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only 04EE (1262)
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch8 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only 04EF (1263)
Ch8 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only 04F0 (1264)
Spare
04F3 (1267)
Ch8 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 04F5 (1269)
Spare
04F9 (1273)
Ch8 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 04FD (1277)
Spare
0501 (1281)
Ch8 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only 0505 (1285)
Spare
050F (1295)
Ch8 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2)
Uint16
Read only 0519 (1305)
Ch8 PV format
Enum
Read only 051A (1306)
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
051B (1307)
Ch8 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only 0557 (1367)
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch8 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only 0558 (1368)
1 = Absolute high
0 = Absolute low
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch8 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0559 (1369)
Spare
055A (1370)
Ch8 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above)
Enum
Read only 0564 (1380)
Ch8 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above)
Enum
Read only 0565 (1381)
Ch8 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0566 (1382)
Spare
0567 (1383)
Ch8 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 0571(1393)
Ch8 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 0572 (1394)
Ch8 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0573 (1395)
Spare
0574 (1396)
Ch8 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 057E (1406)
Ch8 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 057F (1407)
Ch8 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0580 (1408)
Spare
0581 (1409)
Register
Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
60
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
User Guide
Page 298
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 9
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch9 Span high
Ch9 Span low
Ch9 Zone high
Ch9 Zone low
Ch9 PV type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only 058B (1419)
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only 058C (1420)
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 058D (1421)
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 058E (1422)
Input type
Enum
Read only 058F (1423)
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch9 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only 0590 (1424)
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch9 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only 0591 (1425)
Ch9 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only 0592 (1426)
Spare
0595 (1429)
Ch9 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 0597 (1431)
Spare
059B (1435)
Ch9 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 059F (1439)
Spare
05A3 (1443)
Ch9 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only 05A7 (1447)
Spare
05B1 (1457)
Ch9 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2)
Uint16
Read only 05BB (1467)
Ch9 PV format
Enum
Read only 05BC (1468)
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
05BD (1469)
Ch9 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only 05F9 (1529)
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch9 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only 05FA (1530)
0 = Absolute low
1 = Absolute high
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch9 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 05FB (1531)
Spare
05FC (1532)
Ch9 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above)
Enum
Read only 0606 (1542)
Ch9 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above)
Enum
Read only 0607 (1543)
Ch9 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0608 (1544)
Spare
0609 (1545)
Ch9 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 0613(1555)
Ch9 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 0614 (1556)
Ch9 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0615 (1557)
Spare
0616 (1558)
Ch9 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 0620 (1568)
Ch9 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 0621 (1569)
Ch9 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0622 (1570)
Spare
0623 (1571)
Register
Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
60
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 299
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 10
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch10 Span high
Ch10 Span low
Ch10 Zone high
Ch10 Zone low
Ch10 PV type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only 062D (1581)
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only 062E (1582)
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 062F (1583)
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 0630 (1584)
Input type
Enum
Read only 0631 (1585)
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch10 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only 0632 (1586)
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch10 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only 0633 (1587)
Ch10 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only 0634 (1588)
Spare
0637 (1591)
Ch10 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 0639 (1593)
Spare
063D (1597)
Ch10 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 0641 (1601)
Spare
0645 (1605)
Ch10 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only 0649 (1609)
Spare
0653 (1619)
Ch10 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2)
Uint16
Read only 065D (1629)
Ch10 PV format
Enum
Read only 065E (1630)
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
065F (1631)
Ch10 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only 069B (1691)
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch10 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only 069C (1692)
1 = Absolute high
0 = Absolute low
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch10 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 069D (1693)
Spare
069E (1694)
Ch10 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above)
Enum
Read only 06A8 (1704)
Ch10 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above)
Enum
Read only 06A9 (1705)
Ch10 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 06AA (1706)
Spare
06AB (1707)
Ch10 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 06B5(1717)
Ch10 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 06B6(1718)
Ch10 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 06B7 (1719)
Spare
06B8 (1720)
Ch10 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 06C2 (1730)
Ch10 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 06C3 (1731)
Ch10 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 06C4 (1732)
Spare
06C5 (1733)
Register
Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
60
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
User Guide
Page 300
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 11
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch11 Span high
Ch11 Span low
Ch11 Zone high
Ch11 Zone low
Ch11 PV type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only 06CF (1743)
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only 06D0 (1744)
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 06D1 (1745)
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 06D2 (1746)
Input type
Enum
Read only 06D3 (1747)
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch11 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only 06D4 (1748)
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch11 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only 06D5 (1749)
Ch11 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only 06D6 (1750)
Spare
06D9 (1753)
Ch11 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 06DB (1755)
Spare
06DF (1759)
Ch11 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 06E3 (1763)
Spare
06E7 (1767)
Ch11 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only 06EB (1771)
Spare
06F5 (1781)
Ch11 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2)
Uint16
Read only 06FF (1791)
Ch11 PV format
Enum
Read only 0700 (1792)
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
0701 (1793)
Ch11 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only 073D (1853)
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch11 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only 073E (1854)
1 = Absolute high
0 = Absolute low
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch11 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 073F (1855)
Spare
0740 (1856)
Ch11 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above)
Enum
Read only 074A (1866)
Ch11 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above)
Enum
Read only 074B (1867)
Ch11 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 074C (1868)
Spare
074D (1869)
Ch11 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 0757(1879)
Ch11 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 0758 (1880)
Ch11 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0759 (1881)
Spare
075A (1882)
Ch11 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 0764 (1892)
Ch11 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 0765 (1893)
Ch11 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0766 (1894)
Spare
0767 (1895)
Register
Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
60
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 301
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 12
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch12 Span high
Ch12 Span low
Ch12 Zone high
Ch12 Zone low
Ch12 PV type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Upper span value (display full scale)
Scaled
Read only 0771 (1905)
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Scaled
Read only 0772 (1906)
Zone high value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 0773 (1907)
Zone low value (two decimal places)
Scaled
Read only 0774 (1908)
Input type
Enum
Read only 0775 (1909)
1 = Analogue input
3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths
4 = Counter
Ch12 Decimal places
Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16
Read only 0776 (1910)
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch12 Colour
Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum
Read only 0777 (1911)
Ch12 Units
Units string (up to five characters)
String_5
Read only 0778 (1912)
Spare
077B (1915)
Ch12 Open string
Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 077D (1917)
Spare
0781 (1921)
Ch12 Close string
Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters)
String_8
Read only 0785 (1925)
Spare
0789 (1929)
Ch12 Descriptor
Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters)
String_20 Read only 078D (1933)
Spare
0797 (1943)
Ch12 No of alarms
Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2)
Uint16
Read only 07A1 (1953)
Ch12 PV format
Enum
Read only 07A2 (1954)
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare
07A3 (1955)
Ch12 Alarm 1 enable
Alarm 1 enable
Enum
Read only 07DF (2015)
0 = Off
2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched
3 = Trigger
Ch12 Alarm 1 type
Alarm 1 type
Enum
Read only 07E0 (2016)
1 = Absolute high
0 = Absolute low
2 = Deviation in
3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise
5 = Rate of change fall
Ch12 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 07E1 (2017)
Spare
07E2 (2018)
Ch12 Alarm 2 enable
Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above)
Enum
Read only 07EC (2028)
Ch12 Alarm 2 type
Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above)
Enum
Read only 07ED (2029)
Ch12 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 07EE (2030)
Spare
07EF (2031)
Ch12 Alarm 3 enable
Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 07F9 (2041)
Ch12 Alarm 3 type
Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 07FA (2042)
Ch12 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 07FB (2043)
Spare
07FC (2044)
Ch12 Alarm 4 enable
Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above)
Enum
Read only 0806 (2054)
Ch12 Alarm 4 type
Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above)
Enum
Read only 0807 (2055)
Ch12 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2)
Scaled
Read/Write 0808 (2056)
Spare
0809 (2057)
Register
Length
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
4
4
4
4
10
10
1
1
60
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
User Guide
Page 302
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.3 Channel Run-Time data
These tables show addresses for channel input values for channels 1 to 12 inclusive.
Generally: channel N address = channel 1 address + 3(N-1) (decimal). For channels 75 to 100 (Ethernet/IP
option only), see table 4.3.21.
CHANNEL 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch1 value
Ch1 status
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Ch1 Alarms
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1D9 (41433)
Read only A1DA (41434)
1
1
-
A1DB (41435)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 2
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch2 value
Ch2 status
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Ch2 Alarms
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1DC (41436)
Read only A1DD (41437)
1
1
-
A1DE (41438)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 303
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 3
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch3 value
Ch3 status
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Ch3 Alarms
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1DF (41439)
Read only A1E0 (41440)
1
1
-
A1E1 (41441)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 4
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch4 value
Ch4 status
Ch4 Alarms
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1E2 (41442)
Read only A1E3 (41443)
1
1
-
A1E4 (41444)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
User Guide
Page 304
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 5
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch5 value
Ch5 status
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Ch5 Alarms
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1E5 (41445)
Read only A1E6 (41446)
1
1
-
A1E7 (41447)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 6
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch6 value
Ch6 status
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Ch6 Alarms
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1E8 (41448)
Read only A1E9 (41449)
1
1
-
A1EA (41450)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 305
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 7
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch7 value
Ch7 status
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Ch7 Alarms
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1EB (41451)
Read only A1EC (41452)
1
1
-
A1ED (41453)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 8
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch8 value
Ch8 status
Ch8 Alarms
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1EE (41454)
Read only A1EF (41455)
1
1
-
A1F0 (41456)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
User Guide
Page 306
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 9
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch9 value
Ch9 status
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Ch9 Alarms
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1F1 (41457)
Read only A1F2 (41458)
1
1
-
A1F3 (41459)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 10
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch10 value
Ch10 status
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Ch10 Alarms
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1F4 (41460)
Read only A1F5 (41461)
1
1
-
A1F6 (41462)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 307
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 11
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch11 value
Ch11 status
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Ch11 Alarms
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1F7 (41463)
Read only A1F8 (41464)
1
1
-
A1F9 (41465)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 12
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Ch12 value
Ch12 status
Ch12 Alarms
Current process value (PV)
Scaled
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 A1FA (41466)
Read only A1FB (41467)
1
1
-
A1FC (41468)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
User Guide
Page 308
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.4 Group data
Generally: Parameter address for group N = Parameter address for group 1 + 629(N-1) (decimal)
GROUP 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Grp1 Trend type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Trend enhancements
Enum
Read only A4D6 (42198)
0 = Interpolation enabled
1 = Adaptive recording enabled
Grp1 Trend rate
Trend update rate in milliseconds
Uint32
Read only A4D7 (42199)
Grp1 Archive rate
Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds
Uint 32
Read only A4D9 (42201)
Grp1 Descriptor
Group descriptor (20 characters max.)
String_20 Read only A4DB (42203)
Spare
A4E5 (42213)
Grp1 Channels in group 16 Registers holding the group contents, as follows:
Register 1
Uint16
Read only A4EF (42223)
Bit 0: 0 = Point 1 not in group; 1 = Point 1 is in group
Bit 1: 0 = Point 2 not in group; 1 = Point 2 is in group
Bit 2: 0 = Point 3 not in group; 1 = Point 3 is in group
Etc.
Bit 15:0 = Point 16 not in group; 1 = Point 16 is in group
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32
Uint16
Read only A4F0 (42224)
Register 3 - as register 1, but for points 33 to 48
Uint16
Read only A4F1 (42225)
Register 4 - as register 1, but for points 49 to 64
Uint16
Read only A4F2 (42226)
Register 5 - as register 1, but for points 65 to 80
Uint16
Read only A4F3 (42227)
Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96
Uint16
Read only A4F4 (42228)
See table 8.3
Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112
Uint16
Read only A4F5 (42229)
for point types
Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128
Uint16
Read only A4F6 (42230)
Register 9 - as register 1, but for points 129 to 144
Uint16
Read only A4F7 (42231)
Register 10 - as register 1, but for points 145 to 160
Uint16
Read only A4F8 (42232)
Register 11 - as register 1, but for points 161 to 176
Uint16
Read only A4F9 (42233)
Register 12 - as register 1, but for points 177 to 192
Uint16
Read only A4FA (42234)
Register 13 - as register 1, but for points 193 to 208
Uint16
Read only A4FB (42235)
Register 14 - as register 1, but for points 209 to 224
Uint16
Read only A4FC (42236)
Register 15 - as register 1, but for points 225 to 240
Uint16
Read only A4FD (42237)
Register 16 - as register 1, but for points 241 to 256
Uint16
Read only A4FE (42238)
Grp1 Text length
Identifies the length of a text message to be read
Uint16
Read/Write A4FF (42239)
Grp1 Text time stamp
Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double
Read only A500 (42240)
Grp1 Read text
Read text string from instrument display
String_60 Read only A504 (42244)
Reserved
A522 (42274)
Grp1 Write text
Write a text string to instrument display
String_60 Write only A540 (42304)
Reserved
A55E (42334)
Grp1 Batch start
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch
Boolean
Write only A57C (42364)
Grp1 Batch stop
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch
Boolean
Write only A57D (42365)
Grp1 Batch running
Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running
Boolean
Read only A57E (42366)
Grp1 Text field 1
Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A57F (42367)
Reserved
A59D (42397)
Grp1 Text field 2
Batch field 2 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A5BB (42427)
Reserved
A5D9 (42457)
Grp1 Text field 3
Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A5F7 (42487)
Reserved
A615 (42517)
Grp1 Text field 4
Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A633 (42547)
Reserved
A651 (42577)
Grp1 Text field 5
Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A66F (42607)
Reserved
A68D (42637)
Grp1 Text field 6
Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A6AB (42667)
Reserved
A6C9 (42697)
Spare
A6E7 (42727)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Register
Length
1
2
2
10
10
(16)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
30
30
30
30
1
1
1
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
100
User Guide
Page 309
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.4 GROUP DATA (Cont.)
GROUP 2
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Grp2 Trend type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Trend enhancements
Enum
Read only A74B (42827)
0 = Interpolation enabled
1 = Adaptive recording enabled
Grp2 Trend rate
Trend update rate in milliseconds
Uint32
Read only A74C (42828)
Grp2 Archive rate
Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds
Uint 32
Read only A74E (42830)
Grp2 Descriptor
Group descriptor (20 characters max.)
String_20 Read only A750 (42832)
Spare
A75A (42842)
Grp2 Channels in group 16 Registers holding the group contents, as follows:
Register 1
Uint16
Read only A764 (42852)
Bit 0: 0 = Point 1 not in group; 1 = Point 1 is in group
Bit 1: 0 = Point 2 not in group; 1 = Point 2 is in group
Bit 2: 0 = Point 3 not in group; 1 = Point 3 is in group
Etc.
Bit 15:0 = Point 16 not in group; 1 = Point 16 is in group
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32
Uint16
Read only A765 (42853)
Register 3 - as register 1, but for points 33 to 48
Uint16
Read only A766 (42854)
Register 4 - as register 1, but for points 49 to 64
Uint16
Read only A767 (42855)
Register 5 - as register 1, but for points 65 to 80
Uint16
Read only A768 (42856)
See table 8.3
Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96
Uint16
Read only A769 (42857)
for point types
Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112
Uint16
Read only A76A(42858)
Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128
Uint16
Read only A76B (42859)
Register 9 - as register 1, but for points 129 to 144
Uint16
Read only A76C (42860)
Register 10 - as register 1, but for points 145 to 160
Uint16
Read only A76D (42861)
Register 11 - as register 1, but for points 161 to 176
Uint16
Read only A76E (42862)
Register 12 - as register 1, but for points 177 to 192
Uint16
Read only A76F (42863)
Register 13 - as register 1, but for points 193 to 208
Uint16
Read only A770 (42864)
Register 14 - as register 1, but for points 209 to 224
Uint16
Read only A771 (42865)
Register 15 - as register 1, but for points 225 to 240
Uint16
Read only A772 (42866)
Register 16 - as register 1, but for points 241 to 256
Uint16
Read only A773 (42867)
Grp2 Text length
Identifies the length of a text message to be read
Uint16
Read/Write A774 (42868)
Grp2 Text time stamp
Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double
Read only A775 (42869)
Grp2 Read text
Read text string from instrument display
String_60 Read only A779 (42873)
Reserved
A797 (42903)
Grp2 Write text
Write a text string to instrument display
String_60 Write only A7B5 (42933)
Reserved
A7D3 (42963)
Grp2 Batch start
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch
Boolean
Write only A7F1 (42993)
Grp2 Batch stop
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch
Boolean
Write only A7F2 (42994)
Grp2 Batch running
Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running
Boolean
Read only A7F3 (42995)
Grp2 Text field 1
Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A7F4 (42996)
Reserved
A812 (43026)
Grp2 Text field 2
Batch field 2 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A830 (43056)
Reserved
A84E (43086)
Grp2 Text field 3
Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A86C (43116)
Reserved
A88A (43146)
Grp2 Text field 4
Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A8A8 (43176)
Reserved
A8C6 (43206)
Grp2 Text field 5
Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A8E4 (43236)
Reserved
A902 (43266)
Grp2 Text field 6
Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write A920 (43296)
Reserved
A93E (43326)
Spare
A95C (43356)
User Guide
Page 310
Register
Length
1
2
2
10
10
(16)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
30
30
30
30
1
1
1
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
100
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.4 GROUP DATA (Cont.)
GROUP 3
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Grp3 Trend type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Trend enhancements
Enum
Read only A9C0 (43456)
0 = Interpolation enabled
1 = Adaptive recording enabled
Grp3 Trend rate
Trend update rate in milliseconds
Uint32
Read only A9C1 (43457)
Grp3 Archive rate
Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds
Uint 32
Read only A9C3 (43459)
Grp3 Descriptor
Group descriptor (20 characters max.)
String_20 Read only A9C5 (43461)
Spare
A9CF (43471)
Grp3 Channels in group 16 Registers holding the group contents, as follows:
Register 1
Uint16
Read only A9D9 (43481)
Bit 0: 0 = Point 1 not in group; 1 = Point 1 is in group
Bit 1: 0 = Point 2 not in group; 1 = Point 2 is in group
Bit 2: 0 = Point 3 not in group; 1 = Point 3 is in group
Etc.
Bit 15:0 = Point 16 not in group; 1 = Point 16 is in group
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32
Uint16
Read only A9DA (42482)
Register 3 - as register 1, but for points 33 to 48
Uint16
Read only A9DB (42483)
Register 4 - as register 1, but for points 49 to 64
Uint16
Read only A9DC (42484)
Register 5 - as register 1, but for points 65 to 80
Uint16
Read only A9DD (42485)
See table 8.3
Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96
Uint16
Read only A9DE (42486)
for point types
Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112
Uint16
Read only A9DF (42487)
Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128
Uint16
Read only A9E0 (42488)
Register 9 - as register 1, but for points 129 to 144
Uint16
Read only A9E1 (42489)
Register 10 - as register 1, but for points 145 to 160
Uint16
Read only A9E2 (42490)
Register 11 - as register 1, but for points 161 to 176
Uint16
Read only A9E3 (42491)
Register 12 - as register 1, but for points 177 to 192
Uint16
Read only A9E4 (42492)
Register 13 - as register 1, but for points 193 to 208
Uint16
Read only A9E5 (42493)
Register 14 - as register 1, but for points 209 to 224
Uint16
Read only A9E6 (42494)
Register 15 - as register 1, but for points 225 to 240
Uint16
Read only A9E7 (42495)
Register 16 - as register 1, but for points 241 to 256
Uint16
Read only A9E8 (43496)
Grp3 Text length
Identifies the length of a text message to be read
Uint16
Read/Write A9E9 (43497)
Grp3 Text time stamp
Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double
Read only A9EA (43498)
Grp3 Read text
Read text string from instrument display
String_60 Read only A9EE (43502)
Reserved
AA0C (43532
Grp3 Write text
Write a text string to instrument display
String_120 Write only AA2A (43562)
Reserved
AA48 (43592)
Grp3 Batch start
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch
Boolean
Write only AA66 (43622)
Grp3 Batch stop
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch
Boolean
Write only AA67 (43623)
Grp3 Batch running
Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running
Boolean
Read only AA68 (43624)
Grp3 Text field 1
Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AA69 (43625)
Reserved
AA87 (43655)
Grp3 Text field 2
Batch field 2 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AAA5 (43685)
Reserved
AAC3 (43715)
Grp3 Text field 3
Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AAE1 (43745)
Reserved
AAFF (43775)
Grp3 Text field 4
Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AB1D (43805)
Reserved
AB3B (43835)
Grp3 Text field 5
Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AB59 (43865)
Reserved
AB77 (43895)
Grp3 Text field 6
Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AB95 (43925)
Reserved
ABB3 (43955)
Spare
ABD1 (43985)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Register
Length
1
2
2
10
10
(16)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
30
30
60
30
1
1
1
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
100
User Guide
Page 311
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.4 GROUP DATA (Cont.)
GROUP 4
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Grp4 Trend type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Trend enhancements
Enum
Read only AC35 (44085)
0 = Interpolation enabled
1 = Adaptive recording enabled
Grp4 Trend rate
Trend update rate in milliseconds
Uint32
Read only AC36 (44086)
Grp4 Archive rate
Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds
Uint 32
Read only AC38 (44088)
Grp4 Descriptor
Group descriptor (20 characters max.)
String_20 Read only AC3A (44090)
Spare
AC44 (44100)
Grp4 Channels in group 16 Registers holding the group contents, as follows:
Register 1
Uint16
Read only AC4E (44110)
Bit 0: 0 = Point 1 not in group; 1 = Point 1 is in group
Bit 1: 0 = Point 2 not in group; 1 = Point 2 is in group
Bit 2: 0 = Point 3 not in group; 1 = Point 3 is in group
Etc.
Bit 15:0 = Point 16 not in group; 1 = Point 16 is in group
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32
Uint16
Read only AC4F (44111)
Register 3 - as register 1, but for points 33 to 48
Uint16
Read only AC50 (44112)
Register 4 - as register 1, but for points 49 to 64
Uint16
Read only AC51 (44113)
Register 5 - as register 1, but for points 65 to 80
Uint16
Read only AC52 (44114)
See table 8.3
Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96
Uint16
Read only AC53 (44115)
for point types
Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112
Uint16
Read only AC54 (44116)
Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128
Uint16
Read only AC55 (44117)
Register 9 - as register 1, but for points 129 to 144
Uint16
Read only AC56 (44118)
Register 10 - as register 1, but for points 145 to 160
Uint16
Read only AC57 (44119)
Register 11 - as register 1, but for points 161 to 176
Uint16
Read only AC58 (44120)
Register 12 - as register 1, but for points 177 to 192
Uint16
Read only AC59 (44121)
Register 13 - as register 1, but for points 193 to 208
Uint16
Read only AC5A (44122)
Register 14 - as register 1, but for points 209 to 224
Uint16
Read only AC5B (44123)
Register 15 - as register 1, but for points 225 to 240
Uint16
Read only AC5C (44124)
Register 16 - as register 1, but for points 241 to 256
Uint16
Read only AC5D (44125)
Grp4 Text length
Identifies the length of a text message to be read
Uint16
Read/Write AC5E (44126)
Grp4 Text time stamp
Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double
Read only AC5F (44127)
Grp4 Read text
Read text string from instrument display
String_60 Read only AC63 (44131)
Reserved
AC81 (44161)
Grp4 Write text
Write a text string to instrument display
String_60 Write only AC9F (44191)
Reserved
ACBD (44221)
Grp4 Batch start
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch
Boolean
Write only ACDB (44251)
Grp4 Batch stop
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch
Boolean
Write only ACDC (44252)
Grp4 Batch running
Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running
Boolean
Read only ACDD (44253)
Grp4 Text field 1
Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write ACDE (44254)
Reserved
ACFC (44284)
Grp4 Text field 2
Batch field 2 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AD1A (44314)
Reserved
AD38 (44344)
Grp4 Text field 3
Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AD56 (44374)
Reserved
AD74 (44404)
Grp4 Text field 4
Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AD92 (44434)
Reserved
ADB0 (44464)
Grp4 Text field 5
Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write ADCE (44494)
Reserved
ADEC (44524)
Grp4 Text field 6
Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AE0A (44554)
Reserved
AE28 (44584)
Spare
AE46 (44614)
User Guide
Page 312
Register
Length
1
2
2
10
10
(16)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
30
30
30
30
1
1
1
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
100
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.4 GROUP DATA (Cont.)
GROUP 5
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Grp5 Trend type
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Trend enhancements
Enum
Read only AEAA (44714)
0 = Interpolation enabled
1 = Adaptive recording enabled
Grp5 Trend rate
Trend update rate in milliseconds
Uint32
Read only AEAB (44715)
Grp5 Archive rate
Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds
Uint 32
Read only AEAD (44717)
Grp5 Descriptor
Group descriptor (20 characters max.)
String_20 Read only AEAF (44719)
Spare
AEB9 (44729)
Grp5 Channels in group 16 Registers holding the group contents, as follows:
Register 1
Uint16
Read only AEC3 (44739)
Bit 0: 0 = Point 1 not in group; 1 = Point 1 is in group
Bit 1: 0 = Point 2 not in group; 1 = Point 2 is in group
Bit 2: 0 = Point 3 not in group; 1 = Point 3 is in group
Etc.
Bit 15:0 = Point 16 not in group; 1 = Point 16 is in group
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32
Uint16
Read only AEC4 (44740)
Register 3 - as register 1, but for points 33 to 48
Uint16
Read only AEC5 (44741)
Register 4 - as register 1, but for points 49 to 64
Uint16
Read only AEC6 (44742)
Register 5 - as register 1, but for points 65 to 80
Uint16
Read only AEC7 (44743)
See table 8.3
Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96
Uint16
Read only AEC8 (44744)
for point types
Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112
Uint16
Read only AEC9 (44745)
Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128
Uint16
Read only AECA (44746)
Register 9 - as register 1, but for points 129 to 144
Uint16
Read only AECB (44747)
Register 10 - as register 1, but for points 145 to 160
Uint16
Read only AECC (44748)
Register 11 - as register 1, but for points 161 to 176
Uint16
Read only AECD (44749)
Register 12 - as register 1, but for points 177 to 192
Uint16
Read only AECE (44750)
Register 13 - as register 1, but for points 193 to 208
Uint16
Read only AECF (44751)
Register 14 - as register 1, but for points 209 to 224
Uint16
Read only AED0 (44752)
Register 15 - as register 1, but for points 225 to 240
Uint16
Read only AED1 (42253)
Register 16 - as register 1, but for points 241 to 256
Uint16
Read only AED2 (44754)
Grp5 Text length
Identifies the length of a text message to be read
Uint16
Read/Write AED3 (44755)
Grp5 Text time stamp
Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double
Read only AED4 (44756)
Grp5 Read text
Read text string from instrument display
String_60 Read only AED8 (44760)
Reserved
AEF6 (44790)
Grp5 Write text
Write a text string to instrument display
String_60 Write only AF14 (44820)
Reserved
AF32 (44850)
Grp5 Batch start
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch
Boolean
Write only AF50 (44880)
Grp5 Batch stop
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch
Boolean
Write only AF51 (44881)
Grp5 Batch running
Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running
Boolean
Read only AF52 (44882)
Grp5 Text field 1
Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AF53 (44883)
Reserved
AF71 (44913)
Grp5 Text field 2
Batch field 2 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AF8F (44943)
Reserved
AFAD (44973)
Grp5 Text field 3
Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write AFCB (45003)
Reserved
AFE9 (45033)
Grp5 Text field 4
Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write B007 (45063)
Reserved
B025 (45093)
Grp5 Text field 5
Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write B043 (45123)
Reserved
B061 (45153)
Grp5 Text field 6
Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write B08F (45183)
Reserved
B09D (45213)
Spare
B0BB (45243)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Register
Length
1
2
2
10
10
(16)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
30
30
30
30
1
1
1
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
100
User Guide
Page 313
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.4 GROUP DATA (Cont.)
GROUP 6
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Trend enhancements
Enum
Read only B11F (45343)1
0 = Interpolation enabled
1 = Adaptive recording enabled
Grp6 Trend rate
Trend update rate in milliseconds
Uint32
Read only B120 (45344)
Grp6 Archive rate
Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds
Uint 32
Read only B122 (45346)
Grp6 Descriptor
Group descriptor (20 characters max.)
String_20 Read only B124 (45348)
Spare
B12E (45358)
Grp6 Channels in group 16 Registers holding the group contents, as follows:
Register 1
Uint16
Read only B138 (45368)
Bit 0: 0 = Point 1 not in group; 1 = Point 1 is in group
Bit 1: 0 = Point 2 not in group; 1 = Point 2 is in group
Bit 2: 0 = Point 3 not in group; 1 = Point 3 is in group
Etc.
Bit 15:0 = Point 16 not in group; 1 = Point 16 is in group
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32
Uint16
Read only B139 (45369)
Register 3 - as register 1, but for points 33 to 48
Uint16
Read only B13A (45370)
Register 4 - as register 1, but for points 49 to 64
Uint16
Read only B13B (45371)
Register 5 - as register 1, but for points 65 to 80
Uint16
Read only B13C (45372)
See table 8.3
Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96
Uint16
Read only B13D (45373)
for point types
Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112
Uint16
Read only B13E (45374)
Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128
Uint16
Read only B13F (45375)
Register 9 - as register 1, but for points 129 to 144
Uint16
Read only B140 (45376)
Register 10 - as register 1, but for points 145 to 160
Uint16
Read only B141 (45377)
Register 11 - as register 1, but for points 161 to 176
Uint16
Read only B142 (45378)
Register 12 - as register 1, but for points 177 to 192
Uint16
Read only B143 (45379)
Register 13 - as register 1, but for points 193 to 208
Uint16
Read only B144 (45380)
Register 14 - as register 1, but for points 209 to 224
Uint16
Read only B145 (45381)
Register 15 - as register 1, but for points 225 to 240
Uint16
Read only B146 (45382)
Register 16 - as register 1, but for points 241 to 256
Uint16
Read only B147 (45383)
Grp6 Text length
Identifies the length of a text message to be read
Uint16
Read/Write B148 (45384)
Grp6 Text time stamp
Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double
Read only B149 (45385)
Grp6 Read text
Read text string from instrument display
String_60 Read only B14D (45389)
Reserved
B16B (45419)
Grp6 Write text
Write a text string to instrument display
String_60 Write only B189 (45449)
Reserved
B1A7 (45479)
Grp6 Batch start
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch
Boolean
Write only B1C5 (45509)
Grp6 Batch stop
Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch
Boolean
Write only B1C6 (45510)
Grp6 Batch running
Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running
Boolean
Read only B1C7 (45511)
Grp6 Text field 1
Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write B1C8 (45512)
Reserved
B1E6 (45542)
Grp6 Text field 2
Batch field 2 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write B204 (45572)
Reserved
B222 (45602)
Grp6 Text field 3
Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write B240 (45632)
Reserved
B25E (45662)
Grp6 Text field 4
Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write B27C (45692)
Reserved
B29A (45722)
Grp6 Text field 5
Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write B2B8 (45752)
Reserved
B2D6 (45782)
Grp6 Text field 6
Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters)
String_60 Read/Write B2F4 (45812)
Reserved
B312 (45842)
Spare
B330 (45872)
Register
Length
Grp6 Trend type
User Guide
Page 314
2
2
10
10
(16)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
30
30
30
30
1
1
1
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
100
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.5 Feature identification table (FIT)
This table allows the host to identify which features are available at the recorder.
Parameter
Description
Value
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Number of features
Feature 1
CC26 (52262)
CC27 (52263)
CC28 (52264)
CC29 (52265)
CC2A (52266)
CC2B (52267)
CC2C (52268)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CC2D (52269)
CC2E (52270)
CC2F (52271)
CC30 (52272)
CC58 (52312)
CC80 (52352)
CC81 (52353)
1
1
1
40
40
1
100
Feature 2
Feature 3
Feature N
Number of supported features 3
Read only
Indirection Table 1
Read only
Read only indirection table start address (R/O vector)
CD89
Read only
Read/Write indirection table start address (R/W vector)
D18A
Read only
Spare
Function codes supported (FC I.D.)
4
Read only
Bit map of supported MODBUS function codes
32940
Read only
Bit 0: 0 = code 1 not supported; 1 = code 1 supported
Bit 1: 0 = code 2 not supported; 1 = code 2 supported
Bit 2: 0 = code 3 not supported; 1 = code 3 supported
Bit 3: 0 = code 4 not supported; 1 = code 4 supported
Etc.
Bit 15:0 = code 16 not supported; 1 = code 16 supported
Reserved
Reserved
Security ID (MODBUS login security feature)
9
Read only
User name
Write only
Password
Write only
Reserved
100 Spare addresses for further features
Register
Length
8.4.6 Indirection tables
The standard MODBUS protocol allows block register reads and writes. This is efficient only if data is
grouped contiguously, or nearly so. Indirection tables are a means by which widely spaced register addresses can (in effect) be grouped, offering the host the ability to access a block of user defined data in
one single read/write request.
Two configurable tables are available, one for read only parameters, the other for read/write. Each table
is in two halves - the lower address half contains the addresses of the registers to be accessed; the higher
address half contains the values which have been read or which are to be written.
Notes:
1. For Ethernet connections, indirection table entries are lost at power off, as the result of a
brown-out or if the connection with the host is broken.
2. Parameters in IEEE format can be accessed by configuring two successive entries in the table.
Parameters which occupy more than one register can be loaded into the indirection area by
using function code 16 (pre-set multiple registers) and the parameter’s base address (i.e. the
parameter’s 1st register).
3. Separate indirection table entries are held for each host - the recorder automatically switches
each host to its own indirection table without user intervention.
4. Indirection table addresses (CCE5 to D4E7) cannot be entered in the indirection tables. Any
attempt to do so will be ignored.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 315
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.6 INDIRECTION TABLES (CONT.)
Table 8.4.6a shows the overall arrangement of the indirection table area. Figures 8.4.6b and 8.4.6c show
simple examples of Read only and Read/Write addressing for tables with 6 entries.
Read/Write
data area
D2E7
D2E6
Read/Write
indirection
area
No. of R/W entries
Read only
data area
CEE6
CEE5
Read only
indirection
area
Read only area
D0E7
D0E6
D0E5
Read / Write area
D4E6
CCE6
CCE5 No. of Read Only entries
Table 8.4.6a Indirection table areas
User Guide
Page 316
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.6 INDIRECTION TABLES (CONT.)
CEEB
CEEA
Read values from here
(address + hex 200)
CEE9
CEE8
PV chan 1
Archive rate
CEE6
Trend rate
Instrument type
CCEB
A1DB
CEE7
CCEA
Enter required data
addresses here
Alarms chan 1
PV chan 1
CCE9
CCE8
CCE7
CCE6
CCE5
F8C4
F8C3
A4D9
A4D7
0001
0006
Channel 1 Alarm status
Channel 1 PV (bits 16 to 31) 32-bit IEEE
channel
Channel 1 PV (bits 0 to 15)
Group 1 archive rate
Group 1 trend rate
Instrument type number
Number of Read only entries
Table 8.4.6b Read only indirection example
D2EC
D2EB
Write values to, or read
values from this area
(address + hex 200)
D2EA
D2E9
Ch4 Alarm1 Sp
Ch3 Alarm1 Sp
D2E7
Ch2 Alarm1 Sp
Ch1 Alarm1 Sp
D0EC
0415
D2E8
D0EB
Enter required data
addresses here
Ch6 Alarm1 Sp
Ch5 Alarm1 Sp
D0EA
D0E9
D0E8
D0E7
D0E6
0373
02D1
022F
018D
00EB
0006
Chan 6 Alarm 1 setpoint
Chan 5 Alarm 1 setpoint
Chan 4 Alarm 1 setpoint
Chan 3 Alarm 1 setpoint
Chan 2 Alarm 1 setpoint
Chan 1 Alarm 1 setpoint
Number of Read/Write entries
Table 8.4.6c Read/Write indirection example
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 317
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.7 IEEE 32-bit channel configuration data
Note: A/B Switching:
B values are not accessible via modbus
The following tables show the hexadecimal addresses for the specified
for this software version. Span, Zone,
32-bit floating-point values, for channels 1 to 12. Generally, Parameter
Colour etc. are therefore all setting A
address for channel N = Parameter address for channel 1 + 36(N-1) (decimal). The word channel is used as an umbrella term for input channels, maths channels, totalisers etc.
CHANNEL 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch1 span high
Upper span value (Display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch1 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch1 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch1 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2) for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2) for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch1 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2) for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch1 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint (Note 2) for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D4E7 (54503)
D4E9 (54505)
D4EB (54507)
D4ED (54509)
D4EF (54511)
D4F1 (54513)
D4F3 (54515)
D4F5 (54517)
D4F7 (54519)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
CHANNEL 2
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch2 span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch2 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch2 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch2 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch2 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch2 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch2 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch2 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D50B (54539)
D50D (54541)
D50F (54543)
D511 (54545)
D513 (54547)
D515 (54549)
D517 (54551)
D519 (54553)
D51B (54555)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
CHANNEL 3
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch3 span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch3 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch3 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch3 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch3 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch3 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch3 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch3 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D52F (54575)
D531 (54577)
D533 (54579)
D535 (54581)
D537 (54583)
D539 (54585)
D53B (54587)
D53D (54589)
D53F (54591)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
User Guide
Page 318
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.7 IEEE 32-BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 4
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch4 span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch4 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch4 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch4 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch4 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch4 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch4 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch4 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D553 (54611)
D555 (54613)
D557 (54615)
D559 (54617)
D55B (54619)
D55D (54621)
D55F (54623)
D561 (54625)
D563 (54627)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
CHANNEL 5
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch5 span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch5 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch5 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch5 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch5 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch5 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch5 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch5 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D577 (54647)
D569 (54649)
D57B (54651)
D57D (54653)
D57F (54655)
D581 (54657)
D583 (54659)
D585 (54661)
D587 (54663)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
CHANNEL 6
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch6 span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch6 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch6 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch6 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch6 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch6 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch6 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch6 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D59B (54683)
D59D (54685)
D59F (54687)
D5A1 (54689)
D5A3 (54691)
D5A5 (54693)
D5A7 (54695)
D5A9 (54697)
D5AB (54699)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 319
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.7 IEEE 32-BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 7
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch7 span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch7 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch7 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch7 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch7 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch7 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch7 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch7 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D5BF (54719)
D5C1 (54721)
D5C3 (54723)
D5C5 (54725)
D5C7 (54727)
D5C9 (54729)
D5CB (54731)
D5CD (54733)
D5CF (54735)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
CHANNEL 8
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch8 span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch8 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch8 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch8 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch8 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch8 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch8 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch8 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D5E3 (54755)
D5E5 (54757)
D5E7 (54759)
D5E9 (54761)
D5EB (54763)
D5ED (54765)
D5EF (54767)
D5F1 (54769)
D5F3 (54771)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
CHANNEL 9
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch9 span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch9 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch9 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch9 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch9 Alarm 1 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch9 Alarm 2 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch9 Alarm 3 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch9 Alarm 4 setpoint
Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D607 (54791)
D609 (54793)
D60B (54795)
D60D (54797)
D60F (54799)
D611 (54801)
D613 (54803)
D615 (54805)
D617 (54807)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
User Guide
Page 320
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.7 IEEE 32-BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 10
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch10 span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch10 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch10 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch10 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch10 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch10 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch10 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch10 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D62B (54827)
D62D (54829)
D62F (54831)
D631 (54833)
D633 (54835)
D635 (54837)
D637 (54839)
D639 (54841)
D63B (54843)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
CHANNEL 11
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch11 span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch11 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch11 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch11 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch11 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch11 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch11 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch11 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D64F (54863)
D651 (54865)
D653 (54867)
D655 (54869)
D657 (54871)
D659 (54873)
D65B (54875)
D65D (54877)
D65F (54879)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
CHANNEL 12
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Ch12 span high
Upper span value (display full scale)
Float
Read only
Ch12 span low
Lower span value (display ‘zero’)
Float
Read only
Ch12 Zone high
Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch12 Zone low
Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width)
Float
Read only
Ch12 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch12 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch12 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Ch12 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2)
Float
Read/Write
Spare
D673 (54899)
D675 (54901)
D677 (54903)
D679 (54905)
D67B (54907)
D67D (54909)
D67F (54911)
D681 (54913)
D683 (54915)
Register
Length
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
20
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 321
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.8 IEEE Area Channel run-time data
The following tables show the hexadecimal addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for channels 1 to 12. Generally, Parameter address for channel N = Parameter address for channel 1 + 4(N-1) (decimal).
CHANNEL 1
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Channel 1 value
Channel 1 status
F8C3 (63683)
F8C5 (63685)
2
1
-
F8C6 (63686)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Channel 1 Alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
See note
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 2
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Channel 2 value
Channel 2 status
F8C7 (63687)
F8C9 (63689)
2
1
-
F8CA (63690)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Channel 2 alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
See note
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
User Guide
Page 322
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN-TIME DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 3
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Channel 3 value
Channel 3 status
F8CB (63691)
F8CD (63693)
2
1
-
F8CE (63694)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Channel 3 Alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0:0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1:0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2:1 = Acknowledge alarm 1
Bit 3:Spare
Bit 4:0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5:0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6:1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7:Spare
Bit 8:0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9:0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11:Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
See note
Read only
Register
Length
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 4
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Channel 4 value
Channel 4 status
F8CF (63695)
F8D1 (63697)
2
1
-
F8D2 (63698)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Channel 4 alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
See note
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 323
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN-TIME DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 5
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Channel 5 value
Channel 5 status
F8D3 (63699)
F8D5 (63701)
2
1
-
F8D6 (63702)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Channel 5 Alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
See note
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 6
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Channel 6 value
Channel 6 status
F8D7 (63703)
F8D9 (63705)
2
1
-
F8DA (63706)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Channel 6 alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
See note
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
User Guide
Page 324
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN-TIME DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 7
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Channel 7 value
Channel 7 status
F8DB (63707)
F8DD (63709)
2
1
-
F8DE (63710)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Channel 7 Alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
See note
Read only
Register
Length
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 8
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Channel 8 value
Channel 8 status
F8DF (63711)
F8E1 (63713)
2
1
-
F8E2 (63714)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Channel 8 alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
See note Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 325
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN-TIME DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 9
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Channel 9 value
Channel 9 status
F8E3 (63715)
F8E5 (63717)
2
1
-
F8E6 (63718)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Channel 9 Alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
See note
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 10
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
Channel 10 value
Channel 10 status
F8E7 (63719)
F8E9 (63721)
2
1
Channel 10 alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
-
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
See note
Read only
F8EA (63722)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
User Guide
Page 326
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN-TIME DATA (Cont.)
CHANNEL 11
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Channel 11 value
Channel 11 status
Channel 11 Alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0: 0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7: Spare
Bit 8: 0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9: 0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11: Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 F8EB (63723)
Read only F8ED (63725)
2
1
-
F8EE (63726)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
CHANNEL 12
Parameter
Description
Type
Access
Name
Channel 12 value
Channel 12 status
Channel 12 alarms
Current process value (PV)
Float
Channel status Enum
0 = Good PV
5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off
6 = Overflow
2 = Over range
7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range
8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Alarm information
Uint16
Bit 0:0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active
Bit 1:0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 2:1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Bit 3:Spare
Bit 4:0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active
Bit 5:0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 6:1 = Acknowledge alarm 2 Bit 7:Spare
Bit 8:0 = Alarm 3 inactive; 1 = Alarm 3 active
Bit 9:0 = No alarm 3 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 10:1 = Acknowledge alarm 3 Bit 11:Spare
Bit 12:0 = Alarm 4 inactive; 1 = Alarm 4 active
Bit 13:0 = No Alarm 4 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required
Bit 14:1 = Acknowledge alarm 4 Bit 15:Spare
Start Addr.
Hex (Dec)
Register
Length
See note 1 F8EF (63727)
Read only F8F1 (63729)
2
1
-
F8F2 (63730)
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
1
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 327
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.4.9 Permanent ID table
This table contains information relating to the recorder, and also gives the start address of the feature
identification table (FIT).
FFF4
FFF3
HHHH
CC26
0001
FFF2
FFF1
6100 or 6180
0500
FFF0
Checksum
FIT start address
Version ID
Product ID
Company ID
Table 8.4.9 Permanent ID table
8.5 DATA TRANSMISSION
Each message (request or response) is packaged in the (MODBUS) frame shown below. The messages
consist of a 7 byte prefix, followed by the function code (in hex), followed by the relevant data bytes, the
number and content of which depend on the function code, as described in subsequent sections.
Byte 0
Byte 1
Transaction Transaction
identifier
identifier
(usually 00) (usually 00)
Byte 2
Protocol
identifier
(00)
Byte 3
Protocol
identifier
(00)
Byte 4
Byte 5
Number of
Always 00 bytes following
Byte 6
Byte 7
Recorder
Modbus
Modbus
function
address code (hex)
Bytes 8 onwards
Data
(Depends on
function code)
Figure 8.5 MODBUS package
Notes:
1 The transaction identifier has no active function - the recorder just copies the bytes from the
request message to the response message.
2. The protocol identifier bytes are always zero.
FUNCTION CODES AND EXCEPTION CODES
Refer to section 8.2.1 for lists of function codes and exception codes supported.
TEXT STRINGS
When sending text strings, such as Batch fields, the final character must be followed by one or two ‘Null’
characters. The number of bytes in the text string (including the null) must be even, even if this means
adding two nulls at the end of the message instead of one.
For example, the text string: “Batch Number’ should be sent as
Ba
tc
hSpace
Nu
mb
er NullNull, or Ba
tc
hSpace
Nu
mb
er SpaceNull
where each pair of characters occupies on 16-bit word. Similarly, the text string ‘Batch Number:’ would be
sent as
Ba
tc
hSpace
Nu
mb
er :null,
but only one Null character is required to provide an even number of bytes.
User Guide
Page 328
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.5.1 Function code 03
REQUEST
The bytes after the 7-byte prefix described above are:
Function code (03) (1 byte)
Register start address (2 bytes)
Word count (Total number of registers) (1 to 125 decimal; 1 to 7D hex) (2 bytes)
Thus to read Channel 5 descriptor (start address 031F - 10 registers altogether) the following request (as
described in figure 8.5.1a) would be transmitted for a recorder with a Modbus address of 1:
0000000000060103031F000A
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Byte 9
Byte 10
Byte 11
00
00
00
00
00
06
01
03
03
1F
00
0A
Transaction Transaction
identifier
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Always 00 Number of
bytes following
Recorder
Modbus
Modbus
function
address code (hex)
Register
start
address
high byte
Register Word count Word count
start
high byte
low byte
address
low byte
Figure 8.5.1a Function code 03 request example
RESPONSE
As a response to a request, the recorder returns a similar message, but the function code (03) is followed by:
Byte count (= 2 x the number of register values requested) in hex (1 byte)
Value of register at start address (2 bytes)
Value of register at start address + 1 (2 bytes)
etc.
etc.
Value of final register (2 bytes)
Thus as a response to the above request for channel 5 descriptor, the following message (as expanded
in figure 8.5.1b) would be returned to the host (assuming channel descriptor to be: Channel 5 Descriptor
and Modbus address = 1):
0000000000170103144368616E6E656C20352044657363726970746F72
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
00
00
00
00
00
Byte 12
6E
Transaction Transaction
identifier
identifier
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
17
01
03
14
Always 00 Number of Recorder
Modbus Byte count
bytes folModbus
function (No of reglowing (hex) address code (hex) isters x 2)
(Hex)
Protocol
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Byte 13
Byte 14
Byte 15
Byte 16
Byte 17
Byte 18
Byte 19
6E
65
6C
20
35
20
44
ASCII
n (Hex)
ASCII
n (Hex)
ASCII
e (Hex)
ASCII
l (Hex)
ASCII
space (Hex)
ASCII
5 (Hex)
ASCII
space (Hex)
ASCII
D (Hex)
Byte 24
Byte 25
Byte 26
Byte 27
Byte 28
69
70
74
6F
72
ASCII
i (Hex)
ASCII
p (Hex)
ASCII
t (Hex)
ASCII
o (Hex)
ASCII
r (Hex)
Byte 9
Byte 10
43
68
Byte 11
61
ASCII
C (Hex)
ASCII
h (Hex)
ASCII
a (Hex)
Byte 20
Byte 21
Byte 22
Byte 23
65
73
63
72
ASCII
s (Hex)
ASCII
c (Hex)
ASCII
r (Hex)
ASCII
e (Hex)
Figure 8.5.1b Function code 03 response example
EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Byte 0 = Function code 83 (hex) (i.e. Hex (80 + function code))
Byte 1 = Exception code 01 (Illegal function) or 02 (Invalid data address)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 329
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.5.2 Function code 04
This is identical with function code 03, except that 04 must be used as the function code and the exception response Function code is 84 (hex) not 83.
8.5.3 Function code 06
REQUEST
This is used to write a value to a single register. The bytes after the 7-byte prefix described in section 8.5,
above are:
Function code (06) (1 byte)
Register address (2 bytes)
Value to be written (2 bytes)
Thus to write a value of 80 degrees as Alarm 1 setpoint for channel 3 (register address 022F), the following request (as detailed in figure 8.5.3) would be transmitted to the recorder:
0000000000060106022F0050
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Byte 9
Byte 10
00
00
00
00
00
06
01
06
02
2F
00
50
Value
high byte
(hex)
Value
low byte
(hex)
Transaction Transaction
identifier
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Always 00 Number of
bytes following
Recorder MOodbus
Modbus
function
address code (hex)
Register
start
address
high byte
Register
start
address
low byte
Byte 11
Figure 8.5.3 Function code 06 request/response example
RESPONSE
As a response to a request, the recorder returns a message identical with the request message.
EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Byte 0 = Function code 86 (hex) (i.e. Hex (80 + function code))
Byte 1 = Exception code 01 (Illegal function) or 02 (Invalid data address)
8.5.4 Function code 08
This is used to initiate a loop-back test. The bytes after the 7-byte prefix described in section 8.5, above are:
Function code (08) (1 byte)
Subfunction code (00 00) (2 bytes)
Query data (loopback value) (HH HH) (2 bytes)
Thus to initiate a loopback test (using, as an example, ‘P’ ’Q’ as the query data), the following request (as
detailed in figure 8.5.4) is transmitted to the recorder:
000000000006010800005051
The response to the receipt of such a message should be to ‘echo’ the request back to the host.
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Byte 9
Byte 10
Byte 11
00
00
00
00
00
06
01
08
00
00
50
51
Transaction Transaction Protocol
identifier
identifier
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Always 00 Number of
bytes following
Recorder
Modbus Subfunction Subfunction Query data Query data
code
code
Modbus
high byte
low byte
function
address code (hex) high byte low byte (ASCII 'P') (ASCII 'Q')
(Hex)
(Hex)
Figure 8.5.4 Function code 08 (loopback test) example
User Guide
Page 330
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
8.5.5 Function code 16 (Hex 10)
REQUEST
This is used to write values to multiple registers. The bytes after the 7-byte prefix described in section 8.5,
above are:
Function code (10) (1 byte)
Register Start address (2 bytes)
Word count (Total number of registers to be written) (1 to 100 decimal; 1 to 64 hex) (2 bytes)
Byte count (B) ( 2 x word count) (1 byte)
Values to be written (2B bytes).
Thus to write ”Batch Number” as batch field 1 for group 1 (start address A57F), the following message
(expanded in figure 8.5.5a) would be transmitted to the recorder:
0000000000150110A57F00070E4261746368204E756D6265720000
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
00
00
00
00
00
Transaction Transaction
identifier
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
15
01
10
A5
Base
Modbus
Always 00 Number of Recorder
bytes to fol- Modbus
address
function
low (hex) address code (hex) High byte
Byte 9
Byte 10
Byte 11
7F
00
07
Byte 12
0E
Base
Word count Word count
Byte count
address High byte Low byte
Low byte
Byte 13
Byte 14
Byte 15
Byte 16
Byte 17
Byte 18
Byte 19
Byte 20
Byte 21
Byte 22
Byte 23
Byte 24
Byte 25
Byte 26
42
61
74
63
68
20
4E
75
6D
62
65
72
00
00
ASCII
B (Hex)
ASCII
a (Hex)
ASCII
t (Hex)
ASCII
c (Hex)
ASCII
h (Hex)
ASCII
space (Hex)
ASCII
N (Hex)
ASCII
m (Hex)
ASCII
b (Hex)
ASCII
e (Hex)
ASCII
r (Hex)
ASCII
Null
ASCII
Null
ASCII
u (Hex)
Figure 8.5.5a Function code 16 request example
RESPONSE
The response message (detailed in figure 8.5.5b) after the 7-byte prefix described in section 8.5, above is:
Function code 10 (1 byte)
Start address (2 bytes)
Word count (2 bytes)
Thus, the response to the above batch field request would be:
0000000000060110A57F0007
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
00
00
00
00
00
Transaction Transaction
identifier
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Protocol
identifier
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
06
01
10
A5
Base
Always 00 Number of Recorder
Modbus
address
bytes folModbus
function
lowing (hex) Address code (hex) High byte
Byte 9
Byte 10
Byte 11
7F
00
07
Base
Word count Word count
address High byte Low byte
Low byte
Figure 8.5.5b Function code 16 response example
EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Byte 0 = Function code 90 (hex) (i.e. Hex (80 + function code))
Byte 1 = Exception code 01 (Illegal function) or 02 (Invalid data address)
Note: Function code 16 can be used to write multiple registers into the indirection table area, for
example, by writing the base register address of a 32-bit channel value (e.g. channel 3 - start address: F994) into location D18B.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 331
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
9 ANALOGUE OUTPUT OPTION
Up to four analogue output boards can be fitted, each of which supplies two outputs. This allows any
of the recorder points to be output as a voltage or current signal, as configured. Any part of the source
point’s span can be mapped to the output range, and the outputs can be adjusted (as described below)
to compensate for errors in the monitoring system.
9.1 SIGNAL WIRING
Figure 2.2.1d shows the output wiring for analogue output boards.
9.2 SPECIFICATION
See Annex A for the analogue output board specification.
9.3 CONFIGURATION
See section 4.3.17 (output channel configuration) for details.
9.4 OUTPUT ADJUST
Notes
1. Output adjust is relevant only to output channels configured as ‘V’ or ‘mA’, not to those configured as Master Comms.
2. Output channels can be adjusted only by users with ‘Adjust I/O’ access permission (section
4.4.1)
9.4.1 Adjustment procedure
This procedure is carried out as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select ‘Output Adjust’ in the System menu.
Select the required channel.
Enter a low value for the recorder to output.
Observe what value the monitoring equipment is reading for this output
Enter this monitored value.
Repeat for a high value.
Note: 10% and 90% of output range are commonly used as low and high values respectively.
Figure 9.4.1 below, shows typical adjust pages.
9.4.2 Adjustment removal
Adjustments can be removed at any time, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select ‘Output Adjust’ in the System menu.
Select the required channel.
Operate the ‘Remove Adjust’ key
Select ‘Yes’ from the resulting confirmation dialogue.
User Guide
Page 332
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
9.4 OUTPUT ADJUST (Cont.)
Archive
Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Clock
Locale
Upgrade
Input Adjust
Output adjust
Channel 4
Adjust Channel
Remove Adjust
Specify the low output and then the low reading
1) 10.690
13/10/05 15:22:54
3) 3.563
Unadjusted
2) 20.960
4) 0.000
5) 9.365
6) 8.896
13/10/05 16:03:09
Unadjusted
Unadjusted
12/10/05 14:29:26
Low Output 4
Low Reading 4.018
When the values have been entered select
Apply
1) 10.690
Apply
13/10/05 15:22:54
Discard
Specify the high output and then the high
reading
High Output 9
High Reading 8.917
When the values have been entered select
Apply to complete the adjustment procedure.
Apply
Discard
Figure 9.4.1 Typical output adjust pages
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 333
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
10 EVENT INPUT OPTION
10.1 INTRODUCTION
Each Event input option board offers six isolated input circuits. Inputs can be either switch closures or
voltage levels.
Section 4.3.6 (Event configuration) describes the use of events and how they can be combined to perform logic functions, if required. Job lists can be triggered by any event, either internal or as a result of
external events wired to an event input board.
If this option is fitted, ‘Event input board’ appears as a event source, and the user must then specify a
board number and associated input number as required.
Event Number 1) Event 1
Source 1 Event Input Board
Select Event Input board
Board 1
Input 5
Select Input on associated board
Source 1 Sense Source 1
Operator And
Apply
Discard
Figure 10.1 Event input selection
10.2 SIGNAL WIRING
See figure 2.2.1d
10.3 SPECIFICATION
See Annex A
User Guide
Page 334
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
11 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY
11.1 INTRODUCTION
WARNING!
Transmitter power supplies must not be used with dc supply voltages.
Notes:
1. Transmitter power supplies are not suitable for use with dc or low-voltage ac supplies.
2 The transmitter power supply is available only with 100 mm. recorders.
This option consists of a circuit board, terminal block and suitable wiring inside a long terminal cover at
the rear of a 100mm recorder. The board supplies three mutually isolated dc supplies (nominal 25 Volts)
each of which is intended to power a single 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA current loop.
11.2 FUSING
11.2.1 Fuse Rating
The circuit board is protected by a 20 mm anti-surge (type T) fuse, the value of which depends on the
supply voltage as shown in table 11.2.1, below.
Access to the output wiring and to the fuse is achieved by isolating the recorder from mains power and
opening the terminal cover (after removing its securing screws). The process is fully described below.
Supply voltage Fuse rating Part Number
115V ac
100 mA
CH050012
230V ac
63mA
CH050630
Table 11.2.1 Transmitter power supply fuse details
11.2.2 Access to the user connections/fuse
1
2
Isolate the recorder from the supply voltage.
At the rear of the recorder remove the terminal cover securing screws (figure 11.2.2a), taking care to
retain them for use in re-assembly.
Cover securing screws
Figure 11.2.2a Retaining screw locations
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 335
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
11.2.2 ACCESS TO THE USER CONNECTIONS/FUSE (Cont.)
3
Open the cover (figure 11.2.2b) to reveal the circuit board, user connections etc. (figure 11.2.2c)
Swing rear cover
down for access
Recorder
Body
Connector
clip access
Figure 11.2.2b Opening the rear cover
4
The fuse is located as shown in figure 11.2.2c. User wiring to the terminal block (figures 11.2.3a/b)
can be carried out now, or the terminal cover can be removed for convenience, as described in steps
5 onwards below.
Power cord
to recorder
User terminal
block
Fuse
Figure 11.2.2c Fuse and User terminal block locations
To remove the terminal cover:
5. Unplug the IEC connector from the rear of the recorder connector panel and remove the cable tie
securing the loom to the chassis.
6. Close the terminal cover, and lift it off.
Note: Four apertures in each side of the terminal cover allow the user to actuate the clips which
secure the i/o connectors to the rear panel of the recorder. This allows the i/o connectors to be removed if, for example, the recorder is to be removed from the panel for any reason. The positions
of these apertures are shown in figure 11.2.2b (right-hand side shown; left-hand side similar).
User Guide
Page 336
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
11.2.3 User wiring
Figure 11.2.3a shows the terminal block pinout, and figure 11.2.3b shows typical applications wiring.
O/P 1 O/P 2
+
– +
–
O/P 3
+
–
User terminal block
Figure 11.2.3a Terminal block wiring
Long terminal cover
Voltages generated by
various currents for
R = 100� and R =250�
Red
R
Black
I
V+ V-
Transmitter Power Supply
PCB
Red
Channel input
Black
250�
0V
1.0 V
5.0V
Black
100�
0 mA
0V
4 mA 0.4 V
20 mA 2.0 V
Red
Recorder rear
terminal panel
User terminal block
–
-
+
Transmitter
+
–
+
–
+
Other transmitters
Only one channel
shown, for clarity.
R (minimum spec) = 1.4W, ± 1%. 100� or 250� as required (see table)
Figure 11.2.3b Applications wiring
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 337
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
12 ASCII PRINTER OUTPUT OPTION
12.1 INTRODUCTION
If the Serial Communications option is fitted, this allows the printing of messages, as and when they
occur, or the printing of configurable reports as a result of job action. The recorder is set up to drive a
number of recommended printers. As more printers become available, printer drivers can be imported
as described in section 12.4, below. For printer specification, refer to the documentation supplied with
the printer.
12.2 WIRING
12.2.1 Serial communications ports
The printer is connected to one of the Serial communications ports, configured for EIA232 standard,
using the Rx, Tx and common signal lines. Printer Tx must be connected to recorder Rx. Printer Rx must
be connected to recorder Tx. Figure 12.2.1 shows the location of, and user connections for, the recorder
ports. See also section 2.2.
1
Serial Port 1
6
Serial Port 2
5
9
View on solder-bucket face
of user socket
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 12.2.1a Serial port locations (small frame)
EIA232C
Signal
NC
Rx
Tx
DTR
Signal ground
NC
NC
NC
5V via 1500�
Figure 12.2.1b Serial port pinout
12.2.2 DC connection
1
3
+24V
NC
0V
2
Pin
1
2
3
Shell
Function
+24V±10%
0V
Not connected
Chassis ground
Figure 12.2.2 DC connector pinout
(solder side of user connector)
User Guide
Page 338
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
12.3 CONFIGURATION
Configuration takes place in two areas viz: ‘Connections’ and ‘Reports’ (section 12.3.2).
12.3.1 Connections
Figure 12.3.1a shows the default configuration page for ASCII printer protocol. See section 4.3.15 for
other protocols.
Port Serial 1
Online
Link Error Count 0
Reset Error Count
Protocol ASCII Printer
Connection EIA232
Baud Rate 9600
Stop Bits 1
Select required Baud rate.
Select 1 or 2
Parity Even
Printer Type Star TSP600
Select printer type
Printer Name Star TSP600(0)
Printer Status Not Responding
Printer Test
Print Messages From 1) Group 1
Messages To Print
System
Alarms
Power Up
General
Batches
Logins
Apply
Discard
Figure 12.3.1a Serial communications configuration menu
PORT
This allows serial port 1 or serial port 2 to be selected for printer configuration. Separate, independently
configurable printers can be connected to the two ports, or, if only one printer is to be connected, any of
the other available protocols can be selected for the non-printer port.
LINK ERROR COUNT
The counter is incremented every time there is a framing error, a parity error or a Cyclic redundancy
check (CRC) error whilst communicating with the printer. The ‘Reset Error Count’ key is used to reset the
count to zero.
Note: For instruments fitted with two printers, the count relates to the currently selected printer.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 339
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
12.3.1 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
PROTOCOL
Select ASCII Printer.
BAUD RATE
Select Baud Rate setting to match that set at the Printer.
STOP BITS
Selectable as 1 or 2.
PARITY
Allows Parity to be chosen from a pick list of: None, Odd, Even. For reliable communications with the
printer, it is recommended that the default parity be used.
PRINTER TYPE
Allows a printer driver to be selected for the printer connected to this port.
PRINTER NAME
Allows a name to be entered for the printer.
PRINTER STATUS
Not Responding
OK
Paper Low
Paper Out
Unknown error
Printer is not communicating - check wiring
Printer is connected and working correctly
The printer paper is getting low. The roll should be replaced as soon as possible
The printer paper roll is exhausted.
Printer is not working correctly - perhaps an unknown type of printer has been attached.
PRINTER TEST
Operating this button causes a test printout to appear at the
printer, as shown in figure 12.3.1b.
PRINT MESSAGES FROM
The user can select a group for message printing. These messages are printed as they occur, and are not dependent on job
action. Only those messages in the enabled categories (see
‘Messages to Print’ below) are printed.
MESSAGES TO PRINT
This set of enable boxes allows the user to select which, if any,
messages will be printed. Enable boxes appear even if the
relevant option is not fitted.
Figure 12.3.1b Test printout
Messages are printed as they arise, but reports take precedence. For example, if a report is to be printed
when channel one goes into alarm, and ‘Alarms’ is enabled in the ‘Messages To Print’ area, then the Report is printed before the alarm message.
Note: Messages will be printed only if they are enabled in the relevant part of the recorder’s
configuration. For example: ‘Logins’ messages will be printed only if ‘Record Logins’ is enabled in
the unit’s ‘Security’ configuration (section 4.4), and ‘Alarms’ messages will be printed only if ‘Alarm
Message’ and/or ‘Ack Message’ are enabled in the relevant group’s configuration (section 4.3.2).
User Guide
Page 340
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
12.3.2 Reports configuration
This allows the user to configure up to 10 ‘reports’ for printing by the ASCII printer as a result of job action. Figure 12.3.2a shows a typical configuration page, accessed from the CONFIG button ‘Reports’
item.
Report 1) Report 1
Descriptor Report 1
Number of Fields 6
Field 1 Type Date & Time
Style Normal
Field 2 Type Text
Text
Style Bold
Field 3 Type Process Value
Point Channel 1
Style Emphasised
Field 4 Type Batch Field 1
Style Banner
Field 5 Type 1) Message
Style Normal
Field 6 Type Line Feed
Line Feed 1
Apply
Discard
Figure 12.3.2a Reports Configuration
REPORT
Allows the user to select the required report number for configuration.
DESCRIPTOR
A name for the Report can be entered here.
NUMBER OF FIELDS
Select 0 to 10 for the number of items to be included in the report.
FIELD N TYPE
N = 1 to the number of fields selected in the previous item.
Date & Time
Causes the time and date of report generation to be included in the report
Text
Allows the user to enter a text message of up to 60 characters.
Process value
Allows a specified point’s process value (including descriptor and units) to be included in the report
Batch Field 1
Batch field 1 can be included in the report. See section 4.3.10 for Batch details.
Message
A message can be selected for inclusion in the report. See section 4.3.8 for details
of message configuration.
Line Feed
Allows one or more blank lines to be left. This can be useful at the end of a report.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 341
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
12.3.2 REPORTS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
STYLE
See figure 12.3.2b for examples of ‘Normal’, ‘Bold’, ‘Emphasised’ and ‘Banner’ print styles. For all styles, if
the text is too long to fit on one line it ‘wraps round’ as shown (for normal style) in figure 12.3.2b, below.
Figure 12.3.2b Text style examples
POINT
Allows a point to be chosen when ‘Process value’ has been selected as Field Type. The point is selected
from a pick-list containing all the input channels, derived channels, totalisers etc. in the instrument.
LINE FEED
Appears only when ‘Line Feed’ has been chosen as Field Type. Allows the user to enter the required
number of blank lines (up to 10) which are to be inserted.
User Guide
Page 342
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
12.4 IMPORTING PRINTER DRIVERS
The importing of new printer drivers is carried out from the SAVE/RESTORE button menu, fully described
in section 4.2. Before a printer driver can be ‘imported’, it must be available from the recorder’s Flash
memory, from an SD or Flash card, from a USB memory stick or, for Bridge users, from the host PC.
Printer driver files have the suffix .uhi.
Figure 12.4 depicts the process for a recorder.
When using a PC as the operator interface, the detailed appearance of the Host PC browse window depends on the Windows version in use.
Archive
Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Save
Restore
New
Text
Import Screen
Export Screen
Import User Linearisation
Export User Linearisation
Import Printer Driver
File Name Printer_Driver.uhi
Import
\user\
Name
cal\
config\
Filter1a
lib\
Hide
Type
Folder
Folder
Config
Date
03/06/04 12:35:08
01/05/04 10:27:13
05/07/04 10:22:23
Folder
11/05/04 14:01:08
05/06/04 17:30:29
sdb\
Folder
Folder
Printer_Driver.uhi
Folder
user\
05/07/04 10:23:14
Bytes
4445
05/06/04 17:30:29
FileName P r i n t e r _ D r i v e r . u h i
Save
Cancel
Figure 12.4 Importing a printer driver
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 343
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
12.5 REPORT EXAMPLE
This example shows how to configure a report to be printed if any of channel 1 to channel 4 go into
alarm. It is assumed that the Serial comms link with the printer has been successfully established.
The report is to include the process values of channels 1 to 4 and the time and date.
Note: The example assumes that the channels being configured are in their factory default state.
Configuration items not mentioned in the example (e.g. Scale Low) should be left at their default
values.
12.5.1 Group Configuration
Refer to section 4.3.2, as necessary.
GROUP NUMBER 1
Descriptor = Colour mix.
Alarm message = Disable
Deselect all points except Channels 1 to 4.
12.5.2 Channel configuration
Refer to section 4.3.3 as necessary
CHANNEL 1
Input Type = Test
Scale High =100
Units = %
Descriptor = Red
Alarm 1
Enable = Unlatched
Type = Absolute low
Threshold = 10
CHANNEL 2
As channel 1, except
Descriptor = Blue
CHANNEL 3
As channel 1, except
Descriptor = Green
CHANNEL 4
As channel 1, except
Waveform = Sine 4 minutes
Descriptor = Orange
User Guide
Page 344
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
12.5.3 Event Configuration
Refer to section 4.3.6 as necessary
EVENT NUMBER 1
Source 1 = Unack’d Alarm on Group
Descriptor = Paint low
Job number 1
Category = Report
Send Report to = Select required printer
Report = 1) report 1
On = Active
12.5.4 Report Configuration
Descriptor = Paint Low
Number of fields = 8
Field 1 Type = Text
Text = ‘Paint Low Warning’
Style = Banner
Field 2 Type = Line Feed
Line Feed = 2
Field 3 Type = Date & Time
Style = Normal
Field 4 Type = Process Value
Point = Red
Style = Normal
Field 5 Type = Process Value
Point = Blue
Style = Normal
Field 6 Type = Process Value
Point = Green
Style = Normal
Field 7 Type = Process Value
Point = Orange
Style = Normal
Field 8 Type = Line feed
Line Feed = 5
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 345
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
12.5.5 Serial Communications Configuration
Enable ‘Alarms’ in the ‘Messages To Print’ area.
Press ‘Apply’.
A sample Printout is shown in figure 12.5.5, in which it can be seen that it was the Orange channel which
triggered the warning.
Note: In the example above the event trigger is ‘Unacknowledged alarm’. This means that once
the first channel alarm becomes active and the relevant report printed, then no further reports will
be initiated until the alarm is acknowledged, no matter how many other channel alarms go active.
If, however, an unlatched alarm becomes inactive, this is the equivalent of its being acknowledged
as far as report printing is concerned. For latched alarms, each alarm must be acknowledged
before further reports can be triggered.
Figure 12.5.5 Example printout
User Guide
Page 346
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
12.6 TSP600 SWITCH SETTINGS
This section applies only to the Star TSP600 Printer.
The DIP switches are revealed by removing the access panel located on the underside of the printer. The
two switches appear as shown in figure 12.6a, and their elements should be configured as shown in figure
12.6b. See SW1/SW2 details in the TSP600 ‘User’s guide’ for details.
DSW1
DSW2
DSW1
Figure 12.6a DIP switch access
DSW2
Figure 12.6b DIP switch element configuration
DSW3
Figure 12.6c SW3 location
Figure 12.6d SW3 settings
The illustrated switch settings (segments 4, 5 and 6 ‘Off’; all other segments ‘On’) give the following parameter values: Baud Rate = 9600, Data bits = 8, Parity = Even, Handshake = Xon/Xoff.
Settings other than these may result in no communications or unreliable communications with the printer.
See the TSP600 ‘User’s guide’ for more details of SW3.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 347
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13 PORTABLE CASE OPTIONS
Note: Portable case options are available only for the small frame recorder.
The various options described below come provided in a rugged carrying case as depicted in figure 13,
below,
It is possible that input/output circuits can carry high voltages, and this might prove dangerous if the
safety earth connection to the recorder is not in place (e.g. the plug is pulled out) at any time whilst such
hazardous voltages are present. Therefore, the following warning must be complied with:
WARNING
For portable case instruments only:
All I/O connections must be Low Voltage (i.e. maximum 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, 70V dc) unless the
integrity of the instrument safety earth is maintained for as long as the I/O is connected to the recorder.
430 mm
190 mm
384.8 mm
40.5 mm
190
mm
View on right-hand side
153
mm
15 mm
240 mm
300 mm
Top view
38
mm
174
mm
Figure 13 Portable case dimensions
User Guide
Page 348
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.1 BASIC OPTION
13.1.1 Introduction
The basic portable case option provides 6 or 12 input channels with up to four option boards, or 18 input
channels and up to two option boards.
13.1.2 Wiring
Figure 13.1.2a, below, gives alternative back panel connector layouts for the 12-input and 18-input recorder options.
USB Ports (option)
USB Ports (option)
E
L
Serial comms (option)
1
1
Option board 2
Option board 3
Option board 4
Ch7 Ch8 Ch9
Ch10 Ch11 Ch12
V V I V V I V V I
+ –
+ –
+ –
V V I V V I V V I
+ –
+ –
+ –
V V I V V I V V I
+ –
+ –
+ –
L
Serial comms (option)
Mains (supply)
connection
Option board 1
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3
1
Ethernet RJ45
E
N
22
22
22
Option board 1
1
1
1
Ch4 Ch5 Ch6
V V I V V I V V I
+ –
+ –
+ –
1
Option board 2
Ch13 Ch14 Ch15
Ch16 Ch17 Ch18
V V I V V I V V I
+ –
+ –
+ –
Ch7 Ch8 Ch9
Ch10 Ch11 Ch12
V V I V V I V V I
+ –
+ –
+ –
V V I V V I V V I
+ –
+ –
+ –
V V I V V I V V I
+ –
+ –
+ –
N
Mains (supply)
connection
V V I V V I V V I
+ –
+ –
+ –
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3
22
Ethernet RJ45
22
22
22
Ch4 Ch5 Ch6
V V I V V I V V I
+ –
+ –
+ –
22
Figure 13.1.2a Back panel connector details.
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Caution
Before powering the recorder, check that the supply voltage to be applied lies within the range
specified on the serial number label on the underside of the case.
As shown in Figure 13.1.2a, above, the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the
case. A socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder. Minimum recommended conductor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Input and typical options pinouts are as shown in figure 13.1.2a, above. For full I/O wiring details, refer to
Section 2.2.
INTERNAL WIRING
Figure 13.1.2b, below, shows details of the wiring between the portable case rear panel and the recorder
rear panel.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 349
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.1.2 WIRING (Cont.)
Portable case
Line supply
(100 to 240V)
(50/60 Hz)
Recorder back panel
L
Brown
L
N
Blue
N
E
Green/Yellow
E
Power supply unit
Chassis ground
(Safety earth)
Earth
Ethernet
connector
Note: For the sake of clarity, the
Serial Communications and USB option wiring are not shown.
2
3
4
4
5
6
5
6
7
7
Top connector
8
9
10
11
8
9
10
11
12
13
12
13
15
16
15
16
17
17
18
19
20
21
18
19
20
21
22
22
2
3
4
4
5
6
5
6
8
9
10
11
8
9
10
11
7
7
12
13
12
13
15
16
15
16
18
19
20
21
18
19
20
21
17
17
22
22
1
V+
V-
2
3
V+
V-
5
6
V+
V-
5
6
V+
V-
8
9
V+
VI
8
9
10
11
V+
VI
4
7
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
I
I
V+
VI
V+
VI
V+
VI
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CJ
sensor
8
9
10
12
13
14
Bottom connector
Option board 4
14
14
2
3
CJ
sensor
Option board 3
1
1
2
3
1
Option board 2
14
14
Note: For 18 input channels, Option
boards 3/4 are replaced with input board
3, including associated CJ sensor
Option board 1
1
1
2
3
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
4
7
12
13
I
14
V+
V-
17
V+
V-
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
1
I
I
V+
VI
V+
V-
2
3
V+
V-
V+
V-
5
6
V+
V-
V+
VI
8
9
10
11
V+
VI
I
I
V+
VI
V+
VI
V+
VI
22
4
7
12
13
I
V+
V-
17
V+
V-
18
19
20
21
22
Input board 1
I
14
15
16
Input board 2
I
I
I
V+
VI
Figure 13.1.2b Basic option internal wiring
User Guide
Page 350
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.2 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY (TRS) OPTION
This option is identical with the 6/12 channel basic option described in section 13.1, above except that
one of the option slots is used for TRS output. The TRS pinout is given in figure 13.2, below.
Note: Only one transmitter power supply can be fitted in the portable case, and may be terminated only at option slot 2 OR option slot 4 (if available).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
+V 0V
+V 0V
+V 0V
Pinout for TRS
(must use option slot 2 OR 4)
Figure 13.2 TRS pinout
13.2.1 Internal wiring
Figure 13.2.1 shows wiring details between the recorder and the back panel connectors.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 351
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.2 TRS OPTION (Cont.)
Portable case
Recorder back panel
Line supply
(100 to 240V)
(50/60 Hz)
L
Brown L
N
Blue N
E
Earth
Note: For the sake of clarity, the
Serial Communications and USB option wiring are not shown.
Power supply unit
E
Green/Yellow
Chassis ground
(Safety earth)
Ethernet
connector
2
3
4
4
5
6
5
6
7
7
Top connector
8
9
10
11
8
9
10
11
12
13
12
13
15
16
15
16
17
17
18
19
20
21
18
19
20
21
22
22
2
3
4
4
7
7
8
9
10
11
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
24V
0V
17
24V
0V
18
19
20
21
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
24V
0V
22
5
6
CJ
sensor
5
6
5
6
15
16
Terminal
block
TRS
1
4
5
6
7
CJ
sensor
8
9
10
12
13
14
Bottom connector
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
18
19
20
21
22
1
V+
V-
2
3
V+
V-
V+
V-
5
6
V+
V-
V+
VI
8
9
10
11
V+
VI
I
I
V+
VI
V+
VI
V+
VI
22
2
3
Option board 3
1
1
2
3
12
13
Option board 2
14
14
Note: For 6 or 12 input channel recorders
the transmitter power supply may use either
option board 2 connector or (as shown) the
option board 4 connector.
For 18 input channel instruments, the transmitter power supply must use option board
2 connector, because option board 3 and 4
slots (and associated connector) are occupied
by input board 3 and its cold junction sensor.
Option board 1
1
1
2
3
4
7
12
13
I
14
V+
V-
17
V+
V-
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
I
I
V+
VI
1
V+
V-
2
3
V+
V-
5
6
V+
V-
V+
VI
8
9
10
11
V+
VI
I
I
V+
VI
V+
VI
V+
VI
22
4
7
12
13
V+
V-
I
V+
V-
17
V+
V-
18
19
20
21
22
Input board 1
I
14
15
16
Input board 2
I
I
I
V+
VI
Figure 13.2.1 Typical internal wiring
User Guide
Page 352
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.3 HTM2010 QUARTERLY TEST KIT
13.3.1 Introduction
This option is supplied as a six-channel, 100 mm recorder in a rugged portable case, configured for five
type-T thermocouples and one pressure transducer. The option comes complete with pressure transducer, insertion tubes and miniature plugs for type T thermocouples. As supplied, the recorder is for use
with small, unwrapped utensil sterilisers. The default configuration for the thermocouples is: Function =
Type T, Input range = 0 to 150˚C, and for the transducer: Input range = -1 to + 3 bar.
13.3.2 Wiring
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Caution
Before powering the recorder, check that the supply voltage to be applied lies within the range
specified on the serial number label on the underside of the case.
As shown in Figure 13.3.2a, below, the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the
case. A socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder. Minimum recommended conductor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of wiring the thermocouples to the relevant plugs and plugging them and the
(pre-wired) pressure transducer in. Figure 13.3.2a shows the arrangement of the sockets at the rear of a
six-channel recorder (12 channel similar), and of an 18-channel recorder. Figure 13.3.2b shows the wiring
of the thermocouple plugs.
Ethernet RJ45
USB Ports (option)
USB Ports (option)
E
E
Serial comms (option)
Con2
Con3
Con4
Con5
Con6
Con1
Con2
Con3
Con 18
Con 17
Con4
Con 12
Con 11
Con 16
Con 10
Con 9
Con8
Con7
Con1
Con 15
Con 14
Ethernet RJ45
N
Mains (supply)connection
Mains (supply)
connection
Con 13
Serial comms (option)
L
N
L
Con5
Con6
Figure 13.3.2 a Connector locations
+ wire
— wire
+
—
Sheath
T/C type T colours
BS4937:1993
IEC584-3:1989 BS1843:1952
(Superseded)
(Current)
Brown
White
Brown
White
Blue
Blue
Figure 13.3.2b Thermocouple plug wiring (cover removed for clarity)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 353
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.3.2 WIRING (Cont.)
INTERNAL WIRING
Figure 13.3.2c shows the internal wiring between the portable case connectors and the recorder rear
panel for a 6 input option..
Recorder back panel
L
Line supply
(100 to 240V)
(50/60 Hz)
N
E
Earth
Brown
Blue
Chassis ground
(safety earth)
Green/Yellow
Transmitter PSU
N
Blue
+
O/P 3
+
O/P 2
+
O/P 1
Note: For the sake of clarity, only
one input board shown. Two and
three input board wiring similar.
Red
Black
Terminal
Block
Red
Black
Red
Black
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+
Con 1
Con 2
+
-
If fitted, input board 2 channels 1
to 6 are wired to connectors 7 to 12
+
respectively; input board 3 channels Con 3 1 to 6 wired to connectors 13 to 18
respectively.
Con 4
+
-
Con 5
+
-
Con 6
+
-
PSU
Brown
L
Note: For the sake of clarity, the
Serial Communications and USB option wiring are not shown.
L
N
E
V+
VV+
V-
10
CJ
sensor
13
14
15
16
17
18
Shunt
Wiring from thermocouple
connectors to input terminals
is in thermocouple wire
21
22
Input
Board
V+
V-
V+
V-
11
12
V+
VV+ 19
V- 20
Ethernet
connector
Figure 13.3.2c Internal wiring details
13.3.3 Specification
Information additional to the general specification in Annex A.
Pressure transducer
Input range
Output range
Supply voltage range
Non linearity/hysteresis
Long term stability
-1 to 3 Bar G
4 to 20 mA
12 to 32V dc
≤0.25% span
0.1% in 12 months
Safety isolation
Channel to channel:
Channel to ground
User Guide
Page 354
DC to 65 Hz: BS EN61010 (Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.4 THERMOCOUPLE OPTION
13.4.1 Introduction
This option allows the connection of up to 12 type J, K or T thermocouples together with up to two option
boards, or up to 18 thermocouples with no option boards. Transmitter power supply is not available with
this option.
The type of thermocouple (the same for all channels) must be specified at time of order. Each thermocouple input channel will be configured at the factory for the specified type of thermocouple and will be set
to a range of 0 to 100 degrees Celsius.
Thermocouple-style connectors with copper terminals can also be fitted, for use with non-thermocouple
inputs. For such channels the recorder is pre-configured as: Function = Linear, Input range = 0 to 1 Volt.
13.4.2 Wiring
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Caution
Before powering the recorder, check that the supply voltage to be applied lies within the range
specified on the serial number label on the underside of the case.
As shown in Figure 13.4.2a, below, the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the
case. A socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder. Minimum recommended conductor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug, and inserting the
plugs into the relevant socket at the rear of the recorder.
Figure 13.4.2a shows the arrangement of the connectors at the rear panel for 12 and 18 channel versions.
Figure 13.4.2b shows thermocouple wiring details, and Figure 13.4.2c shows the wiring between the
portable case rear panel and the recorder for a 12 thermocouple option.
Ethernet RJ45
USB Ports (option)
USB Ports (option)
E
Con12
Con1
Con2
Con3
Con4
Con5
Con6
Con1
Con3
Con4
Con 18
Con 17
Con 16
Con 15
Con2
Con 12
Con11
Con 11
Con10
Mains (supply)connection
Con 10
Con9
Con7
Con8
Con 9
22
Con7
Con 14
1
Con8
Option board 2
Option board 1
Serial comms (option)
Mains (supply)
connection
Ethernet RJ45
N
L
Con 13
Serial comms (option)
E
N
L
Con5
Con6
Figure 13.4.2a Rear panel connector locations (typical)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 355
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.4.2 WIRING (Cont.)
THERMOCOUPLE WIRING
+ wire
— wire
T/C type J colours
+
—
Sheath
T/C type K colours
T/C type T colours
BS4937:1993
BS4937:1993
BS4937:1993
BS1843:1952
BS1843:1952
BS1843:1952
IEC584-3:1989
IEC584-3:1989
IEC584-3:1989
(Superseded)
(Superseded)
(Superseded)
(Current)
(Current)
(Current)
Black
Yellow
Brown
White
Green
Brown
White
Blue
Black
Black
White
Blue
Green
Red
White
Blue
Brown
Blue
Figure 13.4.2b Thermocouple wiring details.
User Guide
Page 356
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.4.2 WIRING (Cont.)
Portable case
Line supply
(100 to 240V)
(50/60 Hz)
L
Brown
L
N
Blue
N
E
Green/Yellow
E
Power supply unit
Chassis ground
(Safety earth)
Earth
Note: For the sake of clarity, the
Serial Communications and USB option wiring are not shown.
Recorder back panel
Ethernet
connector
2
3
4
4
5
6
5
6
Options
connector
7
7
8
9
10
11
8
9
10
11
12
13
12
13
Option board 2
14
14
15
16
15
16
17
17
18
19
20
21
18
19
20
21
Note: Two input board (12 t/c) wiring shown.
One input board version (6t/c) similar but
input board two and associated wiring and
CON 7
connectors are not fitted.
Three input board (18 t/c) similar, but with
CON 8
option boards 1 and 2 being replaced by the CON 9
third i/p board and the 22-way connector
being replaced by thermocouple connectors
CON 10
CON 13 to CON18. Input board 3 channels 1 to 6 are wired to CON 13 to CON 18 CON 11
CON 12
respectively.
Option board 1
1
1
2
3
22
22
1
+
-
2
3
V+
V-
+
-
5
6
V+
V-
+
-
8
9
10
11
V+
VI
+
-
4
7
CJ
sensor
12
13
V+
V-
17
V+
V-
18
19
20
21
+
-
I
14
15
16
+
-
22
1
I
I
V+
VI
CON 1
+
-
2
3
V+
V-
CON 2
+
-
5
6
V+
V-
CON 3
+
-
8
9
10
11
V+
VI
CON 4
+
-
CON 5
CON 6
4
7
CJ
sensor
+
+
-
12
13
I
V+
V-
17
V+
V-
18
19
20
21
22
Input board 1
I
14
15
16
Input board 2
I
I
I
V+
VI
Figure 13.4.2c Internal wiring
13.4.3 Specification
Information additional to the general specification in Annex A.
Safety isolation
Channel to channel:
Channel to ground
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
DC to 65 Hz: BS EN61010 (Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
User Guide
Page 357
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.5 LOW SUPPLY VOLTAGE OPTION*
Some of the portable case options described in this manual can be ordered for use with 24V (nom.) supply voltages. In such cases, the supply voltage part of the wiring diagrams is replaced with that shown in
figure 13.5a unless otherwise stated. The low voltage supply is terminated by a three pin plug, as shown
in figure 13.5b.
Note: The polarity of the dc supply is not critical, but the recorder operates more efficiently with
the polarity shown below
20 to 54V dc,
or 20 to 42V ac
(45 to 400 Hz RMS)
Earth
DC+
3
Brown
0V
2
Earth
1
Blue
Green/Yellow
Recorder power
supply
Chassis
Ground
Figure 13.5a Internal wiring for low voltage options
24V
1
Earth
0V
Supply connector:
20 to 52Vdc or
20 to 42V(RMS)
22
22
1
22
1
22
Figure 13.5b Low supply voltage connector details
* Consult factory for availability
User Guide
Page 358
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.6 REMOTE CJC BLOCK OPTION
13.6.1 Introduction
This option allows up to 15 thermocouples of any type(s) to be connected to the recorder using miniature compensating connectors. Thermocouples may be connected directly, or by using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature
detector (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of each of the three
input boards. For this reason, connector numbers 6 to 15 do not match the input channel numbering,
but the recorder configuration names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table
13.6.1 gives details.
Connector 1 - Channel 1
Connector 2 - Channel 2
Connector 3 - Channel 3
Connector 4 - Channel 4
Connector 5 - Channel 5
Connector 6 - Channel 7
Connector 7 - Channel 8
Connector 8 - Channel 9
Connector 9 - Channel 10
Connector 10 - Channel 11
Connector 11 - Channel 13
Connector 12 - Channel 14
Connector 13 - Channel 15
Connector 14 - Channel 16
Connector 15 - Channel 17
Table 13.6.1 Connector/channel cross reference
13.6.2 Wiring
Caution
1. Before powering the recorder, check that the supply voltage to be applied, lies within the range
specified on the serial number label on the underside of the case.
2. Thermocouples must not be attached to voltages greater than 24V,
As shown in Figure 13.6.2a, below, the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the
case. A socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder. Minimum recommended conductor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug (figure 13.6.2b),
and inserting the plugs into the relevant sockets at the rear of the recorder.
Figure 13.6.2a shows the arrangement of the connectors at the rear panel, and Figure 13.6.2c shows the
wiring between the portable case rear panel and the recorder.
Ethernet RJ45
USB Ports (option)
E
N
L
Serial comms (option)
Mains (supply)connection
Chan 13
Chan 14
Chan 15
Chan 16
Chan 17
11- 11+
Chan 7
12- 12+
Chan 8
13- 13+
Chan 9
14- 14+
Chan 10
15- 15+
Chan 11
6- 6+
Chan 1
7- 7+
Chan 2
8- 8+
Chan 3
9- 9+
Chan 4
10- 10+
Chan 5
1-
2-
3-
4-
5-
1+
2+
3+
4+
5+
Figure 13.6.2a Rear panel connector layout
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
+ wire
Figure 13.6.2b Connector detail (typical)
User Guide
Page 359
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
13.6.2 WIRING (Cont.)
Portable case
Recorder back panel
Line supply
(100 to 240V)
L
Brown
L
N
Blue
N
Green/Yellow
E
E
(50/60 Hz)
Power supply unit
Chassis ground
(Safety earth)
Earth
Ethernet
connector
1
11+
1112+
1213+
13-
Brown
Black
Red
Black
Orange
Black
CJ sensor
14+
1415+
15-
Yellow
Black
Green
Black
Blue
Blue
2
3
V+
V-
4
I
5
6
V+
V-
Ch13
Ch14
7
I
8
9
10
11
V+
VI
Ch15
V+
V-
Ch16
12
13
14
15
16
I
17
V+
V-
18
19
20
21
V+
VI
Ch18
Ch7
Ch17
I
Violet
Violet
22
Brown
Black
2
3
V+
V-
4
I
5
6
V+
V-
1
6+
67+
78+
8-
Red
Black
Orange
Black
CJ sensor
9+
910+
10-
Yellow
Black
Green
Black
Blue
Blue
I
8
9
10
11
V+
VI
Ch9
V+
V-
Ch10
14
15
16
I
17
V+
V-
18
19
20
21
V+
VI
Ch12
Ch1
Ch11
I
Violet
Violet
22
Brown
Black
2
3
V+
V-
4
I
5
6
V+
V-
1
1+
12+
23+
3-
Red
Black
Orange
Black
CJ sensor
4+
45+
5-
Yellow
Black
Green
Black
Blue
Blue
Violet
Violet
RTD mounted
on connector block
(three places)
I
8
9
10
11
V+
VI
Ch3
V+
V-
Ch4
14
15
16
Input board 1
Ch2
7
12
13
Input board 2
Ch8
7
12
13
Input board 3
I
17
V+
V-
18
19
20
21
V+
VI
Ch5
I
Ch6
22
Figure 13.6.2c Internal wiring
13.6.3 Specification
Information additional to the general specification in Annex A.
Measurement accuracy (typical)
Static at 25˚C:
0 to 50˚C:
Start-up time at ambient
Isolation
User Guide
Page 360
<±0.2˚C error (after overall system calibration)
<±0.3˚C error (after overall system calibration)
2 minutes
<30V RMS or <60Vdc
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
14 REMOTE CJ BLOCK OPTION
14.1 LARGE FRAME RECORDER WITH INTEGRAL CJC BLOCK
14.1.1 Introduction
This option allows up to 30 thermocouples of any type(s) to be connected to the recorder using miniature compensating connectors mounted on the rear terminal cover. Thermocouples may be connected
directly, or using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature detector (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of the relevant input board.
For this reason, connector numbers 6 to 30 do not match the input channel numbering, but the recorder
configuration names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table 14.1.1 gives details.
Connector 1 - Channel 1
Connector 2 - Channel 2
Connector 3 - Channel 3
Connector 4 - Channel 4
Connector 5 - Channel 5
Connector 6 - Channel 7
Connector 7 - Channel 8
Connector 8 - Channel 9
Connector 9 - Channel 10
Connector 10 - Channel 11
Connector 11 - Channel 13
Connector 12 - Channel 14
Connector 13 - Channel 15
Connector 14 - Channel 16
Connector 15 - Channel 17
Connector 16 - Channel 19
Connector 17 - Channel 20
Connector 18 - Channel 21
Connector 19 - Channel 22
Connector 20 - Channel 23
Connector 21 - Channel 25
Connector 22 - Channel 26
Connector 23 - Channel 27
Connector 24 - Channel 28
Connector 25 - Channel 29
Connector 26 - Channel 31
Connector 27 - Channel 32
Connector 28 - Channel 33
Connector 29 - Channel 33
Connector 30 - Channel 35
Table 14.1.1 Connector/channel cross reference
14.1.2 Wiring
SIGNAL WIRING
Caution
Thermocouples must not be attached to voltages greater than 24V,
Signal wiring consists of connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug (figure 14.1.2a), and
inserting the plugs into the relevant sockets at the rear of the recorder.
Figure 14.1.2b shows the arrangement of the connectors at the rear panel, and Figure 14.1.2c shows the
wiring between the portable case rear panel and the recorder.
+ wire
Figure 14.1.2a Connector detail (typical)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 361
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
14 1.2 WIRING (Cont.)
Ethernet RJ45
E
L
N
Mains (supply)connection
Chan 25
Chan 26
Chan 27
Chan 28
Chan 29
Chan 31
Chan 32
Chan 33
Chan 34
Chan 35
21- 21+
Chan 13
22- 22+
Chan 14
23- 23+
Chan 15
24- 24+
Chan 16
25- 25+
Chan 17
26- 26+
Chan 19
27- 27+
Chan 20
28- 28+
Chan 21
29- 29+
Chan 22
30- 30+
Chan 23
11- 11+
Chan 1
12- 12+
Chan 2
13- 13+
Chan 3
14- 14+
Chan 4
15- 15+
Chan 5
16- 16+
Chan 7
17- 17+
Chan 8
18- 18+
Chan 9
19- 19+
Chan 10
20- 20+
Chan 11
1-
2-
3-
4-
5-
6-
7-
8-
1+
2+
3+
4+
5+
6+
7+
8+
9-
9+
10- 10+
Figure 14.1.2b Rear panel connector layout
User Guide
Page 362
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
14 1.2 WIRING (Cont.)
Terminal cover
Recorder back panel
Line supply
(100 to 240V)
(50/60 Hz)
L
Brown
L
N
Blue
N
E
Green/Yellow
E
Power supply unit
Chassis ground
(Safety earth)
Earth
Ethernet
connector
11+
1112+
1213+
13-
1
Brown
Black
Red
Black
Orange
Black
CJ sensor
14+
1415+
15-
Yellow
Black
Green
Black
Blue
Blue
6+
67+
78+
8-
Red
Black
Ch14
Ch32
I
8
9
10
11
V+
VI
Ch15
Ch33
V+
V-
Ch16
Ch34
V+
V-
I
I
17
V+
V-
Ch17
Ch35
V+
V-
18
19
20
21
V+
VI
Ch18
Ch36
V+
VI
12
13
14
15
16
4
5
6
Green
Black
Violet
Violet
RTD mounted
on connector blocks
(six places)
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Input board 2
Input board 5
2
3
I
I
4
V+
V-
5
6
Ch7
Ch25
Ch8
Ch26
I
I
7
Ch9
Ch27
V+
VI
8
9
10
11
V+
V-
Ch10
Ch28
V+
V-
I
I
17
V+
V-
Ch29
V+
V-
18
19
20
21
I
I
V+
VI
Ch30
V+
VI
12
13
14
15
16
Ch11
Ch12
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
V+
V-
Input board 1
Ch1
Input board 4
V+
V-
2
3
4
I
I
5
6
V+
V-
5
6
Ch20
V+
V-
7
I
I
7
8
9
10
11
V+
VI
Ch3
Ch21
V+
VI
8
9
10
11
V+
V-
Ch4
Ch22
V+
V-
I
I
17
V+
V-
Ch5
Ch23
V+
V-
18
19
20
21
V+
VI
Ch6
Ch24
V+
VI
12
13
14
15
16
I
I
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
22
CJ sensor
Yellow
Black
Green
Black
29+
2930+
30-
Blue
Blue
Violet
Violet
Brown
Black
Red
Black
Orange
Black
21+
2223+
2324+
24-
CJ sensor
Yellow
Black
Green
Black
25+
2526+
26-
Blue
Blue
Violet
Violet
1
Ch19
4
Ch2
Orange
Black
26+
2627+
2728+
28-
1
V+
V-
1
Blue
Blue
14
V+
VI
2
3
Green
Black
12
13
8
9
10
11
Brown
Black
Yellow
Black
I
7
8
9
10
11
7
22
Orange
Black
V+
VI
V+
V-
Violet
Violet
Red
Black
I
I
V+
V-
Yellow
Black
Ch13
7
1
CJ sensor
4+
45+
5-
V+
V-
4
5
6
2
3
Blue
Blue
1+
12+
23+
3-
I
V+
V-
Brown
Black
CJ sensor
9+
910+
10-
Brown
Black
I
4
22
Orange
Black
1
2
3
Violet
Violet
Red
Black
Input board 6
V+
V-
V+
V-
5
6
Input board 3
Ch31
2
3
Brown
Black
Red
Black
Orange
Black
16+
1617+
1718+
18-
CJ sensor
Yellow
Black
Green
Black
19+
1920+
20-
Blue
Blue
Violet
Violet
Figure 14.1.2c Internal wiring
14.1.3 Specification
Information additional to the general specification in Annex A.
Measurement accuracy (typical)
Static at 25˚C:
0 to 50˚C:
Start-up time at ambient
Isolation
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
<±0.2˚C error (after overall system calibration)
<±0.3˚C error (after overall system calibration)
2 minutes
<30V RMS or <60Vdc
User Guide
Page 363
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
14.2 LARGE FRAME RECORDER WITH REMOTE CJC BLOCK
14.2.1 Introduction
This option uses two Remote CJC Block units to allow up to 30 thermocouples of any type(s) to be connected to the recorder using miniature compensating connectors at a DIN rail mounted Remote CJ connector unit, with copper wire connections from this unit to the recorder input boards.. Thermocouples
may be connected to the Remote CJ unit directly, or by using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature detector (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of each of the six input boards.
Most connector numbers do not match the input channel numbering, but the recorder configuration
names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table 14.2.1 gives details.
Note: Both of the Remote CJC Block units have connectors numbered 1 to 15, so it is important
that the units be identified clearly as, for example’ the ‘input boards 1 to 3’ unit and the ‘input
boards 4 to 6’ unit in order to reduce the possibility of wiring errors.
Connector 1 - Channel 1
Connector 2 - Channel 2
Connector 3 - Channel 3
Connector 4 - Channel 4
Connector 5 - Channel 5
Connector 6 - Channel 7
Connector 7 - Channel 8
Connector 8 - Channel 9
Connector 9 - Channel 10
Connector 10 - Channel 11
Connector 11 - Channel 13
Connector 12 - Channel 14
Connector 13 - Channel 15
Connector 14 - Channel 16
Connector 15 - Channel 17
Connector 1 - Channel 19
Connector 2 - Channel 20
Connector 3 - Channel 21
Connector 4 - Channel 22
Connector 5 - Channel 23
Connector 6 - Channel 25
Connector 7 - Channel 26
Connector 8 - Channel 27
Connector 9 - Channel 28
Connector 10 - Channel 29
Connector 11 - Channel 31
Connector 12 - Channel 32
Connector 13 - Channel 33
Connector 14 - Channel 33
Connector 15 - Channel 35
Input boards
1 to 3
Input boards
4 to 6
Table 14.2..1 Connector/channel cross reference
14.2.2 Signal wiring
Caution
Thermocouples must not be attached to voltages greater than 24V,
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of
1. connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug (figure 14.2.2a), and inserting the plugs
into the relevant sockets in the remote CJ unit.
2 Connecting the Remote CJ unit to the recorder input board terminals..
Figure 14.2.2b shows the arrangement of the connectors at the Remote CJ Block units; Figure 14.2.2c
shows the recorder connector layout and figure 14.2.2d shows the wiring between the remote CJ unit
and the recorder.
+ wire
Figure 14.2.2a Connector detail (typical)
User Guide
Page 364
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
14.2.2 SIGNAL WIRING (Cont.)
Note: For the sake of clarity, the units in the figure below are shown one above the other. Normally they would be mounted side by side.
Chan 13
Chan 14
Chan 15
Chan 16
Chan 17
11- 11+
Chan 7
12- 12+
Chan 8
13- 13+
Chan 9
14- 14+
Chan 10
15- 15+
Chan 11
6- 6+
Chan 1
7- 7+
Chan 2
8- 8+
Chan 3
9- 9+
Chan 4
10- 10+
Chan 5
1-
2-
3-
4-
5-
11- 11+
6-
6+
1-
1+
12- 12+
7-
1+
7+
2-
2+
8+
3-
9-
3+
9+
4-
15- 15+
10- 10+
4+
5-
I+
I+
S+
S+
I+
5+
I-
I-
S+
5+
Upper connector
(to recorder input board 3)
S-
Middle connector
(to recorder input board 2)
S-
I-
4+
Lower connector
(to recorder input board 1)
S-
Chan 32
Chan 33
Chan 34
Chan 35
11- 11+
Chan 25
12- 12+
Chan 26
13- 13+
Chan 27
14- 14+
Chan 28
15- 15+
Chan 29
6- 6+
Chan 19
7- 7+
Chan 20
8- 8+
Chan 21
9- 9+
Chan 22
10- 10+
Chan 23
11- 11+
6+
1-
8-
14- 14+
3+
Chan 31
1-
6-
13- 13+
2+
12- 12+
7-
1+
2-
1+
7+
2-
13- 13+
8-
2+
8+
3-
14- 14+
9-
3+
2+
9+
4-
3-
15- 15+
10- 10+
4+
5-
5+
I+
I+
3+
S+
S+
I+
I-
I-
S+
4S-
4+
5-
Input boards
4 to 6
5+
Upper connector
(to recorder input board 6)
Middle connector
(to recorder input board 5)
S-
I-
Input boards
1 to 3
S-
Lower connector
(to recorder input board 4)
Figure 14.2.2b Connector locations (Remote CJC Block units)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 365
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
14.2.2 SIGNAL WIRING (Cont.)
USB Ports (option)
Port 1
USB1
USB2
Ethernet
RJ45
Serial comms (option)
Option board 1
Option board 3
E
Port 2
Safety Earth
(M4)
L
N
Mains (supply)
connection
Option board 5
Option board 6
Option board 7
Option board 8
Not used
Option board 9
Option board 2
Option board 4
Input
Inputchannels
channels43
1 to 748
Input channels 37 to 42
Input board 5
Input board 3
Input board 1
Input
Inputchannels
channels31
1 to 736
Input board 6
Input
Inputchannels
channels19
1 to 724
Input board 4
Input
Input channels
channels 71 to
to 12
7
Input board 2
Input channels 25 to 30
Input channels 13 to 18
Input channels 1 to 6
Figure 14.2.2c Connector locations (recorder)
User Guide
Page 366
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
14.2.2 SIGNAL WIRING (Cont.)
Wire colours chosen
for clarity
te CJ
Remo
Block
2
Remote CJ unit (input boards 4 to 6) Upper connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
I+
S+
I-
S-
Remote CJ unit (input boards 4 to 6) Middle connector
6-
6+
7-
7+
8-
8+
9-
9+ 10- 10+
I+
S+
I-
SV+ V2
I
3
V+ V5
I V+ V-
6
8
I
V+ V-
9
Chan 31 Chan 32 Chan 33
V+ V2
I
3
V+ V5
6
I V+ V8
I
V+ V-
9
I
13 14
Chan 25 Chan 26 Chan 27
V+ V-
I V+ V-
16 17
I
Recorder input
board 5
19 20 21
I
V+ V-
13 14
16 17
I V+ V-
Recorder input
board 6
I
19 20 21
Chan 34 Chan 35 Chan 36
Remote CJ unit (input boards 4 to 6) Lower connector
Chan 28 Chan 29 Chan 30
1-
1+
2-
2+
3-
3+
4-
4+
5-
5+
I+
S+
I
I V+ V-
I-
S-
Remote CJ unit (input boards 1 to 3) Upper connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
I+
S+
I-
SV+ V2
I
3
V+ V5
6
I V+ V8
I
9
13 14
Chan 19 Chan 20 Chan 21
V+ V2
I
3
V+ V5
6
I V+ V8
I
V+ V-
9
I
13 14
Chan 13 Chan 14 Chan 15
V+ V-
I V+ V-
16 17
Recorder input
board 3
I
19 20 21
V+ V-
V+ V16 17
Recorder input
board 4
I
19 20 21
Chan 22 Chan 23Chan 24
Remote CJ unit (input boards 1 to 3) Middle connector
Chan 16 Chan 17 Chan 18
6-
6+
7-
7+
8-
8+
9-
9+ 10- 10+
I+
S+
I-
S-
Remote CJ unit (input boards 1 to 3) Lower connector
1-
1+
2-
2+
3-
3+
4-
4+
5-
5+
I+
S+
I-
S-
V+ V2
3
I
V+ V5
6
I V+ V8
I
9
Chan 7 Chan 8 Chan 9
V+ V2
3
I
V+ V5
6
I V+ V8
I
9
Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3
V+ V13 14
I
V+ V-
I V+ V-
16 17
Recorder input
board 1
I
19 20 21
V+ V13 14
I
V+ V16 17
I V+ V-
I
19 20 21
Recorder input
board 2
Chan 10 Chan 11Chan 12
Remote CJ Block 1
Chan 4 Chan 5 Chan 6
Figure 14.2.2c Wiring details
14.2.3 Specification
Information additional to the general specification in Annex A.
Measurement accuracy (typical)
Static at 25˚C:
0 to 50˚C:
Start-up time at ambient
Isolation
Dimensions
<±0.2˚C error (after overall system calibration)
<±0.3˚C error (after overall system calibration)
2 minutes
<30V RMS or <60Vdc
145 mm wide x 127.5 high x 75.6 mm deep (excluding DIN rail)
127.5 mm
145 mm
11- 11+
12- 12+
13- 13+
14- 14+
15- 15+
6-
7-
7+
8-
9-
9+
10- 10+
2-
2+
3-
4-
4+
5-
6+
111- 11+
6-
6+
1-
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
75.6 mm
7-
1+
1+
12- 12+
7+
2-
13- 13+
8-
2+
8+
3-
14- 14+
9-
3+
9+
4-
15- 15+
10- 10+
4+
5-
5+
I+
I+
8+
3+
S+
S+
I+
I-
I-
S+
5+
S-
S-
I-
S-
User Guide
Page 367
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
14.3 SMALL FRAME RECORDER
14.3.1 Introduction
This option allows up to 15 thermocouples of any type(s) to be connected to the recorder using miniature
compensating connectors at a DIN rail mounted Remote CJ connector unit, with copper wire connections from this unit to the recorder input boards.. Thermocouples may be connected to the Remote CJ
unit directly, or by using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature
detector (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of each of the three
input boards. For this reason, connector numbers 6 to 15 do not match the input channel numbering,
but the recorder configuration names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table
14.3.1 gives details.
Connector 1 - Channel 1
Connector 2 - Channel 2
Connector 3 - Channel 3
Connector 4 - Channel 4
Connector 5 - Channel 5
Connector 6 - Channel 7
Connector 7 - Channel 8
Connector 8 - Channel 9
Connector 9 - Channel 10
Connector 10 - Channel 11
Connector 11 - Channel 13
Connector 12 - Channel 14
Connector 13 - Channel 15
Connector 14 - Channel 16
Connector 15 - Channel 17
Table 14.3.1 Connector/channel cross reference
14.3.2 Signal wiring
Caution
Thermocouples must not be attached to voltages greater than 24V,
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of
1. connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug (figure 14.3.2a), and inserting the plugs
into the relevant sockets in the remote CJ unit.
2 Connecting the Remote CJ unit to the recorder input board terminals..
Figure 14.3.2b shows the arrangement of the connectors at the remote CJ unit, and the recorder; figure
14.3.2c shows the wiring between the remote CJ unit and the recorder.
+ wire
Figure 14.2.2a Connector detail (typical)
User Guide
Page 368
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
14.3.2 SIGNAL WIRING (Cont.)
Chan 13
Chan 14
Chan 15
Chan 16
Chan 17
11- 11+
Chan 7
12- 12+
Chan 8
13- 13+
Chan 9
14- 14+
Chan 10
15- 15+
Chan 11
6- 6+
Chan 1
7- 7+
Chan 2
8- 8+
Chan 3
9- 9+
Chan 4
10- 10+
Chan 5
1-
2-
3-
4-
5-
11- 11+
6-
6+
1-
1+
12- 12+
7-
1+
7+
2-
13- 13+
8-
2+
8+
3-
14- 14+
9-
3+
2+
9+
4-
15- 15+
4+
5-
I+
I+
10- 10+
5+
3+
S+
S+
I+
I-
I-
S+
5+
Upper connector
(to recorder input board 3)
S-
Middle connector
(to recorder input board 2)
S-
I-
4+
Lower connector
(to recorder input board 1)
S-
a. Remote CJ unit
USB 1
USB 2
USB Ports (option)
Safety Earth
(M4)
E
L
Port 1
Serial comms (option)
Port 2
Ethernet
RJ45
Option slot 1
N
Mains (supply)
connection
Option slot 2
Input channels 13 to 18
Input board 3 (to CJ unit
upper connector)
Input channels 7 to 12
Input board 2 (to CJ unit
middle connector)
Input channels 1 to 6
Input board 1 (to CJ unit
lower connector)
b. Recorder
Figure 14.3.2b Connector locations
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 369
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
14.3.2 SIGNAL WIRING (Cont.)
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
V+ V2
I
V+ V-
3
5
I V+ V-
6
8
I
V+ V-
9
Chan 13 Chan 14 Chan 15
6-
6+
7-
7+
V+ V2
I
8-
V+ V-
3
5
8+
9-
I V+ V-
6
8
1+
2-
2+
V+ V2
I
3-
V+ V-
3
5
I
V+ V-
8
I
V+ V-
13 14
4-
I V+ V-
6
16 17
9+ 10- 10+
9
3+
V+ V-
I
9
Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3
S+
I V+ V-
I-
S-
16 17
Remote CJ unit
Upper connector
Recorder input board 3
I
19 20 21
Chan 16 Chan 17 Chan 18
Chan 7 Chan 8 Chan 9
1-
I
13 14
I+
I+
S+
I V+ V-
Wire colours chosen
for clarity
I-
I
S-
Remote CJ unit
Middle connector
Recorder input board 2
19 20 21
Chan 10 Chan 11 Chan 12
4+
5-
V+ V-
5+
I+
I
I V+ V-
V+ V-
13 14
16 17
S+
I-
I
S-
Remote CJ unit
Lower connector
Recorder input board 1
19 20 21
Chan 4 Chan 5 Chan 6
Figure 14.3.2c Wiring details
14.3.3 Specification
Information additional to the general specification in Annex A.
Measurement accuracy (typical)
Static at 25˚C:
0 to 50˚C:
Start-up time at ambient
Isolation
<±0.2˚C error (after overall system calibration)
<±0.3˚C error (after overall system calibration)
2 minutes
<30V RMS or <60Vdc
Dimensions
145 mm wide x 127.5 high x 75.6 mm deep (excluding DIN rail)
127.5 mm
145 mm
11- 11+
12- 12+
13- 13+
14- 14+
15- 15+
6-
7-
7+
8-
9-
9+
10- 10+
2-
2+
3-
4-
4+
5-
6+
111- 11+
6-
6+
1-
User Guide
Page 370
75.6 mm
7-
1+
1+
12- 12+
7+
2-
13- 13+
8-
2+
8+
3-
14- 14+
9-
3+
9+
4-
15- 15+
10- 10+
4+
5-
5+
I+
I+
8+
3+
S+
S+
I+
I-
I-
S+
5+
S-
S-
I-
S-
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
15 TUS OPTION
This option affects the way in which operator batch initiation occurs. Section 4.3.10 contains a full description of batch recording and the user should refer to that section for details not contained here. The
option also incorporates the ‘Remote CJ block’ option, so channels 6, 12, 18 and so on are ‘reference’
channels used to measure the block temperature.
15.1 PRE CALIBRATION AND POST CALIBRATION ENABLE
If the TUS option is fitted, two extra ‘tick boxes’ (‘Pre calibration’ and ‘Post calibration’) appear in the
Batch configuration menu (figure 15.1).
Figure 15.1 Batch configuration menu
Pre calibration
If this tick box is enabled, the operator is required to carry out an input adjust procedure before the batch
can be initiated.
Post calibration
If this tick box is enabled, the operator is required to carry out an input adjust procedure when the batch
is stopped.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 371
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
15.2 INPUT ADJUST
Notes
1. Input adjust cannot be applied to input channels with input type of ‘Digital’, ‘Test’ or ‘comms’.
2. Input adjustments can be carried out only by users with ‘Adjust I/O’ permission (see section 4.4.1).
3. The instrument must be powered for a sufficient time (e.g. 30 mins) for it to reach thermal equilibrium before an input adjust is performed.
4. The highest numbered channel on each input board (i.e. input channels 6, 12, 18 etc.) are reference channels and cannot be adjusted
This facility allows the user to compensate for tolerance errors etc. The technique used is to select those
channels to which adjust is to be applied, then for each channel to:
a
apply a known low level signal (at or close to the low input range value) to the relevant input. When
the recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
b. apply a known high level signal (at, or close to, the high input range value) to the relevant input.
When the recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
Figure 15.2a shows the initial display. Channels 1 to 6 are selected by default.
������������� �
��������������������������������
������������ �
��������������������������������
�����������������������
���������������
���������������
����������������
��������������
�����������
�����������
�����������
��������������
���������������
����
�����������
�����������
�����������
�����������
�����������
������
������
������
������
�����
�����������
�������������������
�������������������
�����������
������������������
�����������
�����������
�����������
�����������
�����������
������������
Note: Channel 6 not available for
adjustment
Figure 15.2a Input adjust status page
First channel
Last channel
Select Channels
Adjust channels
Fast Settle
Exit
1) Temps1a etc.
User Guide
Page 372
Allows the user to select the lowest channel number of all the channels to be adjusted.
Allows the user to select the highest channel number of all the channels to be adjusted.
Presents a list of all the channels from the First channel to the Last channel inclusive,
each of which can be removed from the adjustment list by ‘unticking’ its check box.
The channels displayed in the status page reflect this selection.
Initiates the adjustment procedure to all the channels from the First channel to the
Last channel inclusive, unless the list has been modified using the ‘Select Channels’
key.
Switches off the input filter for 1 second,to allow quicker response. Adjust Channels’
values displayed as ‘RANGING’ for the 1 second duration.
Quits the current page. Must be operated after adjustment is complete, in order to
continue batch initiation.
A list of channels required to be susceptible to the adjustment procedure, together
with their current values and their adjustment status (i.e. Unadjusted or, the time/date
of the previous adjustment (if any)).
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
15.2 INPUT ADJUST (Cont.)
ADJUST PROCEDURE
Note: Adjusting a channel invalidates the accuracy values given in the specification in Annex A for
that channel.
Operation of the Adjust Channels key calls the low-end adjust page, as shown in figure 15.2b.
�����������
���������������������������������������������
��������������������
��������� �
������������������������������������������
������
����������� �������
�����������
����������� �������
�������������������
����������� �������
�������������������
����������� �������
�����������
����������� ������
������������������
Discard
Apply
Figure 15.2b Typical low-end input adjust page
Fast Settle
Low Point
Reduces the time taken for the readings to stabilise.
Usually 0, but a different value can be entered here, if required.
Apply the Low point value to the relevant input channels, and wait for the recorder readings to become
stable. When the readings are stable, press the Apply key, to call the High-end page depicted in figure
15.2c, below.
�����������
���������������������������������������������
��������������������
���������� �
������������������������������������������
������
����������� ������
�����������
����������� ������
�������������������
����������� ������
�������������������
����������� ������
�����������
����������� �����
������������������
Discard
Apply
Figure 15.2c Typical high-end input adjust page
Fast Settle
High Point
Reduces the time taken for the readings to stabilise.
Default value displayed, but a different value can be entered here, if required.
Apply the High point value to the relevant input channels, and wait some minutes for the recorder readings to become stable. When the readings are stable, press the Apply key, to return to the status page,
then press ‘Exit’. If this is a Pre calibration check, the Batch initiation continues as described in section
4.6.10.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 373
100/180 mm Paperless Graphic Recorder: User Guide
15.3 CHART MESSAGES
If Audit Trail is enabled then a number of messages appear on the chart, and included in the history file
as described in section 4.4.2. If the TUS option is enabled, ‘Pre calibration’ and/or ‘Post calibration tick
boxes are ticked, then further messages are produced for each adjusted channel, showing the pre calibration and post calibration high and low values.
Example:
05/10/10
05/10/10
05/10/10
05/10/10
05/10/10
05/10/10
05/10/10
05/10/10
05/10/10
05/10/10
16:20:57
16:20:57
16:20:57
16:20:57
16:20:57
16:20:57
16:20:57
16:20:57
16:20:57
16:20:57
5)
4)
3)
2)
1)
5)
4)
3)
2)
1)
Temps1e
Temps1d
Temps1c
Temps1b
Temps1a
Temps1e
Temps1e
Temps1e
Temps1e
Temps1e
Pre
Pre
Pre
Pre
Pre
Pre
Pre
Pre
Pre
Pre
cal
cal
cal
cal
cal
cal
cal
cal
cal
cal
high 5.010 Post cal high 5.000
high 4.994 Post cal high 5.000
high 5.001 Post cal high 5.000
high 4.997 Post cal high 5.000
high 4.993 Post cal high 5.000
low 0.000 Post cal low 0.000
low -0.002 Post cal low 0.000
low -0.002 Post cal low 0.000
low 0.001 Post cal low 0.000
low -0.003 Post cal low 0.000
15.4 OTHER ITEMS
Input channels 6, 12, 18 etc. are reference channels used to measure the temperature of the remote CJ
block. They are therefore excluded from the adjust procedure and channel offsets (section 4.3.3) cannot
be applied to them.
In ‘Save and Restore’, channel configuration will not be restored.
Batch initiation must be by operator action - job triggered batches do not support pre and post calibration.
User Guide
Page 374
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Annex A: SPECIFICATION
INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE
This product has been designed to conform to BS EN61010 installation category II and pollution degree
2. These are defined as follows:
Installation category II
The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V ac mains is 2500V.
Pollution degree 2
Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity
caused by condensation shall be expected.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 375
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Recorder)
Board types (I/O)
Universal input board
Relay output boards (3 change-over, 4 normally closed or 4 normally open relays per board)
6 - event input board
Serial communications board
2 - channel analogue output (retransmission) board
Standard features
Bridge ‘Lite’
Configuration Copy
CSV Archive file format
E-mail
File transfer protocol (FTP)
6 Groups
Job search
Log scales
MODBUS TCP
Messages
Timers
USB port behind access flap (not stainless-steel case option)
Web server
Options
Software:
Hardware:
ASCII Printer output (supplied as a part of the Serial Communications option)
Audit trail
21CFR11Audit
Batch Recording
Bridge ‘Full’ version
EtherNet/IP Server (adapter)
Event Buttons (supplied as a part of the Screen Builder option)
Master Comms
Maths/Totalisers/Counters
Multiple groups (six additional groups)
Screen Builder (User screens)
Security Manager
Simulation
Thermal Uniformity Survey (TUS)
Transmitter power supply - isolated (100 mm recorders only)
Low supply voltage
Access flap lock
Stainless steel case (no access flap) (check availability)
Further two USB ports at rear of recorder
Serial Communications
Environmental Performance
Temperature limits
Operation:
Storage:
Humidity limits
Operation:
Storage:
Altitude (maximum)
Protection Standard bezel/display:
Standard sleeve:
Portable case option:
Stainless-steel case:
Shock
0 to 50˚C.
- 20 to +60˚C
5% to 80% RH non - condensing
5% to 90% RH non - condensing
<2000 metres
IP66 for a recorder mounted in a panel.
IP20
IP21
IP66 for a recorder mounted in a panel.
BS EN61010
Vibration (10 Hz to 150Hz)
2g peak
User Guide
Page 376
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (RECORDER) (Cont.)
Physical
Panel mounting
Bezel size
Small frame:
Large frame:
Panel cutout
Small frame:
Large frame;
Depth behind bezel
Small frame:
Large frame:
Weight
Small frame:
Large frame:
Mounting angle
DIN 43700
Note: For portable case dimensions
144mm x 144mm
292mm x 292mm
138mm x 138mm (-0.0 + 1.0) mm
281mm x 281mm (-0.0 + 1.0) mm
246.5 mm (211.5 mm without terminal cover, 284 with long terminal cover)
260.90 mm (211 mm without terminal cover)
3 kg. max. (5 kg. max. if fitted in portable case)
7 kg. max.
±45 ˚ from vertical
- see section 13.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Emissions and immunity:
BS EN61326
Electrical safety
BS EN61010. Installation category II, Pollution degree 2
Power requirements
Supply voltage
Standard:
Low voltage option:
Power (max.)
All options:
Inrush current
Standard:
Low voltage option:
Namur compliant option:
Fuse type
Interrupt protection
Standard:
Low voltage option:
100 to 240 V (+10% -15%); 47 to 63 Hz or 110 to 370V dc (dc supply not to be used if isolated transmitter power supply fitted)
20 to 42V RMS; 45 to 400 Hz, or 20 to 54V dc (option not to be used if isolated transmitter power supply fitted)
60 W
Note:
36A
36A
Check factory for availabil5.5A at 25˚C
ity of Low Voltage option
None
Holdup >200msec. at 240V ac, with full load.
Holdup 20msec at 20Vdc or RMS, with full load.
Back-up battery
Type
Support time
Replacement period
Stored data
Poly-carbonmonofluoride/lithium (BR2330). Part Number PA261095. See also section B2.2.
A fully-charged, new battery supports the Real-Time Clock for a minimum of 1 year with the recorder unpowered
3-years
Time; date; values for totalisers, counters and timers; batch data; values for those maths functions with history,
such as Fvalue, Rolling average, Stopwatch etc.
Clock (RTC) data
Temperature stability
0 to 50˚C:
Ageing
± 20 ppm
±5 ppm per year
Touch screen
Colour TFT LCD with cold-cathode backlighting, fitted with resistive, analogue, touch panel
Screen specification Small frame: 1/4 VGA Resolution = 320 x 240 pixels
Large frame: XGA Resolution= 1024 x 768 pixels
Update information
Input/relay output sample rate:
Display update:
Archive sample value:
Trended/displayed value:
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
8 Hz.
8 Hz,
Latest value at archive time
Latest value at display update time
User Guide
Page 377
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (RECORDER) (Cont.)
Ethernet Communications
Type
Protocols
Cable
Type:
Maximum length:
Termination:
RJ45 LED indicators
Green:
Yellow:
Internal green LED
10/100 base T (IEEE802.3)
TCP/IP, FTP, DHCP, BootP, SNTP, Modbus, SMTP, ICMP.
CAT5
100 metres
RJ45
Indicates a 100MB link
Indicates Ethernet activity
Indicates a 10MB link
Serial communications option
Number of ports
Protocol
Transmission standards
Isolation (dc to 65Hz BS EN61010)
Terminals to ground:
Two, at rear of instrument
ASCII input, ASCII printer, Modbus master, Modbus slave.
EIA232 and/or EIA485, software selectable per port. EIA485 can be connected as 3-wire or 5-wire as required.
Installation category II; Pollution degree 2.
50 V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
Transmitter power supply (Isolated) (Small frame recorders only)
Number of outputs
Output voltage
Max. current
Isolation (dc to 65Hz BS EN61010)
Channel to channel:
Channel to ground:
Fuse (20mm Type T)
Supply voltage = 110/120Vac:
Supply voltage = 220/240Vac:
Three
25V nominal
20mA per output
Installation category II; Pollution degree 2.
100V RMS or dc (double insulation)
100V RMS or dc (basic insulation).
100 mA
63 mA
USB ports
Number of ports
Standard
Transmission speeds
Maximum current per port
Peripherals supported
1 at front of recorder (standard*); 2 further ports (optional - at rear of instrument)
(*No front USB port with Stainless steel case option)
USB1.1
12Mbits/sec (full speed devices) or 1.5Mbits/sec (low speed devices)
500mA
Floppy disk drive, Keyboard, Bar code reader, Mouse, Memory stick.
Note: The recorder meets the industrial EMC requirements of BS EN61326. Typically, USB peripherals are tested to domestic information technology standards (BS EN55022) with category C
performance. Some USB peripherals, designed for use in domestic or office environments, can be
susceptible to ‘lock up’ in environments containing high electromagnetic field strengths. In order
to recover from such ‘lock up’ situations, the peripheral must be disconnected and then reconnected. Recorder operation is not affected.
Other items
Virus susceptibility
The 6000 series VxWorks operating system is immune to viruses targeted at Windows based operating systems.
As at December 2005, there are no known viruses that target VxWorks.
Calibration coefficients
Input:
Instrument:
The Read-only input coefficients are stored in EEPROM on the input board.
Instrument configuration is held in FLASH memory and has no effect on calibration coefficients.
User Guide
Page 378
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Universal input board)
For small frame recorders only:
For 6 input recorders, up to four option boards may be fitted.
For 12 input recorders up to four option boards may be fitted
For 18 channel recorders up to two option boards may be fitted.
General*
Termination
Edge connector/terminal block
Max. number of inputs Small frame:
18 (three 6-input boards)
48 (eight 6-input boards)
Large frame:
Input ranges
±38mV; ±150mV; ±1Volt; ± 20 Volts
Input types
Dc volts, dc millivolts, dc milliamps, (with external shunt), thermocouple, 2/3 wire resistance temperature detector
(RTD), Ohms, Contact closure (not channels 1, 7, 13,19, 25, 31, 37, 43) (Minimum contact closure = 60msec.)
Input type mix
Freely configurable
Sample rate
See ‘Update information’ above
Noise rejection (48 to 62Hz)
Common mode:
Series mode:
>140dB (Channel to channel and channel to ground)
>60dB
Maximum common mode voltage
250Volts continuous
Maximum series mode voltage
45mV at lowest range; 23.74 Volts peak at highest range
Isolation (dc to 65Hz; BS EN61010)
Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
300V RMS or dc channel to channel (double insulation), channel to common electronics (double insulation) and
channel to ground (basic insulation)
Dielectric strengthChannel to ground: 1500Vac for 1 minute.
Channel to channel:
Insulation resistance
Input impedance
2500Vac for 1 minute
>10MΩ at 500V dc
20V range:
65.3kΩ
Other ranges:
>10MΩ
Overvoltage protection
50V peak (150V with attenuator)
Open circuit detection (applies only to ± 38mV and ± 150mV ranges).
Detection current:
Recognition time:
Minimum break resistance:
Long term drift (typical)
± 57nA max
500mSec
10MΩ
Better than 0.03% of reading or 30µV (whichever is greater) over a three month period.
DC input ranges
Shunt
Additional error due to shunt
Performance
Externally mounted resistor modules
0.1% of input
See table
Low
Range
-38 mV
-150 mV
-1 V
-20 V
High
Typical error
Resolution
Range
(Instrument at 20 deg C)
38 mV
1.4 �V 0.013% input + 0.031% range
150 mV 5.5 �V 0.013% input + 0.028% range
1V
37 �V 0.013% input + 0.024% range
20 V
720 �V 0.075% input + 0.027% range
Maximum error
(Instrument at 20 deg C)
0.030% input + 0.052% range
0.029% input + 0.039% range
0.029% input + 0.029% range
0.393% input + 0.033% range
Worst case temperature
performance
25ppm of input per deg C
25ppm of input per deg C
25ppm of input per deg C
388ppm of input per deg C
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level E7 or above (June 2007). For instruments prior to this, see the table in ‘Previous instruments’ later in Annex A.
*WARNING
For portable case instruments only:
All I/O connections must be Low Voltage (maximum 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak or 70Vdc) unless
the integrity of the instrument safety earth is maintained for as long as the I/O is connected to the
recorder.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 379
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Universal input board) (Cont.)
Resistance inputs
Temperature scale
Types, ranges and accuracies
Influence of lead resistance Error:
Mismatch:
Maximum source current
ITS90
See tables (values exclude influence of lead resistance)
Negligible
1Ω/Ω
250µA
Low
Range
0�
0�
0�
High
Range
Resolution
5k�
148m�
150�
600�
5m�
22m�
Typical error
(Instrument at 20 deg. C)
Maximum error
Worst case temperature
performance
(Instrument at 20 deg. C)
0.027% input + 0.034% range 0.037% input + 0.077% range 30ppm of input per deg C
0.027% input + 0.035% range 0.037% input + 0.057% range 30ppm of input per deg C
0.030% input + 0.034% range 0.040% input + 0.041% range 30ppm of input per deg C
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level E7 or above (June 2007). For instruments prior to this, see the table in ‘Previous instruments’ later in Annex A.
RTD type
Cu10
Cu53
JPT100
Ni100
Ni120
Pt100
Pt100A
Pt1000
Overall range (˚C)
-20 to +
-70 to +
-220 to +
-60 to +
-50 to +
-200 to +
400
200
630
250
170
850
-200 to + 600
-200 to + 850
Standard
General Electric Co.
RC21-4-1966
JIS C1604:1989
DIN43760:1987
DIN43760:1987
IEC751
Eurotherm Recorders SA
IEC751
Max. linearisation error
0.02˚C
< 0.01˚C
0.01˚C
0.01˚C
0.01˚C
0.01˚C
0.09˚C
0.01˚C
Thermocouple data
Temperature scale
Bias current
Cold junction compensation types
Remote CJC source:
Internal CJC error
Internal CJC rejection ratio
Upscale/downscale drive
Types:
Additional error:
Types, ranges and accuracies
ITS90
0.05nA
Off, internal, external, remote
Any input or maths channel.
1˚C max with instrument at 25˚C
50:1 minimum
‘High’. ‘low’ or ‘none’ selectable for each thermocouple channel.
Typically 0.01˚C - depends on wiring. (Detect current = 57nA.)
See table
T/C type
B
0 to + 1820
C
D
E
G2
J
K
L
N
R
S
T
U
NiMo/NiCo
Platinel
0 to + 2300
0 to + 2495
Ni/NiMo
Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh
User Guide
Page 380
Overall range (˚C)
-270 to +
0 to +
-210 to +
-270 to +
1000
2315
1200
1372
-50 to +
-270 to +
-200 to +
-50 to +
0 to +
1768
400
600
1410
1370
-200 to + 900
-270 to + 1300
-50 to + 1768
0 to + 1406
0 to + 1888
Standard
Max.linearisation error
0 to 400˚C = 1.7˚C
IEC584.1
400 to 1820˚C = 0.03˚C
Hoskins
0.12˚C
Hoskins
0.08˚C
IEC584.1
0.03˚C
Hoskins
0.07˚C
IEC584.1
0.02˚C
IEC584.1
0.04˚C
DIN43710:1985 (To IPTS68)
0.02˚C
IEC584.1
0.04˚C
IEC584.1
0.04˚C
IEC584.1
0.04˚C
IEC584.1
0.02˚C
DIN43710:1985
0.08˚C
ASTM E1751-95
0.06˚C
Engelhard
0.02˚C
Ipsen
0.14˚C
0.07˚C
ASTM E1751-95
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
WORST CASE ERROR CALCULATION
Assuming type T thermocouple at 350˚C, ambient temp = 40˚C, CJC = internal.
Total error = input error + range error + temperature error +linearisation error + cold junction error.
Input error:
From thermocouple tables, a type T thermocouple generates a voltage of 17.819mV at 350 ˚C. From the
dc performance table above, the maximum error is 0.030% input = 0.03 x 17.819/100 = 5.346µV
Range error:
The 38mV range is used as the type t thermocouple is defined to cover the range -270˚C (-6.258mV) to
+400˚C (20.872mV). From the dc performance table, the maximum range error is 0.052% range, and the
range is 38 + 38 = 76 mV. Thus the maximum range error is 0.052 x 76/100 = 39.52µV.
Temperature error:
The dc performance table above is specifed at 20˚C, but the ambient in this example is 40˚C. From the
dc performance table, the worst case temperature performance is 25ppm/˚C, so our error is 25 x (40-20)
x 17.819 x 10 -6 = 8.910µV.
Linearisation error:
From the thermocouple table, the maximum linearisation error for a type t thermocouple is 0.02 ˚C
Cold junction compensation (CJC) error:
The internal CJC error is 1˚C maximum with the instrument at 25˚C. The CJC rejection ratio is 50:1, so a
further error of (40-25)/50 = 0.30 ˚C may occur, giving a total maximum CJC error of 1.3˚C.
Maximum error
From the above, the total error adds up as follows:
Input error:
5.346µV
Range error:
39.520µV
Temperature error:8.910µV
Linearisation error:
0.02˚C
CJC error:
1.30 ˚C
Total error:
53.776µV + 1.32˚C
From thermocouple tables, a change of 1˚C is equivalent to a change of 60µV, so a change of 53.776µV is
equivalent to a change of 0.896˚C.
Thus the total worst case error for this example is (0.896 + 1.32) = 2.216˚C
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 381
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
PREVIOUS INSTRUMENTS
This section contains dc performance and resistance input data for instruments with status levels prior to
D6 (June 2007).
DC input ranges
Shunt
Additional error due to shunt
Performance
Externally mounted resistor modules
0.1% of input
See table
Low
Range
-38 mV
-150 mV
-1 V
-20 V
High
Typical error
Resolution
Range
(Instrument at 20 deg C)
38 mV
1.4 �V 0.035% input + 0.031% range
150 mV 5.5 �V 0.035% input + 0.028% range
1V
37 �V 0.035% input + 0.024% range
20 V
720 �V 0.097% input + 0.027% range
Maximum error
(Instrument at 20 deg C)
0.085% input + 0.052% range
0.084% input + 0.039% range
0.084% input + 0.029% range
0.448% input + 0.033% range
Worst case temperature
performance
80ppm of input per deg C
80ppm of input per deg C
80ppm of input per deg C
443ppm of input per deg C
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level prior to E7 (June 2007). For instruments with a status level of E7 or above, see the equivalent table earlier in Annex A.
*WARNING
For portable case instruments only:
All I/O connections must be Low Voltage (maximum 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak or 70Vdc) unless
the integrity of the instrument safety earth is maintained for as long as the I/O is connected to the
recorder.
Resistance inputs
Temperature scale
Types, ranges and accuracies
Influence of lead resistance Error:
Mismatch:
Maximum source current
ITS90
See tables (values exclude influence of lead resistance)
Negligible
1Ω/Ω
250µA
Low
Range
0�
0�
0�
High
Range
Resolution
6k�
148m�
150�
600�
5m�
22m�
Typical error
(Instrument at 20 deg. C)
Maximum error
Worst case temperature
performance
(Instrument at 20 deg. C)
0.027% input + 0.034% range 0.042% input + 0.110% range 35ppm of input per deg C
0.027% input + 0.035% range 0.042% input + 0.053% range 35ppm of input per deg C
0.030% input + 0.028% range 0.045% input + 0.035% range 35ppm of input per deg C
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level prior to E7 (June 2007). For instruments with a status level of E7 or above, see the equivalent table earlier in Annex A.
RTD type
Cu10
Cu53
JPT100
Ni100
Ni120
Pt100
Pt100A
Pt1000
User Guide
Page 382
Overall range (˚C)
-20 to +
-70 to +
-220 to +
-60 to +
-50 to +
-200 to +
400
200
630
250
170
850
-200 to + 600
-200 to + 850
Standard
General Electric Co.
RC21-4-1966
JIS C1604:1989
DIN43760:1987
DIN43760:1987
IEC751
Eurotherm Recorders SA
IEC751
Max. linearisation error
0.02˚C
< 0.01˚C
0.01˚C
0.01˚C
0.01˚C
0.01˚C
0.09˚C
0.01˚C
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Relay output board)
General
Maximum number of relay boards
Small-frame unit
Large-frame unit
Number of relays per board
Changeover relays:
Normally open relays:
Normally closed relays:
Estimated mechanical life
Update rate
Four
Nine
Three
Four
Four
30,000,000 operations
See ‘Update rates’ in ‘Recorder specification’ above
AC load ratings
Derating
The figures given below are for resistive loads. For reactive or inductive loads, de-rate in accordance with graph 1, in which
F1 = Actually measured results on representative samples
F2 = Typical values (according to experience)
Contact life = Resistive contact life x reduction factor.
Maximum switching power 500VA
Maximum contact voltage 250V providing this does not cause the maximum switching power (above) to be exceeded
Maximum contact current 2 Amps providing this does not cause the maximum switching power (above) to be exceeded
DC load ratings
Maximum switching power
Maximum contact voltage/current
See graph 2 for operating volt/Amp envelope
See graph 2 for examples.
Safety isolation
F
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
300V RMS or dc (double insulation)
300V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
300
F1
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
Power factor (cos φ)
Graph 1 Derating curves for ac loads
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Max. DC load breaking capacity
200
F2
DC Voltage (Volts)
Reduction Factor F
Isolation (dc to 65 Hz; BS EN61010)
Relay to relay:
Relay to ground:
0.2
resistive load
100
50
40
30
inductive load
(L/R = 20msec)
20
10
0.1 0.2
0.5 1 2
5
DC current (Amps)
20
Graph 2 DC load switching curves
User Guide
Page 383
100/180 mm paperless GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Event input board)
General
Maximum number of event input boards Four
Number of inputs per board Six
Type of input Contact closure (active closed) or voltage level (active low)
Recognition levels (input to ‘C’ terminal) (R = contact resistance)
Active: -30V to + 0.8V or switch contacts closed (R < 35kΩ).
Undefined: + 0.8V to + 2.0V (35 kΩ < R < 200kΩ)
Inactive: + 2V to +30V or switch contacts open (R > 200kΩ).
Maximum frequency 8 Hz
Minimum closure or pulse width 62.5 msec
Current sink for voltage inputs 10mA max
Isolation
Event input to ground:
Event input to Event input:
50V RMS or dc (double insulation)
0V
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Analogue output board)
General
Max number of analogue o/p boards
Four
Number of outputs per board Two
Output ranges
Voltage: 0 to 10V (source 5mA max.)
Current: 0 to 20 mA
Update rate See ‘Update rates’ in ‘Recorder specification’ above
Step response 250msec (10% to 90%)
Linearity 0.024% of hardware range
Performance See table
Performance in instrument at 20 deg. C
Accuracy
Temperature drift
Range
0 to 10 V 0.1% of range
0 to 20 mA 0.1% of range
±0.12mV +0.022% of reading per deg. C
± 1µA + 0.03% of reading per deg. C
Safety isolation
Isolation (dc to 65 Hz; BS EN61010)
Output channel-to output channel:
Output channel to ground:
Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
300V RMS or dc (double insulation)
300V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (ASCII Printer)
See the documentation supplied with the printer
User Guide
Page 384
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Annex B: REFERENCE
B1 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY
B1.1 MAIN DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY
At power-up, continuously hold a finger in contact with the screen until the main diagnostic display appears as shown in figure B1.1
Special Modes
Display Test
Touch Calibration
System Summary
Diag Summary
Quit
Figure B1.1 Top-level diagnostic display
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 385
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B1.2 SPECIAL MODES
For factory use only, selecting 'Special Modes' allows the enabling and disabling of the Sales Demo
mode of operation.
An 'S' symbol is displayed at the top of the screen whilst the recorder is in sales demo mode.
B1.3 DISPLAY TEST
Selecting this option, allows the user to check the display by flooding the screen with single colours.
Repeatedly touching the screen, scrolls through the following colour sequence: Black, White, Red, Green,
Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow. A further operation of the touch screen returns the main diagnostic screen.
B1.4 TOUCH CALIBRATION
Touching this key calls a selection screen as shown below:
Touch Screen Calibrate
Touch Screen Verify
Main Menu
Figure B1.4 Touch screen selections
User Guide
Page 386
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B1.4.1 Touch screen calibrate
This key initiates the display calibration (offset correction) procedure. This procedure ensures that the
display screen image is positioned correctly compared with the touch screen (so that 'what you touch is
what you get'). The procedure, is necessary only rarely, if at all, and is included here only for the sake of
completeness.
1. Operate the 'Touch Screen Calibrate' key to call the first calibration screen, as depicted in figure
B1.4.1
2. Using the stylus, touch the intersection of the upper set of crosshairs, as requested by the display
and keep touching it until the next target appears.
3. Continue the process, according to the directions appearing on the screen. Once all the 'targets'
have been accepted, the recorder returns to the diagnostic display.
Touch top left target
Figure B1.4.1 Initial calibration display
B1.4.2 Touch screen verify
This allows the user to check the accuracy of the touch screen without having to carry out the calibration
procedure described above.
Touching the screen with the stylus produces a crosshair at the position the recorder believes the screen
to have been touched. It is up to the user to decide if the response is good enough for recorder operation. After a few seconds of non-operation, the recorder returns to the top level touch screen display
(figure 1.4).
B1.4.3 Main menu
Touching this returns the user to the top level diagnostics screen (Figure B1.1)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 387
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B1.5 SYSTEM SUMMARY
This key calls a system summary display, as shown for a typical small-frame recorder, in figure B1.5.
SYSTEM SUMMARY
Variant:
Software:
DRAM:
SRAM:
FLASH:
MAC address:
Date:
Time:
6100A
4.0
67108864
32768
134217728
000A8D002026
02/08/05
16:41:58
Main Menu
Figure B1.5 System summary display
B1.6 DIAG SUMMARY
Note: The diagnostic display does not include details of the Transmitter Power Supply option (if
fitted).
MAC address
Software version
00 00 00
Serial 1
N.N
Serial 2
BATTERY LOCKAB...
3_RELAY_1
4_RELAY_2
4_RELAY_3
EVENT_IP_3
Option boards
Input boards
AI_6
AI_6
Main Menu
Figure B1.6 Diag Summary (small frame recorder - large frame similar)
B1.6.1 MAC Address
Each instrument is allocated a unique hex address as a part of the manufacturing process. The display
at the top left of the display screen shows the final 6 characters of this address. The full address can be
found in the System Summary display, described above, or in the Network\Name display described in
section 4.5.1.
B1.6.2 Software version number
This shows the version number of the software fitted to the recorder.
User Guide
Page 388
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
9-way D-type socket
(solder bucket side)
B1.6.3 Serial 1/Serial 2
Touching one of these keys performs a loopback test on the relevant Serial
port. In order for the test to be successful, a 9-way D-type socket, wired as in
figure B1.6.3, must be fitted to the relevant serial port at the rear of the recorder. If wired as shown, the socket is suitable for testing with both EIA232
and EIA485 communications standards. The test will result in the legend 'S1(2)
Passed' or 'S1(2) Failed' replacing 'Serial 1' or 'Serial 2' on the appropriate key.
If the Serial Comms option is not fitted, pressing either key returns a 'Failed'
message.
1
3
2
6
7
5
8
9
Short pin 1 to pin 7; pin 2 to pin 3;
and pin 6 to pin 8
Figure B1.6.3
Loop back test wiring
B1.6.4 Battery
This area, normally green, flashes red/white when the battery needs to be replaced (section B2). Battery
status is checked once every 15 minutes.
B1.6.5 Lockable
The lockable flap display is green if the lockable flap is fitted, or flashes red/white if the option is not fitted.
B1.6.6 Option boards
This shows which option boards are fitted where as viewed from the rear of the recorder.
RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS
If relay output boards are fitted, the associated relays can be tested, by touching the Option board key,
then touching the relevant relay key to energise/de-energise the relay. Figure B1.6.6 shows a typical
display.
RELAY TESTS
1 (Energised)
2 (De-Energised)
Exercise relays by
touching keys.
3 (De-Energised)
4 (De-Energised)
Relay 4 greyed-out
for 3-relay boards.
Main Menu
Return to previous
menu level
Figure B1.6.6 Relay board test display
EVENT INPUTS
If event input boards are fitted, touching the option board key calls a display showing input status (1 = active; 0 = not active). Changes in input status can be displayed by operating the 'Update' key.
B1.6.7 Input boards
This shows how many input boards are fitted.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 389
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B1.6.8 Main menu
To return to the main diagnostics display, touch the 'Main Menu' key.
B1.7 QUIT
Allows the user to quit diagnostics (after confirmation). The recorder restarts in normal operating mode.
B2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
B2.1 TOUCH SCREEN CLEANING
CAUTION
The touch-sensitive screen used in this product is designed for use by hand or by the stylus supplied only. The use of sharp or pointed implements such as pens, keys and fingernails to operate
the instrument must be avoided, or irreparable damage will be done to the surface material. When
cleaning the touch-screen, a moist cloth should be used, if necessary with a minimal amount of
mild soap solution.
ALCOHOLS SUCH AS ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL MUST NEVER BE USED ON THE SCREEN.
User Guide
Page 390
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B2.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Battery replacement - Every three years
B2.2.1 Battery replacement procedure
WARNING
In order to eliminate the risk of user contact with hazardous voltages, the recorder must be isolated from line power before its top cover is removed.
The battery is of poly-carbonmonofluoride/lithium construction and should be disposed of according to
local regulations covering this type of battery.
Note: All battery backed RAM data is lost during battery change (see Annex A for details of stored
data)..
1. Isolate the recorder from supply power and remove the recorder from the panel (if fitted)
2. Remove the recorder cover by removing the Four Torx headed screws (A) and the Pozidriv-headed
screw B, and then lifting the cover up and out, under the gasket (C).
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
Large Frame
Small Frame
C
Note: Drawings are not to the same scale.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 391
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B2.2.1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT (Cont.)
3. With the cover removed, the battery board is accessible, allowing the exhausted battery to be slid
out of its holder and the replacement battery to be inserted (+ up).
Small Frame
Disconnect connector for
access to battery
Battery type BR2330
Part Number PA261095
Large Frame
Note: drawings are not to the same scale.
User Guide
Page 392
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B2.3 FLAP RELEASE
For recorders fitted with the lockable flap option (section 2.4), it is possible to unlatch the flap from inside
the recorder as follows:
1.Remove the recorder cover as described in section B2.2.1, above.
2.Press down on the solenoid actuator to release the flap.
Fig 2.3a Flap release - small frame units
Fig 2.3b Flap release - large frame units
Note: drawings are not to the same scale.
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 393
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B3 OPTION ENABLING
See 'Upgrade' in section 4.6.3.
B4 COLOUR SELECTION
The following table, gives RGB values and decimal and hex numbers for the available channel colours.
Normally, this table is necessary only when communicating over the Modbus link.
Note: Colour representation varies from screen to screen. For this reason, it is unlikely that the
colour on a PC will match those on these pages or those on the recorder display.
User Guide
Page 394
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B4 COLOUR SELECTION (Cont.)
Colour
Red Green Blue
Decimal
Hex
Red
255
0
0
0
00
Blue
0
0
255
1
01
Green
0
255
0
2
02
Honey
255 191
0
3
03
Violet
170 321 153
4
04
Russet
170
95
0
5
05
Dark Blue
0
0
102
6
06
Jade
0
95
0
7
07
Magenta
255
0
102
8
08
Dusky Rose
255
95
51
9
09
Yellow
255 255 255
10
0A
Powder Blue
85
63
255
11
0B
Dark Red
170
0
0
12
0C
Avocado
0
13
0D
Indigo
85
0
102
14
0E
Dark Brown
85
63
0
15
0F
Ægean
0
63
51
16
10
Cyan
0
255 255
17
11
Aubergine
85
0
51
18
12
Dark Orange
255
63
0
19
13
Pale Yellow
255 255
51
20
14
Hyacinth
170
0
51
21
15
Dark Green
0
63
0
22
16
Sugar Pink
255
31
204
23
17
Bluebell
85
31
255
24
18
Orange
255
95
0
25
19
Pink
255 159 255
26
1A
Buttermilk
255 255 102
27
1B
233 102
Table B4, sheet 1: Colour definitions 0 to 27
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 395
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B4 COLOUR SELECTION (Cont.)
Colour
Red Green Blue
Decimal
Hex
Terracotta
170
63
0
28
1C
Blue Babe
85
95
255
29
1D
Lime
0
223
0
30
1E
Blue Jive
85
31
204
31
1F
Cucumber
0
255 153
32
20
EuroGreen
67
107 103
33
21
34
22
35
23
0
36
24
Wheatgerm
255 223
Sea Blue
85
Ginger
255 159
Aqua Pool
51
159 255
0
63
255
37
25
Pale Red
255
63
51
38
26
Pale Blue
85
127 255
39
27
Lilac
170
255
40
28
Sky Blue
85
191 255
41
29
Wild Moss
0
127
42
2A
Turquoise
0
127 153
43
2B
Pale Green
85
255 153
44
2C
Coffee
170 127
45
2D
Wicker
255 255 191
46
2E
0
0
0
Black
0
0
0
47
2F
Dark Dark Grey
48
48
48
48
30
Dark Grey
64
64
64
49
31
Grey
128 128 128
50
32
Light Light Dark Grey 154 154 154
51
33
Light Dark Grey
172 172 172
52
34
Light Grey
192 192 192
53
35
Light Light Grey
212 212 212
54
36
White
255 255 255
55
37
Table B4, sheet 2: Colour definitions 28 to 55
User Guide
Page 396
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B5 TCP PORT NUMBERS
The following TCP ports are made use of by the recorder. (This information would be needed by anyone
involved in setting up 'firewalls', which may be used selectively to block incoming or outgoing access to
specific ports.)
PORT
Usage
20
21
25
80
123
502
1264
2222
44818
File Transfer Protocol - data
File Transfer Protocol - control
E-mail; SMTP
Web access
SNTP server
Modbus/TCPIP communications
Bridge communications - general
EtherNet/IP communications
EtherNet/IP communications
50010
Bridge communications - trend review
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 397
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B6 ASCII CHARACTERS FOR SERIAL COMMS
This section contains details of the ASCII characters that may be used with the Serial Comms option. All
the ASCII characters listed can be used as Start or End-of-message characters, but only characters with
decimal codes 32 to 127 can be used in messages, as decimal codes 0 to 31 are replaced by Question
marks in messages.
CharacterDecimalHex
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
CharacterDecimalHex
CharacterDecimalHex
CharacterDecimalHex
Space
!
"
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
‘
96
a
97
b
98
c
99
d
100
e
101
f
102
g
103
h
104
i
105
j
106
k
107
l
108
m
109
n
110
o
111
p
112
q
113
r
114
s
115
t
116
u
117
v
118
w
119
x
120
y
121
z
122
{
123
|
124
}
125
~
126
Not printed127
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
Notes:
1 All the above characters can be used as Start or End-of-message characters (entered in decimal)
2 If characters 0 to 31 ( 00 to 1F) are used as message characters, they will be replaced by question marks on the screen.
User Guide
Page 398
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B7 TIME ZONE INFORMATION
This section gives an explanation of the time zone abbreviations listed in the System/Locale/Time Zone
pick list. The list starts at GMT, travelling Eastwards round the world.
Abbre- Full title
viation
Time at
Hours of
noon GMT difference
GMT
UTC
ECT
EET
ART
EAT
MET
NET
PLT
IST
BST
VST
CTT
JST
ACT
AET
SST
NST
Greenwich mean time
Co-ordinated Universal time
Central European time
Eastern European time
Arabic standard time
Eastern African time
Middle East time
Near East time
Pakistan Lahore time
India standard time
Bangladesh standard time
Vietnam standard time
China Taiwan time
Japan standard time
Australia Central time
Australia Eastern time
Solomon standard time
New Zealand standard time
12:00
12.00
13:00
14:00
14:00
15:00
15:30
16:00
17:00
17:30
18:00
19:00
20:00
21:00
21:30
22:00
23:00
24:00
0
0
+1
+2
+2
+3
+3.5
+4
+5
+5.5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+9.5
+10
+11
+12
MIT
HST
AST
PST
PNT
MST
CST
EST
IET
PRT
CNT
AGT
BET
CAT
Midway Islands time
01:00
Hawaii standard time
02:00
Alaska standard time
03:00
Pacific standard time
04:00
Phoenix standard time
05:00
Mountain standard time
05:00
Central standard time
06:00
Eastern standard time
07:00
Indiana Eastern standard time
07:00
Puerto Rico and US Virgin Islands time 08:00
Canada Newfoundland time
08:30
Argentina standard time
09:00
Brazil Eastern time
09:00
Central African time
11:00
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-7
-6
-5
-5
-4
-3.5
-3
-3
-1
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 399
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B8 HISTORY MAINTENANCE OPTION
This option, which must be specified at time of order, is intended for use by hire companies etc. who
have a requirement to remove all customer data from recorders which are not fitted with the 'Simulation'
option (which includes an 'Erase all history' job). See section 4.3.22 for a description of the Simulation option. The History maintenance option is not enabled in Trial Mode' (section 4.3.22).
The erase history procedure consists of entering a special keycode into the System\Upgrade\Key Code
area (section 4.6.3) and operating the 'Apply' button.
CAUTION
The option should be used with discretion, as once the history has been erased, it can never be
regained.
B8.1 KEYCODE EXTRACTION
Notes:
1. This operation can be carried out only from the recorder's operator interface. It is not possible
to extract the keycode or to erase history from a remote pc.
2. To be able to carry out the procedure below, users must have 'Paste/Delete Files' permission
enabled in the 'Security' menu (section 4.4.1).
3. The keycode displayed in the System/Upgrade menu returns to its previous value after a history
erase operation.
1. Recorders fitted with this option come complete with a file called 'HMT.TXT in the 'user/' area of the
filing system, accessed as described in section 5.
Filer Options
2. Highlight this file, and copy it using the Filer Options menu 'Copy' key.
New
Delete
3. With a memory device (e.g. SD card, Memory stick etc.) inserted, use the Filer
Options menu 'Paste' key to save the file into the removable media area.
Cut
Copy
4. Move the storage device from the recorder to a pc, and open the file in an appropriate program (e.g. 'Notebook') to reveal a key code.
Paste
Refresh
5. This keycode can be kept in a secure area for re-use in subsequent erase opFigure B8.1
erations for this recorder.
Filer option menu
B8.2 ERASING HISTORY
1. Enter the key code into the recorder's System\Upgrade\Key Code area and operate the 'Apply' button.
2. Operate the 'Ok' button in the dialogue box (figure B8.2). This initiates the erasure of the recorder's
history files, after which the recorder restarts.
!!!HISTORY ERASE!!!
WARNING:
ALL HISTORY DATA WILL BE PERMANENTLY ERASED
(The instrument will restart after erasing history)
Are you ceratin you wish to proceed?
Ok Cancel
Figure B8.2 Confirmation dialogue box
Note: This operation erases only the recorder's history files; the recorder's configuration remains
unchanged. The Save/Restore 'New' selection (section 4.2), with all tickboxes ticked must be used
to reset the configuration to default values (if required).
User Guide
Page 400
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE
Section 4
Root Menu
Engineer
Channel 1
700.87˚C
Group name
Channel 2
487.39˚C
Channel 3
235.68˚C
Channel 4
378.99˚C
Channel 5
0.49V
Channel 6
0.85V
560.00
640.00
720.00
800.00
05/10/05 11:51:18 Alarms(s) off 3(1)
1
Name
\user\
\P c a r d\
Hide
Type
Flash
Removable

11:46:44
05//05
Option Menu
2
Batch
3
Channel Cycling Off
Trend History
mode
Engineer
Channel 1
400.00
Enter History
Preparing History, please wait
Group name
480.00
560.00
640.00
686.84 ˚C
720.00
17:07:39
05/10/05
Engineer
\user\
Name
user\
s d b\
l i b\
cal\
Type
Date
04/10/05
01/10/05
29/09/05
01/09/05
08:57:03
10:14:56
14:25:13
10:13:48
Bytes
Hide


11:52:51
05/10/05
800.00
11:52:04
05/10/05
05/10/05 11:51:18 Alarms(s) off 3(1)
11:49:24
05/10/05
Group 6
Message Log
Group name
Batch number:020205A12
Logged out
Water temp 1a
Water temp 1b
Water temp 1b
0il pressure
Transfer
60.0000 C
30.0000 C
10.0000 C
250.000 PSI
All Messages
68.5277
23.4531
23.4531
260.3425
15.3678
Message
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
05/10/05
04/10/05
04/10/05
04/10/05
04/10/05
04/10/05
04/10/05
04/10/05
04/10/05
04/10/05
04/10/05
Archive
Save/Restore
Config
Security
Network
System
Figure
B9b
Figure
B9c
Figures
B9d to B9i
Figure
B9j
Figure
B9k
Figure
B9l/ B9m
Engineer
09:06:22
05/10/05
All History
Log: Group name
09:06:18 Alarm(s) on 1(1)
09:06:18 Operator's name: Andrew
09:06:18 Customer: FishesRus
09:06:18 Batch number:020205A12
09:06:18 Config Version:682759 Security Version 746261
09:06:18 Batch start (Engineer)
08:50:30 Configuration version 682,759 was 682,758
08:50:28 Batch) Name files by batch true was false
08:50:28 Batch) On start log 3 was 1
08:50:28 Batch) Field 3 Operator's name: was Batch field 3
08:50:28 Batch) Field 2 Customer: was Batch field 2
08:50:28 Batch) Field 1 Batch number: was Batch field 1
08:50:28 Batch) Batch fields 3 was 1
08:50:50 Config,Signed:Engineer, Authorized:Engineer,New batch fields
16:42:11 Alarm(s) off 2(1)
16:32:50 Alarm(s) off 1(1)
16:31:05 Batch stop (Engineer)
16:31:05 Stop Batch,Signe
: d E n g i n e e r , A u t h o r i:z e d E n g i n e e r , B e l t F a i l u r e
16:29:33 Alarm(s) Ackd 1(1) 2(1)
1 6 : 3 1 : 0 5 A c k a l l a l a r m s , S i g n:e d E n g i n e e r , A u t h o r i:z e d E n g i n e e r , B e l t F a i l u r e
16:27:13 Alarm(s) on1(1)
16:27:13 Alarm(s) on2(1)
14:06:22 Config Version:682759 Security Version 746261
14:06:22 Batch start (Engineer)
Channel 1
700.87˚C
Vertical trend
Group name
Channel 2
487.39˚C
Channel 3
235.68˚C
Channel 4
378.99˚C
Channel 5
0.49V
Channel 6
0.85V
Channel 1
400.00
560.00
640.00
720.00
Horizontal trend
11:52:04
05/10/05
Group name
Engineer
700.87
480.00
Channel 1
800.00
700.87
14:21:30
05/10/05
˚C
800
05/10/05 11:51:18 Alarms(s) off 3(1)
11:49:24
05/10/05
05/10/05 11:47:39 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
11:46:44
05/10/05
14:11:00
05/10/05
14:16:20
05/10/05
14:13:40
05/10/05
05/10/05 12:02:20 Alarm(s) off 2 (1)
400
4
05/10/05 14:47:39 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
5
11:17:51
05/10/05
System
Go
dis to se
pla lec
y m ted
ode
Alarm summary
Group name
Alarm Summary
1(1)
2 (1)
2 (2)
3 (1)
4(1)
05/10/05 11:49:50
14:46:44
05/10/05
Engineer
Network
Group 4
Security
Group 2
Goto View: Group 1
05/10/05 11:47:39 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
Note
Group 3
Goto Group
Group 5
11:49:24
05/10/05
Faceplates On/Off
Group 1
17:06:41
05/10/05
Engineer
\
18:10:39
05/10/05
Save/Restore C o n f i g
Goto Group
Unlock Flap
Goto View
Section 5
11:52:0
4
05/10/05
700.87
480.00
Operator
File
Trend display
mode
Channel 1
400.00
Archive
Home
Selected
Home page
Group name
Engineer
17:08:08
05/10/05
Engineer
\user\cal\
Name
TouchScreen
Type
uha
Date
03/10/05 10:13:48
Bytes
Hide
Numeric page
Logged out
Channel 1
Channel 2
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Channel 3
E x i t H i s t ory
Message Log
Channel 4
Group name
18:08:20
05/10/05
700.87
235.68
378.99
Channel 5
0.49
New
Delete
V
Cut
Copy
Paste
Refresh
Horizontal bargraph
Logged out
Channel 1
Group name
18:09:47
05/10/05
700.87˚C
0.00
05/10/05 11:05
Channel 1
700.87˚C
1125.0956˚C
05/10/05 10:15
Furnace 1
Te..
1113.9806˚C
105/10/05 11:00
05/10/05 10:20
Furnace 1
Te..
1200.9456˚C
05/10/05 10:25
05/10/05 10:55
Flow 1
1 3 6 5 . 2 1/ l h r
05/10/05 10:30
Flow 2
1 2 9 9 . 6 5/ l h r
05/10/05 10:35
05/10/05 10:45
05/10/05 10:40
Flow 3
9 8 9 . 5 4/ l h r
05/10/05 11:07:52 Engineer,Restarted 11:07
Group name
Logged out
11:05:33
05/10/05
Furnace 1
Te..
Channel 2
487.39˚C
Vertical bargraph
Channel 3
Channel 4
235.68˚C
Channel 5
378.99˚C
10:43:50
05/10/05
0.49V
800.00
800.00
400.00
400.00
1.00
400.00
400.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
800.00
235.68˚C
400.00
378.99˚C
400.00
0.00
Channel 5
1500.000
800.00
0.00
Channel 4
0.0000
487.39˚C
400.00
Channel 3
0.0000
05/10/05 10:10
Typical displays see section 3.4 for full details.
See also section 7 if a Screen
Builder option is fitted.
400.00
Channel 2
1500.0000
05/10/05 10:50
6
Filer Options
1 hr/rev
Furnace 1 Temp 13
Full Screen
Instead of using the Root menu:
1 the Up and Down arrow keys can be
used to scroll through display modes;
2 the left and right arrows can be used
to scroll through groups
487.39
Group name
Logged out
0.49V
1.00
Figure B9a Root key menu structure
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 401
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Figure
B9c
Local
Figures Figure
B9d to
B9j
B9i
Figure
B9k
Archive
(section 4.1)
Figure
B9l/m
Local
Remote
Last Archive 23/08/05 11:32:18
Media mediacard
Select Media card, or
USB port
Bring Archive Up To Date
Archive Last Hour
Remote
Last Archive 23/08/2005 10:10:46
Bring Archive Up To Date
Archive Last Hour
Archive Last Day
Archive Last 7 Days
Archive Last 31 days
Archive All
Archive Last Day
Archive Last 7 Days
Archive Last 31 Days
Archive All
Suspend Archiving
Cancel Archive
Archive Transfer Inactive
Media Full 08/09/2006 00:34:57
Media Size 31954944
Bytes
Free Space 28786688
Bytes
Cancel Archive
Archive Transfer Inactive
Figure B9b Archive key menu structure
User Guide
Page 402
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Figure
B9b
Figures Figure
B9d to
B9j
B9i
Figure
B9k
Save
Figure
B9l/m
Save as 6100
File Name
Save
Restore
Save/Restore
(section 4.2)
Configuration Data
Security Data
Network Data
Screens Data
Save
New
Restore
New
Restore
File Name
Configuration Data
Security Data
Network Data
Text
Screens Data
Import Screen
New/Default
Export Screen
Import User Linearisation
Export User Linearsation
Text
Import Printer Driver
File Name
Save As Text
Import Screen
Appear only if Screen
Builder option enabled
Export screen
User Screen 1
File Name screen
Import
User Screen 1
File Name screen
Export
Import User Linearisation
Export User
Linearisation
User linearisation 1) UserLin1
File Name userlin
User linearisation 1) UserLin1
File Name userlin
Import
Export
\user\
Import Printer Driver
Hide
Name
cal\
config\
Filter1a
lib\
Type
Folder
Folder
Config
Date
14/04/05 12:35:08
14/04/05 10:27:13
14/04/05 10:22:23
Folder
14/04/05 14:01:08
14/04/05 17:30:29
Folder
Folder
sdb\
user\
14/04/05 10:23:14
Bytes
4445
File Name Printer
Import
FileName F i l t e r 1 b
Save
Cancel
Figure B9c Save/Restore menu structure
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 403
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Save/Restore
Figure
B9b
Figure
B9c
Config
Instrument
Security
Network
Fig B9j Figure
B9k
System
Figure
B9l/m
Groups
Channels
Views
Archive
Figure B9e
Events
Event Buttons
Messages
User Linearisations
Batch
Maths
Figure B9f
Totalisers
Counters
Timers
Figure B9g
Connections
Master Comms
Figure B9h
Output Channels
Demand Writes
Emails
Figure B9i
Reports
EtherNet/IP Server
Options
Views
(Section 4.3.4)
Home Time-out 0 Minutes
Home Group 1) Group 1
Scope Group
Group 1) Group 1
Display Enable
Home Page Circular Trend
Vertical Trend
Horizontal Trend
Circular Trend
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric Page
User Screen 1
User Screen 2
User Screen 3
User Screen 4
User Screen 23
User Screen 24
Bridge User Screens 0
Apply
Discard
Instrument Name Instrument
Normal Display 100 %
Instrument (Section 4.3.1)
%
Saver Display 50
Save After 30 Minutes
Modbus Address 1
Modbus Security Disabled
= Disabled
Channels (Section 4.3.3)
s
Comms Channel Timeout 0
Channel Number 1) TurbineTempA
0
Preset Hour 0
22/08/05 11:04:56
Value 50.002
Preset Minute 12
Input Type Thermocouple
Disable Warning Dialogs
Lin Type Type K
Show Operator Notes List
C
Range Low 0
Apply
Discard
C
Range High 100
Range Units C
Groups (Section 4.3.2)
Scaled
%
Scale Low 0
Group Number 1) Group 1
%
Scale High 100
Trend Units mm/hr
Units %
Descriptor Group 1
%
Offset 0
Trend
Type Adaptive
Linear
Scale Type
A/B
Switching
Scale Divisions - Major 10
Trend Speed 240
mm/hr
Scale Divisions - Minor 1
Trend Interval 5
s
Filter None
Circular
Settings
None
Break Response
Circular Speed 1 week
Cold Junction Type Internal
Circular
Chart Full New Chart
Descriptor TurbineTempA
Start At Monday
A/B Switching
Spanned A
Span Low A
Span High A
Zone Low A
Zone High A
Spanned B
Zone Low B
Zone High B
Grid Type From Point
50
%
0
%
100
%
0
%
100
%
100
%
PV Format Numeric
Max Decimal Digits 4
Colour A 0
Colour A 26
Alarm Number 1
Enable Unlatched
Type Absolute Low
Setpoint Source Constant
Threshold 75
Hysteresis 10
Dwell 1
s
Job Number 1
Category No Action
Apply
from Channel 3
Recording Enable
Recording Speed 1,200
Recording Interval 1
Trend History Duration 5.29
Archive to Media Enable
Archive via FTP Enable
Alarm Message
Ack Message
mm/hr
s
Days
Point Type Totaliser
Selection 1-3,5,7,9
Enable
Disable
%
%
TurbineTempA
TurbineTempB
Etc.
Apply
List of all available points
(input channels, maths
channels, totalisers etc.).
Discard
Discard
Figure B9d Config menu structure (sheet 1)
User Guide
Page 404
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Save/Restore
Figure
B9b
Figure
B9c
Security
Network
System
Fig B9j
Figure
B9k
Figure
B9l/m
Instrument
Events
(Section 4.3.6)
Events
Event Buttons
Primary remote host 0.0.0.0
Primary login name a n o n y m o u s
Source 2 Point Alarm
On Math 12
Primary password * * * * *
Retype password * * * * *
Secondary remote host 0.0.0.0
Secondary login name a n o n y m o u s
Secondary password * * * * *
Retype password * * * * *
Discard
Discard
ca
Apply
l
Counters
Apply
Lo
Totalisers
Timers
Event Buttons (Section 4.3.7)
Connections
Button Number
Descriptor
Type
Text
Latched Text
Require Signing
Require Authorisation
Master Comms
Output Channels
Demand Writes
Emails
Reports
1) Button 1
Button 1
Latched
Off Text
On Text
Apply Discard
EtherNet/IP Server
Options
Remote path / h i s t o r y
Job Number 1
Category No Action
Maths
Days
Ftp File format Binary
Operator And
Source 2 Sense Not Source 2
Descriptor Event 1
Batch
Figure B9i
Event Number 1) Event 1
Source 1 Alarm on Group
On Group 1) Group 1
Source 1 Sense Source 1
User Linearisations
Mb
Show Remote settings
Archive to Remote None
Alarm 2
Messages
Figure B9h
Flash Size 9 6 . 2 5
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1
Duration 1 0 . 8 6
l
Channels
Archive
Figure B9g
Archive
(Section 4.3.5)
ca
Groups
Views
Figure B9f
Compression Normal
Remote
Lo
Figure B9d
Config
User Linearisations
(Section 4.3.9)
User Linearisation 3) UserLin3
Descriptor UserLin3
Format Numeric
Number of Points 2
Message Number 1) The value of
Message The value of {1} = {2} & {3} = {4}, {5}
X1 0
Replace {1} with Source Descriptor
Y1 0
X2 1
Y2 1
Apply
Messages
(Section 4.3.8)
Discard
Replace {2} with
Replace {3} with
{3} source
Replace {4} with
{4} source
Replace {5} with
Replace {6} with
Replace {7} with
Source Value
Archive
(Section 4.3.5)
Compression Normal
Flash Size 9 6 . 2 5
Mb
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1
Duration 1 0 . 8 6
Days
CSV include Values
CSV include Messages
CSV include Header details
CSV include Column headings
CSV Date/Time format Spreadsheet numeric
CSV use Tab delimiter
Show Local settings
Media mediacard
Archive to Media None
Media file format Binary and CSV
On Media Full Overwrite
Media Size 30.4746094
Removable Media Capacity 3 3 . 1 8
Media Full event limit 100 %
Apply
These fields appear only
if Media File Format is �
'CSV' or 'Binary and CSV'
Mb
Days
Discard
Specified Descriptor
Totaliser 1
Specified Value
Totaliser 1
Config Revision
Blank
Blank
Apply Discard
Figure B9e Config menu structure (sheet 2)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 405
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Save/Restore
Figure
B9b
Figure
B9c
Figure B9d
Config
Security
Network
System
Fig B9j
Figure
B9k
Figure
B9l/m
Instrument
����� �����
����� ���������
���������������������
Groups
���������� ����������
Channels
������������� �����������
Events
������� ���������
Event Buttons
������� ��������������
Messages
������� ��������������
Batch
(Section 4.3.10)
User Linearisations
Batch
(Section 15)
Maths
������� �����������
������������ �
����������� �
������������ �
Totalisers
�������������������
Counters
��������������
Timers
Figure B9g
�����������������
����������������
Connections
Apply
Master Comms
Figure B9h
Function
Fvalue of
Sterilizing Temp
Temperature interval
Low cut off
Units
Descriptor
A/B Switching
Scale Low
Scale high
Scale Type
Zone low
Zone high
������� ������������
Archive
����������
Discard
Output Channels
Figure B9i
Reports
EtherNet/IP Server
Options
PV Format
Max Decimal Digits
Colour
Alarm Number
Maths
Enable
(Section 4.3.11)
Job Number
Category
Channel 1
121.1
10
75
Mins
Fo 1
Timers (Section 4.3.14)
Timer number 1) Timer 1
Enable
Remaining 00:00:00
Repeat in 00:00:00
Start now
Descriptor
Self start
Date
Month
Hour
Minute
Second
Duration
Repeat after
Job Number
Category
Timer 1
Any
Any
These fields appear
only if 'Self start' is
enabled.
Any
Any
Any
Seconds
Seconds
60
0
1
No Action
Apply
60
None
0
%
100
%
Numeric
2
26
1
Off
1
No Action
Discard
Totalisers (Section 4.3.12)
Totaliser Number
Enable
Value
Total of
Low cut off
High cut off
Units
Preset
Counters (Section 4.3.13)
Counter number
Enable
Value
Units
Preset
1) Counter 1
Units
OFF
0
123456
Channel 1
Units (totaliser)
0
ch units Units of channel �
being totalised
ch units
999999
Units
0
Counter 1
0
Units
1
Units
None
Select None orLinear
0
%
100
0
1
%
Select Alarm number
Off
1
Select Job number
No Action
Discard
Select channel etc. to be totalised
Units (totaliser)
Preset now
Units
Preset now
Descriptor
A/B Switching
Scale Low
Scale High
Scale Type
Zone Low
Zone High
Colour
Alarm Number
Enable
Job Number
Category
Select totaliser
number
1) Totaliser 1
Units
Apply
User Guide
Page 406
Mins
0
Apply Discard
Reset now
Figure B9f Config menu structure (sheet 3)
Reset button appears only
for resettable functions
fValue
Demand Writes
Emails
Mins
Reset now
������������ �
Views
Figure B9e
Maths Number 1) Fo 1
Value 32.65
������
Select: Off,
Unlatched,
Latched,
Trigger
Select Job category
Period scaler
Unit scaler
Descriptor
A/B Switching
Scale Low
Scale High
Scale Type
Zone Low
Zone High
PV format
Max Decimal Digits
Colour
Alarm Number
Enable
Job Number
Category
1
1
Totaliser 1
Units (totaliser)
0
1
Units (totaliser)
1
%
Select None, Linear or Log (if log
scales option fitted)
None
100
%
Numeric
Select Numeric or Scientific
4
0
1
Select Alarm number
Off
1
Select Job number
No Action
Apply
Select: Off,
Unlatched,
Latched,
Trigger
Select Job category
Discard
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Save/Restore
Figure
B9b
Figure
B9c
Config
Security
Fig B9j Figure
B9k
Instrument
Figure B9d
Groups
Channels
Views
Archive
Figure B9e
Events
Event Buttons
Messages
User Linearisations
Batch
Maths
Figure B9f
Network
Totalisers
Counters
Timers
System
Figure
B9l/m
Port Serial 1
Select port
Port Serial 1
Link Error Count 0
Online
Reset Error Count
Link Error Count 0
Protocol ASCII (input)
Reset Error Count
Connection EIA232
Protocol ASCII Printer
Baud Rate 19200
Connection EIA232
Stop Bits 1
Baud Rate 9600
Parity None
Data Bits 8
Timeout 250
First Start Char 0
Second Start Char 0
First End Char 13
Second End Char 10
Group 1
Group 2
ASCII input
Group 3
(Section 4.3.15)
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Apply
Stop Bits 1
Select required Baud rate.
Select 1 or 2
Parity Even
ms
Select None, Odd or Even
Printer Type Star TSP600
Select printer type
Printer Name Star TSP600(0)
Printer Status Not Responding
Printer Test
Print Messages From1) Group 1
Discard
Messages To Print
System
Alarms
Power Up
General
= Print these messages
Batches
Logins
Signings
Audit Trail
ASCII Printer
(Section 12)
Connections
Master Comms
Figure B9h
Select port
Output Channels
Apply
Demand Writes
Discard
Emails
Figure B9i
Reports
EtherNet/IP Server
Options
Modbus Slave (Section 4.3.15)
Port Serial 1
Select port
Link Error Count 0
Reset Error Count
Protocol Modbus Slave
Connection EIA232
Baud Rate 19200
Stop Bits 1
Select 1 or 2
Parity None
Apply
Select required Baud rate.
Select None, Odd or Even
Discard
Modbus Master (Section 4.3.15)
Port Serial 1
Select port
Link Error Count 0
Reset Error Count
Protocol Modbus Master
Connection EIA232
Baud Rate 19200
Stop Bits 1
Parity None
Timeout 1000
Enable error code B
Enable Talk Through
Apply
Select required Baud rate.
Select 1 or 2
Select None, Odd or Even
ms
Discard
Figure B9g Config menu structure (sheet 4)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 407
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Figure
B9b
Save/Restore
Figure
B9c
Figure B9d
Config
Security
Network
System
Fig B9j
Figure
B9k
Figure
B9l/m
Instrument
Groups
Channels
Views
Archive
Events
Figure B9e
Event Buttons
Master Comms
(Section 4.3.16)
High Priority interval
Medium priority interval
Low priority interval
Store diagnostics
Slave
Enable
Online
Descriptor
Network
IP Address
Modbus address
Messages
Profile
Timeout
Retry
Max Block Size
Share Socket
Login Required
Username
Password
Batch
Maths
Totalisers
Counters
Timers
Figure B9g
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
1) Remote Device 1
Remote Device 1
Ethernet
149.121.30.0
1
Detect This Slave
User Linearisations
Figure B9f
0.125
1
2
Connections
Apply
Master Comms
Third Party
250
ms
3
124
Register
Username
********
Discard
Detect All Slaves
ogu
Anal
Output Channels
m
s
Demand Type Master Comms
Status OK
Demand Write
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder
Parameter Alarm setpoint 2
Point Type
Point Number
Descriptor
Source
Default
Allow Constant Edits
om
Options
Enable
rC
EtherNet/IP Server
Write number 1) Write 1
te
Figure B9i
Reports
Channel
1
Write 1
Channel 1
0
On Error Write Default
Disable Retries
Send On Power Up
Apply
p
1) Output 1
V
Output 1
0
10
0
0
10
Channel 1
Drive Off
Apply
Output channels
(Section 4.3.17)
as
Emails
Demand Writes
(Section 4.3.18)
M
Demand Writes
e o/
Output Channel Number
Enable
Output Type
Descriptor
Range Low
Range High
Offset
Source span low
Source span high
Data Source
On Error
Output Channel Number
Enable
Output Type
Slave
Parameter
Scaling
Scale Low
Scale High
Point Type
Point Number
Process Value
Descriptor
Source
Default
On Error Write Default
Apply
Discard
1) Output 1
Master Comms
1) Furn Recorder 2
Comms Channel
High/Low
Scaling items appear only
0
for some slave types
100
Channel
1
Medium Priority
Output 1
1) Channel 4
0
Discard
Detect All Slaves
Discard
Figure B9h Config menu structure (sheet 5)
User Guide
Page 408
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Save/Restore
Figure
B9b
Figure
B9c
Figure B9d
Config
Security
Network
System
Fig B9j
Figure
B9k
Figure
B9l/m
Instrument
Mail Server
Port Number
Email
(Section 4.3.19)
Groups
Channels
Rcpt1
Events
Event Buttons
Descriptor Report 1
Number of Fields 6
User Linearisations
Field 1 Type Date & Time
Style Normal
Batch
�������������������� ����������
Counters
��������������� ���
���������������� ���
Figure B9g
���������� ���
Figure B9h
������ ���
Point Channel 1
Style Emphasised
Connections
Field 4 Type Batch Field 1
�������������� �����
Options
������������ �����
Options
(Section 4.3.22)
�������������������� ���
Field 6 Type Line Feed
Line Feed 1
Apply
Import Table
eiptable
Export Table
eiptable
Online
������� ���������
I/O Table
Inputs
(currently 1)
����������������� ��
����������������� ��
(currently 0)
������������������ ��
���������������������� �
Discard
Rcpt6
Rcpt10
Email Number
Descriptor
Protocol
1) Email1
Email1
SMTP (Email)
Text
Discard
EtherNet/IP Server
(Section 4.3.21)
Status
��� ��������
Rcpt5
Style Normal
���������� ��������
����������� ��������
Rcpt4
Field 5 Type 1) Message
Output Channels
EtherNetI/P Server
Rcpt3
Subject
Style Banner
Reports
������� ��������
������������ ��
Field 3 Type Process Value
Emails
���������������� ���������
List1
Rcpt9
Style Bold
Demand Writes
����� ��������
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
Reports
(Section 4.3.20)
Master Comms
�������� ��
1) List1
Rcpt8
Text
Timers
����� ���
Apply
Totalisers
Seconds
Rcpt7
Field 2 Type Text
Maths
Figure B9f
60
Rcpt2
Report 1) Report 1
Messages
���������� ���������
Retry Time
Descriptor
Archive
Recorder IP address
Errors To
Recipient List
Views
Figure B9e
Sender
25
Include Message
Message
1) Message 1
Apply
Discard
Server - - > Client
Input 1
Channel.1.pv
Input 2
Channel.2.pv
Input 3
Channel.3.pv
Input 4
Channel.4.pv
Input 5
Channel.5.pv
Input 6
Ch
Input 200
Apply
Discard
Wizard
Default Table
Show Errors
(currently 0)
Autoconfigure
Figure B9i Config menu structure (sheet 6)
User Guide
Page 409
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Figure
B9b
Save/Restore
Config
Security
Figure � Figs B9d
to B9i
B9c
Security
(section 4.4)
Network
System
Figure
B9k
Figure
B9l/m
Login (section 3.3.1)
User Engineer
Days
Password expires in 30
Login
Access (section 4.4.1)
Access
Management
.
Add user
Remove User
Change Password
Clear Password Cache
Section 4.4.6
Remove user (section 4.4.4)
User User Full Name
Remove
Apply
Discard
Clear Password Cache
Add user (section 4.4.3)
Section 4.4.5
Change Password
Select the required access level and enter the �
password if required
New User ID
New Full User Name
New Domain Name
New Password
Retype Password
Based On Operator
Add
Apply
Discard
Management (section 4.4.2)
Record Logins
Login Timeout
with unapplied changes
Password Attempts
Passwords Expire
Minimum Password Length
Require Signing
Require Authorization
Enable Audit Trail
Password Change on Expiry
Centralised Security
Login By User List
Apply
1 Minutes
Ignore timeout
3 times
30
3
Days
Access when
Domain
New Password
Retype Password
Connect from remote
Remote user name
Remote password
Frederick Bloggs
**
**
Fred
Retype remote password
Login Disabled
Edit own Password
Change Alarm Setpoints
Acknowledge Alarms
Edit Maths Constant
Reset Maths
Preset Totalisers
Logout
To change access level, a password may be
required, (according to configuration).
Engineer password is 100 when dispatched, but
can be edited from Engineer level in 'Access'.
Service is for use by service engineers only.
Operator default password is blank (i.e. none
required) unless Auditor pack option is fitted, in
which case it is also 100.
Preset Counters
Start/Reset Timers
Set Clock
Adjust I/O
Archiving Control
Save/Restore
Paste/Delete Files
Full Configuration
Full Security
Batch Control
Can Sign
Can Authorize
Perform Upgrades
Event Permission 1
Event Permission 2
Event Permission 3
Event Permission 4
Event Permission 5
Edit Output Channel Default
Action Demand Writes
Force Change of Password
Enter Batch Data
Allow web server
Apply
Discard
Discard
Figure B9j Security key menu structure
User Guide
Page 410
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Figure
B9b
Save/Restore
Config
Security
Figure B9c
Figures
B9d
to B9i
Figure
B9j
Network
System
Figure
B9l/m
Instrument number
MAC address
IP address lookup
Network (Section 4.5)
Address
BootP timeout
Address
IP address
Subnet mask
Name
Default gateway
SNTP server enable
240
08:00:48:80:00:F0
Get from BootP Server
28 s
192.168.111.222
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
SNTP client enable
'Name' appears only when 'IP
address lookup' is set to
'Get from BootP server' or to
'Get from DHCP Server'
SNTP server
149.121.128.179
EuroPRP server enable
Active Directory server
123.456.234.1
Active Directory security TLS (port 636)
Password Cache expiry 0
Apply
Days
Discard
Name
Local Host
Domain
Andy136-4
FishesRus.co.uk
Domain Name Service
Primary DNS Server
Secondary DNS Server
Apply
149.121.164.11
149.121.165.14
Discard
Figure B9k Network key menu structure
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 411
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Save/Restore
Config
Security
Network
Figure
B9b
Figure B9c
Figures
B9d to
B9i
Figure
B9j
Figure
B9k
System
Current date DD/MM/YYYY
Current time HH:MM:SS
System
(Section 4.6)
Clock (section 4.6.1)
Clock
Output adjust
(section 9)
Apply
Discard
Locale
Locale (section 4.6.2)
Language English
Country United Kingdom
Select
Time Zone GMT
timezone
Upgrade
Channel 4
Input Adjust
Adjust Channel
Output adjust
Master Comms Diagnostics
Remove Adjust
1) 10.690
13/10/05 15:22:54
2) 20.960
13/10/05 16:03:09
3) 3.563
Unadjusted
4) 0.000
Unadjusted
5) 9.365
Unadjusted
6) 8.896
12/10/05 14:29:26
Master comms disagnostics
(section 4.3.16)
Ethernet Diagnostics
Customise
Actual High Priority
Actual Medium Priority
Seconds
2
Figure
B9m
About
on the Last
Sunday
in March
End at 12:00:00 PM
on the Last
Seconds
Slave Status Online
Last Transaction Status OK
in October
Long Date format
Bad requests 10
Apply
Good requests 1298
Illegal function codes (01)
Illegal addresses (02)
Low Output 4
Low Reading
Apply
13/10/05 15:22:54
Discard
Host 149.121.131.78
Ping Status Host Reachable
8.917
Apply
Discard
Remote Modbus Client 2 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 3 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 4 192.168.189.89
EtherNet/IP Clients:
Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM) Offline
Implicit I/O Messaging Offline
Explicit Messaging (TCP 1) 149.121.129.141
Explicit Messaging (TCP 2) Offline
Explicit Messaging (TCP 3) Offline
Explicit Messaging (TCP 4) Offline
Figure B9l System key menu structure (sheet 1)
User Guide
Page 412
Successful Comms Tests
1
Discard
Select first channel for adjust
Select final channel for adjust
Select Channels
Appear only if Master
comms option enabled
Appear only if EtherNet/IP
comms option enabled
First Channel 1
Last Channel 6
Reset Diagnostics
IP address remains for five
seconds after message
activity ceases, after which
appears instead.
Apply
Input Adjust
(section 4.6.4)
Initiate Comms Test
Local Modbus Client 2 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 1 149.121.130.242
Upgrade
Retried requests 4
Serial Link Error Count 0
Local Modbus Client 1 127.0.0.1
When the values have been entered select
Apply to complete the adjustment procedure.
Source Files From Remote FTP Site
Master Rejects 0
Ping Now
High Output 9
0
Timed out requests 10
Ethernet diagnostics
(section 4.6.7)
Specify the high output and then the high
reading
High Reading
Instrument Number 8203
Key Code WC8N-9F5E-1D41
Key Code File
No Gateway path (10) 0
Gateway Target Fail (11)
Discard
Upgrade (section 4.6.3)
0
Slave Failures (04) 0
When the values have been entered select
Apply
1) 10.690
0
Illegal Values (03) 0
4.018
Pick lists allow
Summertime
period to be
defined
Sunday
Total Requests 1308
Specify the low output and then the low reading
Pick list:
Appropriate to
the selected
Language
Use Summertime (DST)
Start at 12:00:00 PM
Seconds
1
Actual Low Priority 0.125
Modbus Address 1
Copy
.
Job Search
Slave 1) Furn recorder 1
Select language
Channels to be Included
1) Channel 1
2) Channel 2
3) Channel 3
4) Channel 4
5) Channel 5
6) Channel 6
Adjust Channels
Initiate adjustment procedure
Remove Adjust
Remove previous adjustments
Fast Settle
1) Channel 1 5.0001
2) Channel 2 5.0001
3) Channel 3 5.0001
4) Channel 4 5.0001
6) Channel 6 4.998
29/07/08 12:11:55
29/07/08 12:11:55
29/07/08 12:11:55
29/07/08 12:11:55
Unadjusted
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Archive
Save/Restore
Config
Security
Network
Figure
B9b
Figure B9c
Figures
B9d to
B9i
Figure
B9j
Figure
B9k
System
System
(Section 4.6)
Copy
(section 4.6.8)
Source Type Channel
Copy From 1) Furnace Temp 1
Copy To 2) Channel 2 �
Clock
5) Channel 5
Locale
Include alarm data
Upgrade
Input Adjust
Output adjust
Include job data
Figure
B9l
Copy Now
Master Comms Diagnostics
Ethernet Diagnostics
Job Search
(section 4.6.9)
Copy
.
Job Search
Section All Sections
Job Category Totaliser
Customise
Job Action Preset
About
Customise
(section 4.6.10)
About
(section 4.6.11)
��������������������
�����������������
��������������
������������
������������
Appears only when
�������������������
viewing via
�
Bridge software
����������������
��������������������������
����������������������
�����������������
��������������
�
���������
������
������
�����
������
�������
�������������������������
����
������
�������
�����������
����
����
����
����
��
��������������
�����
������
�����
����
Search Now
Desktop
Data Entry Background
Selection
Fixed Text
Active Text
Disabled Text
Title Bar Background
Trend Foreground
Trend Background
History Foreground
History Background
54
55
27
47
6
49
41
48
55
52
48
Font set Auto
Default
Apply
Discard
������������
Figure B9m System key menu structure (sheet 2)
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 413
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
This page is deliberately left blank
User Guide
Page 414
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Annex C: WEB SERVER DETAILS
C1 INTRODUCTION
This feature allows a user limited Read Only access to the recorder from a remote PC, by:
1. Opening a standard internet browser
2. Typing-in the IP address of the recorder in the form: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, or the 'Local host' name
http://Local host. IP address and Local host are described in section 4.5 of this manual.
3. Entering the correct Remote user name and Remote password (as set up in the Security/Access menu
described in section 4.4.1).
If all the entries are correct, the Web Server home page appears, the top part of which is shown in figure
C1, below.
Note: The 'Remote user' must have 'Allow web server' permission enabled (section 4.4.1) and
must have sufficient network access to the product.
12/04/06 14:53:09
ε
Web Server
EUROTHERM
Home
Instrument
Eurotherm Home Page
Trends
Recorder Downloads
Message Logs
About
History
Document Library Search
Figure C1 Home page
As can be seen there are two sets of 'controls' viz the internet links and the instrument access tabs.
C2 INTERNET LINKS
These links (Eurotherm Home Page, Recorder Downloads, Document Library Search) take the user to various areas of the manufacturer's web site.
C3 ACCESS TABS
Most of the information displayed in the pages described below is updated every 20 seconds. The exception is the Trend page refresh rate which can be edited (as shown in figure C3.2) by typing in the new
value, and then either clicking on 'Set' or using the computer <Enter> key. Because of the processing
time required, it is not recommended that a value of less than 5 seconds be entered.
C3.1 INSTRUMENT
This opens the instrument page, a typical example of which is shown in figure C3.1 below.
Home
Instrument
Trends
Message Logs
History
About
Instrument - Status at 12/04/06 14:53:24
Instrument Alarms
: SNTP Server Failure
Global Channel Alarm:
Healthy
Figure C3.1 Instrument display
C3.1.1 Instrument alarms
Either 'Healthy' (green background) or a list of any active instrument alarm(s) (red background).
C3.1.2 Global channel alarm
Either 'Healthy' (green background) if there are no point alarms, or 'Active' (red background) if there is
one or more active point alarm.
HA028910
Issue 7 Jly 09
User Guide
Page 415
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
C3.2 TRENDS
Clicking on the 'Trends' tab displays a screen allowing the user to select a refresh rate and one of Horizontal trend, Vertical Trend or Numeric as the display format. Both the horizontal and vertical trend
modes include the numeric display table.
Instrument
Home
Horizontal Trend
Trends
Vertical Trend
M
Numeric Display
Select
viewing mode by
Please select a trend page
for viewing
Edit refresh rate
(then click on 'Set')
clicking on required heading
Trend Refresh Rate 30
Seconds
Figure C3.2 Trend mode selection
C3.2.1 Horizontal trend
Figure C3.2.1 shows a horizontal trend display for an imaginary group (Furnace Temps 1) with two channels (Stack 1 and Stack2North)
ε
Time and date of most
recent sample update
Web Server
EUROTHERM
Return to mode
selection page
Home
Trends
Group 1
2
Furnace Temps 1
3
Message Logs
Trends
4
12/04/06 14:53:09
5
6
7
8
9
10
History
11
12
About
Select required group by
clicking on required number
Descriptor of selected group
Span High
Earliest sample
Latest sample
Span Low
Descriptor
Stack 1
Span Low Process Value Span High
0.0000
100.0000
100.0000
Stack2North 0.0000
Show me the last 20
minutes of data
Select horizontal scale here...
...Confirm horizontal scale here
Set
Figure C3.2.1 Horizontal trend example
As shown in the figure, the group process values appear as though being traced on a chart which is rolling from right to left (i.e the oldest sample is at the left edge of the chart, and the latest sample is at the
right edge of the chart). The point Descriptors, Span high and Span low values and process values (at the
time and date at the top left of the screen) appear in a table below the chart.
The amount of time across the width of the chart (the 'horizontal scale') can be edited from its default of
20 minutes by typing a new value in the box at bottom left of the page, and confirming either by clicking
on the 'Set' button at bottom right or by using the pc's <Enter> key.
To return to the Trend Mode selection page, Click on the 'Trends' link at top left.
User Guide
Page 416
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
C3.2.2 Vertical trends
This viewing mode is identical in operation to the Horizontal Trend mode described above, except that
the 'chart' is vertical, with the most recent sample at the top, and the oldest at the bottom. The 'Vertical
scale' (i.e the amount of trend history displayed within the height of the chart) is edited as described for
'Horizontal scale' in the Horizontal Trend description above.
To return to the Trend Mode selection page, Click on the 'Trends' link at top left.
C3.2.3 Numeric display
This viewing mode contains only a table of point descriptors, spans high and low, and process values.
The table is identical in layout to that shown below the 'chart' in figure C3.2.1, above.
To return to the Trend Mode selection page, Click on the 'Trends' link at top left.
C3.3 MESSAGE LOGS
Figure C3.3 shows an imaginary message log with a number of alarm messages, for a group called Furnace Temps 1.
Instrument
Home
Group 1
2
3
4
Furnace Temps 1
Message Logs
Trends
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
History
Select required group by
clicking on required number
Selected group's descriptor
All Messages
19/04/06 11:21:26 CO2 OK
19/04/06 11:21:26 SO2 OK
19/04/06 11:21:26 CO OK
19/04/06 11:21:26 Alarm(s) off1(1)
19/04/06 11:21:26 Alarm(s) off2(1)
19/04/06 11:11:13 CO2 over limit
19/04/06 11:11:13 SO2 over limit
19/04/06 11:11:13 CO over limit
19/04/06 11:11:13 Alarm(s) on1(1)
19/04/06 11:11:13 Alarm(s) on2(1)
Show me the last 20
Enter history time here...
minutes of data
...Confirm time here
Set
Figure C3.3 Message log
The required group is selected by clicking on the relevant number at the top of the page. The length of
time that the list covers, can be edited from its default of 20 minutes by typing a new value in the box at
bottom left of the page, and confirming by clicking on the 'Set' button at bottom right or using the <Enter> key on the pc. If there are more messages than can be accommodated in the window height, a scroll
bar appear at the left edge of the window to allow hidden messages to be revealed.
HA028910
Issue 7 Jly 09
User Guide
Page 417
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
C3.4 HISTORY
This produces a list of all the .uhh files held in the instrument archive. The files can be saved to a userspecified location, for use in Review or Quickchart applications. Figure C3.4 shows part of a typical page.
Home
Instrument
Download All Data Files
History
About
Click here to select all files for saving to a user specified location
Note: This data is in archived (TAR) format, and cannot be opened directly by Review without first having been unzipped.
File Name
Group-1~20060501 00204B26000001C4.uhh
Group-1~20060501 00204B26000001C5.uhh
Click on individual files to save to a
user specified location
Size
Last Modified
391 Kb 01/05/06 16:20:10
391 Kb 01/05/06 20:20:10
C3.4 History file display
C3.5 ABOUT
Clicking on this tab displays a subset of the information which appears in the recorder's 'About' screen,
described in section 4.6.11. The items which appear are:
Instrument variant
Serial number
Product software version
Boot ROM version
Board version
SRAM and DRAM capacities.
User Guide
Page 418
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Index
Symbols
A (Cont)
1) Channel 1.................................................................221, 372
3D effect................................................................................265
10 to the power..................................................................... 110
{n} source................................................................................. 95
?Out of Range....................................................................... 186
! Symbol................................................................................... 16
? Symbol..................................................................14, 95, 152
?Syntax Error......................................................................... 186
.uhh files................................................................................. 418
.uhq file..................................................................................230
.uht files.................................................................................. 187
Alarm
Acknowledge
Jobs.........................................................................238
Message enable/disable........................................ 69
Permission...............................................................200
Acknowledge (ACK ALL ALARM)................................. 19
Channel indicator........................................................... 18
Configuration.................................................................. 71
Data (Include in copy)...................................................225
Disable............................................................................238
Enable............................................................................... 78
Icons.................................................................................. 15
Identifier........................................................................... 20
Indication......................................................................... 16
Instrument........................................................................ 16
Summary................................................................... 19
Jobs.................................................................................238
Marks, colour selection................................................265
Messages......................................................................... 81
Enable/disable......................................................... 69
Message log............................................................. 25
Number............................................................................ 77
On Group (Event source)............................................... 91
Parameters....................................................................... 79
Setpoint
Edit permission......................................................200
Source........................................................................ 78
Sounds............................................................................ 249
Summary page................................................................ 20
System.............................................................................. 16
Type................................................................................... 78
All
Messages......................................................................... 25
Points.............................................................................. 270
Allow
Constant edits............................................................... 175
Web server.....................................................................202
Always...........................................................................269, 270
Amount Rate-of-change alarms........................................... 79
Analogue outputs.......................................................173, 332
Specification..................................................................384
AND.......................................................................................... 93
Apply...................................................................................... 156
Key (Ethernet IP config.)............................................... 185
Arc
Angle...............................................................................263
Definition........................................................................ 278
Height.............................................................................263
Width..............................................................................263
Archive
All....................................................................................... 53
Configuration
Automatic.................................................................. 85
Manual....................................................................... 52
Menu........................................................................405
Control permission....................................................... 201
Enable............................................................................... 69
File formats...............................................................89, 90
Indicator........................................................................... 18
Jobs.................................................................................238
Key menu........................................................................402
A
A0 to A5................................................................................. 127
Abort...................................................................................... 156
About............................................................................229, 413
Absolute high/low.................................................................. 78
A/B switching................................................................... 67, 76
Access
Configuration.......................................................198, 410
Flap.................................................................................... 10
Levels.......................................................................15, 198
To configuration.............................................................. 32
When............................................................................... 199
Ack all alarms.......................................................................... 19
ACK Message.......................................................................... 69
Acknowledge
Alarms............................................................................... 19
Jobs.........................................................................238
Permission...............................................................200
AC Supply voltage range............................................... 9, 377
Action demand writes.........................................................202
Active Directory
Security........................................................................... 215
Server..................................................................... 199, 215
Setup....................................................................... 210
Active Text colour................................................................227
Adaptive recording................................................................ 66
Add
Key...................................................................................256
Maths function............................................................... 109
Points to groups.............................................................. 70
User.................................................................................208
Configuration menu.............................................. 410
Address
Allocation (Modbus).....................................................290
IP...................................................................................... 214
MAC...................................................................... 213, 388
Map (Modbus)...............................................................288
Network.......................................................................... 213
Adjust
Channels................................................................221, 372
Inputs..............................................................................221
Permission...............................................................200
Outputs..........................................................................332
Permission...............................................................200
Remove...........................................................................221
Advanced
Edit level.........................................................................258
Parameters.....................................................................265
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 419
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Archive (Cont.)
Batch (Cont.)
Local.................................................................................. 52
Media % full..................................................................... 92
Remote............................................................................. 54
To media........................................................................... 87
To remote......................................................................... 88
with lockable flap............................................................ 53
Archive failed instrument alarm........................................... 16
ASCII
Codes..............................................................................398
Input................................................................................ 149
Printer.............................................................................338
Configuration menu..............................................407
Specification...........................................................384
At version...............................................................................229
Audible warnings................................................................. 249
Audit trail................................................................................. 25
Demand write messages............................................. 177
Enable.............................................................................205
Autoconfigure key................................................................ 194
Auto detect page................................................................. 157
Automatic archive........................................................... 87, 88
A values.................................................................................... 67
Average
Rolling............................................................................. 118
Time.................................................................................. 79
Number.......................................................................... 102
Operator initiation........................................................104
Running (Event source)......................................... 91, 107
Start (Event source)................................................ 91, 107
Start (Job).......................................................................234
Stop (Event source)................................................92, 107
Summary.......................................................................... 22
Battery
Backed RAM data.......................................................... 377
Diagnostics....................................................................389
Indicator........................................................................... 18
Low (Event source).......................................................... 92
Replacement..................................................................391
Specification.................................................................. 377
Battery-backed RAM cleared............................................... 16
Baud rate
Selection........................................................................ 151
Serial comms.................................................................340
Serial printer.................................................................. 347
Bell symbol.............................................................................. 18
Best Fit Font..........................................................................265
Binary....................................................................................... 89
and CSV............................................................................ 86
Blue line across the chart...................................................... 36
Bold........................................................................................ 183
BootP Timeout...................................................................... 213
Break response....................................................................... 76
Bridge
Alarm acknowledgement............................................250
Configuration
Access menu.......................................................... 247
Options menu........................................................246
Connection details....................................................... 245
Minimum PC requirements.........................................244
Operation.......................................................................250
Running the program...................................................248
Software installation.....................................................246
Start as Lite.....................................................................248
Brightness control.................................................................. 63
Bring archive up to date........................................................ 53
Jobs.................................................................................238
BSpc......................................................................................... 33
Button
Number............................................................................ 94
Text..................................................................................263
B values.................................................................................... 67
B
Background
Colour....................................................................227, 263
Decimal...........................................................................266
Quartile..........................................................................266
Banner.................................................................................... 183
Bargraph
Channel.......................................................................... 272
Group
Horizontal................................................................ 271
Vertical.................................................................... 271
Style................................................................................265
Bargraph display mode
Horizontal......................................................................... 46
Vertical.............................................................................. 44
Based on................................................................................208
Basic/Advanced selection..................................................258
Batch
As event source............................................................. 107
Configuration................................................................100
Menu........................................................................406
Control.............................................................................. 23
Permission............................................................... 201
Counter initiation.......................................................... 107
Enter data permission..................................................202
Event sources................................................................. 107
Field 1....................................................................182, 341
Fields............................................................................... 102
Initiation.......................................................................... 107
Jobs.................................................................................234
Message display............................................................ 106
Message filter.................................................................. 25
Message log option........................................................ 26
Modbus initiation.......................................................... 107
Mode............................................................................... 101
User Guide
Page 420
C
Cable
Diameter
Power........................................................................... 9
Signal........................................................................... 5
Calibration coefficients....................................................... 378
Can
Authorize........................................................................ 201
Sign................................................................................. 201
Cancel Archive........................................................................ 52
Jobs.................................................................................238
Caps......................................................................................... 33
Card slot.................................................................................. 11
Category........................................................................... 81, 93
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
C (Cont.)
C (Cont.)
Centralised Security............................................................206
Change
Alarm setpoints permission........................................200
Battery
Procedure...............................................................391
Symbol....................................................................... 18
Maths constant permission.........................................200
Password........................................................................209
Time and date................................................................ 219
Time (Rate-of-change alarms)....................................... 79
Change Password................................................................ 197
Changes not recorded........................................................203
Channel
Alarms.............................................................................266
Indicator.................................................................... 18
Sounds..................................................................... 249
Ave/Max/Min..................................................................111
Bargraph......................................................................... 272
Colour............................................................................... 77
Configuration.........................................................71, 404
32-bit data (MODBUS).......................................... 318
MODBUS.................................................................291
Copy...................................................................... 224, 225
Cycle time.......................................................................265
Cycling enable/disable.................................................. 36
Damping........................................................................... 76
Data................................................................................. 272
Descriptor........................................................................ 76
Error.................................................................................. 16
Failure............................................................................... 16
Maths..............................................................................108
Number......................................................... 72, 160, 162
Numeric.......................................................................... 272
Run-time data (Modbus)..............................................303
IEEE (32-bit)................................................. 322 to 374
Select.....................................................................221, 372
Thresholds.....................................................................266
User screen parameter.................................................263
Value........................................................................72, 270
Virtual.............................................................................. 195
Character set........................................................................... 33
Serial comms.................................................................398
Chart
Full..................................................................................... 67
Speed......................................................................... 42, 67
Circular
Chart Full.......................................................................... 67
Settings............................................................................. 67
Speed................................................................................ 67
Trend Mode..................................................................... 40
CJC........................................................................................... 76
Remote CJC Block Unit................................................ 361
Cleaning................................................................................390
Clear..............................................................................196, 236
Password Cache................................................... 197, 210
Clock
Accuracy......................................................................... 377
Failure (instrument alarm).............................................. 16
Jobs.................................................................................233
Preset hours and minutes settings............................... 64
Setting............................................................................ 219
Permission...............................................................200
Close key...............................................................................257
Cold junction compensation (CJC)..................................... 76
Remote CJC Block option........................................... 361
Colour
Alarms.............................................................................265
B.......................................................................................236
Group......................................................................236
Backgrounds..................................................................265
Backgrounds, Text etc..................................................227
Channel...................................................................77, 266
Foregrounds..................................................................266
RGB definitions..............................................................395
Style................................................................................266
Thresholds.....................................................................266
Trace.................................................................................. 77
Colours and Fonts configuration menu............................ 413
Communications
Channel timeout......................................................63, 91
Diagnostics...........................................................171, 223
Modbus master............................................................. 171
Printer settings.............................................................. 347
Serial............................................................................... 149
Compact Flash location........................................................ 11
Component
Definitions...................................................................... 271
Info on screen................................................................258
Compressibility factor................................................ 115, 116
Compression........................................................................... 86
Config
Key......................................................................... 58 to 242
Revision..........................................................................229
Number....................................................................111
Configuration.......................................................................... 51
A/B switching........................................................... 67, 76
Access............................................................................. 198
Alarm................................................................................. 71
Analogue outputs......................................................... 172
Archive.............................................................................. 85
ASCII printer..................................................................339
Audit pack......................................................................203
Batch...............................................................................100
Break response................................................................ 76
Channel............................................................................ 71
Clock............................................................................... 219
Cold junction compensation........................................ 76
Copy................................................................................224
Counter........................................................................... 143
Country........................................................................... 219
Date format.................................................................... 219
Decimal places................................................................ 77
Demand Writes............................................................. 174
Display brightness settings........................................... 63
DST.................................................................................. 219
Email............................................................................... 178
Ethernet Diagnostics....................................................223
Event................................................................................. 91
Buttons...................................................................... 94
Filter.................................................................................. 76
Full (access permission)............................................... 201
Group................................................................................ 65
Input adjust....................................................................221
Input low/high................................................................. 73
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
User Guide
Page 421
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Configuration (Cont.)
Counter (Cont.)
Instrument........................................................................ 63
Language....................................................................... 219
Linearisation
Range......................................................................... 73
Type........................................................................... 72
Locale............................................................................. 219
Locked icon...................................................................... 18
Management option.....................................................203
Master comms............................................................... 153
Maths channels..............................................................108
Menu.................................................................. 404 to 409
Message........................................................................... 95
Network.......................................................................... 213
Offset................................................................................ 73
Options............................................................... 194 to 196
Output Channel
Analogue outputs.................................................. 173
Master comms........................................................ 172
Printer comms parameters..........................................346
Reports..................................................................182, 341
Scale.................................................................................. 73
Security........................................................................... 197
Serial communications................................................. 150
Shunt value....................................................................... 73
Span.................................................................................. 77
Summertime.................................................................. 219
System............................................................................ 217
Time and date................................................................ 219
Timers............................................................................. 147
Time zone....................................................................... 219
Totaliser.......................................................................... 138
Trace colour..................................................................... 77
Upgrade.........................................................................220
User linearisation tables................................................ 98
Views................................................................................. 82
Zone
Area of chart............................................................. 77
Time................................................................219, 399
Connected messaging........................................................ 184
Connect from Remote permission.................................... 199
Connections.......................................................................... 149
Connector locations
Large frame units.............................................................. 6
Small frame units............................................................... 5
Constant................................................................................ 109
Contents of group.................................................................. 70
Continuous batches............................................................. 101
Controller parameters......................................................... 162
Copy..............................................................................110, 224
Facility....................................................................224, 413
File...................................................................................240
Key...................................................................................256
Maths function............................................................... 110
Rules................................................................................225
Screen.............................................................................257
To/From..........................................................................225
Counter
Batch initiation............................................................... 107
Configuration................................................................ 143
Data (Modbus)........................................................ 144
IEEE 32-bit........................................................145
Configuration menu.....................................................406
Copy................................................................................225
Enable............................................................................. 143
Jobs.................................................................................233
Modbus addressing
Configuration......................................................... 144
IEEE (32-bit).....................................................146
Runtime data.......................................................... 145
Number.......................................................................... 143
Preset permission.........................................................200
Country, Selection of........................................................... 219
Created on............................................................................229
Creating a user screen........................................................254
CSV........................................................................................... 86
Date/time format............................................................. 90
Files................................................................................... 89
Format.............................................................................. 89
Use tab delimiter............................................................. 89
Currently ............................................................................... 194
Cursor keys.............................................................................. 28
Custom Faceplate style....................................................... 267
Customise..............................................................................227
Configuration menu..................................................... 413
Cut file....................................................................................240
Cutoff (High/Low)................................................................. 138
Cycle channels on/off............................................................ 36
User Guide
Page 422
D
Daily................................................................................... 87, 88
Data
Bits
Printer...................................................................... 347
Serial Comms......................................................... 151
Compression Ratio......................................................... 86
Encoding (MODBUS).................................................... 281
Entry Background colour.............................................227
Source............................................................................. 173
Transmission (MODBUS)..............................................328
Type........................................................................164, 281
Demand writes....................................................... 176
Date and time....................................................................... 341
Configuration....................................................... 219, 412
CSV format....................................................................... 90
Reports configuration.................................................. 182
Daylight saving configuration............................................ 219
DC supply
Printer wiring.................................................................338
Recorder wiring................................................................. 9
Decimal.................................................................................. 187
Places.............................................................. 77, 177, 266
EtherNet/IP............................................................. 187
Scale................................................................................ 269
Decrement counter..............................................................233
Default................................................................................... 172
Demand Write value..................................................... 175
Gateway.......................................................................... 214
Passwords........................................................................ 31
Default Table......................................................................... 185
Delete key
File...................................................................................240
User Screens..................................................................256
HA028910
Issue 8 Oct 10
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
D (Cont.)
D (Cont.)
Demand
Type................................................................................. 175
Writes.............................................................................. 174
Action permission.................................................202
Button...................................................................... 175
Configuration menu..............................................408
Copy........................................................................225
Jobs......................................................................... 237
To specific register................................................ 176
With Audit Trail...................................................... 177
Deploy....................................................................................257
Descriptor
Channel............................................................................ 76
Demand write................................................................ 175
Email Recipient list........................................................ 179
Event................................................................................. 93
Event Button.................................................................... 94
Font................................................................................. 267
Group.........................................................................15, 66
Group minimum maths function................................ 132
Instrument........................................................................ 63
Minimum Channel......................................................... 132
Output channel....................................................172, 173
Report....................................................................182, 341
Slave device................................................................... 155
Timer............................................................................... 148
User Linearisation table................................................. 98
Detect
All slaves......................................................................... 156
This slave........................................................................ 155
Deviation
Alarm type....................................................................... 78
Value................................................................................. 79
DHCP Server failure............................................................... 16
Diagnostics
Display............................................................................385
Ethernet..........................................................................223
Master comms............................................................... 171
Summary........................................................................388
Dialogue action.................................................................... 272
Digital............................................................................160, 162
Disable
Alarms.............................................................................238
Counter...........................................................................233
Display
Alarms..................................................................... 267
Descriptor............................................................... 267
Messages................................................................ 267
Pens.......................................................................... 267
Units......................................................................... 267
Group counters.............................................................233
Group totalisers............................................................. 231
Login...............................................................................200
Maths Function..............................................................232
Retries............................................................................. 175
Timer job........................................................................234
Totaliser.......................................................................... 231
Warning dialogs.............................................................. 64
Disabled Text colour............................................................227
Discard................................................................................... 156
Ethernet IP Table........................................................... 185
Key...................................................................................257
Disk
Size.................................................................................... 87
Symbol.............................................................................. 18
Display
Alarms............................................................................. 267
Bargraph......................................................................... 267
Batch Dialogue.............................................................. 107
Brightness........................................................................ 63
Calibration.....................................................................386
Colour configuration menu......................................... 413
Descriptor...................................................................... 267
Enable (group)................................................................. 83
Home................................................................................ 82
Messages....................................................................... 267
Modes............................................................................... 35
Circular trend........................................................... 40
Enable........................................................................ 83
Home......................................................................... 82
Horizontal bargraph................................................ 46
Horizontal trend....................................................... 38
Numeric..................................................................... 48
Select......................................................................... 28
Vertical bargraph..................................................... 44
Vertical trend............................................................ 36
Pens................................................................................. 267
Test..................................................................................386
Units................................................................................ 267
Update rate.................................................................... 377
Values (truncation of)..................................................... 14
Dispose..................................................................................257
Divide..................................................................................... 109
DNS........................................................................................ 216
Domain name
Access menu.................................................................. 199
Domain Name Service......................................................... 216
Do Not Remove Archive Media............................................ 13
Draw
Edge................................................................................263
Order..............................